Home

IBM Optim: Optim Installation and Configuration Guide

1. To use the DB Alias information from each initiating client Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Client for the DB Aliases option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the dbaliaslogon parameter to client Maintain DBMS Logon Credentials The connection string you specify on the Optim Server Settings applet for Windows or in the configuration file for UNIX or Linux is always used regardless of whether Server or Client is the source of the credentials for Optim Directory and DB Alias access You must specify a connection string to access an Optim Directory and use a DB Alias otherwise the Optim process will fail If Server is the source of DBMS logon credentials specify the following Windows On the Connection tab of the Optim Server Settings applet provide a User ID Password and Connection String UNIX or Linux For pstlocal cfg provide a userid password and connect string for the pstdir and dbalias parameters If Client is the source of DBMS logon credentials specify the following for the Server machine Windows On the Connection tab of the Optim Server Settings applet provide a Connection String only User ID and Password are ignored UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg provide a connect string for the pstdir and dbalias parameters userid and password are ignored Also if Client is the source of DBMS logon credentials you must specify the following for the client mac
2. To continue click Proceed 66 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide The next dialog prompts you to Configure the First Workstation Configuration Assistant Configure First Workstation In order to use Optim a Optim Directory one or more DB Aliases and a product configuration File must be created The DB Administrator should create the Optim Directory the first DB Alias and the configuration File If these tasks have not been This dialog and the other dialogs in Configuration Assistant are similar to the Welcome dialog with the addition of a task check box e To perform a task select the check box and click Proceed to open the first dialog for the task e To skip a task clear the check box and click Proceed to open the next Configuration Assistant dialog Dialogs The Configuration program presents a series of dialogs to complete a specific task You respond to prompts or provide necessary information and proceed to the next step in the process Some configuration dialogs are used in a number of different tasks however only the options appropriate for a specific task are available In this guide unavailable options are explained only if certain conditions cause them to become active Most configuration dialogs include the following e An information read me box provides details and directions to guide you through a step in the configuration process e Dialog specific elements prompt for informat
3. v Introduction Open Data Manager ODM is distributed with a temporary 30 day license and for continued use requires a permanent license If upgrading ODM from version 6x or 7 1 of your Optim solution you must obtain a new permanent license but can use the 30 day Type of Installation license temporarily Ifyou are upgrading from a later version of your Install Location Optim solution you can apply the license used previously Ifyou do not have access to the license file or wish to install ODM at a later time select Only Copy the ODM Files License Agreement Customer Information Component Selection ODM Information Shortcut Location Configure ODM Now Summary C Only Copy the ODM Files Installation Installation Complete Cancel Previous If you select Configure ODM Now and click Next the Open Data Manager ODM License Information lon page 31 n page 31 dialog displays 30 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Selecting Only Copy the ODM Files and clicking Next displays the Shortcut Location on page 32 dialog Open Data Manager ODM License Information This dialog prompts you to specify your ODM license file or choose a trial license v Introduction v License Agreement Customer Information Type of Installation v Install Location Component Selection gt ODM Information gt Shortcut Location Summary Installation gt Installation Complete Select
4. userid password IToader pstdir dbalias dbmstype teradatatype 1 0 J pstdir dbalias tdatasvr userid password rowcntgle n excptntbicid Jauditfacility true false Audit OptimDirNamel enabled disabled retention days n Audit RecordLimit n lt FailureAction gt CONTINUE STOP ol1 n 10 lcodepage codepgenum db2default 1 O Q gt iS iS Q Q ay es 1 1 0 1 unixtempdir n 0 1 one default interval infinite 1 1 n 1 1 userid password o n rmremsegsize 10 n 500 n 0 1 D 0 144 1ilinrn Iscriptshowfulltbl1 144 linrn Iscriptwarnmissing 1 0 1 336 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide wormdeviceretention wormdevicedays 0 wormdeviceyears Isybaseunchain active inactive defaultactive defaultinactive luncommittedread active inactive defaultactive defaultinactive none interval maximum SSS Keywords customerid Company identifier n Unique six digit Company ID provided with Optim 000000 The Optim demonstration ID Default customerid 000000 customername Customer name name Company Name provided with Company ID and license key
5. Audit RecordLimit Sets the maximum for number of audit records maintained at any time n Value in the range 100 to 999 999 999 999 The default value is 100 000 lt FailureAction gt Action to be performed when the Audit RecordLimit is exceeded continue Optim will continue to generate audit records This is the default 340 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide stop Optim will not generate audit records for processes allowlocktbls Allow users to lock tables 0 Do not allow users to lock tables 1 Allow users to lock tables Default allowlocktbls 1 codepage Code page for System 390 access codepgenum Valid code page settings are 37 273 277 278 280 284 285 297 500 and 871 db2default The DB2 default setting Default codepage 871 cmmaxshuffleretries Default number of times the Column Map Shuffle Function will refetch a replacement value until a value that does not match the source row is found a retry The Shuffle Function retry parameter overrides this default Using a high retry value with columns that contain many duplicate values will increase the processing time For these columns it may be best to use a retry value of zero n Enter a value from 0 1000 Enter 0 to allow a replacement value to match the source The default is 10 cmmaxshuffleretries 10 dbconnections Number of database connections for Archive Delete or Extract Processing Multiple database connections
6. Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit 53 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog Optim will automatically display the Sign Optim Exit dialog anytime you execute the Configuration program if a signed exit does not exist You also can manually display that dialog by selecting Options gt Sign Optim Exit from the Configuration main window Sign Optim Exit Eel Xx Optim he Optim Exit validates that a user is authorized to use Optim 4 default Optim Exit hat allows access to all actions by all users is supplied with Optim and can be used if our company security policies allow The Optim Exit must be signed To sign an exit ou must enter the unique Password that was included when you received your gt nmnans TN and Licence Kew OF anw time varan sinn_a different evik hx celectina M Optim Exit for this Machine State Leave the Currently Signed Exit Intact Yalid Sign the Default Optim Exit Overlays any previously signed exit Sign the User Supplied Exit Exit must exist in the rt bin directory Company Information Name ID Password OPTIMDEMO 105499 The Sign Optim Exit dialog includes the following options Optim Exit for this Machine There are three options under the heading Optim Exit for this Machine Click on the option you want to use 54 Leave the Currently Signed Exit Intact Use this option to leave the currently signed exit in place You must have permission to execute the Confi
7. userid password User ID and password needed to logon to a target Server set up to receive file logons from client or for which the filelogon keyword in pstserv cfg is set to client Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See Securing the Configuration Files on page 353 for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not provide a password domain Domain needed to validate User ID and password for access to a Server on Windows Note If the user is validated as a local user on a Server enter the Server name server optuser 172 16 8 76 1024 rt password test dom Connection information for an Optim Directory Use pstdir for each Optim Directory that can be accessed for processing initiated from the command line Note that the Optim Directory is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and that connection to the Directory is not verified until required by a client name Name of the Optim Directory dbmstype Database Management System as DB2 Oracle Sybase or Informix dbmsver DBMS version in the form n n dbqual Creator ID Schema Name or Owner connectstring Information defined to the DBMS client to connect to the database dbname Name within connection Provide name if DBMS is Informix or Sybase ASE and pstlogon is client or specify if pstlogon is server IBM Optim Optim Ins
8. After you sign an exit the Configuration program will launch the Optim Configuration Assistant which is described in detail in Configuration Assistant on page 66 34 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide v Introduction Vv License Agreement Z Customer Information vZ Type of Installation v Install Location Component Selection ODM Information Vv Shortcut Location vV Summary v Installation gt Installation Complete Click Done to display the Release_Notes html file and launch the Configuration program Notes To postpone reading the Release_Notes file clear the View the Release Notes check box before you click Done To postpone the configuration of your installation clear the Launch the configuration program check box before you click Done Console Install Windows In a Windows environment you can install Optim from the console Chapter 2 Installation 35 From the prompt use this command IBMOptim exe i console This begins the installer extract process which takes approximately 2 3 minutes When the extract process completes this screen displays f gt Preparing CONSOLE Mode Inmaztallation a IBM Optim lt created with InstallAnywhere gt Introduction TIestallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of your Optim solution is strongly recommended that you quit all programe before continuing with 2 instaliation Respond to each
9. The Warn on Cascade Delete Update setting in Product Options see Cascade Delete Rule on page 223 affects the availability of this option for user input If available you can click the down arrow to choose when to display a warning If unavailable the value specified for Warn on Cascade Delete Update in Product Options is displayed and cannot be modified Chapter 9 Personal Options 287 Sybase Unchained Mode Run in Unchained Mode Optim normally runs in chained mode When a trigger in a Sybase ASE table will be fired as a result of an Insert or Delete Process and the trigger calls a stored procedure that must run in unchained mode the connection must be in unchained mode for the procedure to work The Sybase Unchained Mode setting in Product Options see Sybase Unchained Mode on page 225 enables or disables this check box If enabled select the check box to run Insert and Delete Processes in Unchained Mode or clear the check box to run all actions in normal mode Notify Tab Use the Notify tab to provide default options and addresses for automatic email notification of the success or failure of a process The process report generated when a process completes is automatically sent as an attachment Note Before using email notification the desired email program must be installed For Windows the email client must be defined as the default and set up to interface with MAPI For UNIX or Linux a valid copy of SEND
10. The location of the rc2 d and rc1 d directories is platformAspecific e Under Solaris and Linux the location is etc e Under HP UX the location is sbin e Under AIX the location is etc re d Use the link command to create symbolic links as follows In s actualfile linkname actualfile File to which a symbolic link points In this case specify RT4S linkname Name of a symbolic link used to point to a file In this case point links named S99RT4S and KO7RT4S to RT4S 348 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Solaris or Linux To start up and shut down the Server during Solaris or Linux init processing create symbolic links to the RT4S script in directories etc re2 d and etc rcl d 1 Log in as the root user 2 From the console enter the following commands In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc2 d S99rt4s In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rcl d KO7rt4s HP UX To start up and shut down the Server during HP UX init processing create symbolic links to the RT4S script in directories sbin rc2 d and sbin rcl d 1 Log in as the root user 2 From the console enter the following commands In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s sbin rc2 d S99rt4s In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s sbin rcl d KO7rt4s AIX To start up and shut down the Server during AIX init processing create symbolic links to the RT4S script in directories etc re d rce2 d and etc re d rcl d 1 Log in as the root user
11. This section describes how to establish Functional Security To establish Functional Security 1 Using the Configuration program initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator as described in Optim Security on page 120 2 Edit the Default ACD to map roles to network accounts 3 For each role grant or deny the appropriate Functional Privileges and if Object Security will also be Assigning enabled grant or deny the appropriate Object Association Privileges as described in Privileges on page 396 4 Using the Configuration program enable Functional Security as described in Set Functional Securit Option on page 176 Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 383 Object Security Object Security allows you to control access to specific objects in the Optim Directory using an Access Control List ACL Any Optim object can be secured by associating it with an ACL An ACL lists roles and grants or denies privileges for each role to read update delete or execute where appropriate the object and the ACL For example you might define an ACL to allow members of a role to read and execute but not edit a specific Archive Request Optim can also be configured to secure objects automatically so that a default ACL which can be edited is defined when the object is saved to the Optim Directory Note When Object Security is enabled the size of the fully qualified name for a Primary Key and a Relations
12. e Assigns a value of SE012 to the SALESMAN_ID column for customers in Florida rows with FL in the STATE column To use this sample in a Column Map you must specify PROC CMEXIT BAS in the source column for the destination column SALESMAN_ID Sample Table Information Procedure The sample table information Column Map procedure is created from the TBLINFO BAS file as described above This sample is provided to demonstrate the Optim Basic Column Map procedures that you can use to retrieve data about a process product or database table This procedure moves unchanged source data to the destination and demonstrates how to output the following e Name of Optim Temp Directory e Name of Optim Data Directory e Name of Optim Script e Company Name e Optim Release Number e Optim Build Number e Optim Error Codes e Instance e Thread ID e Thread Handle 512 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e Operating System e Operating System Release e Operating System Build e Operating System Service Pack e Server User ID e Computer Name Sample Extract Files The following Extract Files are included in the Samples Extract subdirectory CSB4DATA XF These Extract Files contain data from the sample database that has been altered slightly These files are useful for training or learning about features PSTD_IFX XF These Extract Files duplicate the data in PSTDEMO XF in DBMS specific format PSTD_MSS XF PS
13. he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 xP tobe al an Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to configure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Server feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step If the site is not licensed for the Server Enable is not available Refer to Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server on page 143 for information needed to configure the Server Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature On the Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature dialog choose to enable or disable the ODBC driver for the current machine Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 125 lt Configure First Workstation Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature Ioj x he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC nterface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry For he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step If your site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available Specify Product Configuration File Use the Specify Product Configuration File dialog to provide the complete directory path and name of the configuration file 126 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Work
14. 2 From the console enter the following commands In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc d rc2 d S99rt4s In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc d rcl d KO7rt4s LOCALE CONF Conversion File The LOCALE COMF file provides locale conversion information between platforms An example of LOCALE COMF is in the etc subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory Use the area at the end of this file to provide additional locale conversion information between or within platforms Specify locale conversion information using the following format LocaleA LocaleB Maintenance and Performance The following commands can generally be used to start stop and maintain prOsvce the Server daemon These commands are unique to the Server under UNIX Note Only one command line argument can be presented at a time An argument must be preceded by a dash or a slash pr0svce h Display Help prOsvee s id1 Shut down prOsvce after last client disconnects id1 Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify pr0svce Leave blank to shut down daemons started under the logged on account prOsvce u id1 Reload configuration file for prOsvce id1 Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify pr0svce Leave blank to reload for daemons started under the logged on account Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 349 prOsvce d id1 Display all instances of prOsvce in the system This command can be run under root
15. 200 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Update the DEMS Version for an Optim Directory Greate Drop Pack Mial Fa e Optim Configuration program can drop the Optim created Packages for the Optim irectory Tables The Package Schema Name must match the name used to create the ackages E Tables Optim Directory Tables Package Specifications Greate Refresh Schema Name f Use Existing optusrs arant Auth 1 i Drop Display SQL Previous Proceed Skip Undo Cancel The Drop option is selected when this dialog opens You can select the Display SQL check box to browse the DDL statements generated for the drop process To continue click Proceed Note The Configuration program attempts to drop all old packages plans and procedures for the specified DBMS version even if they were never installed After the Drop process completes this dialog displays again with the Create Refresh option selected automatically Click Proceed to create packages plans or procedures to update the DBMS for the Optim Directory When the process completes the database signature is updated automatically and the Complete dialog displays Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias When you select Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias from the Tasks menu the first dialog cautions that you should select this task only when a DB Alias refers to a database that has been upgraded to a new version This task promp
16. IBM Optim Version 7 Release 3 Optim Installation and Configuration Guide IBM Optim Version 7 Release 3 Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information in Notices on page 527 Version 7 Release 3 September 2010 This edition applies to version 7 release 3 of IBM Optim and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Copyright IBM Corporation 1994 2010 US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents About this Guide Chapter 1 Getting Started Conceptual Overview Installation Phase Configuration Phase Planning for Installation and Configuration Installation Requirements Required Database Permissions Required Server Authorizations Character Formats Troubleshooting Your Installation Image Locator Diagnostic Tool Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool Microsoft Debugging Utility Chapter 2 Installation Install Introduction Software License Customer Information Select the Type of Installation Install Location Select Components Install ODM Open Data Manager ODM Teenie Infomation Shortcut Location Summary Installing IBM Optim Installation Complete Console Install Windows Silent Installer Windows Con
17. Windows On the Server tab in Personal Options enter the credentials for all Default or individual Servers UNIX or Linux In pstlocal cfg specify the credentials on each server parameter Note The Server credentials must have specific rights as specified in Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials Whether using explicit credentials or client credentials the Server credentials require certain privileges For Windows the Server credentials must allow logon as a user and the creation of a process request as that user To establish these permissions you must access the Local Security Policy and grant the following privileges to the user e Act as part of the operating system SeTcbPrivilege e Increase quotas SeIncreaseQuotaPrivilege e Replace a process level token SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege e Bypass traverse checking SeChangeNotifyPrivilege Note These privileges are automatically granted to the Local System Account Also the overriding User ID specified on the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet and the client credentials must have the following privilege Note that in some installations you can give this privilege to everyone in the Local Security Policy instead of specifying credentials for each client user Appendix B Server Credentials 371 e Log on as a batch job SE_LBATCH_LOGON_NAME For UNIX or Linux Super User
18. a DB Alias Select a DB Alias From the list of existing DB Alias names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Selecting lt Skip gt will also skip those Functions that require a DB S sect Multiple For a Single DB Server Sybase SQL Server Informix lt Select a Value gt v Create Primary Keys The Create Primary Keys and Select Primary Keys dialogs allow you to create the Optim Primary Keys Refer to Create Primary Keys on page 102 Create Primary Keys for Another After you create the Optim Primary Keys for tables accessed using a particular DB Alias the Configuration program prompts you to create Primary Keys for tables accessed using a different DB Alias To continue click Proceed If you select Create Primary Keys for another DB Alias the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens to repeat the sequence e If you clear Create Primary Keys for another DB Alias the Configuration program completes the Create Primary Keys process and returns to the main window Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships To facilitate use of Optim with DB2 z OS tables copy the DB2 relationships into the Optim Directory to reduce the run time when accessing DB2 tables The Configuration program provides an option to copy these relationships to the Optim Directory You can start this process by selecting Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships from the Tasks menu or by selecting the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Specif
19. drop old packages plans or procedures create refresh packages plans or procedures After maintenance is applied the task is complete or you can choose to apply maintenance for another DB Alias Create Select DB Alias When you select Apply Maintenance to a database for a single DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Create Select DB Alias dialog allowing you to select the DB Alias for maintenance Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 185 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Create Select DB Alias Eel x he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Select a DB Alias From the list of existing DB Alias names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Selecting lt Skip gt will also skip those Functions that require a DB Alias e Greate New For any Single Db Name OL Server Informix The only available option is to use an existing DB Alias Specify the name of the DB Alias you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow Click Proceed to open the Connect to Database dialog Connect to Database The Configuration program must connect to the database to apply maintenance to the Data Dictionary Catalog Tables or System Tables depending on the DBMS you are using When the Connect to Database dialog opens the User ID Password Connection String and DB Name are populated with previously entered values The User ID you specify mu
20. he Following Optim Sample Tables will be dropped if they exist If these table names conflict with your database table names then click lt Cancel gt to return to the previous indow You can then skip this step or select another Owner ID for the tables Click lt OK gt to drop these Optim Sample Tables aust i SSS nee eee o tt ET AMS SRST OTE Bese orm oros OOOO S PEZE AE ET E E EZT TE N E Use the Drop Tables dialog to ensure that the names of the sample tables do not conflict with your other table names If there are conflicts click Cancel otherwise click OK During the process that drops sample tables and loads refreshes sample tables the Configuration program displays the Insert Request Progress dialog 106 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide E Sample Tables Insert Request _ of PL PL pM a Sat B i k E AA ERa TR j i J Load Data Privacy Data Tables Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License thus the instructions that follow apply only to those clients Data privacy tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and e mail addresses to generate transformed data that is both valid and unique Generally these data privacy tables are loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load or refresh them by selecting L
21. he code units between U 4dc0 and U 4dff contain the Yijing Hexagram Symbols hich are not on any legacy code page These symbols should not be used as input on Register DB Alias The Configuration program creates a registry entry for subsequent access to the database Unless the connection is shared with the Optim Directory you must provide on the Connect to Database dialog information needed for this registry entry Connect to Database When the Connect to Database dialog opens User ID Password and Connection String are populated with any previously entered values 100 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the Optim Directory Tables DB Alias Name of the DB Alias Database Connection Parameters User ID Enter the User ID up to 30 characters that the DBMS requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Note For security and other reasons a User ID with privileges different from those required to configure the server may be desirable Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Connection String String or name that allows the workstation to access the Optim Directory database The DBMS uses this connection strin
22. 5 gp pel gt oO m Q Signing an Optim Exit on page 49 Signing the default exit supplied with Optim or a user defined exit Information on writing a user exit to provide additional security for Optim processes O gt D gel er ai A Configuration Window and Menus on page 59 Describes the main window for the Configuration program and certain general configuration functions Chapter 5 Configure Workstations on page 7 Use these Configuration tasks to prepare your system for Optim L Configure the Optim Server on page 14 Configure the Optim Server on one or more Windows workstations O zz w er le D a Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks on page 169 After you configure the first and any additional workstations you are ready to start using Optim However it may be necessary to perform other tasks that are available from the Tasks menu You can create update or drop DB Aliases and Optim Directories Configure Security enable or disable the Optim Server or ODBC interface apply maintenance update the DBMS version upgrade Optim software configure options create primary keys copy IBM DB2 z OS relationships load or drop sample data and load or drop data privacy data tables if you have an Optim Data Privacy License v Product Options on page 21 Customize Optim for all users You can set general limits for editing and extracting rows
23. DB Alises with Ohe Optim Directory Examples apply Maintenance T Multiple DB Aliases i e ke OS Appendix D Optim es Functional Security 293 293 295 304 306 306 306 323 327 328 336 346 347 348 349 349 350 Bol z 301 353 356 357 357 lt 357 358 359 361 Signing a User Supplied Exit in UNIX Red Hat wo we o 264 369 369 369 370 371 372 372 Of2 373 373 375 376 376 380 381 383 383 Establish Functional Security Object Security Establish Object Security Archive File Security Establish Archive File Security Access Control Domain Create a New ACD or Select an ACD to Edit Access Control Domains List Access Control Domain Editor Role Specifications Users Tab Privileges Tabs Access Control List Create or Edit an ACL Access Control List Editor File Access Definition Create or Edit a FAD File Access Definition Editor Defining Access Permissions for Columns File Access Definition Example Exporting Security Definitions Export Security Definitions Export Security Definitions Dialog Import Security Definitions Importing Security Definitions Import Dialog Appendix E Security Reports Open the Report Request Editor Create a New Report Request Select a Report Request to Edit Using the Editor General Tab Security Criteria Notify Tab Process a
24. Definition defined For that Optim Directory Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step To retain the Optim Directory tables and objects in it click Skip Create Drop Packages When you drop an Optim Directory all objects stored in that Directory are deleted For this reason the packages plans or procedures used to access the Optim Directory are no longer useful and should be dropped The Create Drop Packages Bind Drop Plans or Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog prompts you to do this Drop Another Optim Directory After you drop the Optim Directory the Configuration program opens the Drop Another Optim Directory dialog Select the check box to restart the process for another Optim Directory Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry For security or other reasons you may want to purge the Windows registry entry for an Optim Directory from a workstation but not drop the Directory or packages plans or procedures used to access that Directory For example when you remove an Optim Directory from a multi user environment you can purge the Optim Directory registry entry from each workstation In addition you can disable Optim for any workstation simply by purging the registry entry When you select Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry from the Tasks menu the Configuration program opens a dialog explaining the process and prompting you to confirm that you want to purge the registry entry for access to the Optim Directo
25. If Overwrite existing definitions is selected all check boxes to the left of each security definition are cleared and any definition can be selected If a selected definition exists in the Optim Directory Security Definition Import overwrites it Note At least one available security definition must be selected to run the Security Definition Import Process Import Progress Statistics detail the current and total number of security definitions imported by definition type and the current and total number of errors encountered the total numbers are the composite counts for all Security Definition Import Processes performed in the session This display is updated during processing The status bar displays information about the definition being processed 430 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Secured Input File Specify a Secured Input File generated by the Security Definition Export Process for details about creating this file refer to Exporting Security Definitions on page 425 e To select from a list of recent file names click the down arrow or use the browse button You may also copy a name into the box or type a name directly e If you do not provide a fully qualified path the path from Personal Options is used e If no path is given in Personal Options the current drive and directory are assumed After a Secured Input File is specified the Import Security Definitions Validation pop up is d
26. Note Product Option settings site level supersede any conflicting Personal Option settings user level For more information refer to Chapter 8 Product Options on page 219 Configuring Personal Options You can configure Personal Options using the Configuration program or you can set options within Optim In either case you will use the Personal Options dialog Using the Configuration Program to Configure Personal Options You can use the Configuration program to configure Personal Options when you first install and configure Optim 1 Open the Configuration program 2 In the main window select Configure Options from the Tasks menu 3 Specify an Optim Directory and click Proceed 4 Click Skip on the Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature and Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Feature dialogs to open the Specify Product Configuration File dialog oO Select Create New File or Use Existing File verify the name of the Configuration File and click Proceed On the Modify Product Options dialog click Proceed to open the Modify Personal Options dialog Click the Personal Options button to open the Personal Options dialog Specify the necessary details on each tab in Personal Options O ON Choose one of the following e To close the Personal Options dialog without saving your changes click Cancel e To save your changes and continue using the Personal Option
27. Server credentials are required to change the effective User ID and Group ID During startup if the filelogon parameter is set to client or server the effective User ID that started the daemon must be a Super User zero UNC Network Share Access Windows Mapped drives cannot be used for file names when processes are run from the Server because the drive is mapped only when the user is logged on to the interactive desktop Mapping is removed when the user logs off or disconnects from the share Thus a file that is valid when the request is created may be invalid at run time To specify network files use a Universal Naming Convention UNC in the following format servername sharename Each file server must specify the User IDs and access rights read write execute and so on for each of its shares The User ID that is sent to these file servers is the User ID used to run the process i e using Server credentials explicit credentials or client credentials The following restrictions apply e The share on the file server can specify the User ID from that Domain or everyone e The share on the file server can specify the Server machine name and the User ID or everyone e You cannot specify Local System Account on a file server since there is no external name associated with this credential When a connection is made to the file server the guest or anonymous account is used therefore the network
28. Server installation you must install the ODM Server and register the ODM license manually Specify ODM License Type After you choose Configure ODM Now from the Setup program the dialog prompts you to select the type of license you will use Optim 7 2 requires an updated ODM license If you do not have one you can select Enable a 30 Da ODM Trial License for immediate access To obtain a new license submit a Service Request to Suppor 6 Optim Server Setup Ea Select Specify ODM License File if you have obtained a license for ODM 7 2 Select Enable a 30 day ODM Trial License to use the temporary license which expires in 30 days After 30 days you must obtain a permanent license from IBM in orderto continue the use of ODM Ifyou select the Specify ODM License File choice you will be prompted to enter the ODM license file name on the next panel Do you want to specify the ODM license file or enable 30 days trial license nstalishietd lt Back Next gt Cancel Automatic ODM Server Installation After you choose Specify ODM License File from the Setup program the next dialog prompts you for the ODM license Enter the path to the ODM license file or click Browse to select a path 454 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide F Optim Server Setup Afel xi Enter the fully qualified name to the ODM License File Ifyou do not have access to the ODM License file atthis time
29. The forth word contains W and or U W means the locale could be supported in Windows I means the locale could be supported in Unix via MainWin B ft Note The installation program saves setup information in a file named vpd properties located in your home directory This file contains information about the current Optim installation like the options that have been installed and the Optim install directory If you manually delete the Optim directory you should also delete this file Sign the Optim Exit Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to sign the Optim exit 318 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide When the Sign Optim Exit dialog appears click Yes to sign the default exit included with Optim or click No to skip this step then click Next Optim Server Setup E l Sign Optim Exit hy te a Optim requires that a Signed Optim Exit exists to validate that a user is authorized to use this product at your company Optim supplies a default exit that can be used if your company does not have one In order to sign an exit you must have the Company ID Name and Password for your company that was included when you received your License Key This information is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as provided Do you want to sign the default Optim Exit T Yes ANo InstallShield You must sign the default
30. To access the Optim Directory and the DB Alias using a single connection select the check box If you clear the check box the Connect to Database dialog opens and you can specify a User ID and Password for the new DB Alias Note If the connection is shared a change to the stored procedures e g dropping the stored procedures or failing to perform maintenance after an installation may prevent your connecting to the Optim Directory Define Character Format If the Optim Directory is in Unicode format and you are creating a DB Alias for a DBMS for which Optim supports Unicode except SQL Server or multi byte you must indicate the character format of the DB Alias If the DB Alias uses a single connection with the Optim Directory the Optim Directory and DB Alias must use the same character format An Optim Directory in multi byte format supports multi byte DB Aliases only If the Directory is multi byte the DB Alias will be set to multi byte format however you must respond to the Issues with Multi byte Format for a DB Alias on page 99 dialog Note If the DB Alias represents the database in which the Optim Directory resides the Keep Character Data in Unicode Format and Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data dialogs are displayed after the Share ao Information for the Current Database dialog Read Share Connection Information on page Keep Character Data in Unicode Format If you are creating an Optim Directory in a DBMS for which
31. Up to 40 characters XXXXXXX The Optim demonstration name Default customername XXXXXXX license The Optim license key Note The license key is saved in the registry This registry entry is replaced if you connect to an Optim Directory with a more recent key Therefore you can remove this keyword after you start prOsvce the first time license key The 5 part license key provided by IBM demonstration key The Optim demonstration key shown in the following example Default license 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 tempdir Directory for temporary work and trace files directory Name of the directory for temporary work and trace files The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon tempdir PSTHOME temp datadir Directory for Extract Compare Control Export and other process files for which a complete path is not provided The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon directory Name of the directory for Extract Compare Control Export and other process files datadir PSTHOME data archivedir Directory for Archive Files for which the process request does not provide a complete path Archive Files are stored in the Data directory datadir by default The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon archivedir PSTHOME archive archivediridx Archive Index Directory for Archive Index Files for which a complete path is not provided Appendix A Install and Configure the
32. Use the Saved Logon Defaults tab to provide the User ID and Password needed to access the DB Alias Create Multiple DB Aliases Optim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables for each database that you want to access The Optim Configuration program can create new Procedures or it can use Procedures created for another Optim Directory for that database Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use The entries on the Saved Logon Defaults tab allow you to save registry entries to access the databases You must enter your password a second time for verification e To modify the saved User ID and Password from within the Configuration program select Configure Options from the main window and edit Personal Options e To modify the User ID and Password from within Optim select Personal from the Options menu on the main window and edit the Logon tab Note The default saved logon information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit logon information on the Databases tab Stored Procedure Defaults Use the Stored Procedure Defaults tab to provide the procedure Qualifier and Grant Auth ID required to create refresh stored procedures Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 119 Create Multiple DB Aliases Optim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables for each database that you want to access The Optim Configuration program can create new Procedures or i
33. Use the identifier from the source synonym as the default for new synonyms Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new synonyms Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new synonyms If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Chapter 9 Personal Options 267 Logon Tab Use the options on the Logon tab to set logon and password preferences Personal Options aoo Pd f gt 4 a jy Directory m amass O T a T T amass o T a o S S saamas ousa mo e OOO ao wooo o o a e S Optim Directory Select the name of the Optim Directory to display the corresponding logon information If you have access to more than one Optim Directory click to select from a list Grid Details The logon information corresponding to the selected Optim Directory includes the following details DB Alias List of DB Alias names you can access User ID Identifier 1 to 30 characters that allows you to access a particular DB Alias User IDs are usually assigned and maintained by the database administrator Note If you are using Informix you must specify the User ID in upper case for an ANSI database and in lower case for a non ANSI database 268 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Always Ask For Password Select to display the logon dialog every time you access a different Optim Directo
34. You can define Functional Privileges from the Default ACD only Privilege Classes Grid Use the Privilege Classes grid to display associated privileges in the Privileges grid You can also use the Privilege Classes grid to allow or deny all privileges in either a single class or all classes To select a row in the Privilege Classes grid click a row indicator cell or either an Allow All or Deny All cell The grid arrow indicates the class of privileges displayed You can also allow or deny all privileges in all privilege classes using the Allow All and Deny All buttons for the Privilege Classes grid or selecting corresponding commands from the shortcut menu To remove all selections in the Privilege Classes grid click or select Clear All 396 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Privileges Grid Use the Privileges grid to allow or deny privileges within a privilege class You can allow or deny a privilege by selecting the corresponding Allow or Deny check box If both the Allow and Deny check boxes are cleared the role is denied the privilege You can also allow or deny all privileges in the class using the Allow All and Deny All buttons for the Privileges grid or selecting corresponding commands from the shortcut menu To remove all selections in the Privileges grid click Clear All Users in Multiple Roles When a user is a member of more than one role certain rules apply to avoid security conflicts e Ifa pri
35. and import all Calendars in a third import process do the following 1 Select the Access Definitions you want to import in the Optim Definitions list and then click Import 2 After the selected Access Definitions are processed select the Table Maps you want to import and click Import again 3 After the selected Table Maps are processed select the Calendars you want to import and click Import a third time Alternatively you can click Next when you are ready to process the last group of objects you want to import as discussed in the Note following step 4 4 When you are done importing objects click Skip to display the Complete dialog described under conversion Canpicie When you are ready to process the last group of objects you want to import you can click Next instead of Import to complete the Import process If you do that you do not have to click Skip to display the Complete dialog During import processing the status bar displays information about the Import process After processing completes imported objects are identified by a gray check box If any errors occur processing continues or stops based on the setting specified for the Continue Import if Errors prompt Errors are identified by a red X beside each object in error If the Overwrite Existing Definitions check box is cleared duplicate definitions are noted in bold and they are not imported If some objects fail to be imported due to errors check the spe
36. if you have a primary ODM server on a Linux platform but want to leverage authentication on a Windows platform a secondary ODM server could be installed on the Windows platform and used to forward authenticated requests to the Linux platform This section describes how to create a secondary server configuration Before configuring the secondary server you must define it to Attunity Studio following the procedures in Attunity Studio Configuration on page 456 Defining Data Sources on the Secondary Server This section describes how to define data sources on the secondary server To define data sources on the secondary server 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the ODM Server list the Bindings list and the NAV list to display the Data sources member 2 Right click the Data sources member name and select New data source shortcut from the shortcut menu to open the New data source shortcut dialog Appendix F Open Data Manager 469 New data source shortcut Select machine for target data source ATST 3 Select Machine from Configuration explorer and then select the primary server from the corresponding list 4 Click Next until the New data source shortcut dialog is displayed 470 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Bi New OLX New data source shortcut Select shortcut target datasource Select a data source from the server Name
37. or Informix dbmsver DBMS version in the form n n n n n or ni as appropriate to the DBMS dbqual Creator ID Schema Name or Owner connectstring Information defined to the DBMS client to connect to the database dbname Name within connection Provide name if DBMS is Informix or Sybase ASE and pstlogon is client or specify if pstlogon is server userid password User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if pstlogon is server IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide dbalias loader mgn as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See 3 for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password pstdir OPTIMDIR Oracle 9i APPPROD USERID pstdir OPTIMDIR DB2 8 1 APPPROD DB Alias information Use dbalias for each DB Alias that the Server can access on behalf of a client Note that a DB Alias is created from a Windows machine using the configuration program and the DB Alias information is not verified until a connection is required by a client pstdir Name of the Optim directory that includes the DB Alias A pstdir entry for the referenced Optim Directory is required name Name of the DB Alias connectstring Information needed by the DBMS to connect to the database typically the system name and port ID Enter if the database designated by the DB Alias includes the Optim
38. other selected entries to use the shared stored procedures display Use Existing Procedure Qualifier The high level qualifier for stored procedures If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used For Sybase ASE databases sharing stored procedures the entry sp_ is displayed and cannot be edited Grant Auth ID An identifier for users authorized to maintain stored procedures Specify a User ID Group Name or Public If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used Logon User ID User ID up to 30 characters required to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used Logon Password The password up to 30 characters required to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used Saved User ID The User ID up to 30 characters required to logon using the DB Alias This identifier is saved to the Windows registry of the workstation If blank the entry on the Saved Logon Defaults tab is used Saved Password The password up to 30 characters required to logon using the DB Alias If blank the entry on the Saved Logon Defaults tab is used Note You can change the Saved User ID and Saved Password when you configure options and when you set Personal Options Always Ask for Password Select this check box to require a password each time you connect to the database If you clear this check box you need not supply a password
39. prOsvce the first time license key The 5 part license key provided by IBM demonstration key The Optim demonstration key shown in the following example Default license 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 rtservername The name of the Server daemon as declared to all client machines Processes initiated from a client machine and directed to the Server are executed if this name matches a name in the Product Configuration File used by the client or for command line processes that explicitly require the Server the Server parameter in pstlocal cfg servername 1 to 15 character name localcomputer name The computer name Default rtservername servername tempdir directory Temporary Directory for temporary work and trace files The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon tempdir PSTHOME temp Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 329 datadir directory Data Directory for Extract Compare Control Export and other process files for which a complete path is not provided The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon datadir PSTHOME data datadirclient Indicator for creating Data subdirectories for client data Settings are 0 or blank Do not create client subdirectories Default 1 Create client Data subdirectory as the default Data Directory when a client first connects to the Server datadirclient 1 archivedir directory Directory for Archive Files for w
40. select lt Back gt and Select the Configure ODM Later choice ODM License File Name Caer After you provide the license file path click Next to continue the Optim installation When the ODM installation is complete a progress dialog indicates that the installation was successful Press Enter to close the dialog If you chose Enable a 30 day ODM Trial License you will not have to specify a license file Manual ODM Installation To install the ODM Server manually you must run the ODM Server installation script and register the ODM license file To install an ODM Server in UNIX 1 Run the ODM Server installation file OdmInstall located in the rt odm install subdirectory 2 When prompted type the path of the Attunity license key license txt 3 Log off and log back on to effect changes to profile Note For users of Oracle prior to release 9 2 ODM and the Oracle Transparent Gateway use different versions of the libnvbaseshr so library To avoid a conflict Oracle Transparent Gateway and ODM must be assigned to different user accounts The shared library path environment variable e g LIBPATH for AIX for the Oracle Transparent Gateway account must reference the library in the Oracle directory before the library in the Attunity directory UNIX Administration After ODM is installed if it has not been done previously you must source the RTSETENV file to set up the environment needed to run ODM If you have added
41. the underscore represents the underscore character Chapter 9 Personal Options 249 Caps Mode Select to convert all lower case characters to upper case when you specify string literals in selection criteria relationships and Column Maps If you clear this check box characters display in upper case or lower case exactly as entered z OS Code Page In an Optim process you can use an Extract File created using the Optim z OS Solution Optim uses a code page to convert the mainframe file format from EBCDIC to ASCII In the z OS Code Page list select a default value to be used if the Extract File does not contain a code page number Days to keep Trace files Specify the number of days 2 to 30 to retain trace files in the temporary work directory The default value is 5 Trace files are useful for Optim to track processing Trace file names are prefixed with PRO followed by letters indicating the trace file type and ended with a numeric extension for example PROTOOL 123 The extension on the name of the trace file distinguishes one trace file from another of that type Trace files are sequentially numbered 001 through 999 followed by A00 through Z99 as necessary If more than 3 599 trace files of a single type are created and stored within the specified number of days file names are reused beginning with the first Note Storage space limitations should be considered when deciding the number of days to retain the files
42. which lists the ACLs based upon the selected ACD This option is available only if the ACD is the basis for one or more ACLs Not available for the Default ACD View or Edit ACD To view or edit an ACD in the Access Control Domain Editor double click the grid row or select Open from the shortcut menu Note Until network accounts are added to the Optim Administrator role or new roles are created in the Default ACD and granted Update access in the ACL only the Security Administrator for the Optim Directory can edit Default Create ACD To create an Access Control Domain a user must be a member of a role in the Default ACD and e If Functional Security is not enabled the user must be the Security Administrator or included in a role that has update access to the Default ACD e If Functional Security is enabled the role must be allowed the Functional Privilege for Access Control Domains in the Create Security Definitions class Open Object Access Control List Use the Open Object Access Control List dialog to list and display the ACLs associated with an ACD Open this dialog by selecting List Object ACLs from the shortcut menu on the Access Control Domains dialog This option is not available for the Default ACD The Open dialog is discussed in detail in the Common Elements Manual Appendix D Optim Security 389 Open Object Access Control List TP Access Definition amp y archive Request f gela Jea a
43. ASE DB Aliases only When Replace is specified in a Load Request data loaded to the affected tables is truncated unless the particular table is partitioned in which case the truncate action will fail Select this check box to issue the SOL Delete statement when the SOL Truncate statement fails Note The SQL Delete statement may be significantly more resourcedintensive than the SQL Truncate statement Loader Parameters Additional Loader Parameters Define additional loader parameters as required to append to the list created by Optim for loading data with a DBMS loader See DBMS documentation for valid operands Force at Run Time Select to force the use of the additional loader parameters defined in Product Options in place of any additional loader parameters specified in a particular Load Request Use to prime New Request Select to populate new Load Requests with the additional loader parameters defined in Product Options These parameters may be edited in the individual Load Requests as necessary Chapter 8 Product Options 243 Report Tab Use the Report tab to set formatting defaults for the Report Process lt gt Product Options Limits Set default limits for the output of the Report Process Rows per Table Specify the maximum number of rows 1 to 99999999 that can be reported on during a single Report Process Lines per Page Specify the maximum number of lines per page 1 to 999 for the report Line Length
44. Access Control List Model dialog 410 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Select Access Control List Model Jrest2 eee Conti Domain Access Control Domain fest w To select an ACL as a model enter the object type and name To apply the ACL for the selected object as a model click OK The roles and permissions from the model are then displayed in the Access Control List Editor Object Name Name of the object with the model ACL Object Type Type of object with the model ACL Use As Model Select an ACL to use as a model using the following Optim Object Template ACL Option to use the Optim Object Template ACL as the model Existing Access Control List Option to use the ACL as the model type and name Type Select the object type associated with the model ACL Name Type or select the object name associated with the model ACL You can also use the Name browse button to open the Select an Access Control List dialog used to select a model ACL from a list of objects If you select an ACL using the Select an Access Control List dialog the Type and Name for the selected ACL will be displayed automatically To populate Type and Name with the current entries each time you open the Select Access Control List Model dialog click Set as Default Select an Access Control List Use the Select an Access Control List dialog to select a model ACL from a list of objects The Identifier area displays the ob
45. Configuration Guide 1 Centera device is available for use This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to a Centera device or process such a file centeraavail 0 centeraretention Default minimum retention setting for Archive Files copied to Centera none No minimum retention period Default default The Centera default applies interval Use any centeradays and centerayears settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum Centera retention infinite Retain the file on Centera forever the file cannot be deleted centeraretention none centeradays The number of days to retain an Archive File copied to Centera This value and the centerayears value determine the retention period when the centeraretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for Centera File retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from Centera at any time n Number of days up to 18300 to retain the file centeradays 250 centerayears The number of years to retain an Archive File copied to Centera This value and the centeradays value determine the retention period when the centeraretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for Centera File retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from Centera at any time n Number of years up to 100 to retain the file centerayears 10 networkeravail Indicator for the use of a NetWorker system 0 NetWorker is not u
46. Configuration Tasks 207 Connect to Database You can specify different Personal Options for each database Therefore the Configuration program may prompt you to connect to the database before proceeding The Connect to Database dialog prompts for the User ID Password and Connection String needed to connect to the database for which Personal Options are specified Initialize Security If Optim Security for the Optim Directory is not initialized the Initialize Security dialog is displayed Use this dialog to assign a Security Administrator and initialize Optim Security for the Directory For more information about this dialog and initializing Optim Security see Optim Security on page 120 Change Security Administrator If Optim Security for the Optim Directory is initialized the Change Security Administrator dialog is displayed Use this dialog to change the Security Administrator for the Directory For more information about this dialog see Initialize Security or Change Security Administrator on Enable Disable Optim Server Feature On the Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the current machine as a Server If the site is not licensed for the Server Enable is not available Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature On the Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the ODBC driver If the site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not avail
47. Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Data Dictionary The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to access the Data Dictionary Specify a User ID and Password with authority to connect to the master database on the server and click proceed to open the Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog Note For SQL Server the User ID must have database owner dbo privileges to create or select multiple DB Aliases For Sybase ASE and SQL Server you are prompted to share a single copy of the stored procedures Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 113 lt gt Configure First Workstation Store Procedures in master Optim must use Optim created Procedures to query the System Tables when accessing the databases on this server The Optim Configuration program can store a separate copy of these Procedures in each database instance or it can store a single copy in master for use by all databases on this server o use a single copy of the Procedures For all databases on this server select the Use a Single Copy of HEN Ores FN ara I lt rs M Pur ml Neen OL COnrin ie P ern If you select the check box to share stored procedures you are prompted to convert existing DB Aliases to use the shared procedures 114 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Configure First Workstation Convert Existing DB Aliases If DB Aliases exist on this server that use a separate copies of the Optim Proced
48. Configure ODM Now Summary Only Copy the ODM Files Installation Installation Complete Selecting Configure ODM Now displays the ODM license dialog introduction if you have a valid ODM license you may specify its location below License Agreement or choose the 30 day trial license Customer Information Enable a 30 day Trial License Type oF Matanenon C Specify Open Data Manager ODM License File install Location Component Selection ODM Information Restore Defaull shgose Shortcut Location Summary Installation installation Complete 450 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Enable a 30 day Trial License Selecting this option installs ODM for a 30 day trial use Specify Open Data Manager ODM License File Selecting this option displays enables the text box below the radio button Type your ODM license file in the text box or click Choose to browse for the license file Windows Installation To install ODM select ODM Interface on the Select Components dialog of the Optim installation program You can install ODM as part of the Optim installation or copy the ODM installation files to your machine for use at a later time Introduction Open Data Manager ODM is distributed with a temporary 30 day license and for continued use requires a permanent license If upgrading ODM from version 6x or 7 1 of your Optim solution you must obtain a new permanent license but can use the 30 day Type of Ins
49. Data Privacy Data Tables 515 Content of Data Privacy Tables a 515 Appendix J Uninstalling 519 Prompt before Dropping Each Set of Optim Database Objects 520 Drop All Optim Created Dat base Objects without Prompting 521 Do Not Drop Any Optim Created Database Objects 521 Cancel the Uninstall Process 522 Appendix K Installing Optim Designer 523 Appendix L Process Audit 525 Contents V Notices 527 Index 2 1 ww ew ee ee ee we 5ST Trademarks 529 vi IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide About this Guide This guide provides information needed to install and configure the IBM Optim solution This release runs in the Microsoft Windows environment or in the Sun Solaris Hewlett Packard HPUX IBM AIX or Red Hat Linux environments supplemented with a Windows workstation Optim supports the IBM DB2 Oracle Sybase Adaptive Server Enterprise ASE Microsoft SQL Server and IBM Informix database management systems The information in this guide is organized into the following chapters Q 5 v ge er oO m Getting Started on page 1 General information about installing and configuring Optim with suggestions for preparing your site and requirements for hardware operating systems and supported database management systems Chapter 2 Installation on page 23 Install Optim O
50. Default n Maximum number of lines to include up to 9999 lines scriptmaxlines 500 scriptprefixout Option for Column Map Procedure name in Process Report 0 Do not include name 1 Include Column Map Procedure name Default If a Local Column Map Procedure is used in process a name is generated in the form tablename columename n to be included in the report Use scriptshowfullcol and scriptshowfulltbl to format the generated name scriptprefixout 1 scriptshowfullcol Format for column name used to generate name for local Column Map Procedure 0 Use full column name 144 Use first 4 characters and last 4 characters in column name Default 1 nrn Use indicated number of characters from beginning ln and end rn of column name scriptshowfullcol 1 3 3 scriptshowfulltbl Format for table name used to generate name for local Column Map Procedure 0 Use full table name 144 Use first 4 characters and last 4 characters in table name Default 1 nrn Use indicated number of characters from beginning In and end rn of table name scriptshowfulltbl 1 6 6 scriptwarnmissing Report option for missing Column Map Procedures 0 Exclude warning of missing Column Map Procedure 1 Include warning of missing Column Map Procedure Default scriptwarnmissing 1 344 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide wormdeviceallowaltret Indicator for minimum WORM device retention settings Indicates whether users can override
51. For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to Pstserv Configuration File on page 328 e The pstlocal configuration file pstlocal cfg is used to configure the system for running the Command Line Utility For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility on page 336 e The locale conf file provides locale conversion information between platforms You can use this file to provide additional locale conversion information For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to LOCALE CONF Conversion File on page 349 If you choose to update a file the default text editor is launched displaying the corresponding file Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 317 Text Editor locale conf TAHHHEEHHHEEREHHEHHHHEHHHHRHHRHEEHHHREHHHREHHHEHHHEEEHHERHEHHREEHHREHHHRERHHRE i ocale con Locale conversion file for M S Server Compone PEDENN DEDEDEN ANON TETRAN OTTEENSA asic format P is start of comment everything to the right is ignored Blank lines are ignore ed Use escape and any character to produce that character line is broken into a series of space delmited words If the word contains space the enclose it in double quotes Normal locale entries are four words The first word is the UNIX Locale name The second word is the WINDOWS Locale name The third word is the WINDOWS LCID
52. ID Schema Name or Owner ID during the configuration process Later this workstation can access the Optim Directory using the same identifier or a different identifier with perhaps less authority Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information that allows the Configuration program to connect to the database and then configure Optim Directory tables Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 75 Configure First Workstation Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the Optim Directory Tables orrimoiR The Connect to Database dialog prompts for the following Database Connection Parameters Optim Directory Previously entered Optim Directory name Database Connection Parameters User ID Enter a User ID up to 30 characters that the DBMS requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Password Enter a password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Connection String Enter the name or string needed to access the Optim Directory database Note If you are using DB2 the term is Database Name or Alias Oracle uses DB Alias Sybase ASE uses Server Name SQL Server uses System Data Source Name and Informix uses Host Name Syntax is described in the DBMS documentation DB Name Enter the name of the Sybase ASE SQL Serv
53. Insert Restore and Delete Request Editors Users can then use the option to lock tables during an Insert Restore or Delete Process Locking tables ensures that other database activity does not interfere with the process and prevents other users from accessing tables involved in the process Allow Insert Action Delete Option Select this check box to enable the Delete Options box in the Insert Request Editor If you clear this check box the Delete Options box is unavailable and the Delete option is set to No Tables by default Enforce DBMS Rel Name Lengths Select this check box to enforce DBMS restrictions for relationship name length when creating or importing relationships This option is selected by default Clear this check box to override DBMS naming restrictions and create or import relationships with names constraints up to 64 characters After changing this option you must exit Optim before the change takes effect You cannot create a DBMS relationship based on an Optim relationship with a name that exceeds the DBMS restrictions Use Oracle Array Delete Select Use Oracle Array Delete to use the Oracle array delete feature during a Delete Process This option is selected by default Note If your site audits Delete processing be aware that Array Delete may report rows as being successfully deleted that do not exist in the database and therefore were not actually deleted by the process The Oracle array delete feature is p
54. Installation and Configuration Guide Sample continued Column Map procedures 511 database tables description 503 510 loading 5 104 structure 503 extract files 513 JCL file 515 Scheduling Monitor directory path for 257 start immediately 257 startup options 257 Scheduling tab Personal Options 257 secured files 413 Security Administrator Optim Security 121 Security Report creating 438 description 437 editing 439 processing 445 run 445 schedule 445 Segment naming 280 size 280 Select Components 29 Select the Type of Install 27 Server Authorizations 12 Server tab Personal Options 270 271 always ask for password 271 check logon 271 Optim Server 270 User ID Password Domain 270 Servers tab Product Options 237 238 endpoint 237 network address 237 protocol 237 Server name 237 Setup creating desktop icons 32 customer information 26 for additional workstations 6 Software License 25 Special Characters Caps mode 250 underscore as SQL LIKE 249 SQL Server connection string 134 create multiple DB Aliases 116 create drop procedures for DB Alias 92 for Optim Directory 79 update DBMS version 204 Sybase ASE connection string 134 create multiple DB Aliases 116 create shared procedures for DB Alias 113 create drop procedures for DB Alias 92 for Optim Directory 79 update DBMS version 204 System Requirements hardware software 7 T Tasks menu 169 217 access Optim Directory 173 configure additional workstations 132
55. Interval the Years and Days boxes become available Years Specify the number of years to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 240 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Days Specify the number of days 0 to 999 to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Note The interval cannot exceed the maximum date 01 17 2071 Archive checks the interval when you set the Product Options save a Storage Profile and run the Archive Process Maximum Use the maximum date 01 17 2071 None Do not use a minimum retention period allow an Archive File to be deleted from the device at any time Load Tab Use the Load tab to customize loader parameters and enforce loader requirements for your site This can be particularly helpful when you have more than one database or more than one Optim Directory You can specify default parameters applicable to all defined DB Aliases and as needed specify unique parameters for each different database each instance or version of a database or each different Optim Directory For example after selecting an Optim Directory you can select Default in the DB Alias box Loader settings you define will apply to all DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory If the default settings are not appropriate for one DB Alias you can select that DB Alias in the DB Alias box select the Override default settings check box and define specific settin
56. Multi byte Support The Optim Directory and DB Aliases can be configured to support multi byte character encoding if character data in your database is kept in a multi byte character format For information about supported multi byte character sets see the link for character set support in the Detailed System Requirements document for your release of Optim If Optim processes data in a multi byte enabled database the Optim Directory must be in a multi byte or Unicode enabled database The Optim Directory and DB Aliases for multi byte enabled databases must be flagged during the configuration process An Optim Directory in multi byte format supports multi byte DB Aliases only Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process information In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Optim provides a Product Option on the Database tab and a Personal Option on the Database that determine how to handle round trip conversion issues when processing data in a multi byte database Compatible Character Sets To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the database client must be compatible with the character set of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 If the client uses a DB Alias configured f
57. Optim Directory must reside in a Unicode enabled database and the Directory and DB Alias for the database must be configured for Unicode data 2 If the database server does not use a Unicode character set the client cannot use one either The DB Alias for the database must not be configured for Unicode data 3 If the database server uses a Unicode character set and the client does not an error results Version 9 0 and Later Oracle Clients For releases 9 0 and later the character set for the Oracle client is set in the NLS_LANG environment variable for example e SET NLS_LANG AMERICAN_AMERICA AL32UTF8 Restart Optim and or the Configuration program after making any changes to the character set Version 9 2 and Later Oracle Clients 1 If the client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 2 If the client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 3 If the client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match that of the server See Formats on page 13 for a list of supported character sets 4 If the client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results 5 If the workstation for the Ora
58. Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 5 Create Refresh Packages Plans or Procedures After maintenance is applied you can choose to apply maintenance to databases in a different DBMS or the maintenance task is complete Specify DB Alias DBMS When you select Apply Maintenance to databases with a specified DBMS Type and Version the Configuration program opens the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Specify DB Alias DBMS OF x he Optim Configuration program can apply maintenance to an existing database Select the DBMS type and version For the databases For which you want to apply aintenance then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS ersions may have been discontinued by the vendor 9i Release 2 9 2 H Specify the DBMS Type and Version and click Proceed to open the Apply Maintenance to DB Alias dialog To continue select the DB Alias connect to the database and create drop packages plans or procedures Note The steps are the same as those previously described to apply maintenance for all DB Aliases Apply Maintenance to Another DBMS Type After you apply maintenance to the database in the selected DBMS the Configuration program opens the Apply Maintenance to Another DBMS Type dialog and prompts you to confirm maintenance for a different database DBMS Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 189 Apply Maintenance for DB A
59. Primary Keys The ORDER_ID column is the primary key column 506 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_ORDERS table is a parent of the OPTIM_DETAILS table through a foreign key on column ORDER_ID The OPTIM_ORDERS table is a child of the OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table through its foreign key on column CUST_ID OPTIM_DETAILS Table The OPTIM_DETAILS table contains additional information for each order in the OPTIM_ORDERS table The OPTIM_DETAILS table has the following columns ORDER_ID DECIMAL order ID number cannot contain null ITEM_ID CHAR up to 5 characters item ID number cannot contain null ITEM_QUANTITY DECIMAL number of items cannot contain null DETAIL_UNIT_PRICE DECIMAL unit price dollar amount cannot contain null Primary Keys The ORDER_ID and ITEM_ID columns are the primary key Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_DETAILS table is a child of e The OPTIM_ORDERS table through its foreign key on column ORDER_ID e The OPTIM_ITEMS table through its foreign key on column ITEM_ID OPTIM_ITEMS Table The OPTIM_ITEMS table contains information about each item for an order including description price and quantity in inventory The OPTIM_ITEMS table has the following columns ITEM_ID CHAR up to 5 characters cannot contain null ITEM_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR up to 72 characters cannot contain null CATEGORY VARCHAR up to 14 characters ca
60. RTSETENV to your profile or login source that file instead If not change to the directory where Optim is installed e g opt IBM Optim and use rtsetenv Appendix F Open Data Manager 455 Starting the ODM Server Once you have set up the required environment use the following to start the ODM Server irpcdstart Stopping the ODM Server Optim and the ODM Server share common resources To reinstall or upgrade Optim you must shut down both Optim and the ODM Server prior to starting the installation Use the following procedure to shut down both Optim and the ODM Server rtserver stop irpcdshutdown mwadm stop Notes e Do not use mwadm stop prior to invoking irpcdshutdown otherwise you may not be able to restart Optim e To shut down Optim only do not invoke mwadm stop Attunity Studio Configuration Attunity Studio is used to configure the ODM Server environment from a Windows machine Adding an ODM Server to Attunity Studio This section describes how to add an ODM Server to Attunity Studio To add an ODM Server to Attunity Studio 1 Open Attunity Studio from the Attunity folder in the Windows Programs list 2 In the Configuration explorer right click Machines and select Add Machine from the shortcut menu to open the Add machine dialog 456 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide H E Solti Name Machines 3 In the Add machine dial
61. Temporary Work Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory in which you want to store internal work files and trace files To select from your system directories click the browse button Data Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory in which you want to store Archive Extract Control Compare and Export Files and other process files To select from your system directories click the browse button The Data Directory serves as the default you can specify a different directory path and file name on any process request Product Configuration File Specify the complete path to the Product Configuration File The file name has a cfg extension To select from your system directories click the browse button The Product Configuration File is created when you install Optim Local Optim Server ODBC Connections Only To improve ODBC response times select the name of the Server that runs on this machine The ODBC Server will run locally and the Server will not be contacted if an ODBC connection specifies this Server name or if the ODBC interface selects an Archive File with this Server name in its Archive Directory entry Note Do not use this setting if accessing archived data on a backup device 250 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Confirm Tab Use the Confirm tab to choose whether a confirmation dialog is displayed before the execution of a process that results in loss of dat
62. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2 31 Roppongi 3 chome Minato ku Tokyo 106 0032 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only
63. Type Coonmectstring AFDSN1 PST_GDB I Alias in binding AFDSNI lt Back Hents __ Finish Cancel 5 Select the data source from the list and click Finish ODM Security This section describes a method for securing an ODM environment To secure an ODM environment you must e Provide Archive File Security user credentials on the ODM Server for each data source e Provide administrative authorization e Secure the Attunity daemon e Provide user credentials for client server access to the ODM Server Credential Definition All credentials specified for Attunity authentication are operating system credentials of the machine performing the authorization For Linux groups as well as individual users are supported For Windows groups are not supported and all credentials are based on local users however Attunity daemon access can be qualified by domain name see Securing the Attunity Daemon on page 474 Providing Archive File Security Credentials Archive File Security user credentials for each data source are assigned to the NAV user profile on the ODM Server You can also provide Archive File Security credentials in an ODBC or JDBC connection string For more information see Runtime Connection Information on page 476 Appendix F Open Data Manager 471 To provide Archive File Security user credentials f In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer expand the server list and the User
64. Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 Server the Optim Server can be run as a process or a service When it is run as a process the Server uses the credentials of the current user ID When it is run as a service and an explicit user ID is used the Server requires the user ID to have the following privileges e Act as part of the operating system e Bypass transverse checking e Increase quotas e Log on as a batch job e Replace a process level token 12 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Local Security Policy You must access the Local Security Policy to grant these privileges to the user You can access the Local Security Policy as follows Note You must be logged on to the Windows machine with a user ID that has administrator rights 1 From the Control Panel access the Local Security Policy applet Administrator Tools gt Local Security Policy 2 From the Local Security Policy window select the menu entry Policies gt User Rights 3 On the User Rights Policy window select the following entry in the left pane Security Settings gt Local Policies gt User Rights Assignments 4 Repeat the following steps for each of the five privileges listed above e Select a privilege from the right pane of the Local Security Settings window e If the user or group is not already listed in the Assign To list box select Add to add the user or group to the list e Ensure that the Local Policy Setting check box is c
65. a E9 Calendar ACL st NAtprivbraud1 7 27 2006 11 04 29 AM ERE Column Map ACL i i Column Map Proc 4 Say Compare Request ABR Convert Request Aw ey PUR OOOO open cancel Refresh Help Access Control Domain Editor The Access Control Domain Editor lists roles in the ACD The name of the ACD is displayed at the top of the dialog The Role List displays the roles in the ACD When you open the Access Control Domain Editor by selecting New ACD from the Tools menu in the Access Control Domains dialog the Optim Administrator role is displayed by default You can also open the Access Control Domain Editor for an existing ACD by double clicking the name of an ACD listed in the Access Control Domains dialog 390 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide OTHER Access Control Domain Editor glalajalal 6 2 M ECN D of ail areal E ay E e E Tech Writers NRTH DOMiga 2005 09 15 1220 21 Administrator NRTH DOMiqa 2005 09 15 12 20 21 Security Manager To add edit or delete a role use the shortcut menu to open the Role Specifications dialog which is used to create and modify roles for an ACD and if Functional or Object Security is used at your facility to grant or deny related privileges to those roles Description Optional text that describes the ACD up to 40 characters Role List A grid that displays the roles in the ACD and includes the following Role T
66. a Security Administrator and enable the security features your site will use To initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator use one of the following Tasks menu options in the Configuration program e Configure the First Workstation e Configure Security for an Optim Directory e Create Update Optim Directory e Configure Options To enable or disable the security features select Configure Security for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu in the Configuration program For more information see Configure Security for an Optim Directory on page 173 Establish Archive File Security This section describes how to establish Archive File security To establish Archive File security 1 Using the Configuration program initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator as described in Optim Security on page 120 2 Using the Configuration program enable Archive File Security as described in Set Archive File Security Option on page 179 3 Edit the Default ACD and any additional ACDs to map roles to network accounts 386 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 4 Create and edit each FAD using roles in the appropriate ACD 5 Reference the appropriate FAD in each Archive Request used to create secured Archive Files Access Control Domain Use the Access Control Domain Editor to create and maintain Access Control Domains There are different ways to open the
67. a Security Administrator designate the workstation as a Server if the optional Server feature is licensed enable the ODBC Interface feature if Archive is licensed specify a Product Configuration File and configure Product and Personal Options Click Proceed to continue Initialize Security Change Security Administrator On the Initialize Security dialog assign a Security Administrator for the Optim Directory and initialize security If security has been initialized for the Directory this dialog is replaced by the Change Security Administrator dialog which is similar to Initialize Security but with no initialize option For information about initializing Optim Security and assigning a Security Administrator see Security on page 120 138 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Additional Workstation Initialize Security Optim he Configuration program can initialize the Security Features and assign a Security dminstrator Once initialized Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security dministrator Click lt Change gt to specify a different Security Administrator Select the nitialize option to Initialize the security Features Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action gt F lt Skin Fo hunasa hiz cken Optim Directory Security State OPTIMDIR Not Initialized Security Administrator For this Optim Directory Domain User Name NAtoptusrd Change Init
68. a new instance of Infosphere Data Architect on the computer To install Optim Designer 1 If Infosphere Data Architect is not yet installed on the computer or if you must install a new instance of Infosphere Data Architect on the computer insert the Infosphere Data Architect installation disc into the computer or access the Infosphere Data Architect installation package and launch the installation program from the Infosphere Data Architect installation disc or package e If IBM Installation Manager is not yet installed on the computer the installation program installs Installation Manager and Infosphere Data Architect e If Installation Manager is already installed on the computer the installation program runs Installation Manager and installs Infosphere Data Architect Choose not to run Infosphere Data Architect after it is installed 2 Insert the Optim Designer installation disc into the computer or access the Optim Designer installation package 3 If Installation Manager is not running on the computer run Installation Manager 4 In Installation Manager click Manage Licenses and import the Infosphere Data Architect product activation kit from the folder on the computer The Infosphere Data Architect product activation kit is located in the ida_activation_kit folder on the Optim Designer installation disc or in the Optim Designer installation package The product activation kit is a jar file named com ibm infosphere data archit
69. a table selection list Use the list to add one or more table names to the Table List Note Add table is available only from the blank row at the bottom of the Table List Appendix D Optim Security 415 Select From Database to display the Select Table s dialog listing tables in the database For more information see Selecting Tables from a Database Select From Archive File to display the Open dialog from which to choose an Archive File before displaying the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog For more information see Selecting Tables from an Archive File on page 417 Note Access permissions in the ACL for the FAD determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Remove shortcut menu options are not available to a role that is limited to read access Table Access Control Use the Table Access Control list to define access permissions for an entry in the Table List You can assign access permissions to selected roles in the associated ACD and a default for all user accounts and roles for which access permissions are not assigned explicitly If the AC Type for an entry in the Table List is None Table Access Control list is blank and cannot be edited Role Default and names of roles for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Role names not included in the Access Control Domain that serves as the basis for the FAD are italicized and settings for them have no e
70. account that corresponds to the Optim Directory table Owner ID does not have SA role the user account must have the following permissions CREATE TABLE CREATE PROCEDURE When you catalog the procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users To create a DB Alias in SQL Server the following must be true 1 You must connect to the database as the System Administrator SA a user account with SA role a user account with a dbo alias or a user account with CREATE PROCEDURE permission Note The account used to connect to the database may be different from the Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables 2 The Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables must be a valid user ID for the database and must have a LOGIN to the database server If wanted you can specify the special SQL Server ID of dbo as the Owner ID of the stored procedures Chapter 1 Getting Started 9 Note The Owner ID may be different from the ID used to connect 3 If the Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables does not have the SA role then the user account must have the following permission CREATE PROCEDURE When you catalog the procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specif
71. account that created them If any of the required permissions are revoked the packages become invalid when executed When you create the packages for the Optim Directory and the Data Dictionary you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users SQL Server In SQL Server the user must have a LOGIN at the database server level and a user account for the database instance being accessed This is true for both creating and accessing an Optim Directory and a DB Alias If shared global stored procedures are used for DB Aliases the user account used to create the stored procedures must have database owner privileges dbo To create the Optim Directory in SQL Server the following must be true 1 You must connect to the database as the System Administrator SA a user account with SA role a user account with dbo alias Note The account used to connect to the database may be different from the Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables 2 The Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables must be a valid user account for the database and must have a LOGIN to the database server If wanted you may specify the special SQL Server ID of dbo as the Owner ID of the Optim Directory tables and related stored procedures Note The Owner ID may be different from the ID used to connect 3 If the user
72. allow processing of multiple rows concurrently to improve performance when processing large quantities of data Valid entries are 0 Use one database connection for processing Default 1n Use the specified number from 2 to 32 of database connections 1 maximum Use the maximum number of connections supported by the Server dbconnections 1 maximum formatnumerics Format of numeric values displayed in process reports 0 Do not format numbers in process reports i e display as nnnnnn Default 1 Format numbers in process reports i e display as nnn nnn formatnumerics 0 maxcommitfreq System wide commit frequency n A number from 1 to 999 999 200 Default setting maxcommitfreq 200 maxextractrows Maximum number of rows to extract n A number from 1 to 999 999 999 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 341 100000 Default setting maxextractrows 100000 onlyidxsearch Use of Archive Indexes in Search and Restore processes Valid entries are 0 Search Archive indexes first and native file system if necessary 1 Search Archive indexes only Default onlyidxsearch 1 orausearraydelete Use the Oracle array delete feature with a Delete Process When the feature is used rows not found are listed as deleted in the Delete Process Report Valid entries are 0 Do not use Oracle array delete 1 Use Oracle array delete Default orausearraydelete 1 reviewdelafterarchive Allow users to l
73. and Registry Entry option is selected Specify the name of the Optim Directory you want to use Click the down arrow to select from a list Click Proceed to continue Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Interface Feature On the Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Interface Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the ODBC driver Enable Disable the Optim Archive ODBC Interface Feature Enable BE Eg Optim he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC interface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry For he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step gt Optim Directory DIRECTORY License Information Archive License Status Archive ODBC Driver State for this Machine Licensed Enabled Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface Feature for This Machine Enable Disable Previous __ Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle QOR922K 7 If the site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access At times it may be necessary to refresh or update the packages plans or procedures needed to access the Optim Directory tables Generally you apply maintenance for Optim Directory access when installing a new version of Optim However if you drop the Optim Directo
74. appear before the Sign Optim Exit dialog because a company Name and ID are required to sign an exit 56 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide E Specify Company Name Optim requires a 1 to 40 character Company Name and 6 character Company ID IBM sent this information to you via email or mail You must specify Company Information hen you first install Optim To change Company infomation select the Company option from the Options menu on the Optim Configuration window If this dialog displays you must specify your company Name and ID and click OK to proceed with the signing process Both entries are case sensitive and you must enter both entries in the format provided to you when you received Optim Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit 57 58 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus This chapter describes the main window for the Optim Configuration program and certain general configuration functions The principal configuration tasks are described in the following chapters Note Before you do any configuration functions you must sign the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit of your own creation You cannot continue with the Configuration_process or use Optim until you sign a valid exit using the Sign Optim Exit dialog as described in Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit on page 49 DBMS Terms Optim supports several database managemen
75. at the target installation Signing an Exit during Configuration To sign an exit in Windows you must run the Optim Configuration program You also must run the Configuration program to switch from using the default exit to a user supplied exit or vice versa When you install Optim you can launch the Configuration program and display the dialog used to sign an exit by selecting the Launch Optim configuration check box on the Install Complete dialog as described in Installation Complete on page 34 Before you run the Configuration program confirm that no other Optim processes are running if other processes are running shut them down or wait for them to finish before you run the Configuration program If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must compile and create the load library opmexit dll You must then copy the DLL to the rt bin directory before you run the Configuration program Note If you use the Configuration program to sign a user supplied exit Optim will immediately call that exit to authorize all future requests This means that the new exit could theoretically prohibit the current user from executing any other requests such as running the Configuration program if that user does not have permission to do so in the new exit Each time you execute the Configuration program it checks for the existence of a signed exit If one is not found the Sign Optim Exit dialog displays and_you must sign either the default Opti
76. click Proceed Drop Another DB Alias After you drop the DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Drop Another DB Alias dialog Select the check box to open the Create Select DB Alias dialog and restart the process for another DB Alias Disable the Optim Server Feature The Configuration program opens the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog next to allow you to disable the Server feature Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 213 lt gt Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Enable Disable Optim Server Feature oOyXx he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 XP tobe an Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to configure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Server feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Click Proceed to disable the Server feature or click Skip to advance to the next step without disabling the Server feature If the site is not licensed for the Server this dialog is not displayed Disable the Archive ODBC Feature The Configuration program opens the Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature dialog next This dialog allows you to disable the Archive ODBC interface feature 214 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature Mi Eg he Configuration program can configure
77. configuration specifications for a WORM device using a Storage Profile 0 Use the WORM device default Any Storage Profile or wormdeviceretention settings for retention will cause the process to fail 1 Use wormdeviceretention settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum WORM device retention Default wormdeviceallowaltret 1 wormdeviceretention Default minimum retention setting for Archive Files copied to a WORM device none No minimum retention period Default interval Use any wormdevicedays and wormdeviceyears settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum WORM device retention The retention interval cannot exceed the WORM device maximum date of 01 17 2071 maximum The WORM device maximum retention date 01 17 2071 applies wormdeviceretention none wormdevicedays The number of days to retain an Archive File copied to a WORM device This value and the wormdeviceyears value determine the retention period when the wormdeviceretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for WORM device file retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from the WORM device at any time n Number of days up to 999 to retain the file wormdevicedays 60 wormdeviceyears The number of years to retain an Archive File copied to a WORM device This value and the wormdevicedays value determine the retention period when the wormdeviceretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile set
78. directory userid password User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if dbaliaslogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See F Securing the Configuration Files on page 353 for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password dbalias OPTIMDIR DBALIAS USERID dbalias OPTIMDIR DBALIAS D0805 dbalias OPTIMDIR DBALIAS USERID PASSWORD The location of the DBMS loader for a delegated Load Request You can identify a loader for a specific Optim Directory and DB Alias or you can identify a default loader be used for any DB Alias within a DBMS pstdir The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias The Optim Directory must be referenced in a pstdir parameter This setting requires a dbalias name dbalias The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the DB Alias The DB Alias must be referenced in a dbalias parameter This setting requires a pstdir name The Loader is the default for a DBMS You must also provide a value for dbmstype dbmstype DBMS type Enter Oracle Sybase Informix or Teradata pathtoloader Path to the executable loader file teradatatype 1 0 For the Teradata loader the load type Specify 1 for Teradata FastLoad or 0 for Teradata MLoad teradataconfig For the Teradata loader
79. drop the DB Alias or click Skip to open the Drop Optim Directory dialog which you can use to drop the specified Optim Directory including all DB Aliases and other objects stored in it Load Drop Sample Tables The Load Drop Sample Tables dialog prompts you to specify the identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID for the sample tables to be dropped Refer to Load Drop Sample Tables on page 104 Load Drop Data Privacy Tables If you have an Optim Data Privacy License the Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog prompts you to specify the identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID for the data privacy tables to be dropped Refer to Load Drop Data Privacy Tables on page 107 Drop Packages Before dropping packages plans or procedures used to access the database the Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages Bind Drop Plans or Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog as appropriate 212 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Create Drop Packages he Optim Configuration program can drop the Optim created Packages for the Data Dictionary The Package Schema Name must match the name used when you created he Packages If the Packages are used by another Optim Directory click lt Skip gt Grant Auth ID a To retain the packages plans or procedures click Skip To browse the DDL used to drop the packages plans or procedures select Display SQL and
80. each DBMS Loader Connection Connect strings for all DB Aliases in an Optim Directory Access Access to specific Server drives and directories Startup Type of start up for the Server Security The source of User ID and password information to log on 144 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Endpoints Protocol and address information for machines hosting the Server Archive Directories for storing Archive files and Archive Index files Retention Options to scan Optim Directories for Archive Files with a retention policy Status Current workstation connections to machines hosting the Server Email Email addresses for report messages As part of the installation process you create entries in the Current User registry Note When you add or delete an Optim Directory or DB Alias using the Configuration program you should also apply the new settings to the Server Configuration You can keep Local Machine registry entries for the Server separate from those for the user by entering information in the Optim Server Settings dialog Settings on the Optim Configuration dialog pertain only to the Server component not to the currently logged on user Note If workstations are processing setting changes are saved when you click Apply but are not applied until all processing completes The Server rejects new connections until the current connections terminate and the new settings are applied Scheduled processes a
81. establish all user accounts If you change user accounts after processes have run the ability of processes to access files produced in earlier processing may be affected For example a Restore Process that uses Centera or NetWorker as the user ID in effect when the file is recalled from a backup device and when the recalled file is deleted from disk after the specified retention period Use the following information to help determine which user IDs to specify for each parameter The user account under which the pr0svce daemon is started for example the account that is logged on when prOsvce is started must have write access to the Optim temporary directory and read access to pstserv cfg As you establish additional user accounts keep in mind the following parameter settings in the configuration files which affect the credentials under which the pr0svce daemon runs as well as the credentials presented to run a process and to access files during a process filelogon The filelogon parameter indicates the source of the credentials for processes Unless you override the normal umask behavior using the filemode configuration parameter output files Extract Files Archive Files Control Files inherit the standard file privileges of the processing user account Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 351 Thus if you use the filelogon client parameter a process may be unable to access files not created under its own
82. explains these steps discusses the software and environmental requirements for using the application software and describes the information you must prepare for the installation and configuration process Installation Phase The installation process unloads Optim from the installation DVD to the target workstation and additional workstations or servers You begin the installation phase by using the program to load the application software at the first workstation You must enter your company name and the identification number indicated in the email sent when Optim is shipped to you You must also designate a destination directory for the application software Depending on your license agreement after you install and configure Optim you may have access to one or more of the following components e Archive allows you to identify and archive sets of relationally intact data before removing selected data from your database You can browse search or restore selected subsets of archived data 2 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e Move allows you to identify and extract migrate and process sets of relationally intact data You can create test databases that are referentially complete subsets of a production database copy sets of related data from a production database to a work area before revising and moving data to the production database or migrate subsets of data that require data transformations as part of the migratio
83. false W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice If the Optim ODM feature is installed indicate when it is configured 1 Configure ODM now This option prompts you for the Attunity license file and automatically installs the ODM Server 2 Configure ODM later This option copies the ODM Server installation files to your machine To complete the ODM Server installation you must install the ODM Server and register the Attunity license manually W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice 2 Note If you choose to configure ODM now W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice 1 you must define a value for W ODMLicensePanel ODMLicenseField W ODM LicensePanel ODMLicenseField If you choose to configure ODM now W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice 1 enter the fully qualified name for the Attunity license file If the directory contains spaces enclose it in double quotation marks Note If you do not have an Attunity license file enter W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice 2 W ODMLicensePanel ODMLicenseField opt 0DM license txt W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtsetenv This keyword allows you to edit the RTSETENV shell script during the installation process using the default text editor The RTSETENV shell script is included in a user profile or login script to define the operating environment for the Server This script sets up the Server daemon or command line environment on login The operati
84. file is located in C Program Files Attunity AIS_BackUp on a Windows machine and on PSTHOME ODM AIS_BackUp on UNIX 5 Start the IRPCD daemon a Right click My Computer and select Manage b Expand the Services and Applications section and select Services c Right click Attunity Server and select Start Attunity Server version 4 8 is now installed with the previous configuration If the previous configuration continues to have problems contact IBM Software Support Appendix F Open Data Manager 483 484 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects All PST Directories created prior to version 6 0 of the Princeton Softech products Archive and the Relational Tools require a conversion to be compatible with later versions Additionally any Optim Directory created prior to Optim version 6 2 on an SQL Server database must be converted Use the Configuration program to convert Optim Directories and objects After the Conversion Process your old PST Directory and objects remain intact and can still be used with the Optim products Version 5 x PST Directories PST Directory objects created using version 5 x of Archive or the Relational Tools must be converted into a format suitable for use with version 6 0 or later Use the Conversion Process in the Configuration program to migrate objects from an old 5 x PST Directory to a Directory compatible with version 6 0 or
85. for ODM Select Specify ODM License File If not select able a 3 day Trial License You may obtain a permanent license by submitting a request to IBM Optim Teck L Support i Specify ODM License File gt 2 Enable a 36 day Trial License ENTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT 1 Specify ODM License File Enter the fully qualified name to the ODM License file If you do not have ss to the file at this time select Previcus and choose Enable a 38 day License Specify Open Data Manager lt CODM gt License File CDEFAULT gt Enter the fully qualified path for the ODM license file Next the Choose Shortcut Folder screen displays Setup requires the ODM license file to enable ODM features and functionalit f you do not have access to the license file select Only Copy the ODM File gt 1i Install and Configure ODM Now 2 Only Copy the ODM Files ANTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Where would you like to create product icons gt 1i In the Program Group gt 2 On the Desktop 3 In the Quick Launch Bar 4 In the Start Menu NTER A COMMA SEPARATED LIST OF NUMBERS REPRESENTING THE DESIRED CHOICES O PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT On the Choose Shortcut Folder screen specify a folder to hold shortcut icons for Optim Optim Configuration and Optim Scheduler If you choose 1 In the Program Grou
86. for data fields noted in message text click Field Font for Informational Messages Informational messages are not critical for example messages that ask whether information should be saved when a dialog is closed Info Text Specify font characteristics for the informational message text The default is System 10 point Bold Black Info Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in an informational message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Maroon Chapter 9 Personal Options 255 Font for Warning Messages Warning messages indicate serious but not critical conditions A warning message does not interrupt an action but may indicate that you should reevaluate the current action Warning Text Specify font characteristics for the warning message text The default is System 10 point Bold Maroon Warning Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in a warning message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Maroon Font for Error Messages Error messages indicate critical conditions and interrupt the current action A problem presented in an error message must be addressed before the attempted action can proceed Error messages can appear in pop up dialogs but usually display in the message bar at the bottom of a dialog Error Text Specify font characteristics for the error message text The default is System 10 point Bold Navy Error Field Specify font character
87. he name of a file to store the exported PST Definitions From the old PST Directory Click lt Proceed gt to export the PST Definitions or lt Skip gt to skip this step PST Directory Name of the PST Directory from which objects are exported PST Directory Specifications Version Version of Configuration program used to create the old PST Directory Export File Name Enter the name of the Export File The Export File is a plain text file and has a dss extension by default Other extensions may be specified or the file can be designated without an extension The Export File is used as the input for Import Processing Always Display Output PNOEXPT LOG Select the check box to automatically display the export process log for the current process When the Export Process is complete the log is displayed in the Browse File dialog To display the log only in the event of an error clear the check box Continue Export if Errors Indicate whether to halt processing if an error occurs To continue processing if an error occurs select the check box To halt processing if an error occurs clear the check box Run Export To start the Export Process click Proceed If you specify the name of an Export File that already exists a dialog prompts you to confirm that you want to overwrite the file During Export Processing the status bar displays information about the process Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 493 If error
88. in message text click Field Font for Informational Messages Informational messages are not critical for example messages that ask whether information should be saved when a dialog is closed Info Text Specify font characteristics for the informational message text The default is System 10 point Bold Black Info Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in an informational message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Black Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 147 Font for Warning Messages Warning messages indicate serious but not critical conditions A warning message does not interrupt an action but may indicate that you should reevaluate the current action Warning Text Specify font characteristics for the warning message text The default is System 10 point Bold Navy Warning Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in a warning message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Navy Font for Error Messages Error messages indicate critical conditions and interrupt the current action A problem presented in an error message must be addressed before the attempted action can proceed Error messages can appear in pop up dialogs but usually display in the message bar at the bottom of a dialog Error Text Specify font characteristics for the error message text The default is System 10 point Bold Maroon Error Field Specify font characteristics for
89. in the Server data directory when each workstation first connects to the Server The new subdirectory becomes the default data directory for the workstation The name of the new subdirectory is determined by the Windows Logon name from the workstation For example if this option is selected and the data directory is D DATA when user JOHN connects to the Server the subdirectory D DATA JOHN becomes the default data directory for JOHN Maximum Processes Use Maximum Processes to limit the number of simultaneous processes that can run on the Server Specify the limit according to the capacity of the Server machine CPU disk space network access speed memory etc Valid values are from 10 to 48 The default value is 48 When the server reaches the maximum an error message Server too Busy is displayed Typically one validation process called a Mirror is created each time a Request Editor that requires the Server is opened When the request is run a Mirror and the request process simultaneously Therefore two processes run for each request For example if a workstation delegates two requests to the Server simultaneously four processes are used Days to keep Trace files The number of days 2 to 30 to retain trace files in the temporary work directory The default value is 5 Trace files are useful for tracking the processing performed using Optim Trace file names are prefixed with PRO followed by letters indicating the t
90. install the ODM Server in a UNIX environment select Open Data Manager Interface from the select components dialog of the Server Setup program You can install the ODM Server as part of the Server installation or copy the ODM Server installation files to your machine for use at a later time Optim Server Setup X Optim 7 2 0 requires a new ODM license file to enable ODM To obtain a new ODM license file contact IBM Optim Technical Support For contact details refer to vwew ibm com planetwide Ifyou have already obtained a new ODM license file or you want to use ODM for a 30 days trial period then select Configure ODM Now After 30 days you must obtain a permanent license from IBM in order to continue the use of ODM Ifyou wantto configure ODM later then select the Only Copy the ODM Files choice Once you obtain the ODM licence file you can either run setup again and select the Optim Open Data Manager Interface feature or run the script lhome Optinimodm Odminstall from a Unix prompt anytime after setup is complete Do you want to configure ODM now or only copy the files to install ODM later Configure ODM Now C Only Copy the ODM Files Cancel Configure ODM Now This option prompts you for the ODM license file and automatically installs the ODM Server Appendix F Open Data Manager 453 Only Copy the ODM Files This option copies the ODM Server installation files to your machine To complete the ODM
91. is to select the DB Alias to update the corresponding DBMS version Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Create Select DB Alias Efel x he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Selecting a DB Alias for a MS SQL Server Sybase or Informix database will also change the DBMS Version For all DB Aliases for that server Select a DB Alias From JA list of existing DB ariel devia on bas oo to continue Selecting lt Skip gt single DB Alias For a Single DB Server Sybase SOL Server Informix 202 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Click the down arrow to select a DB Alias from the list of existing DB Alias names then click Proceed to continue Note If you are using SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix and have several databases on one server the Configuration program automatically selects every DB Alias that resides on the same server Specify DB Alias DBMS You must specify the DBMS version to use for the selected DB Alias Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Specify DB Alias DBMS ioj x he Optim Configuration program will update the DBMS of the selected database Select a he new DBMS version For the target database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support or some of the listed DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor Click the down arrow to select a version from the list The version you select must be different fro
92. list any FADs and ACLs that are based upon a listed ACD which may be useful when maintaining ACDs The list may help you to select an ACD to serve as the basis for a new FAD or ACL or to analyze the potential downstream effect of a change to the ACD Also from the list you can display an FAD or ACL to determine whether it references a role that should be included in the ACD Each Optim Directory for which security is initialized contains an ACD named Default which is the default ACD for secured objects in the directory Default also determines the roles that can create and modify additional ACDs Permissions Needed to Create an ACD To create an ACD a user account must be a member of a role allowed the Create Access Control Domain privilege in the Default ACD If Functional Security is not enabled a user account must be a member of a role with update access to the ACL for the Default ACD Appendix D Optim Security 387 Open Dialog In the main window select Security from the Options menu Then select Access Control Domains from the submenu to open the Access Control Domains dialog Access Control Domains e Ao a LIRI LKI E Laa nmam 20070202142705 OOOO SSS NE e E mes OPTMDOMengi 20070202422 SS OTHER OPTIMDOMeng _ 2007 0202 142741 ooo EMPTY WESTDOMpro 2005062405130 SSS Deu NRTHDOMmwa __ 200e 01 28 12 4511 SSS The Access Control Domains dialog lists the ACDs in a read only grid Domain
93. list to display the NAV member 2 Right click the NAV member and select Open from the shortcut menu to open the user profile editor Ba Design localhost users NAY usr Attunity Studio AeA aA ie Rk User NAV Authenticators Remote Machine X Data Source X Adapter Encryption Keys NAY localhost users NAY usr 3 Click Add from the Authenticators section to open the Add Authenticator dialog 472 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide CON OO BB add Authenticator xj Resource information Resource type Data source z Resource name Authentication information User name Password Confirm password Network encryption P Encryption key Key name l Key Gonhirm keys csi In the Resource type list select Data source In Resource name type the data source name or use the browse button to select a name In User name type the user ID with Archive File Security privileges for the data source In Password and Confirm password type the password for the user name Click OK From the File menu select Save All Providing Administrative Authorization for the ODM Server Administrative authorization for an ODM Server controls the ability to modify the server To provide administrative authorization In
94. login script to set up the environment for the Server or command line on login RTSERVER Provides commands that allow you to manipulate the Server process Installed in sbin subordinate to the PSTHOME directory RT4S Used to start or stop the Server from init processing Installed in sbin subordinate to the PSTHOME directory RT4S should be executed only as part of the system boot procedure Conventions The following conventions are used in shell scripts and cfg files e One parameter per line e Blank lines and leading and trailing blanks within a line are ignored e Use double quotes or the escape character to pass a special character to processing Enclose a string that includes in double quotes e g text here To include a double quote within a quoted string use the escape character e g Precede a special character that is not in a quoted string with the escape character e g Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 327 e References to environment variables are in the form environmentvariablename An environment variable that does not exist equates to a NULL string For example AAA NOT_EXIST BBB is treated as AAABBB e Parameters and keywords are not case sensitive Directories file names User IDs and passwords are case sensitive e Keywords shown as 0 zero in the following text can also be entered as f or false while keywords
95. new exit You can change from using the default exit to a user supplied exit or vice versa or you can change from one user supplied exit to another If you are switching to user supplied exit you must compile link and copy that exit to the bin directory before you can sign it Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 49 The method of signing an exit in a Windows environment differs from the method used in a UNIX environment e In a Windows environment the Optim Configuration program allows you to sign either exit i e the default exit or a user supplied exit See Signing an Exit in Windows on page 51 for more information e In a UNIX environment you can only sign the default exit during installation i e during the Optim Setup program If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must run an opmusign script file following installation Another script file is available to revert to the default exit from a_user supplied exit if needed See Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux on page 293 for detailed information on signing an exit in UNIX The Optim default exit is delivered unsigned to ensure e it is signed by a user with the appropriate company credentials and e the person signing the default exit is authorized to make the decision to use that exit as opposed to a user supplied exit This is important because the default exit returns a continue code at every exit poi
96. next to the object name Following the listed objects a List of Used ACDs displays the ACDs listed in the report The following details are included User Group The users and groups assigned permissions Group names are indicated by a G Role The role name that includes the user or group The ACL Owner is also included Object Access Access privileges for the object Permissions Allow or Deny are listed below each privilege None indicates a permission is not defined Owner indicates the user is the ACL owner and allowed the privilege overriding a permission set for another role that includes the user N A indicates the privilege does not apply to the object Read Open or view an object Upd Save an object Del Delete an object Exec Run a process request ACL Access Access privileges for the ACL that secures the object Permissions Allow or Deny are listed below each privilege None indicates a permission is not defined Owner indicates the user is the ACL owner and allowed the privilege overriding a permission set for another role that includes the user Read View the ACL Appendix E Security Reports 447 Upd Modify the ACL Del Delete the ACL 448 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix F Open Data Manager Optim Open Data Manager ODM provides access to data in Optim Archive Files for programs that use the Open Database Connectivity ODBC and Java Da
97. of an Optim DVD are mounted and UNIX has not been rebooted between mounts If this occurs you must shut down Automount and restart it e The temporary directory used by the setup program may be full The default temporary directory is var tmp To change the temporary directory you can run the setup program with the following parameters setup is tempdir your_tmp_dir where your_tmp_dir is the name of the temporary directory If the setup program still fails to start the installation program wizard you can run the setup program in console mode with the following parameters setup console is javaconsole The default destination directory used by the setup program is 308 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide opt IBM Optim To change the destination directory in console mode you can run the setup program with the following parameters setup console is javaconsole P Main installLocation your_dest_dir where your_dest_dir is the name of the destination directory To change the temporary directory in console mode you can run the setup program with the following parameters setup console is javaconsole is tempdir your_tmp_dir where your_tmp_dir is the name of the temporary directory Software License Agreement Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes the Optim Software License Agreement The next dialog prompts you to read the License Agreement Software License Agreement P
98. of configuring additional workstations in the following ways e Start the Configuration Assistant immediately after Setup completes Clear the Configure the First Workstation check box and click Proceed On the next dialog select the Configure Additional Workstation check box e Select Configuration Assistant from the Help menu on the Configuration main window Clear the Configure the First Workstation check box and click Proceed On the next dialog select the Configure Additional Workstation check box e Select Configure Additional Workstation from the Tasks menu on the Configuration main window If you exported registry data after configuring the first workstation you can save time by importing it to additional workstations You are prompted to import Optim Directory registry data when configuring each additional workstation If you choose not to import registry data you must first enter the Product License Key and select the option to Create a new Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory Import Registry Entries If you intend to configure several workstations you can save time by importing Optim Directory registry data and the Product License Key from a file Note Before you can import registry data you must export the data to a file You can export the data during the process of configuring the first workstation or you can select Export Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window You can import registry d
99. of data specify database options for commit frequency and locking tables identify the Product Configuration File and define the password to access Product Options O D 2 gel er m g0 Chapter 9 Personal Options on page 24 Personal use customization of Optim for each workstation You can customize confirmation prompts display features and message text specify database logon and password information set defaults for the schedule browse and create utilities and establish default preferences for browsing and editing database tables Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux on page 293 Prepare your system to use the Optim Server on a Sun Solaris server under SPARC Hewlett Packard HPUX server IBM AIX server or a Red Hat Application Server under Linux and modify the corresponding configuration files and shell scripts Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 Vii Appendix B Server Credentials on page 369 Credentials used with the Optim Server Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks on page 375 Perform certain configuration tasks while bypassing the graphical user interface for Optim Appendix D Optim Security on page 383 The three types of Optim Security Functional Security Object Security and Archive File Security as well as the security definitions i e Access Control Domains ACDs Access Control Lists ACLs and File Access Definitions FADs
100. of your Optim solution 2 Customized Installation 3 Installation of registry entries and shortcuts only ENTER THE NUMBER FOR THE INSTALL SET OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Chapter 2 Installation 37 Select the type of installation 1 Full Installation this is the default 2 Customized Installation which allows you to select Optim features manually 3 Registry entries and shortcuts Use option 3 if Optim is already installed on a network and you want to access it from your workstation If you chose Full Installation or Customized Installation the Install Location screen displays Please choose the Install Set to be installed by this installer gt 1 Full Installation of your Optim solution 2 Customized Installation 3 Installation of registry entries and shortcuts only ENTER THE NUMBER FOR THE INSTALL SET OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT 8 2 Install Location etup will install IBM Optim in the following folder Install location Default Install Folder C IBM Optim ENTER AN ABSOLUTE PATH OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT You can press Enter to accept the default location or type the path name to the location you choose If you selected Installation of registry entries and shortcuts only the following screen displays bMOptim se choose the Install Set to be installed by this installer Full Installation of your Optim solution Customized Installation Installation of re
101. on future attempts to connect to the database Create Primary Keys Select this check box to create primary keys as needed for the database To create primary keys from within the Configuration program select Create Primary Keys from the Tasks menu on the main window To create primary keys from within Optim select New from the File menu and select Primary Keys from the Definitions submenu on the main window Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before creating or dropping stored procedures Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 117 Logon Defaults Tab Use the Logon Defaults tab to provide the default User ID and Password required to create refresh stored procedures lt gt Create Multiple DB Aliases Optim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables for each database that you want to access The Optim Configuration program can create new Procedures or it can use Procedures created for another Optim Directory for that database Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use no ero q The entries on the Logon Defaults tab allow you to connect to the database while configuring a workstation You must enter the password a second time for verification Note The default logon information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit logon information on the Databases tab 118 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Saved Logon Defaults
102. or Disabled Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the Security Administrator Configuring Functional Security To enable or disable Functional Security select Enable or Disable and click Proceed If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the password for the Security Administrator must be entered Important Before Functional Security is first enabled the Security Administrator must open the Default ACD and establish Functional Privileges for all users If Functional Privileges are not defined before Functional Security is enabled users will be unable to access any functions in Optim For more information see Access Control Domain Editor on page 390 Set Optim Object Security Option The Set Optim Object Security Option dialog allows the Security Administrator to configure Object Security for the Optim Directory Object Security controls access to objects in the Optim Directory such as Column Maps and Access Definitions 176 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide All security definitions are secured by an Access Control List ACL Other Optim objects that have an ACL are secured if Object Security is enabled For more information about ACLs see List on page 405 Configure Security Set Optim Object Security Option he Configuration program can Enable or Disable the Optim Object Security F
103. or a Compare File To display only column names clear the check box 276 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Side Label Display Select to display rows one at a time with column names and values side by side To display multiple rows in a columnar format clear this check box Auto Switch Select to automatically switch subordinate tables in a stack of two or more joined tables to display related rows When you select a row in a table and there are no related rows in the subordinate table the display is automatically switched to the next table in the stack that has a related row Display Row Count Specify the default number of rows to display for each joined table Use row count to manage the display area when you join several tables Maximum Exclude Rows Specify a row limit to improve performance when browsing an Extract Archive or Control File that contains a large number of rows When browsing the Exclude Rows and Only Show Rows in Error features are unavailable for tables that exceed the specified row limit When an Extract Archive or Control File is first opened for browsing system resources are allocated for creating a cache for temporary storage of excluded rows and rows in error Therefore browsing a very large file can consume a large amount of system resources This limit is reevaluated when a table is joined to another table because the resulting subset may contain less rows The default val
104. or any user account to determine whether prOsvce is running id1 Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify pr0svce Leave blank to display all daemons for all users prOsvce 1 id1 List active processes and clients connected to pr0svce The PID for each client is displayed and can be referenced in the c cancel client command id1 Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify pr0svce Leave blank to list for all daemons for all users prOsvce k id1 Shut down pr0svce without waiting for clients to disconnect Use this command only when the normal shutdown s is inoperative Open datasets including the trace file are truncated to the last written buffer and each client SVER process must be identified and killed individually id1 Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify pr0svce Leave blank to shutdown all daemons started under the logged on account pr0svce daemon Start prOsvce as a foreground process To run prOsvce as a background process use nohup prOsvce daemon gt outfilename 2 gt amp 1 amp This command causes any hang up signals to be ignored and directs standard output stdout and standard error stderr streams to outfilename appending stderr to stdout prOsvce c clientid ALL id1 Cancel client processes clientid Specify client name or client process ID or the word ALL id1 Provide process ID User ID or endpoint to identify pr0svce or leave blank to cancel clients for all da
105. permissions associated with the table Access permissions are displayed in the Table Access Control list Select one of the following Explicit Table specific access permissions apply Default The access permissions for Default apply None Access permissions do not apply All users are allowed to access the table Notes If AC Type is None e The Column Secured check box and Table Access Control list are unavailable and any user account is allowed full access e If for Default the Default AC Type is unavailable for other entries in the Table List Column Secured Indicator that access permissions are defined for one or more columns in the table To define access permissions for columns right click the table entry and select List Columns from the shortcut menu Column access permissions are defined in the Table Access Control dialog Column Secured indicates a table with column access permissions defined Shortcut Menu Commands Right click a row in the Table List to display the following shortcut menu commands Remove Table Remove the table name from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Tables Remove all table names except Default from the list List Columns Open the Table Access Control dialog to define access permissions for columns in the selected table This command is not available for Default Add table Display submenus and select a source From Database or From Archive File for
106. processes run simultaneously For example if a workstation initiates two processes simultaneously the Server executes four processes 48 Default setting maxprocesses 48 tracedays Number of days to retain trace files in the temporary work directory Specify n A value from 2 to 30 Consider storage space limitations when deciding the number of days to retain the files 5 Default setting tracedays 5 limitaccess Option to limit Client access to data directories Settings are 0 or blank Client can see all directories on this machine in Browse dialogs 330 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 1 Limit client access to the Temporary tempdir Data datadir Archive archivedir Archive Index archivediridx Archive Browse Index archivebroidx directories and any directories specified in the allowdir parameter Default limitaccess 0 allowdir Option to add a directory to the limitaccess list Use allowdir for each additional directory A valid entry is path A full directory path you need not create the directory first allowdir dir subdir Note Allowing access to the root directory is equivalent to setting limitaccess to 0 pstlogon The source of DBMS User ID and Password for Optim Directory access Valid entries are client User ID and Password for the delegating client i e from the Server tab in Personal Options or PSTDIRUSERID and PSTDIRPASSWORD from the command line Default serv
107. references in the generated DDL DB2 UDB for z OS Current Rules DB2 Select this check box to require the user i e Create and DDL to create and delete LOB tablespaces AUX tables and unique Indexes When you clear this check box DB2 UDB for z OS automatically creates and deletes LOB tablespaces AUX tables and unique Indexes This check box is selected by default Object Name Highlighting Select a font color to highlight object name changes in the SQL statements shown on the Review SQL dialog before creating those objects in the target database During the Create Process object names specified in the Table Map are translated to be appropriate for the target database This feature applies to creating text type database objects functions packages package bodies procedures triggers and views Limit When creating a large number of objects highlighting object names in color can affect the speed of the process Specify the maximum number of created objects to highlight in color i e if the number of objects to create exceeds the limit you specify colorization is not used The default is 1000 Confident Select a font color to highlight object name changes that are reasonably confident Accept the default color blue or click the down arrow to select a different color Uncertain Select a font color to highlight object name changes that may require verification because of the way different DBMSs use object names Accept the defaul
108. round trip Failures Continue processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Use Value from Personal Options Use the round trip processing setting from the Database tab in Personal Options Select the Ignore all round trip Failures option if the database does not contain data with characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion or if columns used to manipulate data in a Column Map for example a function is used and columns for which selection criteria are defined do not contain characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion DBMS Buffer Limits Set the buffer size to use when fetching or deleting rows from the database Optim multiplies the specification for Fetch Buffer Size or Delete Buffer Size by the value for Maximum Database Connections You can select a value from 64K to 1024K in increments of 32 Use the default value unless you are processing tables larger than 10 000 rows Fetch Buffer Size Size of the buffer used when rows are fetched from the database The default is 512K Delete Buffer Size Size of the buffer used when rows are deleted from the database The default is 512K Configuration File Tab Use the Configuration File tab to review the path for the current Configuration File and set new Configuration File preferences 228 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Product Options Cur
109. rows that can be processed in an Insert or Delete Process before a commit is issued and prevent or allow optional table locks during an Insert or Delete Process Configuration File Establish the path to the Configuration File for the selected Product Options Password Change the password for the Product Options dialog Edit Select audit preferences for editing data Specify other site options for using default values Servers Specify protocol endpoint address and network information for machines configured with the Server Archive Select options that apply to Archive Processes Load Specify options for adding Loader parameters Report Specify defaults for creating reports using the Report Request Editor including limits and spacing preferences General Tab Use the General tab to establish default fetch and extract limits for Archive Compare Edit and Extract Processes You can also select the site default calendar determine when to display a warning for a cascade delete and enable auditing for Optim processes Use the General tab to set these options Chapter 8 Product Options 221 100000 user oono E Limits Establish the maximum number of rows in a fetch set for browsing or editing data or using Point and Shoot and the maximum number of rows for extracting or archiving data Maximum Fetch Rows Specify the maximum number of rows 1 100000 retrieved from a table This limit applies to rows that are f
110. share must specify that the guest account or everyone has access to the share Registry Access for Process Requests Windows The Server component always uses the Local Machine hive in the registry which is always available The user credentials used to start the process can be the Local System Account a local user or a domain user Only local users or domain users that have previously logged on to the Server machine have a current user hive others use the default user hive HKEY_USERS DEFAULT instead When using the default user hive any changes are only cached in memory for use by the process and are not recorded to the registry Also you cannot make the default user hive your current user hive if you log on to the interactive desktop for the Server While this is not a problem for the Server processes this may be problematic for registry settings needed by the DBMS For example Informix requires certain registry settings that are recorded in the current user hive for the user logged on at the time that the Informix utilities are used GSETNET32 To correct this issue once you set up the options you can copy them to the default user hive using the REGCOPY utility You must re run the REGCOPY utility each time you change the options Oracle OS Authentication If you set up Oracle to allow OS Authentication which is beyond the scope of this document Optim must use the current User ID for the process to be used by Oracle Ent
111. shown as 1 can be entered as t or true e Comments are allowed after an entry and must begin with Syntax The syntax conventions used to describe the configuration files shell scripts and commands are parameter Parameters and keywords can be entered in UPPER lower or Mixed case text Variable text is shown in lower case italics Delimiter to group a series of qualifiers Delimiter for optional parameters or settings Delimiter for a choice from which you must select one lt gt Delimiter for a choice from which you may select any or none l Separates options Pstserv Configuration File The pstserv configuration file is used to configure the system for running prOsvce the Server daemon An example of pstserv cfg is in the etc subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory Before you run prOsvce modify the following parameters to reflect your site requirements as applicable In the following syntax defaults are shown in bold text customerid n 000000 customername custname xxxxx 1cense XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX dire y datadirclient 0 11 larchivedir l directory datadir directory archivedir larchivebroidx directory archivedir n 48 5 0 1 ient server client server delfi Teinterval n 10 client local server userid password lt ALL RUSR RGR
112. the Default or a DB2 DB Alias You can override the user ID in the Load Request 258 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide z OS FTP Password Provide the password for the default z OS FTP server user ID This option is available when you select the Default or a DB2 DB Alias You can override the password in the Load Request Teradata Select to provide settings for the Teradata loader This option is available when you select a DB2 DB Alias for a Teradata database The Teradata Settings panel displays Use FastLoad if more rows than Row count to determine whether FastLoad or MultiLoad is used Allowable values are 0 to 999 999 999 If you specify 0 or do not specify a value MultiLoad is used For any other value FastLoad is used if the row count of the load file is greater than the value you specify for Use FastLoad if more rows than Fully Qualified Path for Teradata FastLoad Provide the directory path and program name for the Teradata FastLoad Consult your Teradata documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button Fully Qualified Path for Teradata MultiLoad Provide the directory path and program name for the Teradata MultiLoad Consult your Teradata documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button Server Name Name of the Teradata server Teradata User ID Teradata User ID for the u
113. the ACD and roles not specified in the list is assigned Deny access Exporting Security Definitions Use the Export Security Definitions Utility to export security definitions ACDs ACLs and FADs from one Optim Directory to another The Export Security Definitions Utility eliminates the need to recreate security definitions manually and allows you to use the same definitions with the imported objects they secure Export Security Definitions This section describes how to export security definitions To export security definitions 1 In the main window select the Options gt Security gt Export menu option to open the Export Security Definitions dialog In Definitions select the security definitions to export Enter a Secured Output File name Type a Secured Output File Password Type the password again in Verify Password Choose Run from the File menu Monitor progress in the Export Progress pane Oo NOTAN When Security Definition Export processing is finished choose Show Process Log from the Tools menu to review or print the Security Export Process Log Export Security Definitions Dialog When you open the Export Security Definitions dialog the tree hierarchy on the Definitions pane is populated with the security definitions in the Optim Directory to which you have read access Notes e ACLs that secure ACDs and FADs are not listed but will be exported with these definitions e The Default ACD is not list
114. the ACD or not included in the ACL are denied all access to the object and ACL However the owner of the ACL always retains full access to the ACL regardless of permissions granted or denied by the ACL Object Association Privileges In order to create an ACL when Functional Security is enabled a user must be a member of a role to which the ACD grants Object Association Privileges for the object type Object Association Privileges are defined on the Object Association Privileges tab in the Role Specifications dialog Use the tab to identify object types that the role can use with the ACD For more information about defining Object Association Privileges see Object Association Privileges Tab on page 403 Appendix D Optim Security 405 Automatically Associate an Object with an ACL The ACL for a security definition ACD or FAD is created automatically at the time the definition is saved ACLs for other objects may be created automatically at the time the object is created and saved or manually Automatically created ACLs can be edited at any time by an authorized user The initial ACL for a security definition references an Optim Administrator role for the owner and grants full access to the ACL for that role The initial ACL for other objects is modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL if one was created at the time Optim Security was configured for your installation If the Optim Object Template ACL does not exist or the owner of th
115. the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer right click the ODM Server name and select Administration Authorization from the shortcut menu to open the administration authorization 1 editor Appendix F Open Data Manager 473 Ba Design localhost bindings ACADMIN binding bnd Attunity Studio Wo lo a ee 2 Clear the Everyone check boxes 3 In the Administrators section click Add User to open the Add User dialog To add a group click Add Group 4 Type the user ID or group name that will have administrative privileges for the server 5 Click OK 6 From the File menu select Save All Securing the Attunity Daemon To secure the Attunity daemon assign machine access and administrator privileges to the daemon Administrator privileges allow a user to start or stop the daemon Machine access privileges determine if a user ID and password are required to use the daemon You must also assign access and administrator privileges to the daemon workspace These privileges determine the users that can use and administer the workspace To secure the Attunity daemon 474 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer expand the ODM Server list the Daemons list and the IRPCD list to display the Navigator member 2 Right click the Navigator member and select Open to open the daemon configuration editor 3 Select
116. the Configuration program exits and a confirmation is displayed Uninstall IBM Optim 2 J The Configuration Program was canceled Continue No e Click Yes to close the confirmation dialog and continue the uninstall process e Click No to cancel the uninstall process 522 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix K Installing Optim Designer Install Optim Designer on each computer that is to be used to design or test data management services Optim Designer requires an activated copy of Infosphere Data Architect Each Optim Designer installation disc includes an Infosphere Data Architect installation disc and each downloaded Optim Designer installation package includes an Infosphere Data Architect installation package Each Optim Designer installation disc and Optim Designer installation package also includes an Infosphere Data Architect product activation kit which you can use to activate Infosphere Data Architect If you want to install Optim Designer using an instance of Infosphere Data Architect that is already installed on the computer consult the system requirements to ensure that the version of Optim Designer that you are installing supports the version of Infosphere Data Architect that is already installed If the version of Optim Designer does not support the version of Infosphere Data Architect that is already installed either upgrade the installed instance of Infosphere Data Architect or install
117. the Security tab Bi Design localhost daemons IRPCD dmn Attunity Studio mal aoe eos coh Allo fe Workspace Security Server Account Server account to use with anonymous clients E Run server processes under the following server account Server account A solters Worse i Authorized Workspace Users Authorized Administrators 4 In the Server Account section clear the Allow anonymous clients to use this workspace check box 5 Authorize workspace users a In the Authorized Workspace Users section select Selected users only b Click Add user to open the Add User dialog To add a group click Add group c Type the user ID or group name that will have user privileges for the workspace d Click OK 6 Authorize administrators a In the Authorized Administrators section select Selected users only b Click Add user to open the Add User dialog To add a group click Add group c Type the user ID or group name that will have administrative privileges for the daemon d Click OK Appendix F Open Data Manager 475 Ee localhost daemons IRPCD dmn Attunity Studio File Edit Navigate Search Project Window Help Wes CS pale A E E f Desion ff Configuration amp Metadata 5 F Navigator 3 gt m B f Machines 5 T E localhost Workspace Security C Bindings Server Account Daemons IRPCD O Allow anonymous clients to use this w
118. the data referenced in an error message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Maroon Display Lines Specify the maximum number of lines 3 to 9 to display in the message bar for any type of message Hide message bar when empty Select this check box to hide the message bar when no informational warning or error messages are displayed If you clear this check box the message bar appears at the bottom of each editor or dialog even when empty Load Tab Use the Load tab to specify the paths to DBMS loaders Note You can expedite the configuration of the Load settings for the Server by clicking Merge Current User This merges Load settings for the logged on user in the Current User registry with settings for the Server machine in the Local Machine registry 148 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide E Optim Server Settings Ioj x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status E m Load Specifications DB Alias Exception Table Default Greator ID z Fully Qualified Path For Oracle Loader Fully Qualified Path For Sybase Loader E K C Fully Qualified Path for SQL Server Loader Fully Qualified Path For Informix Teradata Merge Current User T onaga Help Configuration Cancel You must specify a Temporary Directory You must specify a Data Directory S Ready Optim Directory
119. the license agreement displays the customer information screen 36 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide to the previous screen 2 You have chosen to decline the license agreement Installation of the Program will be terminated If you are sure you want to decline the licen agreement enter 2 again to confirm Otherwise enter i to accept the license agreement or press Enter to continue reading the agreement i customer Information If using a temporary 3 day license see Release Notes for information neede complete this page If you have a permanent license an email from IBM cont the license key and information needed to complete this page You will app e license key at the time you configure your Optin solution Direct all Opti cense key requests and inquires to optkeys us ibm com User Name DEFAULT IBM User Conpany Name lt DEFAULT gt ID CDEFAULT gt Enter the User Name Company Name and Company ID Next you are prompted to choose whether to install Optim for one user or all users 4 Ag Install this application for gt i finyone who uses this computer Call users 2 Only for me CIBM_USERD NTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Use 1 to install Optim for all users or 2 for one user only The Choose Installation Set screen displays lease choose the Install Set to be installed by this installer gt 1 Full Installation
120. to create shortcut icons Specify USER_SHORTCUTS C Documents and Settings All Users StartMenu Programs IBM Optim Specify USER_SHORTCUTS if you used either USER_SHORTCUT_NEW_PRG_MENU or USER_SHORTCUT_EXST_PRG_MENU USER_SHORTCUT_DESKTOP Create shortcut icons on the desktop Specify USER_SHORTCUT_DESKTOP 1 USER_SHORTCUT_QCK_LAUNCH_BAR Create shortcut icons on the quick launch bar Specify USER_SHORTCUT_QCK_LAUNCH_BAR 1 USER_SHORTCUT_START_MENU Create shortcut icons in the Windows Start menu Specify USER_SHORTCUT_START_MENU 1 USER_INPUT_VIEW_REL_NOTES Display Release Notes when installation completes To display Release Notes USER_INPUT_VIEW_REL_NOTES 1 USER_INPUT_LAUNCH_CONFIG Launch Optim Configuration when installation completes To launch Optim Configuration USER_INPUT_LAUNCH_CONFIG 1 After you specify the variables in the optim_installer properties file use one of these commands to start the silent installer If the optim_installer properties file is under the same directory as the IBMOptim exe file the file is renamed to installer properties Use this command IBMOptim exe i silent 46 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide If the optim_installer properties file is in a different directory than the IBMOptim exe file use the command IBMOptim exe f directorypath optim_installer properties where directorypath is the fully qualified path to the directory for the optim_installer pr
121. to determine the features and number of users licensed to your company IBM sent this information to you via email or mail You must enter the Key the First time you run the Configuration program To change this Key select the License option from the Options menu on the main window The Product License Key provides an internal control that determines the features and number of users your company is licensed to use Optim This key may be changed from time to time when you upgrade the product To enter the license key you can copy it from the email sent to you by IBM To continue click OK Create Optim Directory To create an Optim Directory you must provide the Directory name the database instance in which the Directory resides and the information needed to connect to the database After creating the Optim Directory tables the Configuration program creates packages plans or procedures and a Windows registry entry that allows the workstation to access the Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory The first step in creating an Optim Directory is to name it Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to name or select the Optim Directory 72 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry The name is also stored in the Optim Directory Shared Opt
122. to the locale of the delegating workstation A utility pr0locl exe is provided to tell you the locales that are installed on a machine and the locales with which it is compatible As an example of the output in a Windows environment see the following Current operating system Microsoft Windows XP C runtime locales are LC_CTYPE English_United States 1252 LC_COLLATE English_United States 1252 LC_NUMERIC English_United States 1252 LC_MONETARY English_United States 1252 LC_TIME English_United States 1252 Language Environment Variables LC_ALL LANG Windows Locale is LCID 1033 409 Code Page 1252 4E4 RT Server requests can run on or from a UNIX system that has these locales or their derived locales installed C en_US 1S08859 1 Optim Directories and DB Aliases Optim supports storing data in single byte ASCII Unicode and multi byte character sets The default character set is single byte When you create an Optim Directory or DB Alias using a database for which Optim supports Unicode or multi byte characters you are prompted to indicate the character format used for storing data To use DB Aliases with different character sets the Optim Directory must be in Unicode format If you indicate that the DB Alias for the Optim Directory database should share connection information with the Optim Directory the DB Alias must use the same character set as the Directory Unicode Support The Optim Directory and DB Aliase
123. to the specified User ID Import Optim Directory Definitions This task describes how to import Optim Directory definitions After the workstation is connected to the database you can import the objects using the Import Optim Directory Definitions dialog Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 497 Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 3 Import Optim Directory Defi i Ea Optim he Optim Configuration program can convert and import the Optim Definitions in the xported File specified below Specify the file that contains the Exported Optim efinitions Optionally select the definitions to import Click lt Proceed gt or lt Import gt o import the Optim Definitions or lt Skip gt to skip this step x Optim Directory Export File Name OPTIMDIR PSTEXPORT DSS zo Optim Definitions Ry Access Definition ATRI Column Map KI Delete Request Mi Extract Request 4 fF I Continue Import if Errors IT Overwite Existing Definitions Import Previous __ Proceed _ Skip Cancel Optim Directory Name of the Optim Directory into which objects are imported Export File Name Enter the name of the Export File The Export File was created during the Export Process and contains the object definitions to import Optim Definitions Identifies the objects in the Export File You can display a list of objects of a certain type by clicking the plus sign Select the
124. use this keyword to specify Teradata configuration parameters Teradata parameters can be specified for a particular Optim directory and DB Alias For example Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 333 teradataconfig pstdir dbalias tdatasvr userid password rowcntgle n You can specify Teradata configuration parameters to be used for any DB Alias in a DBMS For example teradataconfig tdatasvr userid password rowcntgle n s The Teradata loader is the default for the Optim directory and DB Alias referenced in the loader keyword pstdir Name of the Optim directory dbalias DB Alias for the Optim directory tdatasvr Name of the Teradata server userid User ID for the Teradata server password Password for the Teradata server rowcntgle n Row count to determine whether Teradata FastLoad or MLoad is used Allowable values are 0 to 999 999 999 If you specify 0 or do not specify a value MLoad is used For any other value FastLoad is used if the row count of the load file is greater than the value you specify for rowcntgle excptntblcid Default CID for creating an exception table loader oracle opt oracle 816 bin sqldir loader PSTDIR DBALIAS opt oracle 816 bin sqidir auditfacility Enable or disable the Audit Facility for all Optim Directories This overrides any specification for individual Optim directories true Enable the Audit Facility false Disable the Audit Facility This is the defa
125. user account and can open files only according to the file permissions which include access to networked files If however you use the filelogon local parameter or the filelogon server userid password parameter any process can access a file created by any other process and any accessed directories must be writable to the processing user account Valid settings are local The process runs under the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon client The process runs under the user account specified on the Personal Options Server tab for the initiating Windows client or the overriding server credentials specified in pstlocal cfg server userid password The process runs under the credentials provided with the server parameter Note The client or server settings require root authorization for the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon a local setting does not tivoliavail userid password The tivoliavail parameter provides the credentials for physical access to the Tivoli resources The filelogon parameter establishes credentials presented for access to the Archive Files managed by Tivoli Valid settings are 1 Present the credentials used to start the prOsvce daemon for physical access to Tivoli resources 0 Do not use Tivoli resources Note A 1 userid password setting requires root authorization for the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon webserver The webserver parameter applies to Optim Amdocs CRM Solutio
126. windows exe installation file located in the ODM Install Thin Clients ODBC Thin Clients subdirectory of the Optim installation DVD For other platforms the installation file is found in the lt DVD_ROOT gt ODM Install Thin Clients directory For more information on installing the ODBC thin client refer to the ThinODBC_installation_530 pdf file located in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Windows Optim installation DVD For more information on ODBC configuration and use refer to Section 88 of the Attunity Installation Guide located in the AIS_530_User_Guide_and_Reference pdf file in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory For non Windows platforms documentation is found in the lt DVD_ROOT gt ODM Install Thin Clients directory 468 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide JDBC Thin Client The JDBC thin client is required on each machine that uses JDBC to connect to ODM To install the JDBC thin client unzip the Attunity_JDBC_5 3 0 2 zip installation file located in the ODM install subdirectory of the Optim installation directory For more information on installing and using the thin client refer to Section 87 of the Attunity Installation Guide located in the AIS_530_User_Guide_and_Reference pdf file in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory Secondary Server Configuration In some ODM deployments it may be advantageous to deploy more than one ODM server As an example
127. workstation is configured however additional entries are required for any additional Directories that may be accessed by the workstation See Access Existing Optim 62 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Directory on page 173 Use this task which replicates the steps described in Create Registr Entry on page 134 to create additional registry entries Configure Security for an Optim Directory You can initialize Optim Security using the Configure the First Workstation Create Update Optim Directory and Configure Options tasks however you must use Configure Security for an Optim Directory task to both initialize Optim Security and enable the security features or to update your security settings See Configure Security for an Optim Directory on page 173 Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Use this task to change the Optim Server status of a machine See Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server on page 180 Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Use this task to enable or disable the ODBC interface access to Archive Files for a previousl configured workstation See Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine on page 181 Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Generally you must apply maintenance for Optim Directory access to refresh or update the packages plans or procedures needed to access the Optim Directory tables when you upgrade O
128. 1 The opmusign script file located in the rt sbin directory You can run this script at any time following a installation to switch to a user supplied exit The letter u in the script name indicates that it is used to sign a user specified exit 2 The pr0sign program As indicated above you can use the pr0sign program to sign either the default exit or a user supplied exit Before you run the pr0sign program however you must ensure that the environment is set up The opmdsign and opmusign scripts will both set up the environment and call prOsign You must sign an exit for each installation of Optim on a UNIX server If you copy a signed exit from one installation to another you must sign the exit again at the target installation The Invalid Credentials Specified Dialog Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 After you sign an exit if any of the company credentials you specified are incorrect an Invalid Credentials Specified dialog will appear This usually happens if you typed your company credentials in the wrong case for example uppercase versus lowercase or you typed your company Name in a format other than the one specified for your company For example if the company name assigned to your organization consists of all lowercase letters such as abc company you must type your company name in all lowercase letters otherwise the Invalid Credentials Specified dialog will appear 358 IBM Optim Optim Instal
129. 1 09 2 18 UDB72 ST_EDT SHIP_ INSTR EDT 12006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST EXT EMPPROJACT EXT 12006 01 09 2 18 UDB72 ST_EXT SHIP INSTR 12006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST EXT SHIP INSTR EXT 3 9nn n1_na IMR CT THSC FMWDDDNATAFT THC Print the log by choosing Print from the File menu Each execution of the Export Process clears the log file before information for the current execution is written Previous log information is not retained Select Close from the File menu to close the log and return to the Export dialog You can display the log again for the current process by clicking Display Output 494 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Step 3 Import Data into New Optim Directory This step describes how to import data into a new Optim Directory The next step in the Conversion Process is to import the objects into the new Optim Directory Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 3 Import Data into a New Opt ie Ea In Step 3 you will import and convert the data from the old Optim Directory using this ersion of the Optim Configuration Program The Import step allows you to select the Optim Definitions to be converted and imported into the the New Optim Directory An Import can be run at any time as long as the file that contains the exported Optim Nire E data ic awailahle im mich ka Tran he Niinkin NeFinitian mint Pip To begin this step select the Import Data into a New Optim Directory check box and click Pr
130. 141 configure first workstation 72 131 configure options 207 208 copy DB2 relationships 209 create additional Optim Directory 173 create primary keys 208 create update DB Alias 88 170 172 create update Optim Directory 173 drop DB Alias 211 215 drop Optim Directory 211 216 enable disable ODBC Interface 181 Optim Server 180 load drop sample data 210 211 maintain access DB Alias 183 190 Optim Directory 182 183 purge DB Alias 217 Optim Directory 216 purpose 7 update DBMS version for DB Alias 201 207 for Optim Directory 198 201 Trace File 250 Troubleshooting 19 Attunity Upgrade 483 Image Locator Diagnostic Tool 19 Microsoft Debugging Utility 20 Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool 19 Troubleshooting Your Installation 19 U UDT 261 Uncommitted Data Extract 226 Unicode support 15 Uninstalling 519 522 cancel 522 do not drop all objects 522 drop all objects 521 prompt to drop all objects 520 Windows Control Panel 519 Unix silent install 304 UNIX command line 336 commands 349 350 customer ID 329 337 data directories 329 337 DB Alias 333 339 DB Alias logon 331 destination folder 309 environment variables 346 install Optim server 295 installation 293 306 326 license agreement 309 loader 333 339 locale conversion 349 LOCALE COMF file 349 UNIX continued logon 331 Maximum Processes 330 Optim Directory 332 338 permission 331 prOpass program 353 pstlocal configuration file 336 pstserv configuration fil
131. 160 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Edit Click Edit to display the Product Options Editor for the corresponding Product Configuration File Update Select the check box to include the corresponding Product Configuration File to be updated Update Click Update to update each selected Product Configuration File with the new endpoint information Archive Tab Use the Archive tab to enter the path to the default Archive Archive Index and Archive Browse Index Directories for the Server lt gt Optim Server Settings Archive Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want the Server to store Archive Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Data Directory specified on the General tab is used by default Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 161 Archive Index Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want the Server to store Archive Index Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default Archive Index Browse Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want the Server to store Archive Index Browse Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default An Archi
132. 2 The Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables must be a valid user ID for the database and must have a LOGIN to the database server If wanted you can specify the special Sybase ID of dbo as the Owner ID of the stored procedures Note The Owner ID may be different from the ID used to connect 3 If the Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables does not have the SA role then the user account must have the following permission CREATE PROCEDURE When you catalog the procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users Informix Database The Informix utility program SELNET 32 includes an environment variable named IFX_AUTO_FREE This variable must not be set If the IFXK_AUTO_FREE variable has a value the Optim Configuration program fails during the creation of the Optim Directory with the error 481 SQL State 37000 Invalid Statement Name To avoid or correct the error ensure that the IFXK_AUTO_FREE variable is not set 10 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim uses the ODBC module ISQLT09A DLL to connect to an Informix server This module is installed as part of the Informix Client SDK 2 2 This SDK must be installed on the workstation for Optim to communicate with an Inform
133. 2 xi Add Cancel Help Me Server Name Select Local or the name of the Server with the domain connection appropriate for the account you want to add to the role If your site does not use a Server Local is displayed and cannot be changed Domain Select the name of the domain for the user and group accounts you want to add to the role The domains are within a network that includes the designated Server Name Note If the Server is on a UNIX platform you do not need to specify a Domain The node name is displayed in Domain at the top of the dialog and in the Users and Groups grids Users The user accounts in the domain including the Name Domain and Description Groups The group accounts in the domain including the Name Domain and Description Shortcut Menu Command Right click the Users grid to display the following shortcut menu command Appendix D Optim Security 395 Display Groups for User Display only groups that include the selected user Command Buttons The following command buttons are available on the Security Users and Groups dialog Select All Select all members in the grid Deselect All Clear all selections in the grid Refresh Display all groups in the domain again Add Add the selected users and groups to the role and open the Role Specifications dialog Cancel Return to the Role Specifications dialog without adding any users or groups to the role To list groups for a specific
134. 3 Database Permissions 8 Database tab Product Options 225 228 allow insert action delete option 226 allow parallel processing 227 allow user to lock tables 226 Extract using Uncommitted Read 226 maximum commit frequency 225 maximum database connections 227 Sybase unchained mode 225 DB Alias configure first workstation 87 create 4 create drop packages 92 create select 88 create update 88 170 create update another 110 description of 87 maintain access 183 DB Alias continued purging 217 share connection information 94 specify DBMS for 89 DB2 bind drop plans for DB Alias 92 for Optim Directory 79 z OS Buffer Pool 264 DBMS type and version 4 Default Directories Archive 278 279 Archive Browse Index Directory 279 Archive Index Directory 278 Data Directory 250 for DBMS loaders 258 Product Configuration File 250 scheduling 257 Temporary Work 250 Trace Files 250 Delete Processing secured files 413 designer installing 523 Dialogs 67 Display tab Personal Options 252 254 column delimiters 252 Large Objects 254 main window 253 maximum fetch rows 253 maximum File menu entries 253 maximum history entries 253 menu behavior 253 null value indicator 252 system messages 254 tooltips and toolbars 253 E Edit tab Personal Options 272 276 audit tables 274 Audit Tables dialog 275 auditing active 273 auto switch 272 default data display 274 display column attributes 272 display deleted rows 272 display row count 274 n
135. 370 936 1383 949 1386 950 UTF8 UTF16 Table 5 SQL Server Character Set Support 1252 UTF8 UTF16 Table 6 Informix Character Set Support 1252 UTF8 Directories and Files The names of all directories and files referenced by generated or used with Optim must consist of ASCII characters This requirement applies to the installation directories for Optim as well as the Optim 14 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide directories for example Temporary Work Directory Data Directory and other directories that are identified in Personal and Product Options or when configuring the Server All text files generated by Optim are in Unicode format and you can edit them with a Unicode compatible text editor such as Microsoft NotePad Optim recognizes Byte Order Mark headers in externally generated files and the following encodings e UTF 8 e UTF 16 e UTF 32 e ASCII e Multi byte Note e You cannot compare Archive Files created before Archive for Servers version 6 0 with files created using a current version of Optim e You can convert early Archive Files and compare data in the resulting Extract Files e Report Files created with earlier versions of Optim are not accessible using version 6 x Optim Server Every locale or its translation that the Server is required to handle must reside on the Server machine In other words the Server must have access
136. A DB Alias is required to access the data privacy tables The DB Alias used as a high level qualifier for the table names provides a single name association for parameters needed to connect to the database The DB Alias and other Optim objects created when the data privacy tables are created are stored in an Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see Create Select DB Alias on page 185 to specify the DB Alias for the data privacy tables Click Proceed to open the next dialog Load Drop Data Privacy Tables After you select the DB Alias for the data privacy tables the Configuration program opens the Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog If you are creating or refreshing the tables you must specify an identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID and Tablespace If you are dropping data privacy tables only the identifier is required Refer to Load Drop Data Privacy Tables on page 107 Load Drop Data Privacy Data for Another DB Alias After you load or drop sample data privacy tables associated with a particular DB Alias the Configuration program displays the Load Drop Data Privacy Data for Another DB Alias dialog and prompts you to load or drop the data privacy tables associated with a different DB Alias If so th
137. Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport Uncheck to use Simple Mail Transport Protocol Set From one of these known Email Servers Custom bi Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Port if not standard Sender s mailbox From address Email account logon Logon domain Email account password Send Test Email Cancel Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport If you use the SMTP email transport keep this check box cleared default and select OK A popup will ask you if you want to connect without entering a password If you use the CDO email transport select this check box to enable the dialog and continue entering information Set from one of these known Email Servers Click to select an account from the list and populate the remainder of the Email Transport dialog with information for the selected account Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Type an exchange server name or internet address Port if not standard Type a port name or leave blank default port Sender s mailbox From address Type the sender From email address Email account logon Type the email logon name Logon domain Type the domain name 290 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Email account password Type the password A blank password is valid if the account allows it a prompt will confirm that you want to connect without entering a password Send Test Emai
138. Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 171 Create Select DB Alias On the Create Select DB Alias dialog specify the DB Alias name Create Update DB Alias Create Select DB Alias he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Select the Create New option to create a single new DB Alias the Create Select Multiple option to create or select multiple DB Aliases From a Single DB ii Server or the Use Existing option to use an existing DB Alias then click lt Proceed gt to E i elerkinn in ill Alen i nrinn NA enuire a DR oli From this point the task is similar to creating a DB Alias when configuring the first workstation For details see Create DB Aliases on page 87 You specify the DB Alias DBMS and then connect to the database User ID Password and Connection String You also create or update the DB Alias packages plans or procedures The following guidelines apply If you update an existing DB Alias and you specify a valid connection string or qualifier for packages plans or procedures that differs from the one associated with the DB Alias you are prompted to update the DB Alias If you attempt to create a DB Alias for a database that has the same signature as an existing DB Alias the Configuration program displays a warning message For Sybase ASE or SQL Server if you intend to convert existing DB Aliases to use shared stored
139. Choose Install Set screen select either option e 1 for full installation This installs all components of Optim Optim Server Executable Files Sample Files and Open Data Manager Interface You continue with the ODM Installation Information screen e 2 for customized installation This allows you to select the components of Optim to install You continue with the Choose Product Features screen If you chose customized installation the Choose Product Features screen displays next Select the features you want to install All features are selected by default To unselect a feature type the number of the feature you want to exclude from the installation To unselect more than one feature type their numbers separated by commas Continue to the Install and Configure Open Data Manager screen Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 299 The Install and Configure Open Data Manager screen displays if you chose full installation or if you selected the Optim Open Data Manager feature on the Choose Product Features screen Choose either option e 1 to install Open Data Manager now Continue to the Configure ODM License Type screen e 2 to copy the files and install at a later time You will continue to the Pre Installation Summary screen If you chose to install Open Data Manager now the Configure ODM License Type screen displays The Configure ODM License Type screen has these options e 1 specify the ODM lic
140. Connect to Database dialog you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that the workstation needs to connect to the Directory Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 193 lt gt Rename Optim Directory Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the E selected task DIRECTORY JoptusrS J QORS22K O Specify New Optim Directory Name After connecting to the database the Specify New Optim Directory Name dialog is displayed allowing you to rename the Optim Directory and the registry entry 194 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt Rename Optim Directory Specify New Optim Directory Name Specify the new name for this Optim Directory and registry entry then click lt Proceed gt a o continue ful The option to Rename Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the new Name for the Optim Directory A Directory name can be from 1 to 12 characters and have no embedded blanks The new Directory name cannot match an existing Directory name Connect to Database After an Optim Directory is renamed the Configuration program updates connection information in the registry entry For subsequent access to the Directory from this workstation use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password see Connect to Databa
141. Data Sample tables are distributed with Optim Generally you load this sample data when you configure the first workstation however you can load it independently or when you configure an additional workstation You can load refresh or drop sample data by selecting the Load Drop Sample Data option which guides you through the process You can start this process by selecting Load Drop Sample Data from the Tasks menu or by selecting the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Specify Optim Directory A DB Alias is required to access the sample tables The DB Alias used as a high level qualifier for the table names provides a single name association for parameters needed to connect to the database The DB Alias and other Optim objects created when the sample tables are created are stored in an Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see Create Select DB Alias on page 185 to specify the DB Alias for the sample tables Click Proceed to open the next dialog Load Drop Sample Tables After you select the DB Alias for the sample tables the Configuration program opens the Load Drop Sample Tables dialog If you are creating or refreshing the tables you must specify an identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID and
142. Drop Plans dialog shown and described in Bind Drop Plans The Create Drop Packages dialog includes the following details Tables Description of the tables for which packages plans or procedures are being created Package Specifications Create Refresh Option to create new or refresh existing Optim Directory packages plans or procedures This option is always available when creating an Optim Directory and is the default selection when the dialog opens Use Existing Option to use existing packages plans or procedures This option is available only if packages or procedures already exist for the Optim Directory Drop Option to drop existing Optim Directory packages plans or procedures This option is available only if packages or procedures already exist for the Optim Directory Qualifier Previously entered high level qualifier needed to access Optim Directory tables The label is Collection Name for DB2 Schema Name for Oracle and Owner ID for SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix Grant Auth ID Enter an identifier for authorized users You may specify a User ID a Group Name or Public When this ID is Public all users can run Optim Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before creating or dropping packages plans or procedures Note If you attempted to create a new Optim Directory but responded Yes to the pop up window from the Connect to Database dialog the following pop up prompts you to confirm tha
143. Enable a 30 day Trial License to install ODM for the trial use period If you choose Specify Open Data Manager ODM License File enter the name of the license file in the text box or click Choose to browse for the file Click Next to display the Shortcut Location on page 32 dialog Chapter 2 Installation 31 Shortcut Location The installation process prompts you to install shortcuts on your desktop Using this dialog choose a folder to hold shortcut icons for these installed components Optim Optim Configuration Optim Scheduler Select the location and click Next to create the desktop icons v Introduction v License Agreement Customer Information v Type of Installation v Install Location Component Selection ODM Information gt Shortcut Location gt Summary Installation Installation Complete Choose from these options In anew Program Group Specify a folder name to be created under the Windows Program menu The default name is IBM Optim In an existing Program Group Select the name of an existing folder from the drop down list On the Desktop In the Quick Launch Bar e In the Start Menu When you click Next the dialog displays 32 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Summary The Summary dialog displays the installation settings for your review You can modify the settings by clicking Previous to return to any installation dialog Click Install to accept t
144. Function 5 gt Create New Actions E __ Create New Definitions O M B Compare Request Convert Request Archive Request Oo es w Privilege Classes Use the Privilege Classes grid to display associated privileges in the Privileges grid You can also use the Privilege Classes grid to select all associated privileges for reporting or clear all associated privileges selected for reporting To select a row in the Privilege Classes grid click a row indicator cell or either a Report All or Clear All cell The grid arrow indicates the class of privileges displayed To include all associated privileges in the report select Report All To remove all selections in the Privileges grid select Clear All Privileges Use the Privileges grid to select privileges to include in the report To include a privilege select Report Shortcut Menu Commands Right click the Privileges Classes grid to display the following shortcut menu commands Appendix E Security Reports 443 Report All Classes Select Report All for all privilege classes Clear All Classes Select Clear All for all privilege classes Right click the Privileges grid to display the following shortcut menu commands Report All Select Report for all privileges Clear All Clear Report for all privileges Object Report The Object Security Report lists Object Security permissions assigned to specified users or groups for specified Optim obj
145. Import Secured Archive File Import a secured Archive File Modify File Security with Migrate Use the Archive File Migration Process to change a FAD Report Security Privileges Run a Security Report Object Association Privileges Tab Use the Object Association Privileges tab to indicate the types of object for which the role will have Object Association Privileges Object Association Privileges allow the role to use roles defined in the ACD as the basis for an ACL that protects objects of the indicated type Appendix D Optim Security 403 lt gt Role Specifications KIKA RI Bman A Ca A Associate Definition Editors E AN 4 Allow Al 4 Haa gt gt E aE a Compare Request o Mo Convert Request a Oe For more information about working with privileges and privilege classes see page 396 Associate Action Editors Associate Action Editors privileges are required to associate the ACD with an ACL that secures an Action request which is created in a editor selected from the Actions menu For example an Archive File Request This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Compare Request Convert Request Delete Request Extract Request Insert Request Load Request Report Request 404 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Restore Request Table Editor Associate Definition Editors Associate Definition Editors privileges are required to associate the ACD with an ACL that secu
146. Linux 303 During the installation several temporary and log files are created You can choose whether Optim removes these files Next the Installation Complete screen displays When the installation process completes this screen displays Press Enter to exit the installer See Configuration on page 327 to establish defaults for the Server Silent Installer UNIX You can use the silent installer in a UNIX environment to install the Optim Server The silent installer is unavailable for Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 platforms For all other supported UNIX and Linux environments the Optim Server can be installed with the silent installer as described below The Optim installation includes the file installer properties in the same directory where install bin is located To use the silent installer open the optim_installer properties file and make any modifications to the variables to customize it for your installation These variables are INSTALLER_UI SILENT Install using silent installer LICENSE_ACCEPTED TRUE Specify that the license agreement is accepted USER_INSTALL_DIR directory Fully qualified path to the destination directory to install Optim CHOSEN_FEATURE_LIST Specify the list of features enabled Files related to these features are copied into the installation directory Values are Optim for Optim Server executables Sample for Optim sample files ODM for Open Data Manager Specify the values in a comma separ
147. MAIL must be configured correctly In an Action Request Editor you can click Get Site Defaults on the Notify tab to populate it with the defaults specified in Personal Options 288 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Personal Options Alwa loptusr4 company com Always Grid Details The Notify tab contains the following details Send For each email address you list click to select an option to send a message as determined by the outcome of the process You can select Always Success or Failure Email Addresses Enter an email address to which notification is sent with a process report at the completion of the process Enter one address per line Send Test eMail Right click a grid row and select Send Test eMail to validate the email address Email Transport Click this button to display the Email Transport dialog so that you may activate and configure the Collaboration Data Object CDO transport to send email If you don t click this button email is sent using the Simple Mail Protocol Transport SMTP Chapter 9 Personal Options 289 Note You must use the CDO transport if the email client on the server requires logon credentials to send an unattended message or requires user input when SMTP is used to send a message Also select the CDO option if the server uses a Microsoft Outlook client version 2000 or later to send messages through a Microsoft Exchange server E mail Transport HEI IV
148. MBER Phone number including area code CHAR 20 characters PHONE_COUNTRY Country code for international calls CHAR 20 characters SALARY Person s salary DECIMAL 11 places with 2 decimal places NAME _FIRST First name CHAR 15 characters NAME INITIAL Middle initial CHAR 1 character NAME _ LAST Last name CHAR 15 characters NAME _FULL Full name first name middle initial and last name VARCHAR 40 characters BIRTHDATE Birth date DATE GENDER M Male F Female CHAR 1 character EMAIL Email address CHAR 70 characters CREDITCARD Credit card number CHAR 19 characters ADDRESS Table The ADDRESS table contains the following columns and data SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER ADDRESS Street address CHAR 50 characters CITY City CHAR 28 characters STATE State abbreviation CHAR 2 characters ZIPCODE ZIP code CHAR 5 characters ZIPPLUS4 Extended portion of US ZIP code CHAR 4 characters Note Data in the ADDRESS table is copyrighted by the United States Postal Service and is provided with permission COMPANY Table The COMPANY table has the following columns and data 516 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE Company name CHAR 40 characters Note Data in the COMPANY table is copyrighted by the United States Postal Service and is provided with permission FIRSTNAME Table The FIRSTNAME tabl
149. MS you are prompted to indicate the format in which the Directory should store data single byte Unicode or multi byte Note The character sets of the DBMS client and the database server must match your selection Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 81 Configure First Workstation Specify Character Set of Optim Director B E3 he Optim Configuration Program can configure this Optim Directory to keep character data stored in it e g object names Optim Primary Keys Audit data etc in one of hree formats Single byte ASCII Unicode UTF 8 or Multi byte MBCS Select the option that corresponds to the character set of the database for the Optim Directory Sin a M E Mi Prom Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 If you select Unicode format in the Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge the following DBMS character set requirements for Unicode e Both the DBMS client and database character sets must be Unicode The Optim Directory must be in Unicode format if it includes DB Aliases for databases of character sets that include single byte and or Unicode 82 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Cr Configure First Workstation Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 Nou have selected the option to configure this Optim Directory so its character data is ept in Unicode Format To enable this option both the DBMS client and Database haracter sets mus
150. ODBC Thin Client 468 runtime connection 476 secondary server 469 security 471 Optim Designer installing 523 Optim Directory add default tables 183 create additional 173 create tables for 77 creating 4 72 definition of 3 export registry data 129 maintain access 182 purge registry entry 216 registry entry 4 specify DBMS 73 table identifier 4 137 typical configuration 3 workstation access 173 Optim Exit Prerequisites for a User Supplied Exit 50 357 Writing a User Supplied Exit 50 357 Optim Exit in UNIX Invalid Credentials Specified dialog 358 Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog 359 361 Signing a User Supplied Exit 364 367 Signing an Exit during Setup 319 320 Signing Methods 358 Signing the default Exit after Installation 361 364 Optim Exit in Windows Changing a Signed Exit 53 Sign Optim Exit dialog 54 56 Signing an Exit during Configuration 51 52 Specify Company Name dialog 57 Optim Security Access Control Domain 385 390 Access Control List 385 405 Assigning Privileges 396 change administrator 121 138 File Access Definition 385 initialize 121 138 Object Association Privileges 404 Security Administrator 121 users in multiple roles 397 Optim Server 1 304 Access defaults 153 Archive defaults 161 Authentication 158 Choose Product Configuration File 159 Configure 143 Connection Defaults 151 default Archive directories 161 Default Directories 145 directories limit
151. Optim Security 421 e In the Table Access Control list the Default setting for users not included in the ACD and roles not specified in the list is assigned Allow access The Guest role is assigned Deny access Restricted Table For the CUSTOMERS table only the Optim Administrator role is allowed access All other users and roles are denied access OPTUSR FIRST File Access Definition Editor alaiajala 5 5 TT sale bia otal gt Ki O KIO IE O O a ro ets E CW ED GE SATIS pemsoprusroroers Dett P a e In the Table List the AC Type for CUSTOMERS is Explicit The access permissions apply to this table only e In the Table Access Control list the Optim Administrator role is assigned Allow access and the Default setting representing users not included in the ACD and roles not specified in the list is assigned Deny access Restricted Column For the ORDERS table all users except the Guest role are allowed access but one or more columns have separate access permissions as indicated by Column Secured setting 422 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide OPTUSR FIRST File Access Definition Editor als ajiale 8 5 eC 4 ia opal O E E e E a E A Ad ee e MO EE gt BMS OPTUSR ORDERS T DBMS OPTUSR CUSTOMERS Explicit M D M D e The AC Type for the ORDERS table is Default which for this File Access Definition allows acc
152. Optim supports Unicode you are prompted to indicate whether the DB Alias data is kept in Unicode format Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 95 ar Configure First Workstation Keep Character Data in Unicode Format Sl he Optim Configuration Program can configure this DB Alias so data is kept in Unicode ormat To enable this option both the DBMS client and Database character sets must be TF8 This option is required if the DBMS client character set is UTF8 Conversely this option is not allowed if the DB t UTF8 To enable this option Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data If Optim supports Unicode for the DB Alias DBMS you are prompted to indicate the format in which the DB Alias should store data single byte or Unicode Note The character sets of the DBMS client and the database server must match your selection 96 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Configure First Workstation Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data Ioj x he Optim Configuration Program can configure this DB Alias to keep character data in one of three Formats Single byte ASCIT EBCDIC Unicode UTF 8 or Multi byte MBCS Select the option that corresponds to the character set of the database for he DB Alias Note The character sets of both the DBMS client and Database server Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 If you select Unicode format in the Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data dialog you are prompted to
153. Oracle Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix Chapter 9 Personal Options 265 lt Personal Options Identifier Specify the default identifier for new triggers based on the identifier from one of the following Object Use the identifier from a corresponding target object as the default for new triggers For triggers the corresponding target object is the table referenced in the trigger Source Use the identifier from the source trigger as the default for new triggers Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new triggers Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new triggers If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Create Synonyms Tab Use the Synonyms tab to select default options for creating new synonyms You can specify a default synonym when you use Oracle or Informix 266 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Personal Options Bfe x Create Logon Server edit 4 gt Identifier Specify the default identifier for new synonyms based on the identifier from one of the following Object Use the identifier from a corresponding target object as the default for new synonyms For synonyms the corresponding target object is the table synonym function package package body procedure sequence trigger or view referenced in the synonym Source
154. Otherwise remove USER_INPUT_ODM_USERLIC and USER_INPUT_ODM_TRIAL from the file USER_INPUT_ODM_USERLIC Specify whether a valid ODM license file will be used Values are 1 a valid license file will be used to install ODM 0 there is no valid license file to install ODM USER_INPUT_ODM_TRIAL Specify whether a trial license will be used for ODM Values are 1 use a default 30 day trial license 0 do not use a 30 day trial license Include ODM_LICENSE_FILE_FULL_PATH only if allthese conditions are met e you are installing ODM CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST contains ODM and e you are installing and configuring ODM now USER_INPUT_ODM_NOW gt 1 and e you are using a valid ODM license file USER_INPUT_ODM_USERLIC 1 Otherwise remove ODM_LICENSE_FILE_FULL_PATH from the file ODM_LICENSE_FILE_FULL_PATH pathtolicensefile Specify the fully qualified path to the ODM license file USER_INPUT_DELETE_FILES Specify whether to delete the temporary files created during the installation Values are 1 delete the temporary files Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 305 0 do not delete the temporary files USER_INPUT_DONOT_DELETE Specify to prevent deleting the temporary files created during the installation Values are 1 do not delete the temporary files 0 delete the temporary files After you specify the variables in the installer properties file use one of these commands to start th
155. P ROTH WUSR WGRP RALL WALL gt SYSTEM tcpportnumber 1024 name dbmstype dbmsver dbqual connectstring userid password pstdir name connectstring userid password pstdir dbalias dbmstype teradatatype 1 0 pstdir dbalias tdatasvr userid password rowcntgle n 328 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide excptntblcid Jauditfacility true false Audit OptimDirNamel enabled disabled retention days n Audit RecordLimit n lt FailureAction gt CONTINUE STOP Jadminemailnotify emailaddress success information warning error exception n 7 0 1 clear archiveretentionpolicy hh mm pstdirectory Q 1 EtvoTtavat Keywords customerid Optim company customer identifier number assigned by IBM 1 nodename password n Unique six digit Company ID provided with Optim 000000 The Optim demonstration ID Default customerid 611239 customername Customer name custname Company Name provided with Company ID and license key Up to 40 characters cececcec The demonstration name Default customername cccccccc license The license key Note The license key is saved in the registry This registry entry is replaced if you connect to an Optim directory with a more recent key Therefore you can remove this keyword after you start
156. RACE attribute DSNPASSWORDS datasourcename domainname userID password The user ID and password for Archive File Security authentication The datasourcename is the data source to which the credentials apply The domainname is optional You can use forward or backward slashes within the parameter If this parameter is not used the credentials of the user running the Attunity Server will be used for Archive File Security authentication OQPTDPNAMEZ primaryservername daemonportnumber The primary server name and port number of the Attunity daemon on the primary server Required when the connection string is passed from a secondary server ODM Data Type Conversions Data type conversions occur when Archive File data is accessed by ODM e When code page translation of archived data to UTF 8 is required character column length may be extended 1 5 times for NCHAR data or 3 times for single byte character data up to 32k However if the total row size is greater than 32k ODM may encounter errors when joining or sorting data e VARBINARY columns are converted to BINARY columns The BINARY column data is padded with binary zeros to match the VARBINARY column maximum data length For DB2 Linux and Windows the data is padded with ASCII spaces x 20 e For MONEY DECIMAL or NUMERIC columns if scale 0 these data types are converted to int2 or int4 If precision lt 31 and both scale gt 0 and scale lt precision these data types are convert
157. Report Request Schedule a Report Process Run a Report Request Report Process Report Appendix F Open Data eae Deployment Strategy Installation Windows Installation UNIX Installation UNIX Administration Attunity Studio Configuration Adding an ODM Server to Attunity Studio Edit Windows Workspace Server F Edit the ODM Server Code Page Define the Data Source on the ODM Server Define an ODM data source ODBC Data Source Definition Client Installation and Configuration ODBC Thin Client JDBC Thin Client e Secondary Server Configuration Defining Data Sources on the Secondary Beier ODM Security Providing Archive File Security Credentials 383 384 384 384 386 387 387 387 390 392 393 396 405 406 407 412 413 414 417 421 425 425 425 428 428 429 437 438 438 438 439 440 441 445 445 445 445 445 449 449 449 451 453 455 456 456 458 459 460 462 463 468 468 469 469 469 471 471 Providing Administrative Authorization for the ODM Server o oec e amp 473 Securing the Attunity Daemon woe ew we AA Runtime Connection Information 476 ODM Data Type Conversions 477 Archive File to XML Convertor 478 Archive File Collections wo ew ee 481 Archive File Collection Subsets eo te ve a 3 ABA PST_ARCHIVE_ID Pse
158. S heckbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step On the Apply Maintenance to DB Alias dialog you can do the following e To apply maintenance for the named DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Connect to Database dialog e To bypass maintenance for the named DB Alias clear the check box and click Proceed The Configuration program prompts you to apply maintenance for the next DB Alias Note The steps to connect to the database and create drop packages plans or procedures are the same as those described to apply maintenance for a single DB Alias Apply Maintenance to Another After you apply maintenance for a DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Apply Maintenance to Another DB Alias dialog and prompts you to apply maintenance for another DB Alias e To apply maintenance for another DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Connect to Database dialog e To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed on each subsequent dialog until the Complete dialog displays Apply Maintenance for Specific DBMS If you select the option on the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog to apply maintenance for a specific DBMS the task includes the following steps 1 Specify the DB Alias DBMS Type and Version 2 Choose to apply maintenance for the first or another DB Alias 3 Connect to the Database 4 Drop old Packages Plans or Procedures 188 IBM Optim
159. S Yersion for a DB Alias Update Multiple DB Aliases Ioj x Optim will drop the Optim created Procedures created For the previous DBMS version It will hen create new Procedures to access the System Tables for each selected database PUBLIC Note The stored procedure defaults apply to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit stored procedure information on the Databases tab When you specify the necessary information on each tab and click Proceed the Configuration program connects to the first selected database If the connection is successful the update process drops the old stored packages plans or procedures creates new ones and updates the database signature These steps are repeated for each selected database When the process is complete the Complete dialog displays Configure Options The Product Configuration File contains the Product Options that apply to all users of Optim at a site Personal Options are recorded in the workstation registry Typically the Product Configuration File and the Personal Options registry entries are created when you configure the first and additional workstations However you modify these options by selecting Configure Options from the Tasks menu Specify Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other
160. SE SQL Server or Informix database instance for the Optim Directory This value was entered earlier in the process and cannot be changed Note DB Name is displayed only if the Optim Directory is in a Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database 86 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Always Ask for Password Select this check box to require a password each time you connect to the database If you clear this check box your password is saved in the Windows registry and you need not supply a password on future attempts to connect to the database This completes the process of creating the Optim Directory for the first workstation In the next phase of the process you create DB Aliases that allow Optim to access each database Create DB Aliases Optim can access several databases simultaneously however each database must have a unique DB Alias stored in the current Optim Directory A DB Alias is given as a high level qualifier for a database table name to provide a single name association for parameters required to connect to the database The next step in the process to configure the first workstation involves creating a DB Alias for each database and creating the packages plans or procedures to access tables in those databases The Configuration program prompts you to e Create a DB Alias for the database instance housing the Optim Directory e Create Optim Primary Keys for tables that have unique indexes if DBMS pr
161. SE012 in the SALESMAN_ID column and processes all other rows e Ages ORDER _SHIP_DATE for rows that have a value of SEO005 in the SALESMAN_ID column and skips all other rows To use this sample you must specify the exit routine as part of the Age Function in the ORDER_SHIP_DATE source column of the Column Map as follows AGE 1W SC ORDER_SHIP_DATE SF YY MM DD DSTEXIT PSTEXIT Sample Column Map Procedures A Column Map Procedure is a custom program written in Optim Basic that is referenced to perform special processing or data manipulation that is otherwise beyond the scope of a Column Map The function of a Column Map Procedure is generally the same as that of an exit routine Exit routines however are written outside Optim and must be externally compiled and linked Column Map Procedures are written within Optim The Samples CMProc subdirectory includes sample files written in Optim Basic that can be used to create a set of Column Map procedures The file names are CMEXIT BAS Sample Optim Basic Column Map procedure modeled after the Standard Exit routine Refer to Sample Standard Exit on page 510 TBLINFO BAS Sample Optim Basic Column Map procedure that demonstrates how to access and retrieve data about the process product or database table This sample procedure moves source data to the destination without changing it and can be used with most column data types Appendix H Samples 511 DEFAULT BAS Sa
162. Select Default in the Optim Directory list to enter the path and name of the Loader executable file for each DBMS type If you have more than one version of a particular DBMS type you can enter the unique loader specification for each version Select the specific Optim Directory and DB Alias then enter the appropriate path and name of the Loader executable file for the particular DBMS version Load Specifications Specify the complete path and name of the executable to access each DBMS Loader that can be used with a Load Request DB Alias Select a specific Optim Directory then click the down arrow to select a specific DB Alias Specify the appropriate loader path for the corresponding DBMS version If you are using DB2 Oracle or Informix you can also specify a default Creator ID for Exception Tables or Violation Tables Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 149 Exception Table Default Creator ID Specify a default Creator ID for exception tables DB2 and Oracle or violation tables Informix Available only when you select a DB Alias for a DB2 Oracle or Informix database Fully Qualified Path for DBMS Loaders Specify the directory path and program name for the specific DBMS Loader Consult your DBMS documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button Teradata Select to provide settings for the Teradata loader The Teradata Settings panel displays Use FastLoa
163. Server under UNIX or Linux 337 Archive Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir by default The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon archivediridx PSTHOME archiveidx archivebroidx Archive Browse Index Directory for Archive Browse Index Files for which a complete path is not provided The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon To expedite the retrieval of data an Archive Browse Index File is created when a user browses archived data and joins tables By default Archive Browse Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir archivebroidx PSTHOME archivebro tracedays server pstdir 338 Number of days to retain trace files in the temporary work directory n A value from 2 to 30 The default is 5 Consider storage space limitations when deciding the number of days to retain the files tracedays 5 Connection for Command Line processes that are not executed locally but instead are targeted to a Server You can omit this keyword if for the targeted Server file access is limited to a specific Windows user account or the filelogon value is server or local name Name of the Server The target Server must support a tcp ip connection address The tcp ip network address for the target Server in the form 1 1 1 1 port The numeric tcp ip port number for the target Server as a value from 1 to 65534
164. Sign Optim Exit dialog Signing a User Supplied Exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to sign a user supplied exit in UNIX If your company requires the additional functionality available via a user supplied exit you can create your own exit and then sign that exit as your Optim exit See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for detailed information about how to write an exit User Supplied Exit Prerequisites This section describes the user supplied exit prerequisites Before you can sign a user supplied exit you must do the following 364 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 1 Compile your user supplied exit and create a load library named libopmexit so in AIX Solaris and Linux or liboptmexit sl in HP UX 2 Make sure that the OptimServer is not running if it is shut it down 3 Copy the file libopmexit so or libopmexit sl to the rt bin directory thereby overwriting the existing file assuming one already exists Run the opmusign Script This section describes how to run the opmusign script As part of setup Optim places the script file opmusign in the rt sbin directory You can run the ww opmusign script at any time following setup to sign a user supplied exit The letter u in the script name indicates it is used to sign a user specified exit The syntax for opmusign is as follows opmusign install_directory rt Company Id Name Passw
165. Specify the maximum number of characters per line 1 to 999 for the report Character Column Width Specify the maximum number of characters per column 1 to 999 for the report Spacing Set default spacing preferences for the output of the Report Process 244 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Blank Lines Between Rows Specify the number of blank lines to insert between each row in the report Minimum Spaces Between Columns Specify the number of blank spaces to insert between each column in the report Blank Lines Between Levels Specify the number of blank lines to insert between each level of related tables when Show Joins is enabled and related tables are joined Archive File Report only Spaces to Indent Subordinate Tables Specify the number of blank spaces to indent rows from each subordinate joined table in the report Archive File Report only Chapter 8 Product Options 245 246 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 9 Personal Options You can use Personal Options to customize Optim for use at each workstation Personal Options are recorded in the Windows Registry of the workstation For example you can e Specify default data directories set user defined database logon and password information and select other options to customize display features and message text e Provide defaults for the Schedule and Create utilities and the Load Edit and Browse Processes
166. TD_MVS XF PSTD_ORA XF PSTD_SYB XF PSTD_UDB XF SAMP_390 XF These Extract Files provide DBMS specific copies of the Optim sample database data SAMP_DB2 XF SAMP_IFX XF SAMP_MSS XF SAMP_MVS XF SAMP_ORC XF SAMP_SYB XF Sample JCL File The sample JCL file LOADDB2 jcl for running the DB2 z OS loader from an Optim Server is included in the Samples JCL subdirectory Appendix H Samples 513 514 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix I Data Privacy Data Tables Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and email addresses to generate transformed data that is both unique and valid within the context of the application Generally these data privacy tables are loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load them independently or when you configure an additional DB Alias You can use the data privacy data tables to e Prevent internal privacy breaches by de identifying or masking the data available to developers quality assurance testers and other personnel e Improve privacy compliance initiatives by substituting customer data with contextually accurate but fictionalized data e Protect confidential customer information and employee data in your application develo
167. Tablespace If you are dropping sample tables only the identifier is required Refer to Load Drop Sample Tables on page 104 210 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Load Drop Sample Data for Another DB Alias After you load or drop sample tables associated with a particular DB Alias the Configuration program displays the Load Drop Sample Data for Another DB Alias dialog and prompt you to load or drop sample tables associated with a different DB Alias If so the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens to restart the process Otherwise the process completes and returns to the main window Load Drop Data Privacy Data Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and email addresses to generate transformed data that is both valid and unique Generally these data privacy tables are loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load them independently or when you configure an additional workstation You can load refresh or drop data privacy data by selecting the Load Drop Data Privacy Data option which guides you through the process You can start this process by selecting Load Drop Data Privacy Data from the Tasks menu or by selecting the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Specify Optim Directory
168. The ACD name Modified By The identifier for the user account used to create or last modify the entry Modified Date The date and time the ACD was created or last modified Description Optional text that describes the ACD To open the Access Control Domain Editor and create a new ACD click the New ACD toolbar button select New ACD from the Tools menu or use the shortcut menu You can also use the shortcut menu to delete an ACD list FADs and ACLs that are based upon the ACD or open the ACL for the ACD 388 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Note Access permissions in the ACL for the ACD determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Delete shortcut menu option is not available to roles limited to read access Shortcut Menu Commands Although similar to the Open dialog described in detail in the Common Elements Manual the Access Control Domains dialog provides the following specialized shortcut menu commands New ACD Open the Access Control Domain Editor to create a new ACD Open Open the Access Control Domain Editor to view or edit the selected ACD Delete Delete the selected ACD from the Optim Directory Not available for the Default ACD Note When you delete an ACD the Default ACD becomes the basis for any FADs or ACLs based upon the ACD Roles that do not exist in the Default ACD are denied access List Object ACLs Open the Open Object Access Control List dialog
169. The following types of credentials are used with the Server e Credentials needed to run the Server and to start Optim processes e Credentials needed by the DBMS to access the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias Server Credentials Credentials required by the Server include a User ID Password and Domain for Windows only You must provide Server credentials for the following users e The user account under which the Server runs e The user account under which Optim processes run At installation the default is to run the Server under the Local System Account and Optim processes under the credentials from the initiating workstation The Local System Account is a special account for Services only that has full access to the local machine However the Local System Account cannot access mapped network drives You can provide other Server credentials on the Startup tab and the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet and the Server tab of Personal Options For UNIX or Linux you can specify Server credentials using the filelogon parameter of the pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg and the server parameter of the pstlocal configuration file pstlocal cfg Note For information about the Optim Server Settings applet see Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server on page 143 for details about Personal Options see Server Tab on page 269 and for information about UNIX and Linux configuration files see Config
170. These objects establish defaults for the Server and must be customized to reflect your network environment Use a text editor for example vi emacs CDE Text Editor textedit or xedit to modify these files Configuration Files Configuration files are ASCII text files and are installed in the etc directory that is subordinate to the PSTHOME directory PSTHOME is an environment variable set during installation that points to the directory in which the Server is installed The configuration file names for the Server are pstserv cfg Configures prosvce the Server daemon pstlocal cfg Configures local command line The appropriate Configuration file is loaded and validated when pr0svce or the Command Line Utility starts up You can also use prQsvce v to validate pstserv cfg or prOcmnd v to validate pstlocal cfg To reload the configuration file for prosvce while it is running use prOsvce u from a console under the user account for the daemon or use pr svce u userid from root After all clients have logged off the file is read reloaded and validated A console message and system log verify the file has been loaded Note Use prOsvce L or use prOsvce L userid from the root account to determine if the system is waiting to reload Shell Scripts The installed shell scripts are RTSETENV Defines the operating environment for the Server Installed in the PSTHOME directory and designed to be included in a user profile or
171. When the Install Location dialog opens a default destination is specified If this folder does not exist Optim creates it as part of the installation process Introduction v License Agreement C Program Files IBM Optim vZ Customer Information Restore Default Choose Vv Type of Installation gt Install Location Component Selection D ODM Information Shortcut Location D Summary gt Installation Installation Complete Install Location Displays the full default directory path for installing Optim Note If you are installing for a workstation with the Optim software on a file server you must specify a Directory Folder on the server where the software is installed Restore Default The full default directory path for installing Optim Browse Opens the Choose Folder dialog where you can select a different folder for installing Optim Previous returns to the Select the Type of Installation on page 27 dialog If you are doing a Full Installation Next continues to thg Install ODM on page 30 dialog If you selected Customized Installation thq Select Components on page 29 dialog is next 28 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Select Components The Select Components dialog displays if you chose Customized Installation It lists the components available for installation v Introduction Optim vV License Agreement h i Optim O
172. You can choose to require a password on the initial connection to the database for each session Configure First Workstation Always Require a Password for Current Mi E3 he Optim Configuration Program can configure this DB Alias so all users will have to enter a password on the initial connection to this database for each session When this option is selected users will not be permitted to store their password in the Windows Registry Once selected this option cannot be changed To enable this option select If you select this option a user of Optim must provide a password at the beginning of each session Once you select this option you cannot change it To continue click Proceed Share Connection Information If you wish to conserve the number of database connections and the new DB Alias represents the database in which the Optim Directory resides you may want to use only one connection for accessing both the Optim Directory and the data in the database For this reason the Configuration program displays the Share Connection Information for Current Database dialog after creating the packages plans or procedures 94 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Share Connection Information for Curren j Ea hen using this DB Alias you can share the connection and logon information with the Optim Directory To share the connection information select the Share Connection
173. You can modify these entries when you configure Personal Options Connect to Database Dialog The name of the Optim Directory is displayed and the Connect to Database dialog is populated with values entered when you created the Optim Directory Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 85 Configure First Workstation Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the Optim Directory Tables Optim Directory Name of the Optim Directory to which the registry entry applies Database Connection Parameters User ID Enter the User ID up to 30 characters that the DBMS requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Note For security and other reasons it may be desirable to specify a user account with privileges that differ from those required to configure the workstation Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Connection String The name or string required to access the Optim Directory database This value was entered earlier in the process and cannot be changed Note If you are using DB2 the term is Database Name or Alias Oracle uses DB Alias Sybase ASE uses Server Name SQL Server uses System Data Source Name and Informix uses Host Name Syntax is described in the DBMS documentation DB Name The name of the Sybase A
174. a lt gt Personal Options Confirm Definition Deletion Select to display a confirmation dialog before you delete a definition or process request from the Optim Directory Selecting this check box helps prevent deleting a request or definition accidentally Confirm File Overwrite Select to display a confirmation dialog before you overwrite an existing file Archive File Extract File Control File Compare File or Export File Note If you select this check box a confirmation dialog opens before you run a process However this confirmation does not display for a process request that is scheduled or run using the Command Line Interface Chapter 9 Personal Options 251 Confirm Loss of DDL in Convert Select to display a confirmation dialog during a Convert Process that can result in the loss of DDL statements The confirmation dialog is not displayed for a scheduled process request Display Tab Use the Display tab to select preferences for displaying information 9 Personal Options NULL value indicator Enter a character to represent a NULL value The question mark is the default Although you can choose any character to represent a NULL value an infrequently used character is best Delimiter for variable length column values Enter a character to delimit variable length column values that have trailing blanks The semicolon is the default Although you can choose any character as a delimiter an in
175. a privacy tables and loads refreshes tables the Configuration program displays the Insert Request Progress dialog Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 109 PRIVACY TABLES Insert Request Mie x 7710 Create Update Another DB Alias At this point the steps for creating a new DB Alias are complete To use Optim with additional databases you must create corresponding DB Aliases After you load the sample tables and the data privacy tables the Configuration program prompts you to create another DB Alias Your positive response opens the Create Select DB Alias dialog to repeat the configuration process for another database Note If the DB Alias you created is for a DB2 z OS database the Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships dialog displays instead of the prompt to create another DB Alias That dialog allows you to copy the DB2 relationships into the Optim Directory to reduce the run time when accessing DB2 tables as described in Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships on page 209 After that task is completed the Configuration program will prompt you to create another DB Alias as indicated above After all DB Aliases are created you can configure Personal and Product Options Refer to Configure Options on page 124 Create Multiple DB Aliases If you are using SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix you may have several databases on one server You can create multiple DB Aliases one for each database in a single op
176. ab The Status tab displays the current connections to the Server Optim Server Settings The Optim Server is not running on this machine 164 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Grid Details The following details display in the grid Client The sign on user name for the user Client Computer The network computer name for the computer Optim Directory The name of the Optim Directory in which the request resides Action The type of action that is running Request Displays the fully qualified name of the request that is running or Mirror to indicate the validation processing associated with the action that is running Started The date and time the action started Duration The duration of the connection Automatically Update Display Select this check box to automatically update refresh the display whenever a connection is established or broken and update the Duration column in the grid every minute Refresh Select Refresh to update the display on demand Refresh is unavailable when the Automatically Update Display check box is selected Note You can right click on a row and choose Cancel Request to cancel the specific connection with the workstation or Cancel all for Client to cancel all connections with the workstation Email Tab The Email tab allows you to automatically send logged messages generated by the Server to the listed email addresses The Server sends me
177. able Specify Configuration File In order to create the Product Configuration File you must provide the fully qualified name of the file The Specify Product Configuration File dialog prompts for this information Refer to Configure Options lon page 124 n page 124 for additional information Create Primary Keys If you add tables to a database you may use the Configuration program to create Optim Primary Keys for tables that do not have DBMS primary keys but do have unique indexes When you create Optim Primary Keys you must specify the Optim Directory and the DB Alias for the database where the tables reside Optim Primary Keys are usually created when you configure the first workstation or when you create a DB Alias After you install Optim you can create these primary keys by selecting Create Primary Keys from the Tasks menu or by selecting Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Specify Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog to specify the DB Alias for the database where you want to create Primary Keys 208 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Create Primary Keys Create Select DB Alias he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in
178. ables dialog on which you can specify a list of tables to audit Note Auditing is available in Personal Options only if the Auditing Status in Product Options is set to Active User Display Row Count Specify the default number of rows to display for each joined table in the Table Editor Use row count to manage the display area when you join several tables in the Table Editor Undo Levels Specify the default number of times 1 to 20 you can undo a commit to any row in the Table Editor You can specify the maximum number of undo levels or commit points per row Use undo commands to restore data in the Table Editor to a prior commit point For example if you change three columns in a row and commit that row you can undo the changes using one undo level If you set Undo Levels to 5 and you commit 7 times on a particular row you can undo only the last 5 committed changes to that row or return to the original row Default Data Display Select the default mode for adding tables to the Table Editor Click the down arrow to select Browse Browse Only or Edit mode for each table opened or joined in the Table Editor In Browse or Edit mode a table can appear only once in the Table Editor In Browse Only mode a table can appear more than once in the Table Editor You can switch from Browse Only mode to Browse or Edit mode by unjoining any duplicate tables selecting Preferences from the Tools menu on the Table Editor and selecting Browse
179. ach time you install Optim in a directory a signed exit must exist in the bin directory Signing Required After Each Install Unlike the Optim Security feature which you must initialize once per Optim Directory you must sign an exit each time you install Optim on a machine Moreover when you upgrade to a new Optim release you must sign a valid exit for each Optim installation before you can use Optim If you install a new version of Optim over a previous version you have to recopy your exit into the bin directory and resign it or sign the default exit The same is true if you reinstall Optim 50 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Anytime you replace a signed exit executable i e opmexit dll libopmexit so or libopmexit sl with another version of that exit you must sign the updated exit to use Optim This is true even if the executable was previously signed e g in another installation or copied from a backup of a signed exit Signing an Exit in Windows In Windows you can use the Configuration program to sign either the default exit or a user supplied exit although you may also use the pr0sign program to sign either exit Note To use Optim you must sign an exit for each installation of Optim on a Windows workstation or server This is also true if you installed multiple copies of Optim on a single machine Moreover if you copy a signed exit from one installation to another you must sign the exit again
180. acknowledge that the DBMS client and database character sets must be Unicode Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 97 Configure First Workstation Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 Mi E3 ou have selected the option to configure this DB Alias so character data is kept in nicode Format To enable this option both the DBMS client and Database character sets must be UTF 8 To confirm this option select the I Acknowledge the DBMS haracter Set Requirements checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next Information on Multi byte Format MBCS for a DB Alias If you select multi byte format in the Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge the following DBMS character set requirements for multi byte e Both the DBMS client and database must have the same supported multi byte character set e The Optim Directory must be in multi byte format 98 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Information on Multi byte Format MBCS fora DBA Biel Ea ou have selected the option to configure this DB Alias so character data is kept in Multi byte rmat To enable this feature both the DBMS client and Database must have the same Multi byte aracter set which must be listed as a supported Multi byte character set in the README TXT file is feature requires that the Optim Directory have either the Unicode or Multi byte feature enabled xj nennfirm t
181. al memory required for acceptable performance will depend on the number of Optim components that are open for example dialogs Optim Server ODBC server as well as the number of open tables the number of rows being read and the size of their column data It will also depend on the memory demands of all other applications and services active on the system In all cases it will be greater than the minimum amount of memory suggested by the Windows system requirements Virtual Memory Since Windows is a virtual memory operating system it can access more memory than actual physical memory It does this by writing pages sections of memory that are not currently referenced to a page file on disk When a page is referenced that is not in memory Windows loads it back into physical memory To do this it must make room for the page by swapping it with another page which in turn is written to the page file Therefore the more physical RAM a workstation has the less swapping needs to be done and performance improves greatly The amount of virtual memory page file space required will depend on the memory usage of all applications services and processes that are running Having a small amount of physical memory RAM means a slower system since time is spent swapping to and from a page file However having an insufficient amount of disk space allocated for virtual memory can cause one or more applications or even Windows itself to hang o
182. all listed roles except Default Selecting Columns from a Table Use the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog to select and add one or more names of columns from the table specified in the Table Access Control dialog to the Column List Source displays the fully qualified table name To open this dialog right click the blank row at the bottom of the Column List and do one of the following e Select Add column from the shortcut menu and then select From Database table from the submenu e Select Add column from the shortcut menu and then select From table in Archive File from the submenu to first specify an Archive File containing the table File Access Definition Table Column Selection Oy x Source DEMS OPTUS SALES SALESMAN_ID SALESMAN_NAME 420 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Click a column name to select it To select multiple columns hold the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking the column names To select all columns in the table click Select All Click OK to add the names of selected columns to the Column List and display the Table Access Control dialog again Selecting Columns from a Table in an Archive File When you select Add table from the Column List shortcut menu and select From table in an Archive File from the submenu the Open dialog is displayed to allow you to select an Archive File In the Open dialog select the server on which the file resides an
183. alled in a directory other than the default directory opt IBM Optim or the Server will be run under a user account other than root For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to RT4S Shell Script on page 348 0 Do not edit RT4S during installation 1 Edit RT4S during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rt4s 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstserv This keyword allows you to edit the pstserv configuration file during the installation process using the default text editor The pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg is used to configure the system to run the Server daemon Before you run that daemon you must modify the file to reflect your site requirements For detailed information needed to edit this file see Pstserv Configuration File on page 328 0 Do not edit pstserv during installation 1 Edit pstserv during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstserv 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstlocal This keyword allows you to edit the pstlocal configuration file during the installation process using the default text editor The pstlocal configuration file pstlocal cfg is used to configure the system for running the Command Line Utility For detailed information needed to edit this file see Pstlocal Configuration F
184. also include the index e ODM will use a unioned index until a column with a different name or attribute is found compatible attributes are not used The unique column and remaining columns in the index will not be processed Archive File Security If Archive File Security denies you access to a table or a column in table no rows are retrieved from the table Appendix F Open Data Manager 481 Archive File Collection Subsets You can specify a subset of files in an Archive File Collection using a data source definition connection string or SQL WHERE clause See Define the Data Source on the ODM Server on page 460 and Runtime Connection Information on page 476 The PST_AF_SUBSET pseudocolumn is logically added to each archived table during ODM processing and allows you to create a subset using an SQL WHERE clause Use the following syntax PST_AF_SUBSET AF_IN n n AF_ID_RANGE x y AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss AF_IN 1 n Archive Files to include where n is an Archive File name GUID or Archive File ID AF ID_RANGE x y A range of Archive File IDs where x is the start and y is the end AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mmiss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss A range of Archive File creation dates You must include the time of day hh mm ss You can use zeros to specify the time e g 00 00 00 The subset criteria can only be specified once in an SQL statement If
185. am to Configure Product Options You can use the Configuration program to configure Product Options when you first install and configure Optim 1 Open the Optim Configuration component 2 In the main window select Configure Options from the Tasks menu 3 Specify an Optim Directory and click Proceed 4 Click Skip on the Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature and Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Feature dialogs to open the Specify Product Configuration File dialog 5 Select Create New File or Use Existing File verify the name of the Configuration File and click Proceed to open the Modify Product Options dialog 6 Click Product Options to open the Enter Product Options Password dialog 7 Specify the case sensitive password to open the Product Options dialog The initial password is optim 8 Enter the necessary details on each tab in Product Options 9 Choose one of the following e To close the Product Options dialog without saving your changes click Cancel e To save your changes and continue using the Product Options dialog click Apply e To save your changes and close the Product Options dialog click OK to return to the Modify Product Options dialog 10 Click Proceed to open the Modify Personal Options dialog Configuring Product Options within Optim You can configure Product Options within Optim after you have installed and configured Optim Copyright IBM Co
186. ame a registry entry the Specify Registry Entry to Rename dialog is displayed The option to Rename Optim Directory Registry Entry is selected Specify the Name of the Optim Directory you want to rename in the registry To select from a list click the down arrow Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 197 Rename Optim Directory Specify Registry Entry to Rename he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory from he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue f Rename Optim Directory and Names a 1 Greate Mew Re y Entry for Existing Optim Directory Connect to Database When renaming an Optim Directory registry entry the Configuration program must connect to the database and verify the user has authorization to perform the task On the Connect to Database dialog you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that the workstation needs to connect to the Directory Confirm the Optim Directory Name After connecting to the database a pop up dialog displays the new Optim Directory name Click Yes to confirm the new name and rename the registry entry Click No to terminate the process Connect to Database After an Optim Directory registry entry is renamed the Configuration program updates connection information in the registry entry For subsequ
187. and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 527 IBM Corporation Software Interoperability Coordinator Department 49XA 3605 Highway 52 N Rochester MN 55901 U S A Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on general
188. and information needed to create a new Windows registry entry for the additional workstation The registry entry allows Optim to connect to the Optim Directory from the workstation Product Configuration File The last step in configuring each additional workstation is to identify an existing Product Configuration File created when you configured the first workstation You may modify Product and Personal Options if desired Configure the Server After you complete the installation and configuration for a Windows workstation that is to use Optim you can choose to configure the Server on it Alternatively you can install the Server from a console and use the Command Line Interface to configure the Server in the appropriate UNIX or Linux environment See Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux on page 293 for complete information On a Windows machine the Optim Server Settings dialog available from the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure and establish network connectivity between delegating workstations and machines hosting the Server In addition the workstations and any machine hosting the Server must have connectivity to the database containing the Optim Directory as well as the database containing data to be processed A Server must have Language Settings for each workstation that accesses it In a purely Windows environment you can use Regional Settings from the Windows Control Panel on
189. and names in separate Archive Files will be unioned To be processed a table need not exist in every Archive File ODM is not case sensitive ODM does not use DB Aliases however an Archive File cannot have two tables with matching creator IDs and names but different DB Aliases Matching tables are not required to have the same columns The union will include all column names in the matching tables Rows from a table that do not include a column found in another table will use a default value such as NULL a default date specified in the Archive File Collection Editor or an appropriate data type spaces zero etc Column Compatibility All columns with the same name that are in tables with matching creator Ds and names must have compatible attributes If columns have different but compatible attributes a compatible attribute will be used for those columns The column compatibility rules for the Compare Process apply to Archive File Collections For information about comparison compatibility rules refer to the Common Elements Manual For example columns COLX DECIMAL 8 2 and COLX DECIMAL 10 0 will become COLX DECIMAL 10 2 If a compatible attribute cannot be found e g COLX INTEGER and COLX TIMESTAMP the Archive File Collection Editor will display an error message Unioned Indexes Archive Indexes for unioned tables may also be unioned The following rules apply to unioned indexes e Each Archive File that includes the table must
190. any workstation having access to the new Optim Directory and Export File If you have upgraded your DBMS or if imported DB Aliases reference a DBMS version that is no longer supported by Optim you must run the Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias configuration task after converting the PST Directory Version 6 0 6 1 PST Directories on SQL Server PST Directory tables created with the Princeton Softech product versions 6 0 6 1 in an SQL Server database must be converted to accommodate Unicode support in later versions of Optim The Directory conversion process will copy data in 6 0 6 1 Directories to new Directory tables The new and old Directories will have the same name and PST object definitions After the Directory is converted you can still use the old Directory tables with the Princeton Softech product versions 6 0 6 1 or you can drop the 6 0 6 1 Directory Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 485 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories The Configuration program presents a series of dialogs that provide instructions to guide you through each step of the Conversion Process During the process you make selections appropriate to your particular site and circumstances Note Refer to Dialogs on page 67 for details on options that are common to the configuration dialogs To begin the process select Convert Optim Directory Objects from the File menu The first window is the Overview dialog lt gt Convert Optim Dir
191. arnings and information regarding the bind Note If problems or a failure occurs during the bind the Browse File dialog opens whether or not you select Always Display Output Define Character Format If the Optim Directory is in a DBMS for which Optim supports Unicode except SQL Server or multi byte you must indicate the character format of the Directory Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format If you are creating an Optim Directory in a DBMS for which Optim supports Unicode you are prompted to indicate whether the Optim Directory data is kept in Unicode format 80 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode F Mi E3 he Optim Configuration Program can configure this Optim Directory so data stored in it e g object names Optim Primary Keys Audit data etc is kept in Unicode format To in enable this option both the DBMS client and Database character sets must be UTF 8 hi er For any DB Alias to have the Unicode feature enabled Note For DB2 for Linux UNIX Windows databases The Special Considerations for an Optim Directory dialog is displayed next indicating that DB Aliases for DB2 for Linux UNIX Windows or DB2 for z OS databases in a DB2 for Linux UNIX Windows Optim Directory must use the same character format as the Directory Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data When you are creating an Optim Directory in a DB
192. ase connection To test the connection to an Oracle database 1 Open a MS DOS window 2 Change to the drive and directory where the Optim software was installed usually C Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN 3 Run the Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool with the name of the TNS Service to which you wish to connect For example ORACONN internal password beq local Microsoft Debugging Utility The Microsoft Debugging Utility USERDUMP EXE creates a memory dump for a process Since the output is quite large as much as 50 meg use this tool only at the request of Support To display a list of running processes and process IDs enter USERDUMP p To dump processes associated with a single process ID or image binary file name enter USERDUMP k lt ProcessSpec gt lt TargetDumpFile gt To dump processes associated with multiple process IDs or image binary file names enter USERDUMP m k lt ProcessSpec gt lt ProcessSpec gt d lt TargetDumpPath gt To dump Win32 GUI processes that appear to hang enter USERDUMP g k d lt 7argetDumpPath gt where k Optionally causes processes to be killed after being dumped lt ProcessSpec gt Is a decimal or Ox prefixed hex process ID or the base name and extension no path of the image file used to create a process lt TargetDumpFile gt Is a legal Win32 file specification If not specified dump files are generated in the current directory using a name based on the imag
193. ash for userid and do not specify a password dbalias ORACLE806 ORACLE806 DO806 rt password The location of the DBMS loader for a command line process You can specify a loader for a specific Optim Directory and DB Alias or specify a default loader be used for any DB Alias within a DBMS pstdir The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias The Optim Directory must be referenced in a pstdir entry A pstdir entry requires a dbalias entry dbalias The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the DB Alias The DB Alias must be referenced in a dbalias entry A dbalias entry requires a pstdir entry The Loader is the default for a DBMS You must also provide a value for dbmstype dbmstype DBMS type Enter Oracle Sybase Informix or Teradata pathtoloader Path to the executable loader file teradatatype 1 0 For the Teradata loader the load type Specify 1 for Teradata FastLoad or 0 for Teradata MultiLoad teradataconfig For the Teradata loader use this keyword to specify Teradata configuration parameters Teradata parameters can be specified for a particular Optim directory and DB Alias For example Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 339 teradataconfig pstdir dbalias tdatasvr userid password rowcntgle n You can specify Teradata configuration parameters to be used for any DB Alias in a DBMS For example teradatac
194. asks menu Specify Optim Directory The Configuration program displays the Specify Optim Directory dialog The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the name of the Optim Directory you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow To continue click Proceed Enable Disable Optim Server Feature On the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the current machine as a Server Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature Enable Disable Optim Ser Mi E3 he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 xP to be an Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to configure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Server feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step If the site is not licensed for the Server Enable is not available Refer to Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server on page 143 for configuration information 180 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine To enable or disable the ODBC interface capability of a machine select Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine from the Tasks menu Specify Optim Directory The Configuration program displays the Specify Optim Directory dialog The Use Existing Optim Directory
195. ata during the process of configuring an additional workstation or you can select Import Registry Data from the File menu The Import Optim Directory Registry Data dialog allows you to import registry entries and license information 132 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Additional Workstation Import Optim Directory Registry Data Mial Ea Optim he table on the left is initialized with the Optim Directory Registry Entries in the pecified file The table on the right indicates the entries to import Drag entries etween the two tables until the desired entries are present in the right table ptionally modify the User ID Password and Connection String For each Optim gt irectors Penicteas Fobra in khe rinqht Fable File Marne El m Import License Information Excluded From Import Selected For Import Descriptic aforas Previous Cancel Hi The Import Optim Directory Registry Data dialog includes the following File Name Enter the name of the file that contains the Optim Directory registry data you want to import Import License Information Select this check box to import license information if available in the specified file Excluded from Import List of available Optim Directories not selected for importing registry data Move an item from one list to the other by dragging the name Also to rearrange listed items drag the line number to the new position Name Name o
196. atabase table Note Optim can provide a default value according to the data type Possible values include blank NULL zero current date current time or current timestamp Yes Select this option to require a user supplied value for every column that cannot accept a default value If you select this option the User Supplies Defaults check box in Personal Options or Edit Preferences for the Table Editor is unavailable eo ae ee more information No Select this option if your site does not require userQsupplied values for columns that cannot accept a default value User Select this option to allow users to supply a value for any column that cannot accept a default value If you select this option users can modify this selection in Personal Options or Edit Preferences in the Table Editor Null as Default Choose whether to use the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns This option applies to new rows that a user inserts while editing a database table Note Optim can provide a default value based on the column data type Other than NULL possible values include blank zero current date current time and current timestamp Yes Select this option to display the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns when editing data If you select this option users cannot modify this selection in Personal Options or Fdit Ineferences in the Table Bator See Display NULL os Insert Default on page 75 for more i
197. ated feature list The values you specify for CHOSEN_FEATURE_LIST must match the values you specify for CHOSEN_INSTALL_ FEATURE _ LIST CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE LIST The list of features to install Values are Optim for Optim Server executables Sample for Optim sample files ODM for Open Data Manager 304 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Specify the values in a comma separated feature list The values you specify for CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST must match the values you specify for CHOSEN_FEATURE_LIST CHOSEN_INSTALL_SET The type of installation Values are Full installs all Optim features If you choose this value ensure that both CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST and CHOSEN_FEATURE_LIST include all the features Custom installs features specified in CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST USER_INPUT_ODM_NOW and USER_INPUT_ODM_LATER should be included in the properties file only if you are installing the ODM feature Otherwise remove them from the file USER_INPUT_ODM_NOW Installs and configures ODM now Values are 1 install ODM now 0 do not install ODM now USER_INPUT_ODM_LATER Copy the ODM files Values are 1 copy the files 0 do not copy the files Include USER_INPUT_ODM_USERLIC and USER_INPUT_ODM_TRIAL only if both these conditions are met e you are installing ODM CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST contains ODM and e you are installing and configuring ODM now USER_INPUT_ODM_NOW 1
198. ation Summary dialog 294 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide G If you selected Customized Installation the Component Selection dialog is displayed next See Select for an example of this dialog The Component Selection dialog lists all the features available for installation You can select e Optim Server Executable Files installs all files including shell scripts and configuration files needed to run the Optim Server e Sample Files installs sample Extract Files e Optim Open Data Manager Interface installs Open Data Manager ODM used with external applications to access data in Archive Files If you select Optim Open Data Manager Interface clicking Next displays the ODM Installation Information dialog See E above If you did not select Optim Open Data Manager Interface the Pre installation Summary dialog is next H The Pre installation Summary displays information such as destination location selected components and disk space required For an example of this dialog see Summary on page 33 You can make any changes by clicking Previous to return to a dialog and make modifications When you are ready to begin the installation process click Install I The Installing Optim panel displays showing a progress bar For an example of this panel see Installing IBM Optim on page 34 When the installation process completes these post installation steps begin e The rtedit command
199. ator to enable or disable Archive File Security for the Optim Directory Archive File Security controls access to tables and columns in Archive Files For more information about Archive File Security see Archive File Security on page 384 Configure Security Set Archive File Security Option he Configuration program can Enable or Disable the Archive File Security Feature For he current Optim Directory Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security Administrator Select an option to enable or disable the Archive File Security Feature lick lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 179 Optim Directory displays the directory name and Security Feature indicates Archive File Security is the option you can enable or disable Security State indicates that security for the option is Enabled or Disabled Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the Security Administrator To enable or disable Archive File Security select Enable or Disable and click Proceed If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the password for the Security Administrator must be entered Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server To change the status of a machine to or from that of a Server select Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server from the T
200. ayed in the text editor is stored for future reference in the prOsign txt file in the rt temp directory Optim will display the Sign Optim Exit dialog along with the text editor window so you can do one of the following e If you can resolve error you can sign the exit 360 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e If you cannot resolve the error select No in response to the question Do you want to sign the default Optim Exit and then click Next After Optim is installed you can fix the problem that caused the error and then sign the exit you want to use by running either the opmdsign script file to sign the default exit or the opmusign script to sign a user supplied exit of your own creation Signing the Default Exit after an Installation After Optim is installed there are two options available in UNIX to sign the default exit if you did not sign that exit during setup e Run the script file opmdsign located in the rt sbin directory The letter d in the script s name indicates that it is used to sign the default exit e Run Setup again but do not select any components for installation Run the opmdsign Script This section describes how to run the opmdsign script As part of setup Optim places the script file opmdsign in the rt sbin directory When you use Setup to sign the default exit it launches this script file to set up the environment and calls prOsign You may also run t
201. basis for roles listed in a new FAD select a name from the Access Control Domain drop down list Appendix D Optim Security 413 e To edit the Table List or list columns for explicit permissions use the shortcut menu e To list a Role select a role name from the Role drop down list in the Table Access Control grid e To allow or deny access to the table or column select the appropriate check boxes 4 Click OK to save the FAD These steps are the minimum required to create or edit an FAD For complete details refer to Definition Editor File Access Definition Editor Use the File Access Definition Editor to define a File Access Definition This dialog allows you to select an Access Control Domain to be used as the basis for the File Access Definition select tables to secure using the Table List and define access permissions for each selected table using the Table Access Control list You can also define access permissions for columns in a listed table Open the File Access Definition Editor by selecting the Tools gt New FAD menu option in the File Access Definitions dialog You can also open that Editor for an existing File Access Definition by double clicking a listing in the File Access Definitions dialog Untitled File Access Definition Editor File Edit Tools Options Help AlS alia l Description Access Control Domain Default Table List Table Access Control Explicit 2 T
202. bjects 520 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Drop All Optim Created Database Objects without Prompting When you select this option and click Proceed you are cautioned that every Optim Directory and DB Alias accessible from the workstation will be dropped without further prompting Uninstall Optim Are You Sure Proceed with caution Every Optim Directory that is accessible to the workstation along ith all of their DB Aliases will be dropped Select the Drop all Optim created database objects without prompting option then select lt Proceed gt to proceed Select lt Cancel gt o abort the entire uninstall process Select the check box on the Are You Sure dialog and click Proceed to drop all Optim objects Click Cancel to abort the uninstall process If a password is required to access a particular database you will be prompted for it When the Optim sample database tables are to be dropped you will be prompted to confirm that the correct tables are dropped When the data privacy tables are to be dropped you will also be prompted to confirm that the correct tables are dropped Do Not Drop Any Optim Created Database Objects When you select this option and click Proceed all Optim created database objects remain unchanged and intact but the Optim software is removed from the workstation Appendix J Uninstalling 521 Cancel the Uninstall Process If you select Cancel on any window
203. bles provided with Optim You may also choose to drop a DB Alias or Optim Directory Tables as well as enable or disable the Optim Security features Each task is described in the following sections Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 169 Create Update DB Alias Optim supports the use of any number of database instances However there must be a unique DB Alias in the active Optim Directory for each database instance A DB Alias serves as a high level qualifier for naming database tables and provides a single name for connecting to a particular database You can define the necessary DB Aliases at installation or use the Configuration program to add DB Aliases after installation by selecting Configuration Assistant from the Help menu or by selecting Create Update DB Alias from the Tasks menu Notes e If using the Server to access data referenced by the DB Alias you also must add the DB Alias information to the Connections tab on the Optim Server Settings applet See Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server on page 143 e If Object Security is enabled and DB Alias objects are secured when saved a new DB Alias is secured by an ACL modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL If the Optim Object Template ACL has not been defined when you create a DB Alias you must define an ACL for each object that requires an ACL For more information about securing objects see Access Control List on page 405 Specify Optim Directory The firs
204. can force selected Optim Object types to be secure when hey are saved Select the object types that you require to be secure Use a right ouse click to select or deselect all Optim Object types Click lt OK gt to confirm the selection or lt Cancel gt to leave the previous selection unchanged Archive Request Calendar MEE Column Map Ves Column Map Proc ME Compare Request 2 Convert Request The following shortcut menu commands are available 178 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Select All Select all objects in the list Deselect All Clear all selections in the list Invert Selection Reverse selected and unselected object types Optim Object Template ACL ACLs for Optim objects are modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL The Optim Object Template ACL does not secure any objects and can be edited by the Security Administrator only The Security Administrator can open the Access Control List Editor and edit the Optim Object Template ACL from the Configuration program or the main window e From the Configuration program click Edit Optim Object Template ACL from the Set Optim Object Security Option dialog e From the main window click Optim Object Template ACL from the Security submenu on the Options menu For information about editing ACLs see Access Control List Editor on page 407 Set Archive File Security Option The Set Archive File Security Option dialog allows the Security Administr
205. cation for error or more severe messages Default exception Send email notification for exception messages n A number of days from 0 to 999 after which a message is resent for a persistent error or warning Specify 0 to resend messages immediately 0 or blank Do not resend messages Default 1 Resend a notification for a persistent error or warning clear Clear messages to be resent when the Server starts adminemailnotify admin company net error 0 false admin2 company net success 7 true archiveretentionpolicy Option to scan Optim Directories for Archive Files with an expired retention period If the retention period has expired the Server will delete the Archive File Archive Index File Archive Index Browse File Archive Directory entry and Archive Files on backup devices To delete backup files you must use the centeraavail or tivoliavail parameters NetWorker backups cannot be deleted hh mm The time of day to scan the Optim Directories Use 24 hour time format for example 1 30 p m is 13 30 Midnight is 00 00 Enter to use the default 00 01 pstdirectory The Optim Directories to scan Separate multiple entries with a comma or space Enter for all Directories archiveretentionpolicy 01 00 pstdirl pstdir2 archiveretentionpolicy 03 00 pstdir3 pstdir4 centeraavail Use Centera with the Archive Retention Policy 0 or blank Do not delete backup files on Centera Default 1 Delete backup files on Ce
206. cedure Qualifier and Grant Authorization ID required to create refresh stored procedures Note The default values apply to all databases unless otherwise specified on the Databases tab Databases Tab The Databases tab on the Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog allows you to provide explicit information for each DB Alias Sel Select the check box to create a DB Alias for the database If you do not want to create a DB Alias clear the check box This grid column is locked in position so you can scroll to the left or right and still see the selections for the databases Note If a DB Alias for a database exists the grid row is protected and shaded 116 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Database Name The name assigned to the database when it was created DB Alias Name The identifier that allows the software to access the database This name also serves as the highAlevel qualifier for database table names This entry is required and is populated with the database name in upper case by default DB Alias Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the DB Alias Procedure Action Options to create refresh procedures or use existing procedures To select an option click the grid cell and click the down arrow Note When creating procedures to be shared for access to all Sybase ASE or SQL Server databases on the server this grid cell is protected The first selected entry is displayed as Create Refresh
207. cedures while configuring the first or additional workstations In some cases this logon may have additional privileges than the Saved Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults Specify the default procedure Qualifier and Grant Auth ID required to create refresh stored procedures Note The default values apply to all DB Aliases unless otherwise specified on the Databases tab Databases Tab Use the Databases tab to review a list of all databases that reside on the single server You can also specify explicit details for the DB Aliases you want to update Sel Select a check box to update a DB Alias for a particular database If you do not want to update a DB Alias clear the check box This grid column is locked in position so you can scroll to the left or right and still see the selected databases Database Name Name assigned to the database when it was created DB Alias Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the DB Alias Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 205 Procedure Qualifier Enter a high level qualifier for stored procedures If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used Procedure Action Select options to create refresh procedures or use existing procedures To select an option click in the grid cell and click the down arrow Grant Auth ID Enter an identifier for authorized users to maintain stored procedures Specify a User ID Group Name or Public If blank t
208. cess Definition Table Column Selection dialog to select the names of one or more tables in the Archive File Click a table name to select it To select multiple tables hold the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking the table names To select names of all tables in the Archive File click Select All Click OK to add the selected names to the Table List and display the File Access Definition Editor again Defining Access Permissions for Columns Permissions for columns are defined using a method similar to that for tables To define access permissions for one or more columns in a table right click the table name in the File Access Definition Editor Table List and select List Columns from the shortcut menu The Table Access Control dialog is displayed Appendix D Optim Security 417 Table Access Control DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS fia KIG KII LARI gt 4 O EA I a e Explicit gt ORR ordeR DATE fone L a FREIGHT CHARGES noe ej ORDER SALESMAN Noe C z ORDER PosTED_Date Noe C aj ORDER SHP DATE Noe a Caj euso hoe oO Table The table for which column access permissions are defined Use Table to select other names from the Table List in the Access Definition Editor and define column access permissions Column List Default and names of columns in the table for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Select an entry in the list to display or define corresponding access per
209. cess the Optim Directory e Identify a Product Configuration File for the workstation You must repeat these steps for each workstation you want to use with Optim After you configure the first workstation and any additional workstations you are ready to configure the Server component if licensed for it and carry out the other tasks available from the Tasks menu The following chapters describe how to configure the Server and perform other tasks Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 141 142 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server The Server option allows users to define tasks on a workstation and direct resource intensive data processing functions to a machine more suited to the task When a task requires the movement processing or storage of very large volumes of data the request can be defined at the workstation in the normal way then directed for remote processing on the machine hosting the Server If this machine is the machine on which the database is running network traffic associated with the movement of data is eliminated You can also install the Server on a machine dedicated to the Server function In addition a Server is required to process from a database residing in a UNIX environment and to support access to archived data using IBM s Open Data Manager Note In a UNIX environment the Server is installed from a console and configured using the Command Line Interface S
210. cessing opens the Optim Directory when reading a configuration file or obtaining Windows registry information After the Optim Directory is open the Archive File or Archive File Collection is validated ARCV_FILE archivefilename The fully qualified Archive File name ARCV_GUID ggg g The Archive File GUID This value is expressed between curved brackets Y ARCV_ID n The Archive File ID number COLLECTIONS archivefilecollection The Archive File Collection name PST_AF_SUBSET AF_IN AF_DATE_RANGE AF_ID_RANGE Subsets an Archive File Collection to specific Archive Files Use one of the following parameters AF_IN 1 n Archive Files to include where n is an Archive File name GUID or Archive File ID If a specified Archive File cannot be found the process will fail Appendix F Open Data Manager 461 AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss A range of Archive File creation dates You must include the time of day hh mm ss You can use zeros to specify the time e g 00 00 00 AF ID_RANGE x y A range of Archive File IDs where x is the start and y is the end PSTTRACE COMP n 1 An optional attribute for turning on the Optim Trace file This attribute should be used at the direction of Optim support Do not use commas in the PSTTRACE attribute Define an ODM data source This section describes how to define an ODM data source To define an ODM
211. check boxes Show Process Log Display the Security Export Process Log generated by the last execution of Security Definition Export Run Export To export security definitions choose the File gt Run menu option Note The Run command will not be available until you have specified security definitions for export a Secured Output File and a password During Security Definition Export processing the Export Progress pane displays the number of security definitions of each type that are exported and the number of errors encountered The status bar displays information about the current security definition that is processed When Security Definition Export processing is finished the status bar displays the message Ready Export Errors If errors occur during Security Definition Export processing for example a dropped definition is selected for export an error message is displayed Definitions for which processing errors occur are also represented visually by a red X Errors and diagnostic information are written to the Security Export Process Log Security Export Process Log When the Security Definition Export is complete select the Tools gt Show Process Log menu option to display the Security Export Process Log Appendix D Optim Security 427 Security Export Process Log Iof x Fie Options Help Security Export Process Log Created on 2 19 2008 at 16 20 25 Access Control Domains Exported Default Exp
212. check boxes associated with the objects you want to import To exclude an object clear the corresponding check box You must select at least one object definition to run the Import Process Continue Import if Errors Indicate whether processing should stop if an error occurs To continue processing if an error occurs select the check box To halt processing if an error occurs clear the check box Overwrite Existing Definitions Indicate what action is required when the name of an imported object matches that of an object already in the current Optim Directory e To select any or all objects and overwrite the existing definitions in the Directory select the check box e To prevent overwriting objects clear the check box Run Import This task describes how to run the Import Process There are two ways to run the Import Process e If you want to import all selected objects at one time i e in one import process click Next 498 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e If you want to import a group of objects in one import process and import another group in a separate import process click Import Each time you click Import the objects selected in the Optim Definitions list are processed but the Import dialog remains displayed so you can select the next group of objects you want to import For example if you want to import all Access Definitions in one import process import all Table Maps in another import process
213. chive Extract Control or Compare Files Set defaults for emphasizing differences between rows when browsing Compare Files Archive Identify the default Archive Directory and Archive Index Directory and select options that apply when archiving data Removable Media Provide default segment size values Actions Set options for displaying tabs in Action Request Editors printing Column Map procedures and retaining reports Printer Set printer font and language preferences for printing a request or definition Database Select options for handling multi byte round trip conversion errors cascade deletes and database connections For Sybase ASE you can also specify whether to run in Unchained mode Notify Specify default options and a list of addresses used for sending an email message when a request is processed or only if a request succeeds or fails General Tab Use the General tab to identify the Temporary Work Directory Data Directory and the directory for the Product Configuration File used by the workstation and other defaults Use as SQL LIKE Character Select to use the underscore character to represent any single character in a pattern For example if Use as SQL LIKE Character is selected you can type PSTDEMO M _ _ P in the pattern box on the Open an Access Definition dialog to list only Access Definitions with a name beginning with M and ending with P for the Identifier PSTDEMO If you clear this check box
214. choose balloon style Clear the check box to choose flat style default Flat Style Toolbars Controls the appearance of the toolbars Select the check box to choose flat style Clear the check box to choose 3D style default Main Window Options for displaying the list of active dialogs and editors in the main window As you open each editor or dialog the main window expands to list the active editors and dialogs To recall an active editor or dialog double click the item in the list Maximum visible components in list Specify the maximum number of active editors or dialogs 5 to 99 displayed in the main window The default value is 10 If the number of active editors and dialogs exceeds the maximum you can scroll the list If fewer editors or dialogs are in use the bottom of the list is blank Auto size Main Window to list Select to automatically resize the main window as editors and dialogs are added to the list If you clear this check box the main window is sized to display the maximum number of editors and dialogs that can be listed Chapter 9 Personal Options 253 Large Object LOB Default Native LOB Mode Select this check box to set the default for the Native LOB Mode check box on the Columns tab of the Table Specifications dialog available through the Access Definition Editor You can use the check box on the Table Specifications dialog when preparing an Access Definition for use with Edit When editing the check bo
215. cifications and then retry the Import process by clicking Import Conversion Complete This task describes how to complete the Conversion Process When you finish importing objects the Conversion Process opens the Complete dialog Click Close on that dialog to return to the Configuration main window where you can quit the program or perform other tasks Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 499 Convert Optim Directory Objects Complete he Configuration process is complete The Following files may have been created uring this session ile Name Contains QL TXT Generated SOL statements IND TXT Contains DB2 Bind report EYS TXT Optim Key s created ROCNFG LOG Log of messages generated during this session h liel eo Claecans ka ehanen namnkhar ankian Femna kha Mmm Fim a kimm manu zi Close Ready A Conversion Process for Directory Tables on SQL Server The Conversion Process for a version 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory on an SQL Server database is part of the normal Directory maintenance performed after installing a new version of Optim After performing the conversion you can keep or drop the old Directory Converting Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables in SQL Server To convert version 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory tables in an SQL Server database use the Create Update Optim Directory or Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access options available from the Configuration program Tasks menu After s
216. cified for this DB Alias i e on the Index Defaults tab of the DB Alias Editor as well as the following lt DEFAULT gt Select to use the default buffer pool specified by DB2 z OS When creating an index Optim does not generate a BUFFERPOOL clause in the Create statement lt SOURCE gt Select to use the same buffer pool as the index for the source Archive or Extract File Create Aliases Tab Use the Aliases tab to select default options for creating new aliases You can specify a default alias when you use DB2 LUW or DB2 z OS 264 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Personal Options Identifier Specify the default identifier for new aliases based on the identifier from one of the following Object Use the identifier from the corresponding target object as the default for new aliases For aliases the corresponding target object is the table view or alias referenced in the alias Source Use the identifier from the source alias as the default for new aliases Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new aliases Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new aliases If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Create Triggers Tab Use the Triggers tab to select default options for creating new triggers You can specify a default trigger when you use DB2 LUW
217. ck Update Product Configuration File s Use the Choose Product Configuration File dialog to list Product Configuration Files to update Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 159 Choose Product Configuration File lolx Enter the name this server will be known to cients RINCETO 34EC8 1 Check the Product Configuration File s you wish updated with Endpoints cancel You cannot UNDO changes made to the Product Configuration File s Note If a Product Configuration File to be updated is unavailable from the Choose Product Configuration File dialog the file must be updated manually on the corresponding workstation Enter the name this server will be known to clients Enter a name for the Server The name you enter is added to the list of available Servers displayed in action request editors that can use a Server for remote processing Grid Details Product Configuration File Specify the complete path to each Product Configuration File to be updated To select from your system directories click the grid cell and click the browse button Each time you enter a Product Configuration File you are prompted for the corresponding password The password is set in Product Options Password When you enter the password for a Product Configuration File the first time the password is saved for future updates to the Product Configuration File For security reasons the password displays as a series of asterisks
218. ck box under Auditing Defaults in Product Options is selected the table is audited If Active User Check for the table name on the Product Options list in the Audit Tables dialog e If the table is on the list and Enabled the table is audited e If the table is on the list and Disabled the table is not audited Check the Edit tab in the Personal Options dialog to determine if the Auditing Active check box is selected If it is check for the table name on the Personal Options list in the Audit Tables dialog e If the table is on the list and Enabled the table is audited based on the default specifications in Product Options e If the table is on the list and Disabled the table is not audited If the table is not on either list and the Enabled check box under Auditing Defaults in Product Options is selected the table is audited If Inactive The audit feature is disabled and the table is not audited Servers Tab When a task requires the movement processing or storage of very large volumes of data the request can be defined at a workstation in the normal way then directed for remote processing on a machine hosting the Server If a workstation on your network is configured as a Server you must provide the appropriate communication protocols so that other workstations can transfer process requests to it Use the Servers tab to specify communication parameters for any Servers on your network 236 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Config
219. cle client uses a non Unicode character set that is not supported by Optim an error results 6 If the character set for the database server is not supported an error results 16 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Microsoft SQL Server Because SQL Server does not differentiate based on Unicode characteristics you need not indicate whether an SQL Server Optim Directory or DB Alias is kept in Unicode format However the following rules apply 1 An Optim Directory in an SQL Server database is kept in Unicode format You must indicate whether any DB Aliases for Unicode supported databases are to be kept in Unicode format 2 A DB Alias for an SQL Server database must use the same character format as the Optim Directory Sybase ASE To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the Sybase ASE database client must be compatible with the character set of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 If the client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 2 If the client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 3 If the client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results DB2 Linux UNIX Windows To prevent any loss of data the character set us
220. client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 3 If the client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 4 If the client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 5 DB2 z OS DB Aliases in an Oracle Sybase ASE or MS SQL Server Optim Directory can have different Unicode formats however Optim cannot connect to both a Unicode enabled DB2 z OS database and a non Unicode enabled DB2 z OS database during the same session If a DB2 z OS Tablespace includes both Unicode and non Unicode tables you must create a separate DB Alias for each table type a Unicode DB Alias and a non Unicode DB Alias During Load Processing you can use only one connection either Unicode or non Unicode You must exit Optim before switching between a Unicode or non Unicode connection If the Load Process includes UTF 8 characters in table or column names the Control File will be in UTF 8 format Before transferring a UTF 8 Control File to a z OS machine the file must be converted to binary format To browse a UTF 8 Control File on a z OS machine you must apply IBM SPE APAR OA07685 ISPF Browse Support for Unicode to the machine Informix Unicode support is available for Informix If an Optim Directory is in an Informix Unicode database all DB Aliases must be Unicode
221. client access to 153 Enable Disable 124 Endpoints 157 Error defaults 147 General defaults 145 install under UNIX or Linux 293 Loader defaults 148 Logon dialog 271 Maximum Processes 146 Index 533 Optim Server continued Merge Current User 151 152 Mirror process 146 name 145 160 Network Access 157 Personal Options 270 Protocols 157 Security 159 Security defaults 156 Service Logon 155 Settings Dialog 143 Start as Process 154 Start as Service 154 Startup defaults 154 Status 164 Trace Files 146 update Configuration File 159 Oracle create drop packages for DB Alias 92 for Optim Directory 78 Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool 19 P Password always ask for 87 always require 94 case sensitive 134 connection information 4 credentials 369 for each workstation 7 for product options 128 230 Product Configuration File 128 Password tab Product Options 230 Personal Options 143 168 247 291 actions 281 archive 278 browsing files 276 configuring 247 confirm 251 creating objects 260 database 286 DBMS loaders 258 display 252 editing data 272 email notification and configuration 288 error defaults 255 MBCS Roundtrip Processing 287 printers language options 284 removable media 280 scheduling monitor 257 servers 237 set general defaults 249 to logon 268 Planning for Installation and Configuration 7 PROCMND 375 Primary Keys creating for database 5 208 select database tables 103 Printer Opt
222. committed rows are extracted from the table unless the Uncommitted Read check box is cleared Default Inactive The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and cleared by default Uncommitted rows are not extracted from the table unless the Uncommitted Read check box is cleared Notes e If you choose to extract uncommitted rows the relational integrity of the data in the Archive or Extract File may be compromised Use caution if inserting data from any Archive or Extract File with uncommitted rows e Optim disables the extracting of uncommitted rows if the DBMS or version does not support it regardless of the setting Parallel Processing Set options to determine the maximum number of concurrent database connections allowed Increasing database connections improves performance when processing large quantities of data by allowing multiple threads to process rows in parallel Allow Parallel Processing Select this check box to enable Maximum Database Connections Maximum Database Connections Increase the maximum number of concurrent database connections for an Archive Extract or Delete Process You can select an even number of maximum database connections from 2 through 32 or Maximum Your selection enables Database Connections on the Archive Extract and Delete Request Editors and Maximum Database Connections in Personal Options see Parallel Processing on page 286 MBCS Roundtrip Processing O
223. ct one of these options Continue Auditing Optim will continue to generate audit records This is the default Stop Auditing Optim will not generate audit records for processes Purge Records Deletes all audit records for the Optim Directory A confirmation prompt displays ie Opi DY Select lt YES gt to proceed with the deletion of all audit records for the AUDITDIR Optim Directory 224 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Database Tab Use the Database tab to manage database activity during Insert Restore and Delete Processes Product Options Iof x General Database Configuration File Password Edit Servers Archive Load Report Maximum Commit Frequency M Parallel Processing 200 IV Allow Parallel Processing Maximum Database Connections Sybase Unchained Mode A 1 x Inactive he lV Allow User to Lock Tables MBCS Roundtrip Processing IV Allow Insert Action Delete Option 4rchive Extract Requests Stop IV Enforce DBMS Rel Name Lengths Insert Load Convert Requests Ignore all round trip Failures Extract using Uncommitted Read M DBMS Buffer Limits Inactive x Fetch Buffer Size Delete Buffer Size s 12K s 12K bd V Use Oracle Array Delete I Allow Optim PK Rels on DB Views Undo Defaults Maximum Commit Frequency Specify the maximum number of rows 1 999999 inserted restored or deleted before chang
224. ct the Type of Installation The Type dialog prompts you to choose a full installation of Optim or to set up registry entries and shortcuts only Introduction v License Agreement v Customer Information Type of Installation Install Location gt Component Selection D ODM Information Shortcut Location D Summary Installation Installation Complete Select e Full Install to install Optim on a particular workstation server or network drive This type of setup includes Windows registry entries and shortcuts to access Optim from the workstation you are using e Customized Installation to select components If Optim is already installed on your network and you want to access it from the workstation you are using select the option to install Installation of registry entries and shortcuts In the lower portion of the dialog indicate whether you would like the workstation to share the Personal Options and other information in the same registry or use a separate registry for each user Click Anyone who uses this computer all users to share the registry information or click Only for me to allow each user to have a private copy of the registry information Previous returns to the Customer Information on page 26 dialog Next continues with the Install Location on page 28 dialog Chapter 2 Installation 27 Install Location The Optim software must be installed in a destination directory folder
225. ction Tab Use the Connection tab to provide DBMS connection information for all DB Aliases in any Optim Directory required to perform delegated tasks Note You can expedite the configuration of the Connection settings for the Server by clicking Merge Current User This merges the Connection settings for the logged on user in the Current User registry with settings for the Server machine in the Local Machine registry amp Optim Server Settings Ai et a edo a eed ed A ee eI ai if lt Directory gt ee gor822k Auasi 2 Settings on the Connection tab and the Security tab are related On the Security tab you choose Server or Client to specify the source of the User ID and Password information for Optim Directory and DB Alias access e If you select Server on the Security tab the appropriate User ID and password entered on the Connection tab are used the User ID and password from the workstation originating the task are not used Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 151 e If you select Client on the Security tab the User ID and password from the workstation originating the task are used Note The Connection String information you enter on the Connection tab is used regardless of whether you select Server or Client on the Security tab Leave the connection string blank or select the Always Fail Connection check box to prevent the Server from accessing an Optim Directory and or DB Alias when performing delegated ta
226. ctionary in Oracle e Plans to access Catalog Tables in DB2 e Procedures to access System Tables in Sybase ASE or SQL Server e Procedures to access Catalog Tables in Informix When the process completes the database signature is updated automatically and the Complete dialog displays Update Multiple DB Aliases If you are updating the DBMS version for Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix you may have several databases on one server The procedure to update the DBMS for multiple DB Aliases is similar to the procedure for updating the DBMS for a single DB Alias After you select the DB Alias and specify the new DBMS version the Configuration program automatically displays the following dialog showing all the DB Aliases that reside on a particular server 204 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide E Update the DBMS Yersion for a DB Alias Update Multiple DB Aliases j EG Optim will drop the Optim created Procedures created For the previous DBMS version It will hen create new Procedures to access the System Tables for each selected database fefe deja Jeje Jeje dejo dejal r afe ose sas oop fous The Update Multiple DB Aliases dialog displays the following tabs Databases Review a list of all databases that reside on the single server Specify explicit information for each DB Alias you want to update Logon Defaults Specify the default User ID and Password needed to create refresh stored pro
227. ctory in which Optim is installed before you can sign it The same is true when you modify an exit If a signed exit does not exist you cannot use Optim See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for more information on creating a user supplied exit Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit If you want to use your own user supplied exit certain requirements apply e The exit load linked module name must be appropriate for your platform as shown below Platform Linked Module File Name Windows opmexit dll AIX Solaris Linux libopmexit so HPUX libopmexit sl e You must copy the exit file to the bin directory before you run the opmusign script in UNIX The opmusign script is used to sign a user specified exit while the opmdsign script is used to sign the default Optim exit e The exit file must exist in the bin directory and be signed on every Optim installation Thus each time you install Optim in a directory a signed exit must exist in the bin directory If you install a new version of Optim over a previous version you have to recopy your exit into the bin directory and resign it or sign the default exit Signing Required After Each Install Unlike the Optim Security feature which you must initialize once per Optim Directory you must sign an exit each time you install Optim on a machine Moreover when you upgrade to a new Optim release you must sign a valid exit for each Optim installa
228. ctory or DB Alias use a percent sign for the name For example prOpass a pstdir myuserid mypassword prOpass a dbalias myuserid mypassword This example would provide a password for the following parameters in the configuration file pstdir pstdirl Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr myuserid pstdir pstdir2 Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr myuserid dbalias pstdirl dbaliasl connectstr myuserid dbalias pstdirl dbalias2 connectstr myuserid dbalias pstdir2 dbalias3 connectstr myuserid But would not provide a password for these parameters in the configuration file pstdir pstdir3 Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr otherid dbalias pstdirl dbalias3 connectstr otherid Protecting the Password File This section describes how to protect the password file By default the owner and the root user have write access to the password file and can use the commands prOpass a or prOpass d to update the password file To allow other members of the group to update the password file you must use the chmod command to change permissions to the password file For example the following command adds write permission to the group for the pstpass file chmod gtw lt installdir gt etc pstpass This allows members of the group to maintain passwords for their accounts However if members of the group other than the owner have write permission anyone in the group can delete a password or the password file at the risk of disabling the prod
229. cured Archive Files A secured Archive File must have an accompanying Security File in order to be registered Using the Archive Directory Maintenance dialog you can export the security information for an Archive File into a Security File The Security File protects the Archive File by requiring a password to register the Archive File During registration the secured Archive File is associated with a new or existing File Access Definition in the target Optim Directory For more information about registering Archive Files and the Archive Directory Maintenance dialog refer to the Archive User Manual Use the File Access Definition Editor to create and maintain File Access Definitions You can open the ACL for a File Access Definition from this dialog or from the File Access Definitions dialog Create or Edit a FAD This section explains how to create or edit a File Access Definition To create or edit a File Access Definition 1 In the main window select the Options gt Security gt File Access Definitions menu option to open the File Access Definitions dialog 2 The next step depends on your purpose e To create a new FAD select New FAD from the Tools menu in the File Access Definitions dialog to open the File Access Definition Editor e To edit an existing FAD double click the grid row to display the desired FAD in the File Access Definition Editor 3 The next step depends on your purpose e To change the ACD used as the
230. d a currently logged on user the machine can be left unattended Note When the Server runs as a service mapped drives are unavailable Start as Process The Server starts in a DOS window The security of the logged on user applies you cannot use a service logon Start When When Start as Service is selected Manual Only the logged on user can start the Server You can use the Optim Server Settings dialog to start the Server Automatic The Server starts when the system boots 154 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide When Start as Process is selected Manual Select Optim from the Windows Start Menu Automatic When Optim starts Optim is added to the Start Startup menu Service Logon When Start as Service is selected you must provide service logon information Use Local System account Select this check box to use the logon information for the local machine as provided on the Personal Options Server tab If you clear this check box you must provide explicit credentials as follows User ID Enter the appropriate User ID If these Server credentials are used to access files external to the Server the User ID must have the following privileges e Act as part of the operating system SeTcbPrivilege e Increase quotas SeIncreaseQuotaPrivilege e Replace a process level token SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege e Bypass traverse checking SeChangeNotifyPrivilege For more information about the
231. d and Write permission for all users Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 331 RUSR_ Read Permission for User RGRP Read Permission for the group that includes User ROTH Read Permission for all users outside Group WUSR Write Permission for User WGRP Write Permission for the group that includes User WOTH Write Permission for all users outside Group RALL Read permission for all users WALL Write permission for all users SYSTEM The system default typically Read and Write permission for the User and Read Only for Group and Other Default filemode system e When filelogon is local the user account under which the pr0Osvce daemon is started is User e When filelogon is client the user that creates a file is User e When filelogon is server the explicitly supplied user account is User endpoint pstdir 332 The TCP port that prOsvce monitors for RPC connections from clients Valid settings are tcpportnumber A numeric value from 1024 to 65534 1024 The default setting endpoint 6736 Connection information for an Optim directory Use pstdir for each Optim directory that can be accessed on behalf of a client Note that the Optim directory is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and that connection to the directory is not verified until required by a client name Name of the Optim directory dbmstype Database Management System as DB2 Oracle Sybase
232. d check boxes Show Process Log Display the Security Import Process Log generated by the last execution of Security Definition Import Process Tab Use the Process tab to identify the Secured Input File select security definitions for import and provide parameters for Security Definition Import processing The tab is populated with defaults you have specified Appendix D Optim Security 429 Import Security Definitions JW Access Control Domain Current amp Access Control List Access Control Domains Access Control Lists File Access Definitions Import errors encountered E C temp Secdefs txt Hie E Definitions The Import Security Definitions Utility populates the list of security definitions by e Identifying the security definitions in the Secured Input File If there are no definitions of a specific type e g no FADs the check box for the definition type is shaded Otherwise you can expand the list of definitions of the type by clicking the plus sign e Scanning the Optim Directory and identifying the security definitions in the Secured Input File that exist in the Directory The check box to the left of each listed definition is selected or not according to the Overwrite existing definitions setting If Overwrite existing definitions is not selected the check boxes to the left of definitions that exist in the current Optim Directory are shaded and selected and are unavailable for Import
233. d click Proceed to display the Information on Creating a New Optim Directory dialog Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 487 Convert Optim Directory Objects Information on Creating a New Opti i EG ou have requested to Create a new Optim Directory After you Create the Optim Directory you will continue to Step 2 of the Convert Optim Directory Objects Task Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step From this point the task is similar to creating an Optim Directory when configuring the first workstation These steps are described briefly in the following paragraphs For further details refer to Directory on page 72 Specify Optim Directory The first step in creating a new Optim Directory is to provide the name of the Optim Directory The Configuration program prompts for this information by presenting the Specify Optim Directory dialog You must select Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry and specify a Directory name Note The name of the new Directory must be different from the name of the old Directory Specify Optim Directory DBMS You must then specify the database in which to create the new Optim Directory tables On the Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog specify the type and version of DBMS software and optionally provide a description of the Optim Directory Connect to Database The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to create the new Optim Director
234. d click Refresh Use Look In to select the directory or path containing the file and double click a listed file name or enter the file name and click Open The names of columns in the selected table are listed in the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog Source indicates the fully qualified name of the table Note The selected Archive File must contain a table with a fully qualified name that matches the name in Table on the Table Access Control dialog File Access Definition Example The following example File Access Definition includes three types of access a default a restricted table CUSTOMERS and a restricted column ORDERS ORDER_ID The roles specified in the example are part of the PSTUSER Access Control Domain ACD The ACD validates the roles and associates them with users in your network Default Access For the first entry on the Table List Default all roles and users except the Guest role are allowed to access tables in the Archive File that are not listed in Table List OPTUSR FIRST File Access Definition Editor File Edit Tools Options Help alelalalal 8 S Description Access Control Domain TEST2 Table List Table Access Control Access e In the Table List the Default setting for tables not listed uses the Default AC Type The Default AC Type assigns access permissions to the Default setting and any other tables that use Default Appendix D
235. d if more rows than 5000 Fully qualified path for Teradata FastLoad f a Fully qualified path for Teradata MultiLoad Server Name Teradata User ID Teradata Password mea Ready Ms Use FastLoad if more rows than Row count to determine whether FastLoad or MultiLoad is used Allowable values are 0 to 999 999 999 If you specify 0 or do not specify a value MultiLoad is used For any other value FastLoad is used if the row count of the load file is greater than the value you specify for Use FastLoad if more rows than Fully Qualified Path for Teradata FastLoad Provide the directory path and program name for the Teradata FastLoad Consult your Teradata documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button Fully Qualified Path for Teradata MultiLoad Provide the directory path and program name for the Teradata MultiLoad Consult your Teradata documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button Server Name Name of the Teradata server Teradata User ID Teradata User ID for the user creating the Load Request 150 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Teradata Password Teradata password for the user creating the Load Request Merge Current User Click Merge Current User to merge the settings from the Current User registry to the Local Machine registry for the Server machine Conne
236. data source 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the primary ODM Server list and the Bindings list to display the NAV member 2 Right click the NAV member and select Open as XML from the shortcut menu to open the NAV binding editor 3 Select the Source tab H Design localhost bindings NAY binding bnd Attunity Studio File Edit Navigate Search Project Window Help le nel ao aa E besion EM Machines lt binding name NAV gt Ej 8 B localhost lt datasources name NAV gt BO Bindings lt datasource name NYCUSTS type PST_GDB gt B ty lt config arcv_file C Optim data N Custs AF dirdb OPTIMDIR gt Daemons lt datasource gt users lt datasources gt E Solutions lt environment name NAV gt lt misc codePage language ENUS gt lt queryProcessor gt lt optimizer gt lt transactions gt lt odbe gt lt oledb gt lt tuning gt lt debug logFile timeTrace true gt lt fenvironmment gt lt binding gt E properties HN e e SY 8 Name Path localhost bindings NAY s 4 Design Source line 4 Edit the lt datasource gt statement to name the data source 5 Edit the lt config gt statement to identify an Archive File or Archive File Collection and the Optim Directory in which it is registered 6 From the File menu select Save All 462 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide ODBC Data So
237. dation pop up is displayed 428 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Type the Password for the Secured Input File and click OK Select options on the Process Owners and Objects tabs Choose the File gt Run menu option Monitor progress in Import Progress NOOR OQ Choose the Tools gt Show Process Log menu option to review or print the Import Process Log Import Dialog The Import Security Definitions dialog has three tabs Each tab and menu command available on the dialog serves a unique purpose Process Identify the Secured Input File select security definitions you want to import and provide parameters for Security Definition Import processing Owners Change the owner of ACLs you want to import Objects Designate names for the imported security definitions File Menu Set as Default Save your entries on the Import Security Definitions dialog as the default specifications The settings for the following options on the Process tab are saved e Allow ACL for nonexistent Optim objects e Overwrite existing definitions e Continue import if error s Tools Menu The following commands are available from the Tools menu Select All Definitions Select check boxes for all listed security definitions This command is especially useful when you want to import all or most security definitions Deselect All Definitions Clear the check boxes for all listed security definitions including shaded and or selecte
238. dialog opens as illustrated in the following figure 68 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Browse SQL of x CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE pstuser PSTV0200 DSSAUDI TYPE t userid IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 U INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t actiondt IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t type IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 AUD INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t_seqno IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 SE INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t_subseqno IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER b M Display SOL cance The Browse SQL dialog displays the generated DDL statements in sequence e To display the next DDL statement select the Display SQL check box may be checked when the dialog opens e To execute remaining DDL statements without review clear the Display SQL check box Note The check box to Display SQL is dynamic If selected or cleared on one dialog it automatically changes on other dialogs where appropriate Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus 69 70 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 5 Configure Workstations Two Configuration tasks are used to configure workstations to use Optim The first Configure the First Workstation creates the Optim Directory and establishes connectivity to databases through the creation of associated DB Aliases If additional workstations are used the Configure Additional Wo
239. directory that does not exist Optim creates it for you along with the subdirectories RT and Bin Click Next to continue to the Shutdown Information dialog C The Shutdown Information dialog describes shutting down any Optim or RT Servers that are running Next displays the Type of Installation dialog D For an example of the Type of Installationdialog see Select the Type of Installation on page 27 On the Type of Installation dialog choose from these options e Full Installation of your Optim Solution installs all components of Optim Optim Server Executable Files Sample Files and Optim Open Data Manager Interface e Customized Installation allows you to manually select the Optim components to install If you select Full Installation of your Optim Solution clicking Next continues to the ODM Installation Information dialog Selecting Customized Installation and clicking Next displays the Component Selection dialog E See Install ODM on page 30 for an example of the ODM Installation Information dialog This dialog prompts you to choose from these options e Install and Configure ODM Now installs ODM as part of this install process e Only Copy the ODM Files copies the ODM files for you to install at a later time F If you select Install and Configure ODM Now click Next and the Open Data Manager ODM License Information dialog displays Selecting Only Copy the ODM Files and clicking Next displays the Pre install
240. does not exist on the target system the Create Utility uses the default Allocation Percent Enter a percent 0 to 999 to adjust SQL storage related parameters for the Create Utility The default is 100 Allocation percent is available for creating tables and indexes in Oracle and creating indexes in DB2 z OS Target SQL is generated based on the values of the objects in a Source File If you specify zero 0 the storage related clause in the SQL statement is omitted Using any value other than zero results in a percentage of the source value being used in the target clause Create Indexes Tab Use the Indexes tab to select a default identifier for creating new indexes Specify an allocation percent to adjust SQL storage related parameters for Oracle and DB2 z OS Specify the default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating indexes 262 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Personal Options Identifier Specify the default identifier for new indexes based on the identifier from one of the following Table Use the identifier from a corresponding target table as the default for new indexes Source Use the identifier from the source index as the default for new indexes Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new indexes Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new indexes If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 t
241. e For details about the configuration files refer to Pstserv Configuration File on page 328 and Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility on page 336 Password File Parameters in both configuration files may include system user ids i e filelogon webserver server and tivoliavail DBMS logons i e pstdir and dbalias with passwords To secure passwords for configuration parameters you can use an encrypted password file separate from the configuration files The prOpass program maintains the password file encrypting passwords for parameters in the configuration files By default the password file is installed in the etc pstpass subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory However you can override the location and name of the file by providing the full path and file name in PSTPASS an environment variable Refer to RTSETENV Shell Script on page 346 for a description of the PSTPASS environment variable Users that can start prOsvce or execute prOcmnd or prOcoms must have permission to read the password file and users that use prOpass must be able to write to the password file Note Do not move the password file to another system to do so will corrupt the file To use encrypted passwords e Execute pr0pass from the Command Line to add the passwords You must be logged on to the Install directory as the owner as a user within the fenced group or as the root user e Within the configu
242. e Create Select DB Alias dialog opens to restart the process Otherwise the process completes and returns to the main window Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables At times it may be necessary to drop a DB Alias or an Optim Directory Use Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables to guide you in performing one or both tasks The following guidelines apply Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 211 e When you drop a DB Alias Optim can no longer access data in that database and any Optim objects that refer to the DB Alias are invalid However you can recreate the DB Alias and restore access to the database and Optim objects e When you drop an Optim Directory the DB Aliases and other Optim objects stored in the Directory cannot be recovered Specify Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory that stores the DB Alias you want to drop or to specify the Optim Directory you want to drop Click Proceed to open the next dialog Connect to Database Optim must connect to the database to drop the Optim Directory tables and packages plans or procedures Use the Connect to Database dialog see Connect to Database on page 183 to specify the connection information Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see Create Select DB Alias on page 185 to specify a DB Alias you want to drop Click Proceed to
243. e silent installer If the installer properties file is in the same directory as install bin use the command install bin i silent If the installer properties file is in a different directory than install bin use the command install bin fdirectorypathinstaller properties where directorypath is the fully qualified path to the directory for the installer properties file After the installation completes see Configuration on page 327 to establish defaults for the Server Installation Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 Installing the Server takes only a few minutes and can be performed using a graphical interface or from the command line The graphical interface option uses the setup program to guide you through the installation process To use this option see Run Setup Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 Note A graphical workstation is required to run the setup program and a defined DISPLAY environment variable must point to the workstation To ensure that you have the proper environment for running setup open a terminal session and issue the following command echo DISPLAY The command should return a valid identifier for your graphical workstation If not see your System Administrator The command line option uses a setup options file setupopts in which you define your installation settings To use this option see Installing from a Network Drive Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 You can copy the contents of t
244. e 328 RT4S shell script 348 RTSERVER shell script 347 RISETENV shell script 346 securing 351 355 configuration files 353 355 password file 353 trace days 330 338 User Defined Types Replace UDTs Personal Option 261 User ID credentials 369 DB Alias access 101 Optim Directory access 86 required authority 75 W Warn on Cascade 223 287 Windows Registry access to Optim Directory 4 exporting entries 5 importing entries 6 Merge Current User 7 151 152 Index 535 536 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Printed in USA
245. e File Access Definition privilege in the Default ACD If Functional Security is not enabled a user account must be a member of a role with update access to the ACL for the Default ACD Using Secured Archive Files You can limit the ability of roles to process or view archived data at the level of table or column For a Restore Process members of a role can insert or update from a table and column in a secured Archive File if permitted If the account is not permitted to access a column that affects the referential integrity of the data e g a primary key an error message is displayed in the Process Report For a Delete Process only an account that is permitted access to data in a table and column in a secured Archive File can delete database data from that table and column If an account is not permitted to access a column that affects the referential integrity of the data e g a primary key an error message is displayed in the Process Report For a Browse session an account must be permitted access to data in a table and column in a secured Archive File in order to browse the data Accounts that are denied access to data in all tables or columns in a secured Archive File cannot use the file in any Archive process or Browse session A message indicates that the file cannot be opened If an Archive File is associated with a File Access Definition that does not exist the file cannot be used to define or run a process Registering Se
246. e NULL value indicator use the Display tab on the Personal Options dialog Note Site management may set Product Options to restrict the use of this feature User Supplies Defaults Select to require a user supplied value for every column that cannot accept a default value If you clear this check box Optim provides a value based on the column data type Possible values include blank zero current date current time or current timestamp Note Site management may set Product Options to restrict use of this feature Prompt for Variables Select to request a prompt for default values associated with substitution variables in an Access Definition You can use substitution variables in selection criteria to specify data to browse or edit Retain SelCrit for Self Ref Rels Select to apply selection criteria each time a table is self referenced in the Table Editor Clear the check box to remove as the default selection criteria when the table is self referenced Note A table can only be self referenced when the Table Editor is in Browse mode Auditing Active Select to activate the Audit option for tracking database changes when you edit data If you select this option click Audit Tables to specify the tables you want to audit If you prefer not to use this option clear the check box Note Site management may set Product Options to restrict the use of this option Chapter 9 Personal Options 273 Audit Tables Click to open the Audit T
247. e Tasks 377 PSTDIRPASSWORD Password for connection password A value is required if the Always Prompt for Password option is active for the Optim Directory PSTDIRUSERID User account with DBMS permission to connect userid If TASK MAINTPST the user account must have the authority through System Privileges or Roles to create the tables and to catalog the packages plans or procedures under the appropriate table identifier DB Alias DBAACTION Processing indicator for the DB Alias CreateNew Create a new DB Alias named by DBANAME UseExisting Use the existing DB Alias indicated by DBANAME DBANAME Name of DB Alias dbaliasname Required if TASK DB or TASK MAINTCAT CONNECTSTR Connection string for the database associated with the DB Alias dbmscnctstr Required if TASK DB or TASK MAINTCAT PASSWORD Password for connection password Required if the Always Prompt for Password option is active for the DB Alias or if creating a DB Alias using TASK DB PASSWORDREQUIRED Always Require Password option for a new DB Alias TASK DB Keyword is ignored for an existing DB Alias TRUE ON or YES Always require a password FALSE OFF or NO Save the password in the registry USERID User account with DBMS permission to connect to database associated with the DB Alias Required if the Always Prompt for Password option is active for the DB Alias or if creating a DB Alias using TASK DB use
248. e a Optim Primary key for every table that does not have a primary key but does have a unique index defined Click lt Proceed gt to E display a list of unique indexes if they exist or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Note You can also create Optim Primary Keys on a table by table basis 102 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Select Tables The Select Tables dialog allows you to select tables for creating Optim Primary Keys ia Configure First Workstation Select Tables Optim e following tables have a unique index but do not have a Primary Key defined Drag p remove tables from the list of Primary Keys to be created then cick lt OK gt to create ptim Primary Key s or lt Cancel gt to return to the previous window DE Alias OPTIMUSER Selected Tables Excluded Tables Table Name MANISHAP MANISHAP 4 MANISHAP The Select Tables dialog includes DB Alias DB Alias associated with the list of tables Selected Tables List of tables selected for creating primary keys To remove a table from the list drag the table name to Excluded Tables Creator ID Identifier for the table Creator ID in DB2 Schema Name in Oracle and Owner ID for SQL Server Sybase ASE and Informix Table Name Name of the table Index Name Name of the unique index Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 103 Excluded Tables List of excluded tables available for creating primary keys To sel
249. e command line that is use IMPORT Migrate FMF Invoke Migrate FMF File Maintenance Facility privilege is required to perform the Archive File Migration process that is use MIGRATE and the File Maintenance processes Remove Rows and Compress that is use FMF Restart Retry Invoke Restart Retry privilege is required to restart or retry processes from the command line that is use RESTARTRETRY Run Invoke Run privilege is required to run processes from the command line that is use R Table Editor Invoke Table Editor privilege is required to edit tables from the command line that is use E Configuration Actions Invoke Configuration Actions privileges are required to perform tasks within the Configuration program for example Create Update DB Alias The respective Tasks menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Create Update DB Alias Drop Optim Directory DB Alias Update DBMS Version for DB Alias Definition Editors Invoke Definition Editor privileges are required to create or edit an Optim object for example an Access Definition The respective Definitions menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Access Definition Column Map Column Map Proc edure DB Alias Point and Shoot Primary Key Relationship Table Map Appendix D Opt
250. e file name d lt 7TargetDumpPath gt Is the directory in which the dump files are to be created The default is the current directory If a Toolbox Process Is Hanging To dump the main Toolbox process if that is the one that is hanging 1 Open a MS DOS window 2 Enter USERDUMP p to get a list of processes and process IDs Look for the process PROTOOL EXE 3 Enter USERDUMP nnnnn where nnnnn is the process id for PROTOOL EXE 20 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide The program will take about 10 or 20 seconds to produce the dump file A dump file will be created in the current directory unless you specified a target dump file name with a name similar to PROTOOL DMP Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 22 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 2 Installation Installing Optim takes only a few minutes The program guides you through the installation process You can install Optim using the graphical user interface console install or silent install When installation completes use the Configuration program to prepare your workstations to use Optim To install Optim from the graphical user interface see Install Introduction Installing from the console is detailed in Console Install Windows on page 35 Information for the silent install is in Silent Installer Windows on page 44 You can find information needed to install and configure the Optim Server Server feature o
251. e has the following columns and data SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE First name CHAR 15 characters FIRSTNAME_F Table The FIRSTNAME F table has the following columns and data for females SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE First name CHAR 15 characters FIRSTNAME_M Table The FIRSTNAME_M table has the following columns and data for males SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE First name CHAR 15 characters LASTNAME Table The LASTNAME table has the following columns and data SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE Last name CHAR 15 characters Appendix I Data Privacy Data Tables 517 518 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix J Uninstalling To remove Optim from a workstation use the Add Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel as follows Select Add Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel Select IBM Optim from the list of programs on the Add Remove Programs dialog 5 Add or Remove Programs amp Currently installed programs Show updates Sort by Name x Change or Wizard Remove Programs PF Hummingbird Exceed Size 95 40MB r jG IBM Optim 6 5 0 ty lick here for su Add New i Programs Last Used On 1 17 2 0 i rogram or remove it from your computer click Change Remove Ta Char 5 Change Remove ER rr Intel Matrix Storage Manager Size 14 96MB Windows Components amp J2SE De
252. e name is CUSTOMERS and you specify 4 for From Left and 2 for From Right the subset of the table name used is CUSTRS Show Full Column Name When Local Proc Select this check box to include the full column name in the generated Local Column Map procedure name If you clear this check box use the From Left and From Right controls to specify a subset of the column name From Left indicates the number of bytes to use from the beginning of the column name From Right indicates the number of bytes to use from the end of the column name For example if the column name is SALESMAN_ID and you specify 0 for From Left and 2 for From Right the subset of the column name used is ID Note You can specify 0 for From Left and 0 for From Right to indicate that no part of the name is used However you must use part of either the table name or the column name Column Map Max Shuffle Retries Default number of times the Column Map Shuffle Function will refetch a replacement value until a value that does not match the source row is found a retry The Shuffle Function retry parameter overrides this default Enter a value from 0 1000 Enter 0 to allow a replacement value to match the source The default is 10 Note Using a high retry value with columns that contain many duplicate values will increase the processing time For these columns it may be best to use a retry value of zero Action Display Defaults Show Currency Tab Page Select to di
253. e object is not granted object association privilege for the ACD that forms the basis for the Template ACL the owner creator of the object is prompted to define the required ACL Note Only the Security Administrator can define the Optim Object Template ACL using the Configuration Program or selecting the Options gt Security menu option in the main window See Set Optim Object Security Option on page 176 for further information Manually Associate an Object With an ACL You can create an ACL manually by selecting the Tools gt Edit ACL menu option in the object editor or the shortcut menu in the Open dialog to display the Access Control List Editor You can also use these options to edit an ACL Settings in the Optim Object Template ACL if the Template ACL exists are used to populate the Access Control List Editor If there is no Optim Object Template ACL the editor is blank Remove an ACL You cannot delete the ACL for an object for which security is required To delete an ACL you must be the ACL owner or in a role that is allowed Delete permission for the ACL To remove the ACL for an object select the Tools gt Delete ACL menu option in an object editor or right click the object name in the Open dialog and select Delete ACL from the shortcut menu You can also click Delete on the Access Control List Editor Create or Edit an ACL This section explains how to create or edit an Access Control List To create or edit an Acces
254. e table OPTIM_CUSTOMERS as follows e Discards rows that have a value of zero 0 in the YTD_SALES column and processes all other rows e Assigns a value of SE003 to the SALESMAN_ID column for all customers in Florida rows with FL in the STATE column 510 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide To reference this sample in a Column Map you must specify EXIT PSTEXIT in the source column for the destination column SALESMAN_ID Sample Source Format Exit A Source Format Exit is typically called to format the source column for example for an Age Function that otherwise would not be supported in a Column Map The sample performs the following operations on the sample database table OPTIM_ORDERS e Discards rows that have a value of SE012 in the SALESMAN_ID column and processes all other rows e Ages ORDER_DATE for rows that have a value of SEO005 in the SALESMAN_ID column and skips all other rows To use this sample you must specify the exit routine as part of the Age Function in the ORDER_DATE source column of the Column Map as follows AGE 1W SC ORDER_DATE SRCEXIT PSTEXIT Sample Destination Format Exit A Destination Format Exit is typically called to format the destination column for example for an Age Function that otherwise would not be supported in a Column Map The sample performs the following operations on the sample database table OPTIM_ORDERS e Discards rows that have a value of
255. e tables The Create Optim Directory Tables dialog prompts you for the information to create these tables You can also specify the tablespace for tables individually or as a group and browse the DDL generated to create the Optim Directory tables Configure First Workstation Create Optim Directory Tables Optim he Optim Directory tables are used to store Optim Objects that contain information For very database with which you want to use Optim Each Optim Directory table can be oaded into a different Tablespace which can be separate from your application tables pecify a default Tablespace and optionally a Tablespace name to override the default nr a Ontin Directory Table Thou are using Fhe Audit ankinn For Feit TRM recormends Directory Table Specifications Directory Table Tablespace Schema Name optusr4 PSTARCYFDAT2 ria gt A El PSTARCYFILE2 PSTARCYSEG2 Default Tablespace PSTARCYTBL2 PSTAUDIT2 lt DB Default gt z PSTAUDITK2 Tl Display SQL Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel Oracle Q0R922K The Create Optim Directory Tables dialog displays the following details Directory Table Specifications Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 77 Schema Name Enter an identifier for the Optim Directory tables The label is Creator ID when creating the Optim Directory for a DB2 database Schema Name fo
256. e the Create Drop Packages dialog or the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog to specify the identifier for new or existing packages plans or procedures when available You can use common stored procedures for Sybase ASE Configure First Workstation Create Drop Packages Optim must use Optim created Packages to access the Data Dictionary The Optim configuration program can create new Packages or can use Packages created for another Optim Directory for that database Specify whether to create or use the existing Packages If enabled specify the Package Schema Name PUBLIC The Create Drop Packages dialog includes the following DB Alias The previously entered name for the DB Alias for which packages plans or procedures are being created Tables Type of tables Data Dictionary Catalog Tables or System Tables depending upon the DBMS for which packages plans or procedures are being created Stored Procedure Specifications Create Refresh Select this option to create new or refresh existing packages plans or procedures This option is always available when creating a new DB Alias and is the default selection when the dialog opens 92 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Use Existing Select this option to use existing packages plans or procedures The Configuration program creates a DB Alias that refers to the packages plans or procedures but does not verify that they exist Drop Drop existin
257. e user and group accounts from a list of members in a network domain Remove Remove the selected user or group account from the role Remove All Remove all user and group accounts from the role Everyone Group The Everyone group includes all users in all Windows domains and UNIX nodes in your network This group is not available in the Security Users and Groups dialog To add this group to a role type Everyone in User Group leave Domain blank and select the Type Group Security Users and Groups When you select Add Users Groups from the shortcut menu on the Users tab the Security Users and Groups dialog is displayed Use the Security Users and Groups dialog to select user and group accounts in a network domain 394 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide E Security Users and Groups ioj x Server Name Domain Local a Users Description Select All Deselect All li 16DE9185 C768 453 23B6E4B0 9CDF 46 NA Acct Ops NA ADC_YDYVBSBGO NA alains NA Calendar for manager department tasks Domain Description Select All rfa gt Members can administer domain user and group Deselect All ik Account Operators NA Accounting NA All users with Rights to Accounting Applications Refresh accounting 1 NA admin NA Admin Users NA D mham iem mdan md mn an n gE Cee ee ee ee ee ee T eee ee ee ete ee Sire
258. eady Activate Archive Retention Select this check box to scan the selected Optim Directories If you clear the check box the Optim Directories are not scanned but the parameters on the Retention tab remain Allow delete from File Backup Devices List of the Backup Devices integrated with Archive Select the appropriate check box es to allow the device to delete the Archive File when the retention policy has elapsed Tivoli Options Specify the node name and password that allow the Server to access the Tivoli tape backup device Note To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs Node Name Identifier needed to access the Tivoli tape backup device Password Password needed to access the Tivoli tape backup device Note For security reasons the password is displayed as a series of asterisks Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 163 Time of day to scan The time to begin scanning the Optim Directories Use 24 hour time format for example 1 30 p m is 13 30 Optim Directories to scan Optim Directories registered with the Server Select the Optim Directories to scan for Archive Files with a retention policy All Optim Directories Select to automatically scan all Optim Directories registered with the Server Note Selecting this option also ensures that any future Optim Directories registered with the Server are scanned Status T
259. eature For he current Optim Directory Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security Administrator Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Object Security feature lick lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Optim Directory displays the directory name and Security Feature indicates Optim Object Security is the option you can enable or disable Security State indicates that security for the option is Enabled or Disabled Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the Security Administrator Configuring Object Security Use the Set Optim Object Security Option dialog to configure Object Security by doing the following e Enabling or disabling Object Security Indicating whether selected objects are automatically assigned an ACL when saved e Defining the Optim Object Template ACL To enable or disable Optim Object Security select Enable or Disable After configuring Object Security click Proceed If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the password for the Security Administrator must be entered Automatically Assigning an ACL Use the Secure Selected Objects When Saved option to automatically assign an ACL to an object when it is saved The ACL is modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL For more information about using the Optim Object Template ACL see Opti
260. ech Writers DBMS OPTUSR FIRSTNAME None DBMS OPTUSR LASTNAME None Description Enter text that describes the File Access Definition Access Control Domain Type or select the name of an Access Control Domain ACD to use as the basis for the File Access Definition The ACD translates the roles specified in the Table Access Control list into accounts in your network After a File Access Definition is saved you can select a different ACD by modifying the associated ACL 414 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Table List Default and names of tables for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Select an entry in the list to display or define corresponding access permissions in the Table Access Control list The Default setting applies to archived data in tables not otherwise listed and cannot be deleted gt Identifies the active entry to select an entry click the arrow Table The fully qualified table name You cannot save a File Access Definition if any table name is not fully qualified Type the fully qualified three part name or use Add Table from the shortcut menu to select a table name from a database or an Archive File To remove a table name select the row number and press Delete or use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Any security settings for tables or columns that are not in the secured Archive File have no effect AC Type The type of access
261. ect an excluded table drag the table name to Selected Tables Creator ID Identifier for the table Creator ID in DB2 Schema Name in Oracle and Owner ID for SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix Table Name Name of the table Index Name Name of the unique index When the process completes you are prompted to load the sample database tables Load Sample Tables This software is distributed with sample data tables You can use these tables for training and to experiment with sample data before applying the software to your own database tables Generally the sample data is loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load or refresh that data by selecting Load Drop Sample Data from the Tasks menu Load Drop Sample Tables The Load Drop Sample Tables dialog allows you to provide the identifier Creator ID Schema or Owner ID and tablespace for the sample tables before they are loaded 104 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide amp Configure First Workstation Load D mop Sample Tables Optim e Configuration program can load the sample tables for example OPTIM_CUSTOMERS OPTIM_DETAILS etc into your database and can refresh or drop sample tables if they ready exist Select an option to load refresh or drop the sample tables Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step j DE Alias OPTIMUSER Load Refresh Sample Tables i Drop Samp
262. ect pek_vrm jar where vrm is the version release and modification of Infosphere Data Architect For example Infosphere Data Architect V7 5 2 uses the product activation kit com ibm infosphere data architect pek_7 5 2 jar 5 In Installation Manager click File gt Preferences click Add Repository and specify the location of the Optim Designer installation repository on the Optim Designer installation disc or in the Optim Designer installation package The Optim Designer installation repository is located in the repo folder on the Optim Designer installation disc or in the Optim Designer installation package Click OK until you return to the main Installation Manager window 6 In Installation Manager click Install and complete the installation wizard for Optim Designer Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 523 524 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix L Process Audit Optim Process Audit is a facility that enables a site to monitor Optim processes and obtain information about their execution When a process is started Optim collects information such as the type of request and the user who initiated it and writes audit records to an XML document Audit records are produced whether a process is run from a menu or editor using the Command Line Interface or as a scheduled job When you enable Process Audit for an Optim Directory auditing is active for all users of these processes Archive Browse Compare Conver
263. ected to the Server Additionally processing can be initiated from a console using a Command Line Interface Installation Installing the Server in a Linux or UNIX environment can be performed using the graphical user interface or from the command line There are differences in the installation process depending upon your environment The information in this section applies to all Linux and UNIX platforms except Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 For all Linux and UNIX environments except Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 this section outlines installing the Optim Server using the graphical user interface To install from the console see Installer UNIX or Linux on page 295 To use the silent installer see Silent Installer UNIX on page For sites using Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 refer to Installation Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 on Installing from the Graphical User Interface Before you begin e You may need to give executable permission to install bin e Clear the following directories if they exist tmp softech and absoluteInstallLocation rt bin etc e Create tmp softech if it does not exist To start installing the Optim Server using the graphical user interface either e Double click in install bin or e At the command prompt use install bin Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 293 The installation process begins Each panel displays showing the step of the installation You can click Next to continue th
264. ectory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Connect to Database The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to access the old Optim Directory tables The entries in the Connect to Database dialog are populated with values entered when the old Directory was created Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 491 lt gt Convert Optim Directory Objects Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the selected task Connection String The name or string needed for the server to access the Optim Directory database Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID 492 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Export Old Directory Definitions After the workstation is connected to the database you can export objects using this dialog Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 2 Export Data from an Old 0 BI ES he Optim Configuration program has determined the version of Optim that was used to reate the old PST Directory IF this is not correct select the correct version Then select
265. ectory Notice the rt subdirectory appended to the installation directory this is required Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 361 3 362 Run the opmdsign script in the rt sbin subdirectory and specify the present working directory In the following example the user specified the system variable pwd to indicate that users roberts rtinstalled rt is the present working directory The pwd variable has the same effect as specifying the directory s full path t cd users roberts rtinstalledsrt sbinfopmdsign pwd pr sign d Please walt Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company pA Note In the above example the prOsign d parameter shown on the third line was generated by the signing script to indicate the default script is being signed Type your company credentials when prompted for that information Your company credentials consist of the company ID Name and Password assigned to your organization when you received Optim All three entries are case sensitive and you must enter them in the format provided to you Press Enter after each prompt to display the next prompt After you specify your company ID for example press Enter to display the Name prompt IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide cd fusers roberts ttinstalled rt sbinfopmusign pwd orllsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to you
266. ectory Objects Overview he objects in any Optim Directory created with a 5 x version of Optim must be onverted to work with the current version of Optim Optim Directories created with an earlier version must first be upgraded to 5 x Converting Optim Directory Objects is accomplished in a 3 step process Step 1 Create a new Optim Directory Step 2 Export H Click Proceed to continue Step 1 Create a New Optim Directory The next dialog prompts you to create a new Optim Directory This Directory will store objects exported from the old Directory 486 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 1 Create a New Optim Direct Miel Ea Optim n Step 1 you must either create a new Optim Directory or use an existing Optim irectory that was created with this version of the Optim Configuration Program The ew Optim Directory will ultimately house the converted data The old Optim Directory ill not be modified nor will it be used by this version of Optim To create a new Optim cs ptions Create a New Optim Directory Previous Cancel Hi If you created the new Optim Directory earlier leave the check box blank and click Proceed to displa the Export Data from an Old Optim Directory dialog discussed in Step 2 Export Data from Old Optim Directory on page 490 To create a new Optim Directory however select the Create a New Optim Directory check box an
267. ects and the ACL that secures each object You can use wild cards for criteria The report is sorted alphabetically by object type Note The Object Security Report allows you to view permissions for ACLs for which you do not have read access lt gt OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor alslala 2 Alm nale test report Obiect koca ns 2 rs a A E a E 4 Access Definition AD dom pstuser Extract Request SC a 444 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Object Type Select an object type Object Name Enter an object name You can use percent as a wild card character but the pattern must match the object name format For example if an object uses a two part name enter own nam Domain and User Group Enter user or group names in the format domain name or everyone to include all group and user names in all domains and nodes Enter one name per line You can use percent as a wild card character but the pattern must use the domain name format For example dom n or Notify Tab Use the Notify tab to specify options and addresses for automatic email notification of the success or failure of the process The process report generated when the process completes is automatically sent as an attachment Process a Report Request A Report Request processes in several steps There are a few differences depending on whether you schedule the process or run the Report Request immed
268. ed and cannot be cleared Also the Allow All Deny All and Clear All command buttons and the shortcut menus are unavailable When the check box is cleared the Allow All and Allow check boxes remain selected but can be cleared Tabs The Role Specifications dialog includes the following tabs Users The user and group accounts in the role Functional Privileges Access privileges to functions for accounts in the role Note The Functional Privileges tab is available only from the Default ACD Object Association Privileges Permissions to use the ACD to secure Optim objects for accounts in the role Users Tab Use the Users tab to add and delete user and group accounts in a role User Group A user or group account from a network domain up to 256 characters for users and up to 85 characters for groups Domain The network domain or UNIX node name that includes the user or group account Type Type of account If entering the account manually select the correct Type to validate the account Modified By The identifier for the user account used to create or last modify the entry Appendix D Optim Security 393 Modified Date The date and time the account was created or last modified Description Text that describes the user or group account Shortcut Menu Commands Right click the grid to display the following shortcut menu commands Add Users Groups Open the Security Users and Groups dialog used to select multipl
269. ed and cannot be exported Appendix D Optim Security 425 Export Security Definitions 3 Access Control Domain Access Control List A File Access Definition Access Control Domains Access Control Lists File Access Definitions Export errors encountered C temp Secdefs txt v A a o eeeeeee S You can select the check box for a security definition type in order to export all definitions of that type or expand the list and select the definitions to be exported Tools menu commands allow you to select or deselect all definitions Secured Output File The name of the Secured Output File The Secured Output File is a text file and is given a txt extension automatically but other extensions may be used The Secured Output File is used as the Secured Input File for Security Definition Import processing Password Password for securing the Secured Output File This password must be entered when using the file with the Security Definition Import Process Verify Password Enter the Password again for verification Tools Menu The following commands are available from the Tools menu 426 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Select All Definitions Select check boxes for all listed security definitions This command is especially useful when you want to export all or most definitions Deselect All Definitions Clear the check boxes for all listed security definitions including shaded and or selected
270. ed by the DB2 Linux UNIX Windows database client must be compatible with the character set of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 All DB2 Linux UNIX Windows DB Aliases in a DB2 Linux UNIX Windows Optim Directory must have the same Unicode format as the Directory 2 If the client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 3 If the client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 4 If the client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results 5 DB2 Linux UNIX Windows DB Aliases in an Oracle Sybase ASE or MS SQL Server Optim Directory can have different Unicode formats however Optim cannot connect to both a Unicode enabled DB2 Linux UNIX Windows database and a non Unicode enabled DB2 Linux UNIX Windows database during the same session DB2 z OS To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the DB2 z OS database client must be compatible with the character set of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 All DB2 z OS DB Aliases in a DB2 Linux UNIX or Windows Optim Directory must have the same Unicode format as the Directory 2 If the client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the
271. ed to NUMERIC p s otherwise they are converted to BINARY_DOUBLE e NCLOBs are converted to CLOBs e For Oracle NUMERIC columns without precision are converted to BINARY_DOUBLE Timestamps including TZ and LZ are converted to ODBC timestamps Appendix F Open Data Manager 477 e For Oracle and Informix time intervals are converted to VARCHAR 30 e For DB2 Linux and WINDOWS LONGVARCHAR LONGVARBINARY and LONGVARGRAPHIC columns are converted to CLOBs or BLOBs Archive File to XML Convertor Use the Archive File to XML Convertor to convert Archive File data to XML format You can identify the data to convert by typing SQL SELECT statements or using a batch file You can also create a file that includes an XML schema describing Archive File data The Archive File to XML Convertor requires Java JRE release 1 4 or later To open the Archive File to XML Convertor run the atoxml jar executable file located in the ODM java subdirectory of the Optim installation directory For batch and command line documentation refer to the Archive File to XML Convertor online help available from the Help menu Interactive Tab Use the Interactive tab to type an SQL STATEMENT that specifies the data to convert B IBM Optim Archive File To XML Convertor Parameters mon Server The machine name of the ODM Server followed by a colon and the port number If the default port number 2551 is used the port number can be o
272. ediately by selecting the File gt Run menu option or you can schedule the request for processing at a later time by selecting the File gt Schedule menu option Naming Conventions A fully qualified Report Request name is in the form identifier name where identifier Identifier assigned to the Report Request name 1 to 8 characters name Base name assigned to the Report Request 1 to 12 characters A logical set of naming conventions can identify the use for each Report Request and be used to organize them for easy access Section Contents This section explains how to create maintain and process a Report Request including how to e Select the type of Security Report e Provide criteria and values for the report e Run save and schedule a Report Request Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 437 Open the Report Request Editor Use the Report Request Editor to create or edit requests for Security Reports You can store these requests in the Optim Directory There are different ways to open the editor depending on whether you want to create a new Report Request or edit an existing a Report Request Create a New Report Request This section describes how to create a new Report Request You can create a Report Request from the main window or from the Report Request Editor From the Main Window This section describes how to create a Report Request from the Main window To create a Report Request 1 In the main wi
273. editor depending upon whether you want to create a new Access Control Domain or select an Access Control Domain to edit Create a New ACD or Select an ACD to Edit This section explains how to create or edit an Access Control Domain To create or edit an Access Control Domain 1 In the main window select Access Control Domains from the Security submenu on the Options menu to open the Access Control Domains dialog 2 The next step depends on your purpose e To create a new ACD select New ACD from the Tools menu in the Access Control Domains dialog to open the Access Control Domain Editor e To edit an existing ACD double click the grid row to display the desired ACD in the Access Control Domain Editor 3 Optional In the Access Control Domain Editor right click the Role List and select New or Open from the shortcut menu to open the Role Specifications dialog and define or edit roles in the Role Specifications dialog Save the role Save the ACD Optional Edit the ACL for the ACD Click OK to save the ACD These steps are the minimum required to create an ACD Refer to Access Control Domain Editor on page 390 for complete details SO QV ae Access Control Domains List The Access Control Domains dialog lists all ACDs in the Optim Directory You must use this dialog to open the Access Control Domain Editor needed to create a new ACD or edit an existing ACD From the Access Control Domains dialog you can also
274. ee Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux on page 293 for complete information To configure the Server option on a Windows workstation you must first install Optim and run the Configuration program to configure the workstation and enable it as a Server Refer to Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server on page 180 After you activate the workstation as a Server you must configure it using the Optim Server Settings applet from the Control Panel Control Panel Double click the Optim icon in the Windows Control Panel to run the Optim Server Settings applet which allows you to provide settings unique to the server such as the path and executable file name for each database loader connection strings for all DB Aliases and protocols for access to the server Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 143 lt gt Optim Server Settings C Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN je C Documents and Settings Pes Tabs The tabs on the Optim Server Settings dialog are described in the following paragraphs Detailed information is provided in the following sections General The default Temporary Work Directory and Data Directory Errors Font characteristics for displays of informational warning and error messages Indicate the maximum number of lines displayed in the message bar and whether to hide the message bar when empty Load The path and name of the executable required to gain access to
275. ee Ee hac if Configuration Metadata 1 Machines 8 3 localhost 2 9 Bindings EB Nay 4 Adapters Data sources i Events a Daemons _ Eag IRPCD amp Navigator Binding NAV E use nav environment gt Debug gt General v Language Settings fy i Design Copy NAY environment Restore default values i Users Configure the language and codepage properties Restore default values Solutions Language English US 7 Codepage z NLS string UTF 8 bd gt Modeling gt ODBC gt OLEDB gt Optimizer gt Parallel Processing gt Query Processor gt Temp Features E Properties 3 GP poe B value gt Transaction gt Tuning gt XML Environment Machines 4 Expand the Language Settings section 5 From the Codepage list select UTF 8 6 From the File menu select Save All Define the Data Source on the ODM Server A data source definition on the ODM Server is needed to access archived data You can define a data source for each Archive File and Archive File Collection or specify the Archive File or Archive File Collection in an ODBC or JDBC connection string See Runtime Connection Information on page 476 Conventions The conventions used to describe these statements are KEYWORD Keywords are shown in uppercase for emphasis but can be specified in lower or mixed case text Variable text is shown in lowercase italics An opt
276. eeded you can browse or print this file using a text editor such as Notepad Configuration Assistant There are several ways to start a task to configure Optim e You can use the Configuration Assistant available immediately following installation when you select the option to Launch Optim configuration The Configuration Assistant provides Wizard like help to guide you to the appropriate configuration options You may also start the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu in the Configuration program e You can select individual configuration options from the Tasks menu in the Configuration program After you install Optim you are prompted to configure the first workstation Choosing to continue starts the Configuration Assistant If you choose not to configure immediately after installing the software you can select Configure First Workstation from the Tasks menu or select Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Configuration Assistant Dialogs The Configuration Assistant presents a series of dialogs to guide you through each step in the configuration process During the process you make selections appropriate to your particular site and circumstances The first window is the Welcome dialog Configuration Assistant Welcome he Configuration Assistant will ask you a few questions to determine which tasks need a o be performed on this workstation so that Optim can be run Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step
277. eeds this maximum a warning message indicates the output is incomplete Warn if Missing Function Clear this check box to suppress the warning message generated in the process report when a Load CmStartTable CmEndTable or UnLoad function is omitted from a Column Map Procedure Note The CmTransform function must be included in a Column Map Procedure Prefix Output with Name Select the check box to include the name of the Column Map procedure with the print output default Note When you choose to include the name of the Column Map procedure with the print output and a Local i e unnamed Column Map procedure is used a name for the Local Column Map procedure is automatically generated The name is generated using the corresponding table name column name and a unique number as follows tablename columnname n The following options allow you to modify parts of the generated name for a Local Column Map procedure the full table name and column name are used by default Chapter 9 Personal Options 281 Show Full Table Name When Local Proc Select this check box to include the full table name in the generated Local Column Map procedure name If you clear this check box use the From Left and From Right controls to specify a subset of the table name From Left indicates the number of bytes to use from the beginning of the table name From Right indicates the number of bytes to use from the end of the table name For example if the tabl
278. efinitely specify zero 0 or leave blank Max Rows Specify the maximum number of audit rows 1 to 999999 retained for each database table or tables To retain an indefinite number of rows specify zero 0 or leave blank Note The Max Rows limit is checked after 15 commits to the database table Write Option Select the level of audit information to record for the table or tables Click to display a down arrow and select e All Columns to record audit information for all columns in edited rows e Changed Columns to record audit information as follows Record an image of all columns in an inserted row Record an image of the primary key column in a deleted row If there is no primary key record an image of all columns Record an image of the primary key columns and any changed columns in an updated row Example Default specifications are propagated to new entries in the list of tables and can be useful when building the list For example if your database includes 100 tables and you want to retain audit information for fifty tables for a period of 90 days information for thirty tables for a period of 1 year information for 5 tables for an indefinite period and do not want to audit processes on the remaining 15 tables build the list of audit instructions in the following way 1 Clear Enabled 2 Enter in the grid names of the 15 tables that are not audited select from a list or type names or patterns Status is Di
279. electing an Optim Directory and completing the Connect to Database dialog see Connect to Database on page 488 a pop up warns you that new Directory tables will be created and the old tables will still be available to your 6 0 6 1 release G Directory SQL8 was found in 6 0 format Tables in this Directory are not compatible with this release In order to upgrade new tables must be created Then data from the old tables will be copied into the new tables Your old tables will remain intact and usable by a 6 0 or 6 1 release Click OK to continue the Conversion Process and open the Update Directory Tables dialog Click Proceed to create the 6 2 Optim Directory tables and continue the Configuration program task 500 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Dropping Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables After an Optim Directory in an SQL Server database has been converted you can drop the version 6 0 6 1 Directory tables To drop the 6 0 6 1 Directory tables select Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables from the Configuration program Tasks menu Specify Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to select the name of the version 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory you want to drop Click Proceed to continue Connect to Database The Configuration program must connect to the database to drop the Optim Directory tables Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information Click Proceed to continue Crea
280. emons started under the logged on account prOsvce v configuration file name Validate the contents of a configuration file and exits configuration file name Valid configuration file name If you do not provide a configuration file name the normal server is validated Temporary Files You must shut down all Optim processes before deleting certain files in the tmp directory Optim requires that the following files not be deleted while any Optim process for example pr0svce pr0cmnd etc is running 7 e Directories with names beginning with Mw_ directories or files whether open or closed within those e Files whether open or closed with names beginning with Mw e Files whether open or closed with names beginning with regss Even though some of these files are of type s they may be safely deleted after all Optim processes are shut down In addition you must shut down all Optim processes before killing watchdog mwrpcss or regss and before stopping mwadm 350 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim writes log and error files to the tmp softech directory during installation These files may contain diagnostic information should the setup program fail Once the installation has been deemed successful the tmp softech directory can be safely deleted Securing the Products and Configuration Files This section provides guidelines for obtaining the most protection on UNIX s
281. ense file e 2 enable a 30 day trial license Continue to the Specify ODM License File screen 300 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide This screen prompts you to enter the fully qualified name of your ODM license file or return to the previous screen and choose a trial license Next the Pre Installation Summary screen displays Sutebile Filep a Manager Intertsac The Pre Installation Summary screen displays details including the type of installation product features and space requirements Press Enter to proceed with the installation When the installation process completes the following screen displays Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 301 This screen displays information about the rtedit file and the EDITOR environment variable Proceed to the Files to Modify screen The files listed on this screen must be modified before running Optim Continue to the Sign Optim Exit screen 302 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim requires ized To use IHE HUMBER On the Sign Optim Exit screen choose whether to sign the default Optim exit The View Release Notes screen displays next m e p ee DEFAULT Choose whether to view the Release Notes Release Notes are displayed if you selected them Next continue with the Remove Temporary Files screen ftmp sotftech files Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or
282. ensePanel selection The Optim license agreement You must accept the license agreement to continue the installation 1 T accept the terms of the license agreement 2 I do not accept the terms of the license agreement W LicensePanel selection 1 P installLocation The directory path for installing the Server If the directory name contains spaces enclose it in double quotation marks P installLocation opt IBM Optim rt P ProgramFeature active Install the Server This option installs all files needed to run the Server in a Solaris HP UX or AIX operating environment including shell scripts and configuration files true Install the Server false Do not install the Server P ProgramFeature active true P SampleFeature active Install sample Extract Files true Install sample Extract Files false Do not install the sample Extract Files P SampleFeature active true P ODM Feature active Install the Optim Open Data Manager ODM interface feature which requires a product license If you select this option refer to Appendix F Open Data Manager on page 449 for ODM configuration instructions 324 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide true Install the Optim ODM interface feature false Do not install the Optim ODM interface feature Note If you set P ODMFeature active true you must define a value for W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice P ODMFeature active
283. ent Optim Directory The Security Admistrator can only be changed by the Security Administrator lick lt Change gt to specify a different Security Administrator Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Optim Directory displays the Directory name and Security State indicates that security is Initialized Security Administrator for this Optim Directory identifies the Security Administrator by the two part Domain User Name Changing the Administrator To change the Security Administrator click Change The Configuration program displays the next dialog depending on the following e If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the administrator must enter the domain password e If the Security Administrator is logged on to the workstation or a password is supplied the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog allows the user to specify a new Security Administrator For more information see Specify Domain Connection Information on page 122 After specifying a new Security Administrator Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the new Administrator and Proceed is available You must click Proceed to complete the change of Administrator If a new Security Administrator is specified clicking Skip will cancel the change of Administrator After clicking Skip or Proceed the Set Archive Fi
284. ent access to the Directory from this workstation use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password see Connect to Database on page 75 Click Proceed to display the Complete dialog and complete the process Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory When you select Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu the first dialog cautions that you should select this task only when the Optim Directory resides in a database that has been upgraded to a new version This task prompts you to 198 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Tasks to update DBMS version for an Optim Directory 1 Select the Optim Directory to update and select the new DBMS version 2 Drop the old packages plans or procedures and create new ones for the Optim Directory 3 Update the database signature for the Optim Directory When the process completes the database signature is updated automatically Specify Optim Directory The first step in updating the DBMS version for an Optim Directory is to specify the name of the Directory Click the down arrow to select from a list and click Proceed Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Specify Optim Dire Mi E3 he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From wi he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed g
285. ent in every dialog Cancel Close the current dialog and return control to the Configuration main window This button is present in every dialog DBMS Terms Used Optim supports several database management systems Terms used in a configuration dialog reflect the DBMS for the database that is being configured For example when configuring an Oracle database a configuration dialog refers to Packages to access database tables However when configuring a Sybase ASE or SQL Server database the same dialog refers to Procedures and for a DB2 database it refers to Plans Varying terms are noted in the discussion of a dialog In some instances a particular DBMS may require a unique dialog When this happens both the common dialog and the DBMS unique dialog are illustrated and discussed Display SQL If the Configuration program creates data definition language statements or DDL the pertinent dialog includes a check box Display SQL To review DDL statements before they are executed select this check box To execute a task without review clear the check box Note The Configuration program creates a text file sql txt containing the DDL generated during the current and previous sessions You can browse or print this file using a text editor such as Notepad The file is generated whether or not you select Display SQL on a particular dialog and is stored in the default Temp directory If you select Display SQL and click Proceed the Browse SQL
286. er or Informix database instance for the Optim Directory Note This prompt is displayed only if the Optim Directory is in a Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database Note If you are creating a new Optim Directory and specify a User ID associated with another Directory in the database the following pop up dialog informs you that another ID must be specified for the Optim Directory tables schema name 76 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e Select Yes to use the existing Directory instead of creating a new Directory and proceed to the Create Drop Packages dialog e Select No to continue creating a new Directory and specify a new schema name in the Create Optim Directory Tables dialog IBM Optim 2 Optim Directory was found with the Schema Name pstuser To create a new Optim Directory you must specify a different Schema Name Select lt Yes gt to use the existing Optim Directory or select lt No gt to specify a different Schema Name and create a new Optim Dien ntne s i Yes No Create Optim Directory Tables After the workstation is connected to the database you can create the Optim Directory The Configuration program names the tables automatically but you can specify the identifier Creator ID Owner ID or Schema Name and the database tablespace for each table You can create the Optim Directory tables in a unique tablespace or in the same tablespace as the other databas
287. er User ID and Password provided with pstdir keyword pstlogon client dbaliaslogon The source of DBMS User ID and Password for DB Alias access Valid entries are client User ID and Password for the delegating client i e from the Server tab in Personal Options or USERID and PASSWORD from the command line Default server User ID and Password provided with dbalias keyword dbaliaslogon client delfileinterval The interval in minutes for deleting Archive Files with an expired retention period after being recalled from secondary media n A value from 0 to 300 Specify 0 to prevent the deletion of recalled files 10 Default setting delfileinterval 10 filelogon The source of User ID and Password for file access Valid entries are local User ID and Password used to start prOsvce Default client DBMS User ID and Password for the delegating client i e from the Server tab in Personal Options or the server parameter in pstlocal cfg server userid password The provided User ID and Password apply for all delegated processes Specify as the assword when a secure password is supplied in a password file See Securing the D Configuration Files on page 353 for more information Note If the client or server keyword is used the prOsvce daemon must be started under root authority filelogon local filemode Access permissions for Extract Archive and Control Files Use any combination of the following ALL Rea
288. er function Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 1 SHARED NETWORK Minimal Opiim data flows over shared network mosi data tows between the Serer and ihe DBMS Server A dedicated server must have connectivity to the database but can be configured to avoid competition with other network traffic In general a process must be defined using Optim running on a Windows platform However a process can be initiated on any platform using the Command Line Interface Installation and Configuration Sequence Regardless of the configuration you choose you must first install Optim on a Windows machine that has connectivity to your database i e the First Workstation Following this installation you will configure the first workstation to create the Optim Directory and any DB Aliases needed to access your databases If the first workstation is to be used as a Server you can also configure it for this You can then install and configure any additional Windows based workstations or Servers using the Configure Additional Workstation task and if needed following the steps for Server configuration If you are implementing the Server on a UNIX or Linux based machine you can follow the directions in Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux on page 293 once the Windows installations are complete and Optim Directory and DB Aliases are configured Several steps are involved in installing Optim This overview
289. er one forward slash for the User ID and leave the Password blank 372 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide UNIX or Linux File Access The effective User ID and Group ID for a process determine the directories files or mount points that can be accessed By default the user that creates a file has read and write privileges any other group or user has read privileges only Filemode Parameter You may want files created by the Server to be available to other users to run the same job and overlay the same file The filemode parameter in pstserv cfg allows you to grant file access to other users The filemode parameter changes the default file mode for any file created by the Server and allows you to limit read or write privileges for a user group or other Daemon Startup Directory A directory created during the daemon startup tracks the daemon system wide so that you can shut the daemon down from a different process This directory includes a file for each daemon started In production environments there is usually one file The default creates an rt4s subdirectory under the system tmp directory However the daemon is often run under a fenced user that does not have privileges in the tmp directory To overcome this you can set the PSTINFO environment variable before starting the daemon Specify the complete path to a directory to which the user starting the daemon can write In general you must p
290. eration 110 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Configure First Workstation Create Select DB Alias he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Select the Create New option to create a single new DB Alias the Create Select Multiple option to create or select multiple DB Aliases from a Single DB Server or the Use Existing option to use an existing DB Alias then click Although you can select the Create New option and follow the steps for each database the Create Select Multiple option saves time by allowing you to set specifications for each database at the same time On the Create Select DB Alias dialog select the Create Select Multiple option and click Proceed The Configuration program opens the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 111 lt gt Configure First Workstation Specify DB Alias DBMS he Optim Configuration program can create a DB Alias for an existing database Select he DBMS type and version for the database that you want to configure then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor freseo Select the DBMS Type and Version and click Proceed The Connect to Database dialog is displayed next 112 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Configure First Workstation Connect to Database he Optim
291. erformed during a Delete Process only when the following are true e Compare Row Contents is not selected in the Delete Request Editor e Both the table in the source file and database have a unique primary key e The table has no file attachments to be deleted Allow Optim PK Rels on DB Views Select this check box to allow users to define Optim Primary Keys and Relationships for database views Extract using Uncommitted Read Set an option to enable extracting of uncommitted rows from the database during an Archive or Extract Process You can extract uncommitted rows from specific tables in the Access Definition or all tables Selecting this option for tables with known performance problems may increase the speed of your Archive or Extract processes This option is available only if your Optim license key includes support for a DB2 LUW or DB2 z OS database 226 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Active Automatically extract uncommitted rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes The Uncommitted Read check box on the Access Definition Editor is unavailable Inactive Automatically extract only committed rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes The Uncommitted Read check box on the Access Definition Editor is unavailable Default Active The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and selected by default Un
292. erver without the need of a secondary server You can use Attunity Studio which is included with your ODM installation to administer the ODM Server from a Windows machine Attunity documentation is located in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory Installation The Optim installation DVD for Windows includes installation files for the ODM Server and Attunity Studio The Optim installation DVD for Linux includes installation files for the ODM Server only Note If installing ODM Server or Attunity Studio in a Windows environment you must remove any prior versions before installation During the installation of Optim you can install ODM as part of the Optim installation process or copy the ODM files and install ODM at a later time Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 449 Introduction Open Data Manager ODM is distributed with a temporary 30 day License Agreement license and for continued use requires a permanent license If upgrading ODM from version 6x or 7 1 of your Optim solution you must obtain a new permanent license but can use the 30 day Type of Installation license temporarily If you are upgrading from a later version of your Install Location Optim solution you can apply the license used previously Ifyou do not have access to the license file or wish to install ODM at a later time select Only Copy the ODM Files Customer Information Component Selection ODM Information Shortcut Location
293. es or procedures are created as part of the configuration process Note When you create the Optim Directory the Configuration program also creates the Windows registry entry needed to access the Optim Directory Create DB Alias es Optim requires a DB Alias for each database instance it accesses You may define one or more DB Aliases at installation or use the Configuration program to add DB Aliases later 4 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide The same information specified for the Optim Directory is needed for each DB Alias that is DBMS Type and Version User ID Password Connection String and Identifier for the packages plans or procedures to be included as part of the DB Alias definition Meaningful DB Alias names are desirable because Optim references tables using a three part name dbalias ownerid tablename Create Optim Primary Keys Many Optim processes require primary keys Often database tables do not have DBMS primary keys In this step you can create Optim Primary Keys for any table that does not have one but does have a unique index You may choose this option for each DB Alias Load Sample Database Tables Optim is distributed with a sample database consisting of several tables CUSTOMERS ORDERS etc These sample tables allow you to experiment while learning how to use Optim and serve as the basis for training Load Data Privacy Data Tables Data privacy data tables are available to clien
294. es are committed to the database If you do not specify a limit the default value is 200 An Insert Restore or Delete Request can require more frequent commits Sybase Unchained Mode Optim normally runs in chained mode When a trigger in a Sybase ASE table will be fired as a result of an Insert or Delete Process and the trigger calls a stored procedure that must run in unchained mode the connection must be in unchained mode for the procedure to work Select an option for running an Insert or Delete Process as follows Active Require Insert Restore and Delete Processes to run in unchained mode the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options see Sybase Unchained Mode on page 288 is unavailable Inactive Set all processes to run in normal mode the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is unavailable Chapter 8 Product Options 225 Default Active The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and selected by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in unchained mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is cleared Default Inactive The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and cleared by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in normal mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is selected Allow User to Lock Tables Select this check box to enable the Lock Tables option in the
295. ess to all users and roles except the Guest role The Column Secured setting indicates that one or more columns in the table have defined access permissions To view a list of the secured columns right click the ORDERS row and select List Columns As shown by the Table Access Control dialog the Default AC Type grants all users Allow access All users that can access the table are allowed to access columns not specified in the Column List Appendix D Optim Security 423 Table Access Control File Edit Options Help Table Dems OPTUSR ORDERS Column List Column Access Control Column 4 Default Default olx Access Allow Deny bial eda H vw ORDER _ID Explicit However only the Optim Administrator role can access the ORDER_ID column All other users and roles are denied access Table Access Control Ioj x File Edit Options Help Table DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS 7 Column List Column Access Control Access Column Allow Deny gt afaa of Default 1 Default rl wv ORDER ID Explicit Optim Administrator MIC Ready A e In the Column List the AC Type for ORDER_ID is Explicit The access permissions column only 424 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide apply to this e In the Column Access Control list the Optim Administrator role is assigned Allow access and the Default setting representing users not included in
296. ess to the Directory from this workstation you can use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password different from those used to create the Directory After you have created the new Optim Directory the Conversion Process displays the Export Data from an Old Directory dialog Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 489 Step 2 Export Data from Old Optim Directory The next step in the process is to export objects from the old Optim Directory gt Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 2 Export Data from an Old 0 Mi E3 In Step 2 you will export the data from the old Optim Directory using this version of he Optim Configuration Program To export the data From an old Optim Directory select the Export Data from an Old Optim Directory checkbox If step 2 has already been performed and you have access to the file containing the exported data From the d Ankin Mire par the checkho ele Proceed m inue Fa the ne arn To begin this step select the Export Data from an Old Optim Directory check box and click Proceed To skip this step and display the Import Data into New Optim Directory dialog leave the check box blank and click Proceed Specify Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to select the name of the Optim Directory from which objects are exported 490 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Convert Optim Directory Objects Specify Optim Dir
297. ess to the Optim Directory as provided in Personal Options for the delegating workstation In Personal Options you can also require a password each time or deny access Refer to Server Tab on page 269 for more information DB Aliases Server Select to use the User ID and password provided on the Connection tab for Server use of DB Aliases Client Select to use the User ID and password for Server use of DB Aliases as provided in Personal Options on the delegating workstation In Personal Options you can also require a password each time or deny access Refer to Server Tab on page 269for more information 156 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide File Input Output Server Select to use the Service Logon on the Startup tab This setting applies only when Server credentials are used for file access Client e Select this option to use User ID password and domain specified on the Server tab in Personal Options on the delegating workstation for Server local disk and network share access Refer to Server Tab on page 269 for more information The delegating credentials must have the following privilege e Log on as a batch job GSE_LBATCH_LOGON_NAME Note that in some installations you can give this privilege to everyone in the Local Security Policy instead of specifying credentials for each user Use this Logon for accessing files If files are accessed using Server credentials you must indicate the
298. etched to browse or edit table data or for Point and Shoot If you do not specify a value the default value is 1000 A user can establish a lower Maximum Fetch Rows limit by selecting Personal from the Options menu and editing the Display tab Maximum Extract Rows Specify the maximum number of rows 1 999999999 that can be processed during a single Extract or Archive Process If you do not specify a value the default value is 100000 A Row Limit for an Archive or Extract Process cannot exceed this value Site Defaults The site specific default Calendar used to schedule action requests or to age data in a Column Map Calendar Select a site default Calendar To select from a list of available calendars click the down arrow You can select a different calendar on a process request as needed 222 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Cascade Delete Rule Set options for performing a cascading delete or update on tables that are not explicitly included in an Access Definition or a process Warn on Cascade Delete Update Click the down arrow to choose when to display a warning if a cascading delete or update may occur User Allow the user to determine when to display a warning This is the default setting The corresponding Warn on Cascade Delete Update setting in Personal Options is enabled See Warn on Cascade on page 273 for more information Runtime Display a cascade delete update warning only at run ti
299. exit or a custom exit supplied by you to use Optim but you can only sign the default exit during setup See The Optim Exit in UNIX on page 356 for detailed information on the Optim default exit and user supplied exits Note If you want to sign a custom user supplied exit you must run a script file called opmusign following installation as described in Signing a User Supplied Exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 on page 364 If you select Yes on the Sign Optim Exit dialog to sign the default exit setup will open a separate terminal window to sign the default exit Window Edit Options Help orUsign d setup home roberts rtinstalledstt Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company Id Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 319 Type your company credentials when prompted for that information Your company credentials consist of the company ID Name and Password assigned to your organization when you received Optim All three entries are case sensitive and you must enter them in the format provided to you Press Enter after each prompt to display the next prompt After you specify your company ID for example press Enter to display the Name prompt orUsign d setup home roberts rtinstalledtt Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company Id 105499 Name Sample Company Name Password fj Note If any of
300. ext the Configuration program opens a query dialog that prompts you to purge another DB Alias To purge another DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Create Select DB Alias dialog on which you can select another DB Alias Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 217 218 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 8 Product Options Each workstation using Optim must reference a Product Configuration File The path to the appropriate Product Configuration File is specified in Personal Options You must use the Product Options dialog however to create a Product Configuration File Note A password is required to open the Product Options dialog Generally Product Options parameters enforce site and system requirements Use the Product Options dialog to e Name the Product Configuration File e Establish password security for Product Options e Limit the amount of data that can be processed at one time e Define defaults and user control over certain activities e Provide connection information for machines hosting the Optim Server Server e Specify general parameters for editing or archiving e Customize loader parameters and enforce loader requirements Configuring Product Options You can configure Product Options using the Configuration program or you can set options within Optim In either case you will use the Product Options dialog Using the Configuration Progr
301. ext setup displays information about the shell scripts and configuration files to help you select files to modify You can scroll the display to read information about each file Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 315 Optim Server Setup For new installations a working version and a sample version of each shell script and configuration file are installed The sample version of each file has the file extension sam For upgrade installations only the sample scripts and files are installed and existing samples are automatically renamed with the extension bak This feature prevents overwriting of your working scripts and files and allows you to compare existing versions with new sample versions When you click Next you are prompted to edit each shell script and configuration file 316 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide The following files must be modified for your installation before the Optim Server can be run The Setup program can launch your default editor via users test2 optimbuild rt sbin rtedit to modify each of the selected files Select the files from the following list for which you would like setup to launch an edit session Any of these file can be modified later but must be modified before starting Optim Update userstest2 optimbuild ttsetenv Update susersAest2 optimbuild t sbinstserver W Update usersMest2 optimbuild rt sbinst4s W Update fuserstest2 op
302. ext file with the appropriate parameters for the tasks For this example the text file is called C Cre_dba txt PSTDirName ORA_LOCAL PSTDirUserID roberts PSTDirPassword softech DBAAction createnew DBAName AUDB_LOCAL DBMSType ORACLE DBMSVERSION 6 1 ConnectStr sample UserID roberts Password robbie SPAction createnew Description Local ORA V 6 1 Sample Task DB DBAAction createnew DBAName ASYB_LOCAL DBMSType SYBASE DBMSVERSION 11 9 2 ConnectStr roberts UserID roberts Password robbie DBQualifier roberts SPAction createnew SPShare True Description Local Sybase V 11 9 2 roberts Task DB DBAAction createnew DBAName AROBDB3 DBMSType SYBASE DBMSVersion 11 9 2 ConnectStr roberts UserID roberts Password robbie DBQualifier robdb3 SPAction Useexisting SPShare True Description Local Sybase V 11 9 2 robdb3 Task DB DBAAction createnew DBAName AROBDB4 DBMSType SYBASE DBMSVersion 11 9 2 ConnectStr roberts UserID roberts Password robbie DBQualifier robdb4 SPAction UseExisting SPShare True Description Local Sybase V 11 9 2 robdb4 Task DB To perform the tasks from the command line specify 380 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide PROCNFG FILE C Cre_dba txt Examples Apply Maintenance to Multiple DB Aliases To apply maintenance to multiple DB aliases the first step is to create a text file with the appropriate parameters for the tasks For this example the te
303. ey is unique to your company and is sent to you by email when Optim is shipped You must use this key when you configure the first workstation and any additional workstations Note During the process to configure the first workstation you can optionally export the Product License Key and other details and import this information when configuring additional workstations Create Optim Directory Although you may use any number of database instances with Optim only one is designated to hold the Optim Directory Typically the Directory will share an instance used for other tables While the Optim Directory is rarely so large or so heavily accessed as to justify a dedicated database instance you can dedicate a database instance solely to the Optim Directory if desired When you create the Optim Directory you are prompted for the following information Optim Directory Any meaningful name up to 12 characters DBMS Type and Version Supported database management systems include DB2 Oracle Sybase ASE SQL Server and Informix Connection Information User ID and password needed to connect to the database instance and the connection string needed to permit user access Table Information Identifier Creator ID Owner ID or Schema Name for the Optim Directory tables and the tablespace where they are created This identifier is used as a qualifier for the names of plans packages or procedures needed to access these tables The plans packag
304. f Optim on a machine using the Solaris operating environment under SPARC the HPUX operating environment the AIX operating environment or Red Hat Application Server in Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux on page 293 Install Introduction You can begin Optim installation using the graphical user interface in one of three ways 1 Insert the Optim DVD in the workstation drive Optim begins the installation automatically 2 Open Windows Explorer double click the icon for your DVD drive and double click IBMOptim exe 3 Open Network Neighborhood open the network drive that contains the contents of the Optim DVD and double click IBMOptim exe Optim displays the Introduction dialog Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 23 gt Introduction License Agreement Customer Information Type of Installation Install Location Component Selection ODM Information Shortcut Location gt Summary gt Installation Installation Complete After you read the text click Next to continue to the Software License on page 25 24 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Software License The Software License Agreement dialog prompts you to accept the License Agreement v Introduction gt License Agreement Customer Information Type of Installation Install Location Component Selection gt ODM Information Shortcut Location gt Summary gt Insta
305. f each available Optim Directory Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory Selected for Import List of Optim Directories selected for import Move an item from one list to the other by dragging the name Also to rearrange listed items drag the line number to the new position Name Name of each selected Optim Directory Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 133 Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory User ID Identifier up to 30 characters that the DBMS requires to permit access to the Optim Directory You can modify this entry Password Password 1 to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID You can modify this entry e The database administrator usually defines User IDs and passwords e This password is used only by the DBMS Sybase ASE and SQL Server passwords are case sensitive Connection String String or name that permits a workstation to access the database The DBMS uses this connection string to recognize the database You can modify this entry e For some database management systems it is possible to define a different Connection String for each workstation to access the same database e For Sybase ASE and SQL Server the Connection String refers to the network name of the computer where the database resides Create Registry Entry If you elect not to import Optim Directory registry data you must create a new registry entr
306. f you select this check box the Centera Minimum File Retention box becomes available NetWorker Select this check box if EMC NetWorker is available Tivoli Select this check box if Tivoli is available If you select this check box the Tivoli Options box becomes available Note To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs Chapter 8 Product Options 239 Note You can copy an Archive File to a backup device by referencing a Storage Profile with the necessary backup device parameters in an Archive Request For details refer to the Archive User Manual Tivoli Options Node Name Specify an identifier that allows access to the Tivoli tape backup device Password Specify a password that allows access to the Tivoli tape backup device Centera Minimum File Retention Specify the default minimum retention period for protecting Archive Files on Centera from deletion The minimum retention period is measured from the time the Archive Process copies the file to Centera After the minimum retention period expires the file can be deleted from Centera Allow User to alter Minimum Retention Select this check box to enable the Minimum File Retention setting in the Storage Profile Utility allowing users to override the default minimum retention defined in Product Options Centera Default Select to use the Centera default minimum retention period based on your Centera con
307. ffect Notes e If a user is included in multiple roles in the list the most restrictive permission applies e Unless the AC Type for the Table List entry is None the Table Access Control list includes a Default setting This default cannot be deleted and applies to users for which no explicit permissions are granted Type the name or use the drop down list to select the name of a role defined in the ACD You can also edit a role name To remove a role name use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Access The type of access permissions for the role Select one of the following Allow The role is allowed access to the table Deny The role is denied access to the table You must select either Allow or Deny for Default Roles for which both Allow and Deny are blank assume the permission selected for Default Shortcut Menu Commands Right click the Table Access Control list to display the following shortcut menu commands Remove Remove the role from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Remove all roles except Default from the list Allow all non default Allow access for all listed roles except Default Deny all non default Deny access for all listed roles except Default Selecting Tables from a Database Use the Select Table s dialog to select the names of one or more tables from a database referenced by a specified DB Alias To open the Select Table s dialog right click the b
308. figuration Infinite Select to keep an Archive File on Centera forever the file cannot be deleted Interval Select to protect an Archive File from deletion for a specified period You can specify a number of years days or a combination of both When you select Interval the Years and Days boxes become available Years Specify the number of years 0 to 100 to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Days Specify the number of days 0 to 18300 to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Note 18300 days equals 50 years None Do not use a minimum retention period allow an Archive File to be deleted from Centera at any time WORM Device Minimum File Retention Specify the default minimum retention period for protecting Archive Files on a WORM device from deletion The minimum retention period is measured from the time the Archive Process copies the file to the device After the minimum retention period expires the file can be deleted from the device Allow User to alter Minimum File Retention Select this check box to enable the WORM Device Minimum File Retention options in the Storage Profile Utility allowing users to override the default minimum retention defined in Product Options Interval Select to protect an Archive File from deletion for a specified period after the file is generated You can specify a number of years days or a combination of both When you select
309. figuration Overview Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit Writing Your Own Exit Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit Signing an Exit in Windows Changing a Signed Optim Exit The Sign Optim Exit Dialog Specifying a Company Name and ID Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus Main Window and ence Main Window Menus Processing Log Configuration Assistant Dialogs Chapter 5 Configure Workstations Configure the First Workstation Specify Product License Key Create Optim Directory Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 23 23 20 26 S27 28 s29 30 lt 31 32 33 34 34 35 44 47 49 50 50 pl 53 54 56 59 60 60 61 65 66 67 71 s71 lt 71 72 Create DB Aliases Optim Security Configure Options Export Registry Data Configure the First Workstation Summary Configure Additional Workstation Import Registry Entries Create Registry Entry Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Enable Disable Optim eet Feat re Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface Specify Product Configuration File Configure Additional Workstation Summary 87 120 124 129 131 131 132 134 138 139 140 141 141 Chapter 6 gue the ae Server 143 General Tab Errors Tab Load Tab Connection Tab Access Tab Startup Tab Security Tab Endpoints Tab Archive Tab Rete
310. file installs This launches the default editor that you will use to modify shell scripts and configuration files before starting Optim for the first time e The next dialog displays information about the shell scripts and configuration files to be modified You can scroll the display and read about each file e The Select Files to Modify dialog displays next If you select files to modify from this list the default editor launches displaying the selected file e Next you are prompted to sign the default Optim exit and supply your company s ID name and password e You are then prompted to view the Release Notes e The next dialog prompts you to remove temporary files During installation Optim creates several temporary log and error files You can delete these log and err files from the tmp softech directory e The Installation Complete panel displays the message that Optim has been successfully installed Console Installer UNIX or Linux In a UNIX environment you can run the installer from the console to install Optim server The information in this section applies to all UNIX or Linux platforms except Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 For Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 refer to e Command Line Installation Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 on page 323 Installation Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 on page 306 To install Optim server from the console use this command in the installer directory install bin i conso
311. following screen displays Install location Default Install Folder C IBM Optim ENTER AN ABSOLUTE PATH OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Configure Open Data Manager Now Open Data Manager CODM gt is distributed with a temporary 38 day license and ontinued use requires a permanent license If upgrading ODM fron i 7 1 of your Optim solution you must obtain a new permanent license the 38 day license temporarily If you are upgrading from a later version ww Optim solution you can apply the license used previously If you do not access to the li e File or wish to install ODM at a later time select Copy the ODM Files i Configure ODM Now 2 Only Copy the ODM Files ENTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Select 1 to configure ODM or 2 to copy the ODM files for installation later If ODM was not installed before this installation the following screen displays Chapter 2 Installation 39 etup will install IBM Optim in the following folder Install location Default Install Folder C IBM Optim NTER AN ABSOLUTE PATH OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Your Optim solution includes a 38 day trial license for Open Data Manager lt In order to use ODM after JA days you must have a permanent license Dire 1 ODM license key requests and inquiries to optkeys Cus ibm com If you do n e access to the license file or wish to install ODM at a later time selec ly C
312. for Windows 2000 or above provides a Windows Service called DB2 Security Server db2sec exe This program must be started on any machine client or server on which a user account must be validated For client machines this service is necessary only if any connected instance requires client authentication During installation of a DB2 Linux UNIX Windows product this service is registered with Windows It is removed during uninstall By default the DB2 Security Server starts automatically when Windows starts You can start it manually using the Service dialog from the Windows Control Panel or you can enter the following command at the Command Line Interface NET START DB2NTSECSERVER You can stop the service manually using the Service dialog or you can enter the following command at the Command Line Interface NET STOP DB2NTSECSERVER If you want to start the service manually at system startup use the Service dialog in the Windows Control Panel to change the service startup options When you create a DB Alias or apply maintenance to an existing DB Alias the DB2 Linux UNIX Windows client software on the workstation must be at the same or higher level as the target database Any version of the DB2 Linux UNIX Windows client can connect to a version of the DB2 Linux UNIX Windows database that is one version lower or two versions higher Note IBM does not support a DBMS client server configuration that includes an out of service vers
313. for each database table Chapter 8 Product Options 233 unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list The oldest rows are deleted to create space to accept new rows Specify zero 0 or leave blank to retain an unlimited number Table Name Pattern List Tables for which table specific audit parameters apply If you select the Active User option for auditing database tables the Product Options list supersedes any list users may specify in Personal Options Table Name Pattern Specify the fully qualified name of the database table or a pattern that identifies the database tables in the form dbalias creatorid tablename You can also right click a grid cell and select Add Tables to display a selection list Status Select the auditing status for the table or tables Click to display a down arrow and select Enabled or Disabled for each table or pattern in the list Use this selection to override the default status established with the Enabled check box Note If auditing is disabled for a table other table specific parameters cannot be edited If a table is listed in both Personal Options and Product Options the status in Personal Options is Superseded by Product List The user cannot change the auditing status for that table Users can modify the table name however or remove it from the list Days to Retain Specify the maximum number of days 1 to 999 to retain audit information for the table or tables To retain Audit information ind
314. frequently used character that differs from the NULL value indicator is best 252 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Maximum Fetch Rows Specify the maximum number of rows from a single table that can be displayed when you browse or edit table data or use Point and Shoot You can enter a number from 1 through the site maximum specified on the Product Options dialog The default value is 500 Maximum entries in History Lists Specify the maximum number of recently selected items 1 to 20 displayed in a drop down list For example the Extract File box in a request editor where you can click the down arrow to view a list of the most recently used Extract Files Maximum entries in Menu File Lists Specify the maximum number of items 1 to 20 displayed below the File menu commands in an editor For example a list of the most recently opened definitions appears on the File menu in the Access Definition Editor Action Definition Menu Behavior Click the down arrow to select the default mode for opening the action or definition editors from the Actions or Definitions menu in the main window Open Last Opens the last edited request in the selected editor This is the default Open New Opens a new untitled request in the selected editor Appearance Options for displaying tooltips and toolbars on dialogs and editors in Optim Balloon Style Tooltips Controls the appearance of the tooltips Select the check box to
315. fully disconnected Connection to database QOR922K successful for user pstuser The Optim Directory you selected already has a name of PSTDIRECTORY The registry entry PSTDIRECTORY successfully saved Database QOR922K successfully disconnected Connection to database QOR922K successful for user pstuser Transaction committed The Write Sianature Record to the Oracle Optim Directory PSTDIRECTORY functo l b Use this log to review the actions in the configuration process and determine if additional action is required The Processing Log shows the following e The date and time you started the Configuration program e A list of the processes started completed or cancelled e The tasks performed successfully or unsuccessfully e Instances of connecting to or disconnecting from the database e The names of newly created Optim Directory tables e The names of newly created database plans packages or procedures e The sample tables Optim objects and data privacy data tables loaded or dropped Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus 65 Note To keep processing steps in view you can move the Processing Log window without regard to other open windows The Configuration program generates a file PROCNFG LOG of configuration information from the current and previous sessions This file is saved to the Temporary Work Directory specified when you configure Personal Options or in the default Temp directory If n
316. fy the ACL Delete Controls the ability to delete the ACL Not available for ACDs or File Access Definitions or for Optim objects that are secured automatically when saved Shortcut Menu Commands Right click the grid to display the following shortcut menu commands 408 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Remove Remove the selected role from the ACL Remove All Remove all roles from the ACL Allow All Allow all Object Access ACL Access or both to the role Deny All Deny all Object Access ACL Access or both to the role Clear All Allowed For the role clear all Allow check boxes for Object Access ACL Access or both Clear All Denied For the role clear all Deny check boxes for Object Access ACL Access or both Right click the grid column for an action to display the following shortcut menu commands Allow All action Access Allow access to all roles for the selected action Clear All action Access Clear all Allow and Deny check boxes for all roles for the selected action Deny All action Access Deny access to all roles for the selected action Command Buttons The following command buttons are available on the Access Control List Editor Change Owner Open the Security Users dialog to assign ACL ownership to another user account Available to user accounts permitted to update the ACL who are also the ACL owner or the Securit Administrator for the Optim Directory For more information about this d
317. g packages plans or procedures This option is available only if packages plans or procedures already exist and can be dropped Qualifier Prefix When enabled enter the high level qualifier for packages plans or procedures Refers to Collection Name to access DB2 Catalog Tables Schema Name to access the Oracle Data Dictionary and Owner ID to access System Tables in SQL Server or Sybase ASE or Informix Note For Sybase ASE and SQL Server the sp_ prefix is displayed when stored procedures are shared and Use One Copy for all Databases on this Server is selected Grant Auth ID Enter an identifier for authorized users You can specify a single User ID a Group Name or Public Use One Copy for all Databases on this Server This check box is displayed for Sybase ASE and SQL Server only Select the check box to use common stored procedures for databases on a single server For Sybase ASE stored procedures are stored in the special Sybase ASE database sybsysprocs For SQL Server stored procedures are stored in the MASTER database Note Microsoft SQL Server documentation includes a caution regarding the creation of stored procedures in the MASTER database Consider the implications of sharing stored procedures for SQL Server before proceeding Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before creating or dropping packages plans or procedures Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 93 Always Require a Password
318. g to recognize the database This value was entered earlier in the process and cannot be edited DB Name Name that identifies the database for the DB Alias This name is assigned when the database is created Note The database name applies to Sybase ASE SQL Server and Informix and refers to a particular database for a given server that is referenced by the DB Alias Always Ask for Password Select this check box to require a password each time you connect to the database If you clear this check box you need not supply a password on future attempts to connect to the database Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 101 Note This option is selected and unavailable if you selected the Always Require a Password for this Database option This completes the steps for creating the DB Aliases Next you create Optim Primary Keys for databases you want to use with Optim Create Primary Keys In some cases primary keys are required to extract and insert data Certain tables in the database may not have primary keys but may have unique indexes You can use the Configuration program to create Optim Primary Keys for these tables Optim Primary Keys are stored in the Optim Directory and supplement primary keys defined to the database Use the Create Primary Keys dialog to confirm the DB Alias for the database tables that require Optim Primary Keys lt gt Configure First Workstation Greate Primary Keys e Optim Configuration program can creat
319. gistry entries and shortcuts only ENTER THE NUMBER FOR THE INSTALL SET OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAUL 2 Install Location Setup will install IBM Optim in the following folder Install location Default Install Folder C M BM Optim ENTER AN ABSOLUTE PATH OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT For the registry entries enter the path to the folder where Optim is already installed 38 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide The Component Selection screen displays only if you chose Customized Installation on the Choose Install Set screen d Install location Default Install Folder C Program Files IBM Optim ENTER AN ABSOLUTE PATH OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT the Product Features that you would like to install Optin Optin Online Documentation Optin Archive ODBC Interface Optim ODM Interface Sample Files gt 6 5 x PST Directory Conversion Files ENTER A COMMA SEPARATED LIST OF NUMBERS REPRESENTING THE DESIRED CHOICES O PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT The Component Selection screen lists all components available for installation You can type a list of features separated by commas or press Enter to select all If you chose Full Installation or if you selected Optim ODM Interface from the Component Selection screen the next screen to display depends on whether ODM has been installed previously If ODM was installed before this installation the
320. gs for that DB Alias only You can repeat the procedure for any or all DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory and similarly for all DB Aliases in each Optim Directory Chapter 8 Product Options 241 Product Options Iof x General Database Configuration File Password Edit Servers Archive Load Report Optim Directory DB Alias J Override default settings Defaut z Use Delete when Truncate fails m Loader Parameters Additional Loader Parameters C Force at Run Time Use to prime New Request Undo Defaults Ready Mi Optim Directory Select the name of the Optim Directory containing the DB Aliases for which you want to customize loader parameters If your site has more than one Optim Directory and you want to specify loader parameters for DB Aliases contained in those directories click the down arrow to select from a list DB Alias Click the down arrow to select from the available DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory If you select Default the custom loader parameters you specify apply to all DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory Override default settings Select to define unique loader parameters for a specific DB Alias when default values are defined for all DB Aliases in a selected Optim Directory 242 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Use Delete when Truncate fails This check box is applicable to SQL Server and Sybase
321. guration program to use this option This option is available only if an exit was previously signed in which case the word Valid will appear to the right of this option under State If you select this option the Password field is disabled and clicking OK or Cancel has the same effect i e the existing exit remains in effect This is the default option when the State entry is Valid Sign the Default Optim Exit IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Use this option to sign the default Optim exit The default exit allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group via the security functionality included in Optim If you select this option you must specify your company Password to sign the default exit Signing the default exit will overlay any previously signed exit If you are replacing a user supplied exit you must have permission in that exit to sign the new exit This is the default option when the State entry is Unsigned e Sign the User Supplied Exit Use this option to sign a user supplied exit See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for information on how to write an exit If you select this option you must specify your company Password to sign the user supplied exit Before you sign a user supplied exit you must copy it to the rt bin directory where you installed Optim This step will overlay any previously signed exit rendering Optim unusable unt
322. h user can run Client supplied exits are called user supplied exits in Optim to differentiate them from the default exit supplied with Optim The Optim default exit allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group using the security functionality included in Optim The default exit is intended for clients who do not need to use a user supplied exit although it may also be used temporarily until you create your own customized exit If you use the default exit Optim user security functions as it did prior to release 6 5 If you implement a user supplied exit that exit will augment the extensive security functionality already included in Optim Note A user supplied exit may also be used for other functions such as managing user accounts monitoring user activity forcing inactive sessions to timeout auditing product use and overriding user authorization credentials Regardless of the exit you use i e the default exit or your own exit you must sign that exit before you can use Optim After the exit is signed Optim will invoke the exit at initialization and call it at various exit points in the program to determine whether Optim should continue with what it was about to do An exit point is a point within a program at which an exit routine can take control to do some external function The exit allows you to e See what is being done by a given user at various points in a p
323. hat the Report Process will use to verify user and group names The machine must be part of the domain or node where the accounts of the user and group names in the report are defined User Report The User Security Report lists Functional Security permissions for specified users and groups The report lists each privilege class and permissions for the associated privileges as well as the role to which a permission applies If a user is a member of a group for which Functional Security is defined the group is included You can use wild cards for criteria Domain and User Group Enter user or group names in the format domain name or everyone to include all group and user names in all domains and nodes Enter one name per line You can use percent as a wild card character but the pattern must use the domain name format For example dom n or Function Report The Function Security Report lists Functional Security permissions assigned to each user and group for selected privileges as well as the role to which they apply The tab is divided into two grids one for privilege classes and one for privileges that are included in the selected privilege class For a description of Functional Security privilege classes and privileges see Functional Privileges Tab on page 397 442 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor Bl lala 8 S AB nale test report
324. hat matches the user id Note If you do not enter a password on the Command Line prOpass prompts for one pr0pass d type name userid Delete a password entry type A valid password type filelogon webserver server tivoliavail pstdir dbalias user name The name of the configuration file parameter Note Use the wildcard character as described for adding a password entry userid The user ID used to verify that the password matches the parameter name To protect changes to the password file or the configuration file the two keywords must match 354 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Examples This section includes examples of using the Add command The following examples demonstrate using the Add command for the prOpass program and indicating encrypted passwords in the configuration file 1 To encode the password for the Optim Directory PSTDIR1 create a password as follows prOpass a pstdir pstdirl myuserid mypassword In the configuration file for PSTDIR1 specify the password as a question mark pstdir pstdirl Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr myuserid 2 To encode the password for the DBALIAS specify both the Optim Directory to which it belongs and the DB Alias name prOpass a dbalias pstdirl dbalias1 myuserid mypassword And in the configuration file specify dbalias pstdirl dbaliasl connectstr myuserid 3 To encode a single password for a specific user account to access any Optim Dire
325. have to specify a license file Manual ODM Installation To install the ODM Server manually you must run the ODM installation script and register the Attunity license The installation includes the ODM Server and Attunity Studio 452 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide To install a second instance of ODM Server manually you must run the ODM Server installation file This server installation includes the ODM Server only To install an ODM Server on a Windows machine 1 Copy the Attunity license file to a directory on your machine 2 From a Command Prompt access the ODM install subdirectory of the Optim installation directory 3 Type the following command ODMINSTALL 4 When prompted to confirm the Attunity Server installation click OK 5 When prompted type the path to the Attunity license file and click OK Note To install a second instance of the ODM Server on a Windows machine run the ODM Server installation file AIS_53020 win32 exe located in the ODM install subdirectory of the Optim installation directory By default the Attunity daemon runs under the Local System account If access to needed resources requires network credentials you must change the daemon logon to an appropriate network account To change the logon account open the Services dialog from the Control Panel Administrative Tools double click Attunity Server Daemon IRPCD and specify the account on the Log On tab UNIX Installation To
326. he Optim Server DVD to a network drive and then run the setup program from the network drive 1 Create a directory on a network drive 2 Copy the contents of the Optim Server DVD to the directory Copy all of the files in the root of the Optim Server DVD to the network drive 3 See Section Run Setup Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 to begin installation Run Setup Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 The graphical interface option uses the setup program to guide you through the installation process You can begin Optim Server installation from a graphical interface in one of two ways e Mount the Optim Server DVD From File Manager or a console window navigate to the DVD ROM drive and start setup e If you copied the contents of the Optim Server DVD to a network drive navigate to the drive from File Manager or a console window and start setup 306 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Begin Optim Server Installation Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 3 This section describes how to begin the Optim Server installation When you launch setup a prompt for options and arguments displays Action Run Please enter the following information Arguments Cancel Do not enter options or arguments Click OK to continue The progress of a Sun Java Runtime Environment which launches an installation program wizard is displayed initially Window Edit Options InstallShield Wizard Initializing InstallShield Wi
327. he Server process Generally the RTSERVER script does not need modification You must change the script however if the Server is installed in a directory other than the default directory opt IBM Optim or if the Server will be run under a user account other than root The script contains areas that allow you to modify the following environment variables e Set PSTHOME PSTHOME directory rt to define the directory containing the Server e Set PSTUSER PSTUSER user to identify a user other than root Arguments RTSERVER arguments define the operation to be performed as follows rtserver start Start the Server in the background The stdout and stderr produced by the Server are written to a file named prOsvce out which can be found in the temp directory that is subordinate to the Optim installation directory Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 347 rtserver stop Stop a running Server instance The Server stops after processes are complete rtserver kill Kill a running Server instance The Server stops abruptly without regard to running processes rtserver update Reread the Pstserv configuration file after processes have completed Use this command to make changes to the configuration file without restarting the Server rtserver list List all processes running on the Server The list includes the PID of the process the name of the computer delegating the process the Optim Directory that is active f
328. he default exit during installation If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must run an opmusign script file following installation Another script file is available to revert to the default exit from a user supplied exit if needed See Signing an Exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 on page 357 for more information 356 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide The Optim default exit is delivered unsigned to ensure the following e It is signed by a user with the appropriate company credentials e The person signing the default exit is authorized to make the decision to use that exit as opposed to a user supplied exit This is important because the default exit returns a continue code at every exit point Thus if the default exit were delivered signed it would bypass any security checks and additional functionality included in your user supplied exit assuming that you already created one Writing Your Own Exit If you want to employ the additional functionality available via a user supplied exit you must write your own exit To write a user supplied exit you must do the following 1 Determine what you want the exit to do 2 Determine which Optim exit points that call your exit are suitable for what you want to do 3 Write the appropriate code to respond to those exit points within your user supplied exit After you create an exit you must compile link and copy the exit to the bin dire
329. he default exit is intended for clients who do not need to use a user supplied exit although it may also be used as a temporary solution while you create your own customized exit If you use the default exit Optim user security will function as it did before release 6 5 If you implement a user supplied exit that exit will augment the extensive security functionality already included in Optim Note A user supplied exit may also be used to perform other functions such as manage user accounts monitor user activity force inactive sessions to timeout audit product use and override user authorization credentials Regardless of which exit you use the default exit or your own exit you must sign that exit before you can use Optim After the exit is signed Optim will invoke that exit at initialization and call it at various exit points in the program to determine whether Optim should continue with what it was about to do An exit point is a point within a program at which an exit routine can take control to perform some external function The exit allows you to e See what is being done by a given user at various points in a program s logic e Ensure that the user s request meets your company standards e Change the request if needed to pass your company standards or forbid the request altogether Optim will call the exit at each exit point to verify that the user s request meets your company standards such as verifying that the use
330. he entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used Logon User ID Specify an identifier up to 30 characters required to logon to the DB Alias to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used Logon Password Enter a password up to 30 characters required to logon to the DB Alias to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before dropping or creating stored procedures Logon Defaults Tab Use the Logon Defaults tab to specify the User ID and Password needed to create refresh stored procedures E Update the DBMS Yersion for a DB Alias Update Multiple DB Aliases Efel Ea Optim will drop the Optim created Procedures created for the previous DBMS version It will hen create new Procedures to access the System Tables for each selected database The entries on the Logon Defaults tab allow you to connect to the database while configuring workstations Enter your password twice the second time is for verification 206 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Note The default logon information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit logon information on the Databases tab Stored Procedure Defaults Use the stored procedure Defaults tab to specify the procedure Qualifier and Grant Auth ID required to drop and create stored procedures E Update the DBM
331. he object Use each set of Allow and Deny check boxes to define access permissions for the role Read Controls the ability to open or view an object If access is denied a warning popup indicates the object is restricted by security A role must have Read access in addition to Update access to the object in order to update the object Update Controls the ability to save an object If access is denied the Save command will not be available from the object editor Note Roles denied update access can use the Save As command to rename an object Delete Controls the ability to delete an object If access is denied the Delete command is not available from the object editor and the Open dialog Execute Controls the ability to run a process This option is available only for objects created with editors listed in the Actions menu If access is denied the Run command is not available from the Request Editor and the Execute command is not available from the Table Editor ACL Access Possible access to the ACL Use each set of Allow and Deny check boxes to define access permissions for the role If both the Allow and Deny check boxes are cleared accounts in the role are provisionally denied the privilege but may be granted the privilege as members of another role Read Controls the ability to view the ACL A role must have Read access in addition to Update access to the ACL in order to update the ACL Update Controls the ability to modi
332. he opmdsign script file at any time following setup to sign the default exit Before you do that however make sure that no Optim processes are running The syntax for opmdsign is as follows opmdsign install_directory rt Company Id Name Password install_directory xt The rt subdirectory appended to your installation directory Company Id The six digit ID assigned to your company Name The Name assigned to your company Password The Password assigned to your company e These parameters are positional so you must enter them in the order shown above e The installation directory parameter install_directory rt is required the remaining parameters Company Id Name and Password are optional e If you specify a Name you also must specify the company ID e If the company Name contains spaces type the name in double quotation marks such as Sample Company e If you specify a Password you also must specify the company ID and Name The following examples show three different ways of using the opmdsign script to sign the default exit following Optim installation In all three examples the path for the Optim installation directory is users roberts rtinstalled opmdsign Signing Example 1 This section includes an example of signing the default exit Use the following procedure to sign the default exit after installation 1 Shut down the Optim Server if it is running 2 Change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt dir
333. he option that corresponds to the character set of the database for the Optim Directory e If the DB Alias is multi byte format the Optim directory must be set as MBCS If the DB Alias is UNICODE then the Optim Directory must be set as UNICODE e If the DB Alias is single byte the Optim Directory can be set as either UNICODE or ASCII 74 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Specify Character Set of Optim Director Mi EG he Optim Configuration Program can configure this Optim Directory to keep character data stored in it e g object names Optim Primary Keys Audit data etc in one of hree formats Single byte ASCII Unicode UTF 8 or Multi byte MBCS Select the optio cter set of the database For the Optim Directory The options on this dialog are Keep Optim Directory Data in Single byte Format ASCII Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format UTF 8 Keep Optim Directory Data in Multi byte Format MBCS Select the option and click Proceed to open the next dialog Connect to Database The Configuration program must connect to the database to create the Optim Directory tables and packages plans or procedures To enable this connection you must provide a valid User ID Password and Connection String The User ID must have the DBMS privilege to create the tables and to catalog the packages plans or procedures under the appropriate table identifier Creator
334. he role name Modified By The identifier for the user account used to create or last modify the entry Modified Date The date and time the role was created or last modified Description Text that describes the role Shortcut Menu Right click the Role List grid to display the shortcut menu commands New Open the Role Specifications dialog to create a new role Open Open the Role Specifications dialog to view or edit the selected role Delete Delete the selected role from the ACD A confirmation prompt is displayed if Personal Options are set to provide it Note The Open and Delete commands are not available for roles that are denied update access Appendix D Optim Security 391 Role Specifications The Role Specifications dialog allows you to create or edit a role within an ACD From the dialog you can identify the user and group accounts that are members of the role and assign access permissions For roles in the Default ACD you can also grant or deny access to functions in Optim for a role Role Specifications iof x Role Name Description Access Control Domain jo efault P Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges for this Role Users Functional Privileges Object Association Privileges User Group Domain Modified Date Description 2006 06 19 15 51 00 Built in account for Note You must save the ACD in order to save any changes made to the role including Functional o
335. he settings and proceed with the installation v Introduction v License Agreement Customer Information vZ Type of Installation v Install Location Component Selection ODM Information vZ Shortcut Location gt Summary gt Installation gt Installation Complete When you click Install the Installing IBM Optim on page 34 dialog displays Chapter 2 Installation 33 Installing IBM Optim When you click Install on the Pre installation Summary dialog the installation process begins The Installing IBM Optim panel displays and a progress bar allows you to monitor the process Vv Introduction v License Agreement Customer Information vV Type of Installation vV Install Location Component Selection ODM Information v Shortcut Location V Summary gt Installation gt Installation Complete At the end of the process the Installation Complete panel displays Installation Complete When the installation process finishes the Installation Completedialog allows you to e View the Release_Notes html file for the installed release e Launch the Optim Configuration program and display the Sign Optim Exit dialog The Sign Optim Exit dialog allows you to sign the default exit sup plied with Optim or a custom user supplied exit of your own creation as described in ptim Exit Dialog You must sign the default exit or a user supplied exit to continue with the Configuration process and use Optim
336. hecked for the user or group 5 Select OK to apply the changes and close the Local Security Policy Setting window UNIX Server For UNIX Super User Server credentials are required to change the effective user ID and group ID During startup if the filelogon parameter is set to client or server the effective user ID that started the daemon must be a Super User zero Character Formats Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data Optim supports the following DBMS character sets Table 1 Oracle Character Set Support ALI16UTF16 JA16SJIS AL32UTF8 NEE8ISO8859P4 AR8ISO8859P6 N8PC865 AR8MSWIN1256 TR8SMSWIN1254 BLT8MSWIN1257 US7ASCII CDN8PC863 US8PC437 CL8ISO8859P5 UTF8 CL8MSWIN1251 UTF16 EE8ISO8859P2 VN8MSWIN1258 EE8MSWIN1250 WE8DEC EL8ISO8859P7 WES8ISO8859P 1 EL8MSWIN1253 WES8ISO8859P9 IW8ISO8859P8 WES8ISO8859P15 IW8MSWIN1255 WE8MSWIN1252 WE8PC850 WE8PC863 WE8PC860 Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 Table 2 Sybase ASE Character Set Support cp437 cp1257 cp850 iso_1 cp1250 iso_2 cp1251 iso_4 cp1252 iso_5 cp1253 iso_6 cp1254 iso_7 cp1255 iso_8 cp1256 iso_9 romans UTF16 UTF8 Table 3 DB2 z OS Character Set Support 437 865 850 1252 860 UTF8 863 UTF16 Table 4 DB2 Linux UNIX Windows Character Set Support 437 964 850 970 860 1252 863 1363 865 1
337. heduling when monitor starts Clear this check box to prevent starting scheduled jobs immediately when the Schedule Monitor starts Chapter 9 Personal Options 257 Load Tab Use the options on the Load tab to set specifications for a Load Process Personal Options E Load Specifications Specify the complete path and name of the executable to access each DBMS Loader that can be used with a Load Request DB Alias Select Default to enter the path and name of the Loader executable file for each DBMS type If you have more than one version of a particular DBMS type you can enter the unique loader specification for each version Click the down arrow to select the specific DB Alias then enter the appropriate path and name of the Loader executable file for the particular DBMS version Exception Table Default Creator ID Specify a default Creator ID for exception tables DB2 and Oracle or violation tables Informix This field is available only when you select a DB Alias for a DB2 Oracle or Informix database Fully Qualified Path for DBMS Loader Specify the directory path and program name for the specific DBMS loader Consult your DBMS documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button z OS FTP User ID Provide the default user ID for the z OS FTP server used when uploading files to the z OS machine during the Load Process This option is available when you select
338. hese variables only if you included Optim ODM Interface in the CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST Otherwise remove these variables from the file Specifies whether to install and configure ODM now To install and configure ODM now specify USER_INPUT_ODM_INSTALL 1 USER_INPUT_ODM_COPYONLY 0 To copy ODM files for later installation specify USER_INPUT_ODM_INSTALL 0 USER_INPUT_ODM_COPYONLY 1 USER_INPUT_ODM_ENABLE_TRIAL USER_INPUT_ODM_SPECIFY_LICENSE Use these variables only if you included Optim ODM Interface in the CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST AND you specified USER_INPUT_ODM_INSTALL 1 to install and configure ODM now Otherwise remove these variables from the file Specifies the type of license for ODM Chapter 2 Installation 45 To specify the ODM license file USER_INPUT_ODM_ENABLE_TRIAL 0 USER_INPUT_ODM_SPECIFY_LICENSE 1 To enable a 30 day trial license for ODM USER_INPUT_ODM_ENABLE_TRIAL 1 USER_INPUT_ODM_SPECIFY_LICENSE 0 USER_SHORTCUT_NEW_PRG_MENU Create shortcut icons in a new program group Specify USER_SHORTCUT_NEW_PRG_MENU 1 Use either USER_SHORTCUT_NEW_PRG_MENU or USER_SHORTCUT_EXST_PRG_MENU do not specify both USER_SHORTCUT_EXST_PRG_MENU Create shortcut icons in an existing program group Specify USER_SHORTCUT_EXST_PRG_MENU 1 Use either USER_SHORTCUT_NEW_PRG_MENU or USER_SHORTCUT_EXST_PRG_MENU do not specify both USER_SHORTCUTS Fully qualified path for the directory in which
339. hich the process request does not provide a complete path Archive Files are stored in the Data directory datadir by default The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon archivedir PSTHOME archive archivediridx directory Archive Index Directory for Archive Index Files for which a complete path is not provided Archive Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir by default The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon archivediridx PSTHOME archiveidx archivebroidx directory Archive Browse Index Directory for Archive Browse Index Files for which a complete path is not provided To expedite the retrieval of data an Archive Browse Index File is created when a user browses archived data and joins tables By default Archive Browse Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir The directory must exist before starting the Optim daemon archivebroidx PSTHOME archivebro maxprocesses Maximum number of processes that can run on the Server simultaneously When the server reaches the maximum an error message Server too Busy is displayed Specify n A value from 10 to 48 Set the limit according to the capacity of the machine CPU disk space network access speed memory etc noting that typically a mirror validation process is created each time a client edits a process request that specifies the Server Both
340. hine Windows On the Logon tab in Personal Options provide the User ID and Password Also provide a valid Connection String for the client to connect to the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias UNIX or Linux For pstlocal cfg provide a userid and password for the pstdir and dbalias parameters Also provide a valid connectdstring for the client to connect to the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias 374 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks Optim provides a Command Line Interface that allows you to perform certain configuration tasks without using the graphical user interface for Optim You can run the Command Line Interface from the command line in a batch file or from another program Command Line Tasks You can use the Command Line Interface to e Create one or more DB Aliases e Update refreshing the DB signature one or more DB Aliases e Apply maintenance to one or more DB Aliases e Apply maintenance to one or more Optim Directories The following sections explain and describe how to perform each of these tasks Guidelines The typical command consists of PROCNFG followed by keywords and associated arguments The following guidelines apply e All keywords must be prefixed by a forward slash or a dash and separated from one another by one or more spaces Do not use commas e Keywords must be separated from arguments by an equal sign or a colo
341. hip is restricted as described in the Common Elements Manual The roles in an ACL are defined in an ACD associated with the ACL If Functional Security is enabled a member of a role that is granted an Object Association Privilege in an ACD for an object type e g Associate Access Definition privilege can use the ACD to define roles in an ACL for that object type Object Association Privileges are not required to use Object Security however these privileges must be defined to secure objects if both Functional and Object Security are enabled Once an object is associated with an ACL it is considered to be secured although Object Security must be enabled for the security defined in the ACL to be effective ACDs and File Access Definitions are automatically associated with an ACL whether or not Object Security is enabled using the Configuration program Establish Object Security This section describes how to establish Object Security To establish Object Security 1 Using the Configuration program initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator as described in Optim Security on page 120 2 Using the Configuration program enable Object Security as described in Set Optim Object Securi Option on page 176 e Indicating whether selected objects are automatically assigned an ACL when saved e Defining the Object Template ACL 3 Edit the Default ACD and any additional ACDs to map roles to network accoun
342. his antinn select the M Acknowiledne the DRMS Character Set Renuirementsl rherkhnw Options T I Acknowledge the DBMS Character Set Requirements Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format for a DB Alias After you acknowledge the DBMS character set requirements for a DB Alias in multi byte format or if the Optim Directory is in multi byte format you are prompted to acknowledge multi byte round trip conversion issues Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character and or some Unicode characters are mapped to the same multi byte character When these characters are converted from Unicode to multi byte plus multi byte to Unicode or multi byte to Unicode plus Unicode to multi byte the original character may not be returned This two way conversion is considered a round trip and identifies this situation Note To avoid round trip issues with multi byte data do not use multi byte characters in your source data that will result in ambiguous conversions from Unicode Optim provides a Product Option on the Database tab and a Personal Option on the Database tab that determine how to handle round trip conversion issues when processing data in a multi byte database Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 99 Configure First Workstation Round Trip issues with Multi byte Format Mi Ea
343. ialize the Security Feature For this Optim Directory Initialize Proceed Skip Cancel Ready Oracle Q0R 924K ZA Enable Disable Optim Server Feature On the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog indicate whether to enable or disable the current machine as a Server Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 139 Configure Additional Workstation Enable Disable Optim Server Feat Miel Ea Optim he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 P to be n Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to onfigure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim erver Feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Optim Directory OPTIMDIR License Information Server License Status Server Stabe For this Machine Licensed Enabled Enable Disable Server Feature For This Machine Enable Disable Previous Skip Cancel Ready Oracle QOR 322k Zt If the Server is not licensed Enable is not available Refer to Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server on page 143 for information needed to configure the Server Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface On the Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface dialog indicate whether to enable or disable the ODBC driver for the current machine 140 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Firs
344. ialog see Security Note Change Owner is not available for the Default ACL and the Optim Object Template ACL Model After Open the Select Access Control List Model dialog to model the ACL after another ACL Available to roles permitted to update the ACL For more information about this dialog see Select Access Control List Model on page 410 Security Users Click Change Owner to open the Security Users dialog used to reassign ACL ownership Use this dialog to select a user account from a list of accounts in a specified network domain To display the list select an Optim Server Name and a Domain To select a network user account click the name in the Users grid and click Select Appendix D Optim Security 409 Security Users local g i oo A a JL fe 16DE91 8B C768 4B3 ee 23B6E4B0 9CDF 46 Acct Ops Calendar for manager department tasks ADC_YDYVBSBGO Server Name Select the name of a Server If your site does not use a Server Local is displayed Domain Select the name of the domain for the users you want to list The domain is within a network that includes the server in Server Name Note If a UNIX server is selected the node name is displayed in Domain and in the Users grid Users A list of user accounts by Name with Domain and a Description Select Access Control List Model To model an ACL after the ACL for another security definition or Optim object click Model After to open the Select
345. iately Schedule a Report Process To schedule a Report Process to run once or repeatedly at a specified future time save the Report Request and select Schedule from the File menu e Processing is initiated at the scheduled time you do not review the Report Process as it is performed e If warning conditions exist processing continues without prompting depending on the Stop on Error parameter you specified on the Steps tab of the Scheduling Job dialog e If an error occurs during the Report Process processing stops For details on scheduling refer to the Common Elements Manual Run a Report Request To process a Report Request immediately select Run from the File menu It is not necessary to save the Report Request before it is run e Before processing begins the Report Request is verified If errors exist you can review the details on the message bar at the bottom of the Report Request Editor e After the Report Request has been verified the process parameters are verified If warnings or errors exist you can review the details in the Warnings dialog and choose to continue or cancel the process e During processing the Report Request Progress dialog displays the progress of the process and allows you to cancel the process e If an error occurs during the Report Process processing stops Report Process Report The Report Process generates a Report Process Report that provides general information and statistics about
346. icode format TRUE or ON Store data in Unicode format FALSE or OFF Do not store data in Unicode format MULTIBYTEDB Use multibyte encoding for the DB Alias TRUE or ON Use multibyte encoding FALSE or OFF Do not use multibyte encoding Optim Directory or DB Alias The following keywords are interchangeable and are not DBMS dependent SPACTION BINDACTION Indicator for Optim Stored Procedures or Optim Bind Files Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks 379 CreateNew Create new Stored Procedures or Bind Files UseExisting Use previously loaded Stored Procedures or Bind Files SPQUALIFIER COLLECTIONNAME name Schema Name or Owner ID of the Stored Procedures or Plan Name of the Bind Files Task The TASK keyword identifies the task to be performed If a task is entered on the command line you must provide the parameters on the same line When using a parameter file the TASK keyword signals the end of a list of parameters for a task keywords on lines following a TASK keyword are processed in the next task if any or are ignored if no new TASK keyword is found TASK The task identifier as follows DB Create or update a single DB Alias MAINTPST Apply maintenance to a single Optim Directory MAINTCAT Apply maintenance to a single DB Alias Examples Create Multiple DB Aliases with One Optim Directory To create multiple DB aliases with one Optim Directory the first step is to create a t
347. ide the toolbar a check mark indicates it is selected for display 64 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Status Bar Display or hide the status bar a check mark indicates it is selected for display Customize Toolbar Open the Customize Toolbar dialog to add or remove buttons Help Menu Use the Help menu to access online help information or to select the Configuration Assistant In addition if you have internet access you can connect directly to the IBM Web site A check mark indicates the toolbar or status bar is selected for display Processing Log The Processing Log lists the actions performed during the configuration process or when you select any command on the Tasks menu Optim Configuration Iof x File Tasks Options Help Processing Log Configuration starting 02 13 08 14 53 27 Build 2115 Configure the First Workstation Starting the Configure First Workstation process The Specify Product License Function was successful The Specify Optim Directory Function was successful The Specify Optim Directory DBMS Function was successful The Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data was acknowledged Connection to database QOR922K successful for user pstuser The Connect to the Oracle Optim Directory PSTDIRECTORY function was successful The Create Optim Directory Function was successful The Create Drop Packages for the Optim Directory Function was successful Database QOR922K success
348. iew When you select Rename an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu the Overview dialog provides an overview of the task To continue click Proceed 190 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Rename Optim Directory Overview his task allows you to rename a Optim Directory that was created with a 6 x version of aj Optim Since connection information for the Optim Directory is stored in the Windows Registry the Windows Registry is also updated If there are other workstations that access ded Opam prono then this task must be run on those workstations to update Select a Rename Option The first step in renaming an Optim Directory is to select a rename option You do this on the Select a Rename Option dialog Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 191 Rename Optim Directory Select a Rename Option o rename the Optim Directory and update the Windows Registry on this workstation select the Rename a Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry option button On the Select a Rename Option dialog select one of the following options e Rename an Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry Select this option to rename an Optim Directory in the Directory tables and the Windows registry on the workstation To rename a Directory this option needs to be performed only once e Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry Select this option to rename the Optim Directory in the Window
349. igure First Workstation Specify Optim Directory DBMS he Optim Configuration program can store the Optim Directory Tables in an existing database To create the Optim Directory Tables select the DBMS type and version For he database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS ersions may have been discontinued by the vendor Oracle iY fai Release 2 9 2 o o o o When this dialog opens Optim Directory Description Type and Version may be populated with previously entered information The Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog includes the following DBMS Specifications Optim Directory Description Enter text to explain the purpose of the Optim Directory up to 40 characters The description is especially valuable if you have multiple Optim Directories Type Select the DBMS for the Optim Directory database To select from a list click the down arrow The selected DBMS appears on the status bar of subsequent dialogs in the process Note You cannot create the Optim Directory in a DB2 z OS database Also an Optim Directory in an SQL Server database is not accessible to a UNIX based Optim Server Version Select the version of the DBMS for the Optim Directory database To select from a list click the down arrow Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Character data such as object names and primary keys are stored in the Optim Directory in one of these formats ASCII Unicode or multi byte Choose t
350. il you sign the new exit State This display only entry identifies the current state of your exit Code Meaning Unsigned A signed exit does not exist or was not found This is the standard status after the initial installation of an Optim release You must sign a valid exit to use Optim Valid A signed exit exists No action is required in response to this status unless you want to use a different exit Corrupt The existing signed exit was not the one expected by Optim The two most common reasons for this status are e an install was done on top of an existing install that already contained a signed exit e the existing exit was tampered with If you receive this status you must resign a valid exit to use Optim Not Authorized The current user does not have permission to access the Configuration program so Optim will terminate the user s session after displaying an appropriate error message If the user requires access to the Configuration program contact your Optim Administrator to have the user s access permissions changed Company Information There are three items listed under this heading Name ID and Password Each company is assigned a unique company Name ID and Password when it receives Optim These entries are your company credentials for accessing Optim When you install Optim on a Windows machine you normally enter your company Name and ID during setup although this may not be the ca
351. ile Note The password is provided by email when the product is shipped Modify Product Options Optim is distributed with standard settings for Product Options The Modify Product Options dialog allows you to customize these settings to accommodate conditions at your site If the Optim Directory is in multi byte format you will be prompted to use Product Options to indicate how Optim should handle round trip errors For more information see MBCS Roundtrip Processing on page 227 Configure First Workstation Modify Product Options Optim he Configuration program allows you to configure product options used by Optim To hange these options at any time select Product Options Fram the Options menu on he main window Configuration File Specifications File Mame St Product Options Previous Cancel Zi The name of the Product Configuration File specified in the preceding dialog is displayed If you click Product Options you are prompted for a password to open the Product Options dialog Note You must have a password to review and change Product Options Optim is distributed with the case sensitive password optim You can change this password when configuring the first workstation 128 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide For a detailed description of the Product Options dialog refer to Using the Editor on page 220 After you modify Product Options and retu
352. ile for the Command Line Utilit 0 Do not edit pstlocal during installation 1 Edit pstlocal during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstlocal 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_locale This keyword allows you to edit the locale conf file during the installation process using the default text editor The locale conf file provides locale conversion information between platforms You can use this file to provide additional locale conversion information For detailed information needed to edit this file see LOCALE CONF Conversion File on page 349 0 Do not edit locale conf during installation 1 Edit locale conf during installation This option will cause an error unless installing from a graphical interface W UpdateFilesPanel Update_locale 0 W View_Readme Value 326 This keyword allows you to open the readme txt file using the default text editor The readme txt file contains installation notes and information 0 Do not open readme txt during installation 1 Open readme txt during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W View_Readme Value 0 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configuration Configuration files and shell scripts are installed with the executable files when you install the Server in a supported UNIX environment
353. im Directories must have unique names Specify the name for the Optim Directory and registry entry then click lt Proceed gt to continue OPTIMDIR Greate New Ri y Entry for Existing Optim Directory The Specify Optim Directory dialog presents the following options You must select an option enter an Optim Directory name and click Proceed to open the next dialog e Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry Select this option to create the first or an additional Optim Directory This option is always available and is selected when the dialog opens If no Optim Directory registry entry exists for the workstation the default name OPTIMDIR is shown You can use this name or enter a different name for the new Optim Directory 1 to 12 characters no embedded blanks e Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry Select this option if you are updating or continuing the configuration of the first workstation This option is available after an Optim Directory and Windows registry entry are created You must enter the name of the existing Optim Directory to use Specify Optim Directory DBMS Before you can create Optim Directory tables the database instance for the Optim Directory must exist that is it must be configured under a database management system To create an Optim Directory you must identify the DBMS type and version on the Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 73 Conf
354. im Security 401 Invoke Options Invoke Options privileges are required to edit Product Options or use dialogs for securing Optim functions objects and Archive Files The respective Options menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Access Control Domain Export Security Definitions File Access Definition Import Security Definitions Product Options Invoke Utilities Invoke Utilities privileges are required to open the utilities dialogs The respective Utilities menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Archive Directory Maintenance Invoke Archive Directory Maintenance privilege is required for roles that maintain Archive Files or the Archive Directory Archive Index Maintenance Invoke Archive Index Maintenance privilege is required for roles that maintain Archive Indexes Browse Invoke Browse privilege is required for roles that browse Archive Compare Extract or Control Files Calendar Invoke Calendar privilege is required for roles that create or edit Calendars Create Invoke Create privilege is required for roles that create database objects either online or from the command line Currency Invoke Currency privilege is required for roles that create or edit Currency Definitions Export Invoke Export privilege is required for roles that export Optim objects Import Invoke Import p
355. imary keys have not been created e Create and load the sample tables if desired e Create and load the data privacy data tables if you have an Optim Data Privacy License The Configuration program then provides an option to create DB Aliases for other databases and repeats the process If you have several SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix databases on one server you can use the Create Multiple option to create a DB Alias for each database on the server from a single dialog Create DB Alias After you create the Optim Directory you are prompted to create a DB Alias for the database in which it resides Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 87 Configure First Workstation Create Update DB Alias for this Databa Mi E3 IF you plan to use Optim to access user tables in QOR922K other than the Optim Directory Tables select the Create Update DB Alias For this Database checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step If you plan to access tables in addition to Optim Directory tables in the same database select the Create Select DB Alias for this Database check box After creating the DB Alias you are prompted to share connection information for the DB Alias and the Optim Directory If you want to create a DB Alias for a different database clear the check box Click Proceed to continue Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog to create and name a single new DB Alias create multi
356. in your database allowing you to manipulate sets of relational data in the same manner as in your production environment e Data is provided for all tables in the sample database shown in the diagram An additional set of tables is also installed with the sample database Tables in the additional set have the same names as tables in the first set with the suffix 2 appended The four tables in this additional set are e OPTIM_CUSTOMERS2 e OPTIM_ORDERS2 e OPTIM_DETAILS2 e OPTIM_ITEMS2 Tables in the additional set do not contain data They are used to demonstrate the facilities in Optim OPTIM_SALES Table The OPTIM_SALES table identifies each salesperson by name ID number and manager The OPTIM_SALES table has the following columns SALESMAN _ID CHAR up to 6 characters cannot contain null FIRST_NAME VARCHAR up to 15 characters cannot contain null LAST_NAME VARCHAR up to 15 characters cannot contain null NATIONALITY VARCHAR up to 30 characters NATIONAL_ID VARCHAR up to 30 characters PHONE_NUMBER VARCHAR up to 20 characters cannot contain a null value EMAIL_ADDRESS VARCHAR up to 70 characters cannot contain null AGE SMALLINT cannot contain null has a default value SEX CHAR 1 character cannot contain null has a default value TERRITORY VARCHAR up to 14 characters cannot contain null MANAGER ID VARCHAR up to 6 characters Primary Keys The SALESMAN_ID column is the primary key c
357. ined Optim must check the Archive File to resolve the search This check box is cleared by default to direct the Archive Process to automatically search Archive Files when a match cannot be determined from Archive Index Files When you select this check box you direct the Archive Process to search Archive Index Files only Use shortcut menu commands Resolve and Resolve All to complete the search when a match cannot be determined from Archive Index information Automatically Trim Search List Select to automatically exclude all files other than possible matches when you use the Search command to locate and display Archive File names that contain specific data File Backup Device Click the down arrow to select the default backup device from a dropddown list of available backup devices Note The drop down list includes the backup devices selected on the Archive tab in Product Options If no backup devices are selected in Product Options this option is unavailable The default backup device is automatically selected when you create a new Storage Profile Removable Media Tab Use options on the Removable Media tab to set default values for segment size when creating Archive Files whether or not using a Storage Profile Definition and Extract Files When an Archive or Extract File is larger than the space limitation for the target media the file must be segmented to span more than one volume Chapter 9 Personal Options 279 9 Pers
358. ing that allows the workstation to connect to the database and access Optim Directory tables If you are using Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix you must indicate the DB Name Also provide the identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID for Optim Directory tables Note For some database management systems the identifier for Optim Directory tables must match the identifier used to create the Optim Directory including case The configuration process locates the Optim Directory and displays a confirmation message Click No to cancel the function and return to the main window or click Yes to create a registry entry for the Optim Directory and display a second Connect to Database dialog Connect to Database Subsequent Access On the next dialog you are prompted to provide the User ID and Password for subsequent access to the Optim Directory from the workstation Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 137 Configure Additional Workstation Connect to Database Optim he Optim Configuration program remembers the User ID and optionally the Password for future access to the Optim Directory Specify the User ID and Password then click Proceed Optim Directory OFTIMBIF Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr OR IZ2K Password Optim Directory Schema Name optusrd Previous Undo Cancel Hi Subsequent steps allow you to initialize Optim Security or assign
359. ion For example DB2 UDB version 7 clients connecting to a DB2 UDB version 8 server are no longer supported because version 7 has been withdrawn from service Chapter 1 Getting Started 11 To create an Optim Directory the following authorizations are needed CONNECT CREATETAB IMPLICIT _ SCHEMA BINDADD CREATE_NOT_FENCED_ROUTINE To create a DB Alias the following authorizations are needed CONNECT BINDADD IMPLICIT_SCHEMA CREATE_NOT_FENCED_ROUTINE To create and load the sample tables or data privacy tables the following authorizations are needed CONNECT CREATETAB IMPLICIT_SCHEMA When the plans are bound for the Optim Directory and the System Catalog you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users will be able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users DB2 z OS Authorizations You will need certain authorizations to create a DB Alias and create and load sample or data privacy tables for DB2 z OS To create a DB Alias for DB2 z OS the following authorizations are needed GRANT BINDADD TO userid GRANT CREATE ON COLLECTION TO userid To create and load the sample tables or data privacy tables for DB2 z OS you will need the following authorizations GRANT USE OF TABLESPACE lt tblspace gt TO lt userid gt GRANT USE OF BUFFERPOOL lt bpname gt TO lt userid gt Required Server Authorizations On a Windows machine
360. ion needed to perform a selected configuration task When a dialog opens these elements are populated with default entries or other useful information whenever possible and the most likely options are preselected e Command buttons control the logical flow from one dialog to the next e The status bar at the bottom of most configuration dialogs displays one or two boxes when you are connected to a database The first box indicates the location of the Optim Directory The second box is displayed if you are also connected to a DB Alias and indicates the corresponding information for the DB Alias Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus 67 e Each box indicates a DBMS type and a connection string separated by a dash For Informix Sybase ASE and MS SQL Server the connection string is followed by the database name The letters NA following an Informix database type indicate a Non ANSI database Skip Undo Cancel Oracle Q0A92 DB2MYS pstd Command Buttons The most common command buttons include Previous Return to the previous dialog This button is not present in every dialog Proceed Perform any tasks initiated by the current dialog using the information provided close the dialog and open the next dialog in sequence Skip Skip one or more logically related dialogs or tasks This button is not present in every dialog and is sometimes unavailable Undo Restore the dialog to its initial status This button is not pres
361. ional keyword or argument is shown in bolded square brackets A choice of settings from which only one must be selected is shown in bolded curved brackets Separates options 460 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Data Source Definition A data source definition is expressed in XML as follows lt DATASOURCE NAME datasourcename TYPE PST_GDB READONLY true gt lt CONFIG DIRDB pstdirectoryname ARCV_FILE archivefilename ARCV_GUID gggggg ARCV_ID n COLLECTION archivefilecollection PST_AF SUBSET AF_IN n n AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss AF_ID_RANGE x y PSTTRACE COMP n n COMP nn gt lt DATASOURCE gt Syntax Use the following syntax to define a data source lt DATASOURCE gt Specifies the name and type of the data source and information required to connect to the data source NAME datasourcename The data source name which can be a maximum of 32 characters in length and cannot include hyphens TYPE PST_GDB The data source driver The value for the ODM driver is PST_GDB READONLY true The value for an Archive File or Archive File Collection is true lt CONFIG gt Specifies configuration properties of a data source DIRDB pstdirectoryname The name of the Optim Directory in which the Archive File or Archive File Collection is registered Standard Optim pro
362. ions 284 285 Process Audit 525 Processing Log 65 browse the log file 66 completed actions 65 Product Configuration File additional workstations 132 configure workstations 141 creating 5 identify existing 6 set default directory 250 set default path for 229 switch configuration files 229 Product License Key description of 4 exporting 5 for additional workstations 132 for first workstation 3 for your company 72 Product Options 219 247 archive 239 configuration file 229 configuring 219 database defaults 225 DBMS Loaders 241 editing data 231 password 230 report 244 servers 237 set general defaults 221 PST Directory Objects converting 485 499 Purge DB Alias 217 Optim Directory 216 R Registry Data export file 130 from first workstation 129 importing data 133 Release _Notes file 35 Removable Media Personal Options 280 default segment sizes 280 Replace UDTs Personal Option 261 Report Request Editor 437 449 Email notification 445 menu commands 440 Report Type 440 Security Report 440 Report tab Product Options 244 245 blank lines between levels 245 blank lines between rows 245 character column width 244 indent subordinate tables 245 line length 244 lines per page 244 minimum spaces between columns 245 rows per table 244 Required Database Permissions 8 Required Server Authorizations 12 Reset Messages 254 Restore Processing secured files 413 S Sample Column Map exits 510 511 534 IBM Optim Optim
363. irectory Specify the Optim Directory for which audit parameters are defined If your site has more than one Optim Directory click the down arrow to select from a list Audit results are stored in the PSTAUDIT table in the Optim Directory If authorized you may browse or edit the PSTAUDIT table in the same way you browse or edit any other database table However Auditing Status in Product Options must be set to Active or Active User and you must have database SELECT authority for the PSTAUDIT table Auditing Defaults Specify the defaults for the auditing option at your site Enabled Select to audit processing for all tables unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list For example if a table or pattern is listed and Disabled status is specified the table is not audited Write All Columns Select to record information for all columns in updated deleted or inserted rows unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list If you clear this check box audit information is recorded for changed columns inserted rows and tables that do not have a primary key Days to Retain Specify the maximum number of days 0 to 999 to retain Audit information unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list Audit information is purged automatically after the specified number of days elapse Specify zero 0 or leave blank to retain Audit information indefinitely Maximum Rows Specify the maximum number of audited rows 0 to 999999 to retain
364. is initialized with the Optim Directory Registry Entries defined on his workstation The table on the right indicates the entries to export Drag entries etween the two tables until the desired entries are present in the right table File Mame Export License Information El E Export Optim Directory Logon Information Export DE Alias Logon Information Excluded From Export Selected For Export 1 DOCORAY Previous Cancel Zh The Export Optim Directory Registry Data dialog includes the following File Name Enter the name of the file to which you want to export the registry data The file name uses a default txt extension To select from your system directories click the browse button Note If you do not provide the full directory path and file name the file is saved to the Data Directory identified in Personal Options Export Select one or all check boxes to export e Product License information e Optim Directory Logon information e DB Alias Logon information Excluded from Export List of Optim Directories not selected for exporting registry data Name Name of each available Optim Directory 130 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory Selected for Export List of Optim Directories selected for export Name Name of each selected Optim Directory Description Text that describes or explains the p
365. isplayed Type the Password and click OK to access the file Import Security Definitions Validati B Ea Import File C temp ecdefs txt Password oo Cancel Help Ready Allow ACL for non existent Optim Objects Indicate if ACLs can be imported without having corresponding secured objects in the Optim Directory Importing ACLs before corresponding secured objects allows the objects to be secured when they are imported If secured objects are imported before the corresponding ACLs the objects are unsecured until the ACLs are imported If a corresponding secured object is never imported the Optim Directory will contain ACLs that do not secure an object orphan ACLs If an object is created with a name that matches an orphan ACL that ACL will be associated with the object e To import ACLs for secured objects that do not exist in the Optim Directory select this check box e To prevent importing ACLs for secured objects that do not exist in the Optim Directory clear the check box Overwrite existing definitions Indicate the action taken when the name of an imported security definition matches a definition already in the current Optim Directory e To overwrite existing definitions in the Directory and select any or all security definitions for import select the check box e To prevent overwriting security definitions clear the check box Duplicate definitions indicated by check boxes that are
366. ist rows to be deleted after Archive Process 0 Do not allow users to list rows to be deleted after Archive Process 1 Allow users to list rows to be deleted after Archive Process Default reviewdelafterarchive 1 reportdir Directory or location for saved reports directory As you must use a Window workstation to view reports specify a path accessible from such a workstation unixtempdir The UNIX or Linux temporary directory Default reportdir users RTuser DDRIVE OUTDIR REPORTS reportlevel Maximum number of reports to retain for each type of process e g Extract Processes Archive Processes Valid entry is 0 200 A value of 0 default disables the report retention feature 0 Do not retain reports Default n The number of reports retained for a particular process up to 200 Once the number of retained reports equals this amount the oldest report is deleted as the current report is saved reportlevel 0 centeraallowaltret Indicator for minimum Centera retention settings 0 Use the Centera default Any Storage Profile or centeraretention settings for retention will cause the process to fail 1 Use centeraretention settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum Centera retention Default If centeraavail is 0 the Archive Process will fail centeraallowaltret 1 centeraavail Indicator for the use of a Centera device 0 Centera device is not used Default 342 IBM Optim Optim Installation and
367. istics for the data referenced in an error message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Navy Display Lines Specify the maximum number of lines 3 to 9 to display in the message bar for any type of message Hide message bar when empty Select this check box to hide the message bar when there are no informational warning or error messages to display If you clear this check box the message bar appears at the bottom of each editor or dialog at all times Scheduling Tab Use the options on the Scheduling tab to specify a default directory for Optim to store process requests and to set options for the Scheduler 256 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Personal Options Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN New Folder 2 Scheduling Directory Enter the full path to the default directory for schedule files To select from your system directories click the browse button Fach user should have a unique directory for schedule files Scheduling Monitor Select options for using the Scheduling Monitor The Scheduling Monitor must be active for scheduled jobs to be processed Add to StartUp Folder Select this check box to add the Scheduler to the group of programs that start automatically when you start Microsoft Windows Show in Taskbar Icon Tray Select this check box to display the Scheduler icon in the Microsoft Windows task bar icon tray instead of as a button on the taskbar Start sc
368. itialize Optim Security and assign the Security Administrator e Create the Product Configuration File and modify Product and Personal Options e Export registry data to ease the task of configuring additional workstations Configure Additional Workstation After you configure the first workstation you can configure any additional workstations to use Optim This task uses Optim Directory and DB Aliases created while configuring the first workstation However you must create a Windows registry entry on each additional workstation to permit access to the Optim Directory You may also configure Personal Options for each workstation Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 131 Note If the configuration at your site requires you may create a separate Product Configuration File for an individual workstation however the typical installation uses one Configuration File that is easily accessible to all users Guidelines When you configure additional workstations the following guidelines apply e Even if you install Optim on a server that allows access to each workstation you must run Setup before configuring each additional workstation This step ensures that the Windows registry for the workstation is properly prepared and desktop icons are created e If you run Setup for a workstation with the Optim software on a file server you must identify the server directory in which Optim is installed as the Destination Folder You can start the process
369. ix database You can download the Informix Client SDK for free from the Informix website To create and access an Optim Directory and a DB Alias the user account be defined on the server that is the operating system The user account must be configured in uppercase for an ANSI database and in lower case for a non ANSI database The server is not case sensitive To create the Optim Directory or a DB Alias a user account must have the RESOURCE privilege Note DBA privilege includes RESOURCE privilege In some cases however Informix requires that the user account used to create the stored procedures or tables match the stored procedure qualifier or table owner ID This is true even if the user account has DBA privilege This rule also applies when creating the sample tables or data privacy tables since a GRANT is issued as part of the creation process When you catalog procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users To access an existing Optim Directory or a DB Alias a user must have CONNECT privilege Note Both DBA and RESOURCE privileges include CONNECT privilege DB2 Linux UNIX Windows Interface The DB2 Linux UNIX Windows interface used to validate a user account uses restricted APIs DB2 Linux UNIX Windows
370. ject types to list on the right side of the dialog Appendix D Optim Security 411 Select an Access Control List Access Control Domain ACL Access Control Dor Access Definition 4 E Archive Request Ai Calendar ACL NA topt4 Column Map ACL VWEST DOM eng1 Column Map Proc A NA Yopt2 2 2 2007 2 27 02 PM Compare Request NA topt3 7 18 2006 2 17 29PM INA topt4 219 2008 2 15 02PM z R Convert Request A M Enter pattern for Access Control List NAME TEST bd Cancel Refresh Help After you select an Identifier ACLs are listed on the right side below the type of object Double click the desired ACL to select it as a model Note An ACL is identified by the name of its associated object Enter Pattern for Access Control List allows you to limit the ACL list to names that match the specified criteria You can use the percent wild card to represent one or more characters or use the _ underscore wild card to represent a single character The underscore must be selected as the SQL LIKE character on the General tab of Personal Options After you specify a Pattern click Refresh to display the list again based on your criteria File Access Definition Use a File Access Definition to control access to data in one or more Archive Files created by running an Archive Request that references the FAD The archived data is protected according
371. l Click this button to send a test email to your mailbox Note It is recommended that you send a test email to ensure that the information you entered is sufficient to send an email If you do not receive the test email make the necessary corrections to the information you entered Chapter 9 Personal Options 291 292 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux This section provides information needed to install and configure the Optim Server on a UNIX or Linux machine The installation process for Optim 7 3 has changed from prior releases of Optimand differs depending on your environment For Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 sites refer to Installation Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 on page 306 For all other supported UNIX or Linux platforms refer to Configuration information applies to all UNIX or Linux environments You can use the Sun Solaris operating environment under SPARC the Hewlett Packard HP UX operating environment the IBM AIX operating environment or the Red Hat Application Server Note that an Optim Server installed in a UNIX environment cannot access an Optim Directory in an SQL Server database Configuration files included with the installation must be modified to adapt the Server to the requirements of your environment After completing the installation and configuration processing initiated on a Windows workstation can be dir
372. l Optim you can use this task to create primary keys for tables added to the database See Create Primary Keys on page 208 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships Use this task to copy DB2 z OS relationships into the Optim Directory which reduces the run time when accessing DB2 z OS tables See Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships on page 209 Load Drop Sample Data Sample tables are distributed with Optim and are generally loaded when you configure a workstation but you can use this task to load or refresh the sample data independently See Load Drop Sample Data on page 210 Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus 63 Load Drop Data Privacy Data Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables are generally loaded when you configure a workstation if you have a Data Privac License but you can use this task to load or refresh them See Load Drop Data Privacy Data Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Use this task to drop a DB Alias or an Optim Directory See Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables on Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry You may at times want to remove workstation access to an Optim Directory without dropping the Directory or packages plans or procedures used to access that Directory or disable Optim for a workstation Use this task to purge a workstation registry entry to accomplish these goals See You may want to purge a DB A
373. l and select Test Connection from the shortcut menu A message displays in the Status bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the success or failure of the test If you selected the Always Ask For Password check box you are prompted to enter the password Server Tab Use the Server tab to provide credentials that may be used when the optional Server is enabled and tasks are delegated to the Server The Server can be configured to use these credentials for access to the Optim Directory certain DB Aliases or the working files Chapter 9 Personal Options 269 Personal Options Server Select the name of the Server for which to enter User ID Password and Domain information Click the down arrow to select from the list of Servers configured in Product Options or select Default to use the same information for all Servers User ID Enter the User ID used by the Server when performing tasks Note The User ID must have SeBatchLogonRight privileges or be a member of a well known group with the appropriate authority This privilege must be granted at the local level for each Server machine Password Enter the password corresponding to the specified User ID Domain Enter the Domain name used to run actions remotely or for remote input output files 270 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Always Ask for Password Select to display the Server Logon dialog whenever the Server is used for remote proces
374. lank row at the bottom of the Table 416 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide List select Add table from the shortcut menu and select From Database from the submenu You can then select one or more table names to be added to the Table List The Select Table s dialog lists the database tables e DB Aliases for available databases are listed on the left To list tables in a database double click the DB Alias or overtype the DB Alias in the Pattern box e Objects referenced by the selected DB Alias are listed in the Database Table grid in alphabetical order by Creator ID and Table Name The type of object table view alias synonym DBMS and fully qualified name are provided Selecting Tables from an Archive File When you select Add table from the Table List shortcut menu and select From Archive File from the submenu the Open dialog is displayed to allow you to select an Archive File In the Open dialog select the server on which the file resides and click Refresh Use Look In to select the directory or path containing the file and then double click a listed file name or enter the file name and click Open The names of tables in the selected file are listed in the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog Source indicates the path for the file File Access Definition Table Column Selection Iof x Source e Templarchtest af DBMS OPTUSR CUSTOMERS DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS Use the File Ac
375. lans or procedures needed to access database tables Generally you apply maintenance for DB Alias access only when you are installing a new version of Optim or to recreate packages plans or procedures To refresh or update the packages plans or procedures for database tables select Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access from the Tasks menu Specify Optim Directory The first step in applying maintenance for DB Alias access is to specify an Optim Directory see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 You must select an Optim Directory name and click Proceed to open the next dialog Connect to Database When applying maintenance for DB Alias access the Configuration program must connect to the database to access Optim Directory Tables Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 183 lt gt Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the m selected task DIRECTORY optusr3 J QORS22K O O On the Connect to Database dialog you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that allows the workstation to connect to the database to access Optim Directory tables Note The User ID you specify must have the authorization to perform this maintenance task Query Method to Apply Maintenance After you specify the Optim Directory and c
376. laris 8 Run the setup process from the command line using the following command setup silent options lt file name gt For example if setupopts is in the users name directory enter the following setup silent options users name setupopts If you are upgrading or installing on a machine that has one or more Servers installed in another directory you must manually shut down all Server processing To shut down a Server you must log on as the processing user account for each Server and run the following command before manually shutting the Server down rt mw bin mwadm stop Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 323 Syntax Conventions Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 The syntax conventions used to describe the setupopts keywords are as follow yn pop yw parameter Parameters can be entered in UPPER lower or Mixed case Defaults are shown in bold text text Variable parameter text is shown in lower case italics Delimiter for optional keywords or parameters Delimiter for a choice from which you must select one l Separates options Keywords Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 P_installLocation nstalldirectory P Programteature active true false true eae Ley _W_ODMLicensePanel ODMLicenseField W UpdateFi esPanel Update_rtsetenv W _UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtser pdatefileskanel ir date _rtserver 8 Sona W View Readme Value W Lic
377. later You can convert and migrate the following objects Access Definitions Table Maps Column Maps Column Map Procedures Primary Keys DB Aliases Relationships Calendars Currency Definitions Storage Profiles process requests Archive File Directory entries and File Access Definitions Note When running setup select the 5 x PST Directory Conversion component to install files required for converting PST Directory objects The Conversion Process consists of three steps which must be completed in the order listed 1 Create a new Optim Directory This step can be completed prior to running the Conversion Process if desired using commands available from the Tasks menu Note If you create a new Directory before using the Conversion Process note the following e If Object Security is applied to a 6 0 Directory before you convert 5 x objects you can automatically secure converted objects Automatically securing objects may be more convenient than securing each object manually For more information see Automatically Associate an Object with an ACL on page 406 e If Functional Security is enabled for the 6 0 Directory you must have the create privilege for the objects you are converting For more information see Functional Privileges Tab on page 397 2 Export objects from the old PST Directory to an Export File 3 Import objects from the Export File to the new Optim Directory You can complete this step from
378. lation and Configuration Guide Optim Server Setup If the Invalid Credentials Specified dialog appears click Next to display the Sign Optim Exit dialog again Then repeat the signing process by typing your company credential in the correct format If needed refer to the company credential you received along with Optim to determine the correct format for this information The Sign Optim Exit Failed Dialog Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 The Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog notifies you about exit related errors For example if the Optim module used to challenge an exit s signing is corrupted or missing the Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog will appear Note The Invalid Credentials Specified dialog displays errors pertaining to the company credentials specified during the signing of an exit Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 359 Optim Server Setup It is important to understand that this dialog only notifies you that there was an unspecified error in the signing process Detailed information about the actual error will appear in a separate text editor window after you click Next Optim will extract the appropriate error information from a prOsign txt file as shown in the following example Text Editor prOsign txt CETATI The system cannot find the file specified In the above example the signing process failed because the module used to challenge the signing is missing The information displ
379. le This starts the console installation process Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 295 Information about the installation process displays Throughout the process you can use these commands e To return to a previous screen use back e To cancel the installation use quit Press Enter to continue to the Welcome screen 296 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide This panel informs you that some files must be modified before starting the Optim Server Continue to the Software License Agreement screen The Software License Agreement screen prompts you to read and accept the agreement Enter one of the following 1 to accept the agreement and proceed to the Choose Destination Location screen 2 to decline the agreement 3 to print the agreement 99 to return to the previous screen The Choose Destination Location screen displays next Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 297 The Choose Destination Location screen prompts you to select a directory where the Optim server will be installed You can accept the default or enter the path to the directory you choose Continue to the Shutdown Information screen The Shutdown Information screen contains instructions for uninstalling or stopping any earlier versions of Optim server Continue to the Choose Install Set screen 298 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide On the
380. le DBMS OPTUSR4 FEMALE_RATES d Enter pattern for Table DBALI45 CREATORID TABLE DEMS OPTUSR4 Cancel Refresh Help gt Show Only rn I Find Tables Related to Table i arente Levels to Search Alias DEMS AMYS CUSTOMERS al S Shiler a V All Levels Tables Matching Table Pattern Both H C n of oF sie Fy Select All Matching Synonyms Select Table The Select Table to be audited dialog provides a list of tables for the selected database e DB Aliases for available databases are listed on the left To list tables in a database double click the DB Alias or overtype the DB Alias in the Pattern box e Objects referenced by the selected DB Alias are listed in the Database Table grid in alphabetical order by Creator ID and Table Name The type of object table view alias synonym DBMS and fully qualified name are provided Pattern Use a pattern to limit the list of objects in the Select Table to be audited dialog After you specify a pattern click Refresh to display again the list based on your criteria Chapter 8 Product Options 235 Audit Summary During an Edit Process Optim audits tables according to the following parameters If Active Check for the table name on the Product Options list in the Audit Tables dialog e If the table is on the list and Enabled the table is audited e If the table is on the list and Disabled the table is not audited If the table is not on the list and the Enabled che
381. le The OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP table contains state codes and corresponding abbreviations The OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP table has the following columns DIST_CODE CHAR 3 characters cannot contain a null value DISTRICT CHAR 2 characters cannot contain a null value Primary Keys The OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP table does not have a primary key Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP table is a child of the OPTIM_SALES table through a substring relationship on column DISTRICT using SUBSTR SALESMAN_ID 1 2 Sample Column Map Exits The Samples CMExit subdirectory includes a set of sample exit routines These commented samples show how to use the data areas available for exit routines and provide examples of the type of processing that can be performed using an exit Note Column Map Exits must be compiled and linked and must conform to C programming language calling conventions Sample exit routines included are PSTEXIT C Samples of the three types of exit routines standard source format and destination format PSTEXIT dll Compiled versions of the three sample exit routines PSTEXIT h PSTCMEXIT h Required header files PSTEXIT mak A sample make file Note For complete information about Column Map Exits refer to the Common Elements Manual Sample Standard Exit A Standard Exit routine is called to derive the value for a destination column in a Column Map This sample performs two operations on the sample databas
382. le E aiReeass2 02 o o o o o The Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog includes the following details When the dialog opens Optim Directory Description Type and Version are populated with any previously entered information DBMS Specifications Optim Directory Description Provide text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory up to 40 characters This is useful if you have multiple Optim Directories Type Select the type of DBMS software To select from a list click the down arrow The selected DBMS appears on the status bar of subsequent dialogs in the process Version Select the version of the DBMS software To select from a list click the down arrow Connect to Database The Connect to Database dialog allows you to provide database connection information for the Optim Directory registry entry 136 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Additional Workstation Connect to Database Optim he Optim Configuration program remembers the User ID and optionally the Password for future access to the Optim Directory Specify the User ID and Password then click Proceed Optim Directory OPTIMDIF Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String loptusr JORIK Password Optim Directory Schema Marne optusrd Previous Undo Cancel Hi When configuring the workstation you must provide a User ID Password and Connection Str
383. le Installer UNIX or Gini Silent Installer UNIX Installation Red Hat Linux 3 and Solaris 8 Installing from a Network Drive Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 Run Setup Red Hat Tinuk 3 0 or Svla is 8 Command Line Installation Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 Configuration Pstserv Configuration File Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility RTSETENV Shell Seript RTSERVER Shell Script RT4S Shell Script i LOCALE CONF Conversion File Maintenance and Performance Temporary Files Securing the Products and Configuration Files Securing the Products Securing the Configuration Files The Optim Exit in UNIX Writing Your Own Exit 5 Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit Signing an Exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 The Invalid Cred ntials Specified Dialog Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 The Sign Optim Exit Failed Dialog Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 Signing the Default Exit after an installation Linux 3 or Solaris 8 Appendix B Server Credentials Server Credentials Credentials to Run the Server Credentials to Run Optim Processes Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials UNC Network Share Access Windows Registry Access for Process Requests Windows Oracle OS Authentication UNIX or Linux File Access DBMS Logon Credentials Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks Syntax and Keywords Keywords Examples Create Multiple
384. le Security Option dialog is displayed Click Cancel to exit the security configuration process and cancel any changes to the Security Administrator Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 175 Set Functional Security Option The Set Functional Security Option dialog allows the Security Administrator to enable or disable Functional Security for the Optim Directory Functional Security controls access to functions and dialogs in Optim For more information about Functional Security see Privileges Tabs on page 396 amp Configure Security Set Functional Security Option Optim he Configuration program can Enable or Disable the Functional Security Feature For the urrent Optim Directory Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security dministrator Select an option to enable or disable the Functional Security feature lick lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step gt A Optim Directory Security Feature Security State DIRECTORY l Functional Security l Disabled Security Administrator For this Optim Directory Domain User Name NA optusr3 Security Options for this Optim Directory Enable Disable Skip Cancel Oracle QOR922K Ui Optim Directory indicates the directory name and Security Feature shows that Functional Security is the option you can enable or disable Security State indicates that security for the option is Enabled
385. le Tables Table Specifications Schema Name Tablespace lt 0 Default gt C Display SOL Previous Skip Unda Cancel The Load Drop Sample Tables dialog displays the following DB Alias DB Alias for sample tables If you do not want to load sample tables for this DB Alias click Skip Load Refresh Sample Tables Select this option to load or refresh sample tables This option is available and selected when Load Drop Sample Tables opens Drop Sample Tables Select this option to drop previously loaded sample tables This option is unavailable when not applicable such as when you are initially loading those tables Sample Table Specifications Schema Name Enter an identifier for the sample tables This element is labeled Creator ID for DB2 Schema Name for Oracle and Owner ID for an SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix database Tablespace Select a tablespace to store the tables To select from a list click the down arrow Tablespace is not available if you select Drop Sample Tables Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 105 Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before loading or dropping the tables Note If you are loading or refreshing the sample tables click Proceed to open the Drop Tables dialog Drop Tables The Drop Tables dialog allows you to review a list of the sample tables that are to be dropped within the selected DB Alias Configure First Workstation Drop Tables
386. lease read the following license agreement carefully Intemational Program License Agreement Part 1 General Terms BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING COPYING ACCESSING OR USING THE PROGRAM YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREBWENT IF YOU ARE ACCEPTING THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF ANOTHER PERSON OR ACOMPANY OR OTHER LEGAL ENTITY YOU REPRESENT AND WARRANT THAT YOU HAVE FULL AUTHORITY TO BIND THAT PERSON COMPANY OR LEGAL ENTITY TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL COPY ACCESS OR USE THE PROGRAM AND PROMPTLY RETURN THE PROGRAM AND PROOF OF ENTITLEMENT TO THE PARTY FROM WHOM YOU ACQUIRED IT TO OBTAIN A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID IF YOU DOWNLOADED THE PROGRAM CONTACT THE PARTY FROM WHOM YOU ACQUIRED IT IBM is Intemational Business Machines Corporation or one of its subsidiaries _jl accept the terms in the license agreement _jl do not accept the terms in the license agreement InstallShield You must accept the terms of the license agreement in order to enable the Next button and continue the installation After you select the option accepting the licensing agreement click Next to indicate that your company agrees to its provisions Choose Destination Location Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to choose the destination location The Server must be installed in a directory When the following dialog opens a default path and directory name are provided Ap
387. lect from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default Archive Browse Index Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want to store Archive Index Browse Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default 278 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide An Archive Index Browse File is created automatically whenever you join tables while browsing an Archive File The Archive Index Browse File stores primary key and foreign key information to expedite the retrieval of data and has an abf extension by default Archive Index Browse Files are dynamically updated For this reason it is advisable to select a directory accessible to any user that may browse an Archive File Directory for Generated Subset Extract Files Select either Data Directory or Temporary Work Directory to specify the location in which to store automatically generated subset Extract Files Note Both directories are specified on the General tab Only Use Index to Perform Search When search criteria are used to locate Archive Files containing specific data Optim initially searches for matching rows in the corresponding Archive Index Files If a match for the search criteria cannot be determined from the Archive Index information or index information is not def
388. lect the Tools gt Show Process Log menu option to display the Security Import Process Log Security Import Process Log ioj x Fie Options Help Security Import Process Log Created on 2 19 2008 at 16 38 23 Access Control Lists Imported Optim Object Template Access Control List Imported OPTUSR47 4D1 Access Definition Imported OPTUSR47 4DSAMP Access Definition Imported OPTUSR47 TEST1 Access Definition Imported OPTUSR1ARCORD Archive Request Imported OPTUSR MULTARCHIDX Archive Request Imported ROBERTSC NOV4 Archive Request Imported SAMPLE_DE Calendar Imported PSTFXF CUST Column Map Imported TEST18 CURRENCY1 Column Map Imported TEST18 CURRENCY2 Column Map Imported OPTUSR CUST Extract Request MATII CortaAmiogs e g Creation Date Date and time the Security Import Process Log was created List of errors Explanatory text for each error if errors were encountered List of imported objects Names of the imported security definitions listed by object type and name Print Print the log by choosing the File gt Print menu option Each execution of the Security Definition Import clears the log before information for the current execution is written Previous log information is not retained Appendix D Optim Security 435 436 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix E Security Reports Using the Report Process you can create a report on the permissions for F
389. lespace lt DEFAULT gt v IV Use default tablespace Defaults Undo Cancel Apply Help R eady Ai DB Alias Specify the DB Alias that identifies the database in which you want to create database objects To select from a list click the down arrow Specify default options for creating different types of database objects on each corresponding tab 260 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Compile error Drop Select this check box to automatically drop any Oracle object that causes a compile type error during the Create Process If you clear this check box and compile type errors occur you must interrupt the Create Process to drop the object before continuing This feature applies to Oracle compile type errors that may occur on certain database objects functions packages package bodies procedures triggers and views The Create Process can create these objects but they may not be functional Select this check box to correct possible problems in the Review SQL dialog before performing the Create Process Replace UDTs Select this check box to replace table type column references to User Defined data Types with base column data types in any generated DDL When you clear this check box references to UDTs are preserved in generated DDL This check box is available only when you select a DB Alias for a DB2 Sybase ASE or SQL Server database Note Clear this check box if you want UDT
390. let select Server for the File Input Output option and select the Only files local to this Server may be accessed check box UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the filelogon parameter to local Note the following when you use the Server credentials to run processes e For Windows a service running under Local System Account cannot be logged on to the network See UNC Network Share Access Windows on page 372 for more information e Oracle OS Authentication will run under the user that started the service Windows or daemon UNIX or Linux Oracle requires a known User ID established by an administrator therefore you cannot use the Local System Account for Windows Informix Loader which uses credentials for the currentl logged on user also requires a known User ID For more information see Oracle OS Authentication on page 372 e For UNIX or Linux mount points for networked shares or file access are allowed according to the effective User or Group accounts for the process Therefore all processes can use files available to the User account under which the Server daemon is started For more information see UNIX or Linux File Access on page 373 Run Under Explicit Credentials You can run processes under an explicit user account to control network access and DBMS logons that use the account for the process for Oracle OS Authentication and Informix Loader 370 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Config
391. lias Access Apply Maintenance to Anot Bie Ea o apply maintenance For catalog access in another DBMS select the Apply jaintenance for Another DBMS Type checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the ext step On this dialog you can do the following e To apply maintenance for another DBMS select the check box and click Proceed to open the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog e To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed on each subsequent dialog until the Complete dialog displays Rename an Optim Directory At times you may rename an Optim Directory For example upgrading from version 5 x to version 6 x requires that you create a new Directory and convert Optim objects created before the upgrade Once the new Directory is created and the old Directory is deleted you can rename the new Directory to use it in place of the old Directory To learn how to convert Optim objects created before the upgrade to version 6 x refer to ing i i j e 485 To delete a Directory see Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables on page 211 To rename the new Directory you must replace the name in the Directory itself and in the Windows registry on each workstation that accesses the Directory Select Rename an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu to change the name in the Optim Directory and workstation registry or once the Optim Directory is changed to rename a registry entry or register the renamed Directory on a workstation Overv
392. lias when you drop a database or to make a database temporarily inaccessible to workstations using Optim See Purge DB Alias on page 217 Note Many basic tasks are also available when you select Configuration Assistant from the Help menu See Configuration Assistant on page 66 for details Options Menu Use the Options menu to edit or view license or company name information sign a user exit customize the toolbar and view or hide the toolbar or status bar by selecting either command from the menu Select any of the following commands Optim Configuration Fie Tasks Options Help License Sign Optim Exit Configure Company Name Processing L Toolbar v Status Bar Customize Toolbar License After the initial installation you may need to change the license key A new license key may be required for example to activate additional functions or increase the number of users or servers for Optim Select License to display the Specify Product License Key dialog After you update the license key you must store the key in the Optim Directory by connecting to the Directory Sign Optim Exit Select this option to display the Sign Optim Exit dialog to sign and activate a new exit whether it is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit Company Name IBM generates a license key for a specific Company Name and Company ID Select Company Name to display the Change Company Name dialog Toolbar Display or h
393. ll be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Calendar Archive File Collection Currency Storage Profile Editor Options Editor Options privileges are required to create database objects for example create tables drop tables or modify SQL statements Appendix D Optim Security 399 This class includes the following privileges Create Indexes During Primary Key Index Analysis Create Indexes During Primary Key Index Analysis privilege is required to create new indexes from the Primary Key Index Analysis dialog Create Indexes During Relationship Index Analysis Create Indexes During Relationship Index Analysis privilege is required to create new indexes from the Relationship Index Analysis dialog Create Tables During Create Create Tables During Create privilege is required to create new tables during the Create Process Drop Tables During Create Drop Tables During Create privilege is required to drop tables during the Create Process Modify SQL During Create Modify SQL During Create privilege is required to modify SQL statements during the Create Process Modify SQL During Primary Key Index Analysis Modify SQL During Primary Key Index Analysis privilege is required to modify SQL statements when creating indexes from the Primary Key Index Analysis dialog Modify SQL During Relationship Index Analysis Modify SQL During Relationship Index Analysis privilege is required to modif
394. llation gt Installation Complete Command Buttons After you read and accept the License Agreement select I accept the terms in the license agreement to indicate that your company agrees to its provisions You must click Next to continue to the Information on page 26 dialog Other command buttons I do not accept the terms in the license agreement Cancels and does not install Optim Print Prints this dialog Cancel Cancels and does not install Optim Previous Returns to the Install Introduction on page 23 dialog Chapter 2 Installation 25 Customer Information The Customer Information dialog prompts for information to supplement your company License Key Introduction v License Agreement gt Customer Information Type of Installation Install Location DO Component Selection ODM Information Shortcut Location D Summary Installation Installation Complete The following information is needed to proceed with the installation User Name Your User ID Company Name Your company name as provided on the notification sent when Optim is shipped to you Company ID Your company identifier as provided on the notification sent when Optim is shipped to you Click Next to continue with the Select the Type of Installation on page 27 dialog or click Previous to return to the Software License on page 25 dialog 26 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Sele
395. llection 481 subsets 482 Archive tab Personal Options 278 279 Archive browse index directory 278 Archive directory 278 Archive index directory 278 directory for Subset Extract Files 279 file backup device 279 trim search list 279 use index to search 279 Archive tab Product Options 239 241 available file backup devices 239 Centera options 240 Centera retention period 240 Tivoli options 240 user can review data to be deleted 239 WORM device retention period 240 Attunity Upgrade 483 Audit Tables dialog 232 234 275 276 Select Table to be Audited dialog 235 summary 236 Auditing 525 active status 231 Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 Auditing continued active user status 231 Audit Tables dialog 232 234 275 276 description of 236 enable disable for tables 275 inactive status 231 Personal Options tables list 275 Product Options Edit tab 232 PSTAUDIT 233 275 site defaults 233 summary 236 Auditing Optim processes 525 Bind Drop Plans creating a DB Alias 92 creating Optim Directory 80 Browse tab Personal Options 276 277 auto switch 277 display changed data 277 display column attributes 276 display row count 277 maximum exclude rows 277 side label display 277 Buffer Pool index defaults 264 C Cascade Delete Update Option 223 287 Character Formats 13 Choose Destination Location 28 Column Map Procedures sample 511 Command Line Interface 375 381 examples 380 381 keywords 376 380 syntax 376 syntax g
396. location E Connect through fixed NAT Ping server 4 In the Name field type the name of your ODBC data source and click Next 464 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide FR Attunity Connect ODBC Setup Wizard Fifa x What Attunity Connect binding do you wish to use An Attunity Connect binding represents a collection of data sources as well as settings for some particular task e g reporting transactions etc Default datasource catalog IM Single datasource for schema T Virtual database T Batch update passthru 5 Select NAV from the Binding list select the datasource from the Default datasource list Leave the Single datasource checkbox checked and click Next Appendix F Open Data Manager 465 PR attunity Connect ODBC Setup Wizard 5 x Select a local user profile to use for this ODBC data source 4 user profile definition holds usernames and passwords required by Attunity Connect for accessing databases and remote machines User profile x Password I Save password unsafe 6 If applicable select the User profile and enter a Password Click Next 466 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide BR attunity Connect ODBC Setup Wizard Attunity Connect provides log more detailed than ODBC trace availble via the ODBC control panel Log file name ODBC_MYDSN_ p log I General trace 7 Produce log to debug output A
397. location of Optim PSTHOME opt IBM Optim PSTINFO 346 The location of process information files for Optim all installations If this environment variable is not set it defaults to the following PSTINFO var tmp rt4s Set this variable if you do not have access to var tmp or if you want to direct process information to another location IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Note All installations of Optim must point to the same location ORACLE_HOME The location of Oracle ORACLE_HOME opt oracle TNS_ADMIN The location of file tnsnames ora TNS_ADMIN opt oracle RTORACLELIB The location of the Oracle API shared objects RTORACLELIB ORACLE_HOME 1ib DB2CODEPAGE The code page for DB2 DB2CODEPAGE 1252 RTDB2PROFILE The location of the DB2 environment script db2profile RTDB2PROFILE opt db2ad81 sqllib SYBASE The location of Sybase ASE SYBASE opt sybase RTSYBASELIB The location of the Sybase ASE API shared objects SYBASE opt sybase syb12 0CS 12_0 1ib INFORMIXDIR The location of Informix INFORMIXDIR opt informix INFORMIXSERVER The name of the Informix server when the product was configured INFORMIXSQLHOSTS The location of Informix SQLHOSTS INFORMIXSQLHOSTS INFORMIXDIR sqlhosts RTSERVER Shell Script The RTSERVER shell script is located in the sbin directory that is subordinate to the Optim installation directory This shell script contains commands that may be useful to manipulate t
398. ltiple DB Aliases 204 Configure Options 3 207 Create Primary Keys 208 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships 209 Load Drop Sample Data 5 210 Load Drop Data Privacy Data 211 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables 211 Drop the Optim Directory lt 215 Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry 216 Purge DB Alias 217 Chapter 8 Product Options 219 Configuring Product Options 219 Using the Configuration Program to Configure Product Options a 219 Configuring Product Options within p m 219 Using the Editor She ek 8 220 General Tab 221 Database Tab i225 Configuration File Tab 228 Password Tab 230 Edit Tab 230 Servers Tab 236 Archive Tab 238 Load Tab 241 Report Tab 244 Chapter 9 Personal Options 247 Configuring Personal Options 247 Using the Configuration Program to Configure Personal Options 247 Configuring Personal Options within Optim 247 Using the Editor 248 General Tab 249 Confirm Tab 251 Display Tab gt 252 Errors Tab 255 Scheduling Tab 256 Load Tab 258 Create Tab 260 Logon Tab 268 Server Tab 269 Edit Tab 272 Browse Tab 276 Archive Tab 278 Removable Media Tab 279 Actions Tab 281 Printer Tab 283 Database Tab 286 Notify Tab 288 iv IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Installation Conso
399. ly available systems Furthermore some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products All statements regarding IBM s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice and represent goals and objectives only All IBM prices shown are IBM s suggested retail prices are current and are subject to change without notice Dealer prices may vary This information is for planning purposes only The information herein is subject to change before the products described become available This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental COPYRIGHT LICENSE This information contains sample applica
400. m Object Template ACL on page 179 Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 177 Note Secure Selected Objects When Saved is available only when Enable is selected To automatically assign an ACL to an object select Secure Selected Objects When Saved When Secure Selected Objects When Saved is selected the browse button is available Click the browse button to open the Select Optim Object Types dialog which allows you to select the types of Optim objects that are automatically assigned an ACL when they are saved To secure objects with an ACL when saved 1 In Security Options for this Optim Directory select Enabled 2 Select Secure Selected Objects When Saved 3 Click the browse button to open the Select Optim Object Types dialog 4 In the Optim Objects List select the check box for each object type you want to automatically assign an ACL when saved 5 Click OK to return to the Set Optim Object Security Option dialog Note If Secure Selected Objects When Saved is selected objects are automatically assigned an ACL when Object Security is either enabled or disabled Select Optim Object Types Use the Select Optim Object Types dialog to select object types that are assigned an ACL when saved Use the check boxes in the Optim Objects list to select the object types To exclude an object type clear the corresponding check box Configure Security Select Optim Object Types he Configuration program
401. m exit or a user supplied exit to use Optim See The Sign Optim Exit Dialog e 54 for further information Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit 51 Sign Optim Exit he Optim Exit validates that a user is authorized to use Optim 4 default Optim Exit that allows access to all actions by all users is supplied with Optim and can be used if our company security policies allow The Optim Exit must be signed To sign an exit ou must enter the unique Password that was included when you received your namnan IN and icens bk anw time waou ran sion a different evik hw ce legye Cie GUITEnUY sianed sab Intact If you click Cancel without signing an exit Optim displays a warning message and the Configuration program terminates Note If you did not previously provide a company Name and ID the Specify Company Name dialog will appear before the Sign Optim Exit dialog See Specifying a Company Name and ID on page 56 for more information 52 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Changing a Signed Optim Exit After you sign an exit you can sign a different exit or switch between the default exit and a user supplied exit by selecting Options gt Sign Optim Exit from the Configuration main window D z Optim Configuration Sign Optim Exit 55 34 Build 3015 Toolbar Selecting this option displays the Sign Optim Exit dialog described in The Sign Optim Exit Dialog oni page 54 54
402. m the current version If not an error message displays To continue click Proceed Connect to Database If you are updating the DBMS version for only one DB Alias the Connect to Database dialog opens You specify the User ID Password and Connection String needed to connect to the selected database Note If you are updating the DBMS version for Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix and you have several databases on one server refer to Update Multiple DB Aliases on page 204 for complete details Create Drop Packages The Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages dialog the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog or the Bind Drop Plans dialog as appropriate for the DBMS you are using Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 203 E Update the DBMS Yersion for a DB Alias Create Drop Packages he Optim Configuration program can drop the Optim created Packages for the Data Dictionary The Package Schema Name must match the name used when you created he Packages If the Packages are used by another Optim Directory click lt Skip gt Grant Auth ID The Drop option is selected when this dialog opens You can select the Display SQL check box to browse the DDL statements generated for the process To continue click OK After the Drop process completes this dialog displays again with the Create Refresh option selected automatically Click Proceed to create the following e Packages to access the Data Di
403. m the Report Request Editor To select a Report Request to edit 1 In the Main window select the File gt Open menu option to display the Open object selection dialog Double click to select Report Request and expand the Identifier list Double click the Report Request Identifier to display a list of Report Requests Optional Specify a pattern to limit the list based on your criteria and click Refresh aeo N Double click the grid row for the desired Report Request to open the Report Request Editor To select the last Report Request you edited in the Main window select the Actions gt Report menu option to open the Report Request Editor and the last edited Report Request 438 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide When you select the File gt Open menu option in the Main window or an editor the Open dialog is displayed For more information about this dialog see the Common Elements Manual Using the Editor In the Report Request Editor you can create modify or delete Report Requests You can also save Report Requests to the Optim Directory gt OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor Frempltestym Report Printer Hamer E Description Text to describe the purpose of the Report Request up to 40 characters Tabs Use the Report Request Editor tabs to provide parameters and select options to define Report Requests Each tab in the editor serves a unique purpose General Parameters req
404. me of a process The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Runtime Saving Access Definition Display a cascade delete update warning only when saving the Access Definition The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Saving Access Definition Always Display a cascade delete update warning at run time of a process and when saving the Access Definition The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Always Never Do not display a cascade delete update warning The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Never Abort Scheduler or Command Line Select this check box to abort the process when run from the Scheduler or the Command Line Interface and the cascade delete update affects at least one table that is not explicitly included in the process This check box is selected by default Audit Facility Activates auditing for Optim processes You can enable auditing for specific Optim Directories When auditing is active for a Directory audit records are written to the Optim Directory Audit Table for these processes Archive Convert Compare Delete Edit Extract Insert Load ODM Report Restore Browse Import Export Create See Appendix L Process Audit on page 525 for additional details Enable Process Utility Audit To enable auditing select this check box and click Audit Selection to display the Audit Facili
405. me this information was published Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at Copyright and trademark information at www ibm com legal copytrade shtml Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Intel Itanium and Pentium are registered trademarks of INTEL in the United States and other countries Other company product or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others Notices 529 530 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Index Special characters 306 A Access Control Domain definition 385 editor 390 list 387 role specifications 392 Access Control List definition 385 editor 405 Actions tab Personal Options 281 283 Column Map Procedure 281 format numeric values 283 maximum database connections 286 monitor update frequency 282 report retention 283 show aging tabs 282 show currency tab 282 Age Function destination format exit 511 source format exit 511 Allocation Percent index defaults 263 table defaults 262 Apply Maintenance add default tables 183 all DB Aliases 187 DB Alias Access 183 Optim Directory Access 182 query method 185 specific DB Alias 185 specific DBMS 189 update DBMS version 204 Archive File Co
406. missions in the Column Access Control list The Default setting applies to archived data in columns not otherwise listed and cannot be deleted The arrow indicates the active entry To select an entry click the row Column The column name Type the name or use Add column from the shortcut menu to select a column name from a database or an Archive File To remove a column name select the row number and press Delete or use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Any security settings for tables or columns that are not in the secured Archive File have no effect AC Type The type of access permissions associated with the column Access permissions are displayed in the Column Access Control list Select one of the following Explicit Column specific access permissions apply Default The default access permissions apply 418 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide None Access permissions do not apply All users are allowed to access the table Notes If AC Type is None e The Column Access Control list is unavailable and any user account is allowed full access e If for Default the Default AC Type is unavailable for other entries in the Column List Shortcut Menu Commands Right click a row in Column List to display the following shortcut menu commands Remove Column Remove the selected column name from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Columns Remove all column
407. mitted Data Source The data source for the Archive File 478 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Maximum Rows The maximum number of rows to convert to XML Root Name The name of the root XML tag Rowset Name The name of the XML tag in which the data is placed Generate Schema Select this check box to include XML schema of the Archive File data with the output XML XML Select this check box to include Archive File data with the output XML Mode Element Select this check box to generate an XML tag for each data value Attribute Select this check box to generate lt row gt tag attributes for each data value Execute Click to begin the conversion process SQL Select Type an SQL SELECT statement to specify selection criteria for the data Messages Displays messages for the conversion process Output Displays the XML output Appendix F Open Data Manager 479 Batch Tab Use the Batch tab to specify the data to convert by using a batch file or typing batch parameters IBM Optim Archive File To XML Convertor come Fe Open File Click to select a batch input file Messages Displays message for the conversion process Execute Click to execute the batch process Input Type the batch parameters if a batch input file is not used Conversion Issues The following issues arise in the conversion of archived data to XML e Characters that are not legal in XML incl
408. mm dd hh mm ss AF_ID_RANGE x y PSTTRACE COMP n n COMP nn amp datasourcename2 DSNPASSWORDS datasourcename domainname userID password amp datasourcename2 QPTDPNAME primaryservername daemonportnumber 476 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Note For additional connection parameters refer to Attunity documentation DSNCONFIG2 datasourcename The ODM data source name ARCV_FILE archivefilename The fully qualified Archive File name ARCV_GUID gggggg The Archive File GUID ARCV_ID n The Archive File ID number COLLECTIONS archivefilecollection The Archive File Collection name PST_AF_SUBSET AF_IN AF_DATE_RANGE AF_ID_RANGE Subsets an Archive File Collection to specific Archive Files Use one of the following parameters AF_IN 1 n Archive Files to include where n is an Archive File name GUID or Archive File ID If a specified Archive File cannot be found the process will fail AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mmiss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss A range of Archive File creation dates You must include the time of day hh mm ss You can use zeros to specify the time e g 00 00 00 AF ID_RANGE x y A range of Archive File IDs where x is the start and y is the end PSTTRACE COMP n n An optional attribute for turning on the Optim Trace file This attribute should be used at the direction of Optim support Do not use commas in the PSTT
409. mple Optim Basic Column Map procedure used to populate the Column Map Procedure Editor when installed in the BIN subdirectory Create a Column Map Procedure from file provided This task describes how to create a Column Map Procedure from a provided file To create a Column Map Procedure from one of the files provided 1 In the main window select Column Map Proc from the Definitions menu to open the Column Map Proc Editor and last edited Column Map Proc 2 Select New from the File menu in the Column Map Proc Editor 3 Select Import from the File menu in the Column Map Proc Editor to open the Supply an Import File Name dialog 4 Type or click the Browse button and select the path to the Samples subdirectory containing the sample files and the file name e g C Program Files IBM Optim RT Samples CMProc CMEXIT BAS 5 Select Save As from the File menu in the Column Map Proc Editor In the Save a Column Map Proc dialog type a name in the Patternbox and click Save 6 Edit the Column Map Proc as needed 7 Compile Sample Standard Procedure A Standard procedure is called to derive the value for a destination column in a Column Map This sample Column Map procedure is created from the CMExit bas file provided as described above This procedure performs two operations on the sample database table OPTIM_CUSTOMERS as follows e Discards rows that have a value of zero 0 in the YTD_SALES column and processes all other rows
410. mport Registry Data 132 Index Buffer Pools 264 Index Defaults 264 Informix create multiple DB Aliases 116 create drop procedures for DB Alias 92 for Optim Directory 79 update DBMS version 204 Initialize Optim Security 121 138 Install 23 27 28 31 33 34 293 completing 35 console 36 console installer 295 Release_Notes file 35 select components 29 silent installer 44 summary 33 Install continued Unix silent install 304 Install from console 36 Install ODM 30 Install Optim Server Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 306 Installation 23 32 additional workstations 6 Linux 293 306 planning for 7 system requirements 7 UNIX 293 306 workstations or server 3 Installation Complete 34 Installation phase 2 Installation Requirements 7 J JCL File sample 515 L Large Objects Personal Options 254 license agreement 25 License Agreement 25 Linux command line 336 commands 349 350 customer ID 329 337 data directories 329 DB Alias 339 destination folder 309 environment variables 346 installation 293 306 326 license agreement 309 loader 333 339 locale conversion 349 LOCALE COMF file 349 Optim Directory 338 prOpass program 353 pstlocal configuration file 336 pstserv configuration file 328 RT4S shell script 348 RTSERVER shell script 347 RTSETENV shell script 346 securing 351 355 configuration files 353 355 password file 353 trace days 338 Load tab Personal Options 258 DB Alias 258 exception tables 258 pa
411. n e Using a keyword that is inappropriate for the type of processing may cause a fatal conflicting parameter error e The DBMS type keyword must precede the DBMS version keyword All other keywords can be specified in any order e If you use a keyword more than once for a task the last instance applies e You can include all keywords and arguments for one or more tasks in a text file and reference this parameter file on the command line e Ina parameter file keywords and arguments for a task may be on more than one line Note that lines after the line containing the TASK keyword are processed in the next task if any e If a keyword required for a task is omitted values specified for the previous task or values specified the last time the Configuration program was run are used by default Note This feature may be advantageous for a series of tasks that share the same setting for one or more parameters e An argument that includes spaces must be enclosed in single or double quotes un e To clear a parameter specify the value as an empty string i e Syntax Conventions The syntax conventions used to describe these statements are KEYWORD Keywords are shown in upper case for emphasis but can be specified in lower or mixed case text Variable text is shown in lower case italics Statement delimiter to group a series of qualifiers for a parameter Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 375 An optional keywo
412. n e Edit allows you to edit and browse related data review logical application paths resolve data problems modify data to test all possible scenarios and ensure that one or more related tables contain expected data e Compare allows you to compare before and after images of relationally intact sets of data from a set of tables You can identify and analyze changes to related rows to resolve referential integrity issues or identify similarities and differences between two independent databases and verify database changes e Scheduler allows you to schedule process requests to be executed in unattended mode e The Configuration program allows you to configure the first and additional workstations to use Optim You can also establish security and perform various tasks to maintain the system environment e The Server allows you to process resource intensive tasks away from the workstations to reduce network traffic and improve efficiency to process data that resides in a UNIX or Linux environment or to use Optim Open Data Manager to access archived data e Open Data Manager ODM provides Archive File access for programs that use the ODBC and JDBC APIs Workstations or File Server You can install Optim on individual workstations or on a file server for multiple users to share Note Installing Optim on a file server is different from installing the optional Server Sites that consider installing Optim on a file server would generally tend t
413. n SQL LIKE character select the upper case or lower case default for selection criteria establish the number of days to keep Trace Files specify a default code page value and choose whether to warn a user when a cascading delete or update may occur Confirm Choose to display a confirmation prompt before definitions are deleted files overwritten or DDL lost 248 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Display Choose options for data displays when editing data or using Point and Shoot including the maximum number of rows fetched and the maximum number of entries in history and menu file lists Also set options to determine the default settings for Large Objects for the Access Definition Errors Select font characteristics for informational warning and error messages and the number of lines to display in the message bar Scheduling Select options for using the Scheduling Monitor Load Provide the complete path and name of the executable used to access each DBMS loader Create Specify default options for creating database objects Logon Review logon information for each DB Alias in a selected Optim Directory Connection and password information is stored in the workstation registry Server Provide User ID password and domain information to be used by the Optim Server Server when running actions remotely Edit Select options for browsing or editing database tables Browse Select display options for browsing Ar
414. n Sybase ASE or SQL Server e Procedures to access Catalog Tables in Informix Apply Maintenance to Another After you apply maintenance for a single DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Apply Maintenance to Another DB Alias dialog and prompts you to apply maintenance for another DB Alias e To apply maintenance for another DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Create Select DB Alias dialog e To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed to open the Complete dialog Apply Maintenance for All DB Aliases If you select the option on the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog to apply maintenance for all DB Aliases the task includes the following steps choose to apply maintenance to the first or another DB alias connect to the database drop old packages plans or procedures create refresh packages plans or procedures After maintenance is applied you can choose to apply maintenance for the next in a series of DB Aliases or the maintenance task is complete Apply Maintenance to DB Alias When you select Apply Maintenance to databases for all DB Aliases the Configuration program prompts you to confirm maintenance for each DB Alias in the selected Optim Directory one at a time Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 187 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Apply Maintenance to DB A B Ea o apply maintenance to the DB Alias DBMS select the Apply Maintenance to DBM
415. n explicitly controls access Role names not included in the Access Control Domain that serves as the basis for the FAD are italicized and settings for them have no effect Notes e If a user is included in multiple roles in the list the most restrictive permission applies e Unless the AC Type for the Column List entry is None the Column Access Control list includes a Default setting This default cannot be deleted and applies to users for which no explicit permissions are granted Type the name or use the drop down list to select the name of a role defined in the ACD You can also edit a role name To remove a role name use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Access The type of access permissions for the role Select one of the following Appendix D Optim Security 419 Allow The role is allowed access to the column Deny The role is denied access to the column Note If a role is denied access to any file attachment pseudocolumn in an Archive File the role cannot use the Archive File in a Delete Restore Update or Insert process Shortcut Menu Commands Right click the Column Access Control list to display the following shortcut menu commands Remove Remove the selected role from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Remove all roles except Default from the list Allow all non default Allow access for all listed roles except Default Deny all non default Deny access for
416. n feature When the number of retained reports for a particular type of process exceeds the maximum the oldest report is deleted and the current report is saved Retain Scheduler Command Line Reports Select to retain reports generated by processes invoked using the Scheduler or the Command Line Interface This check box is cleared by default Report Retention Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory in which you want to store reports Leave blank default to use the Temporary Work Directory specified on the General tab To select from your system directories click the browse button Note It is recommended that each user specify a private directory for storing reports Printer Tab Use the Printer tab to set printer font and language preferences for printing Note that font and language settings appropriate to the character set used for the object will ensure that text prints correctly if the Locale settings for your computer do not match settings for the computer used to create the object Chapter 9 Personal Options 283 9 Personal Options Jita a a a a ete ted The default printer and font information for requests and definitions are shown in each of the message boxes To open the Windows Print Setup dialog to select a printer click Set Printer To open the Windows Font dialog to select font attributes and specify the desired language script click Set Font Printer Set Printer Click to display the P
417. n only For details see your Tomcat documentation Valid settings are 1 Present the credentials used to start the prOsvce daemon for webserver access to Archive Files 0 Do not use webserver access Note A 1 userid password setting requires root authorization for the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon When setting up user accounts and file permissions note that both pr0svce and the user account running pr0svce must be able to access the file that keeps information about active daemons in order to perform an action against prOsvce for example to shut down or delete pr0svce This file is maintained in the directory designated by the PSTINFO environment variable See RTSETENV Shell Script on page 346 for more information regarding the PSTINFO environment variable Execution If the configuration file includes filelogon local tivoliavail or webserver parameters without explicit credentials the process assumes the authority of the user account used to start prOsvce Thus if you start pr0svce from the root user the request will run under root credentials If you start prOsvce under a user account in the group the request will run under the credentials for the user account 352 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Generally you should avoid running pr0svce under root authority However as noted earlier you must run the pr0svce daemon under root authority when certain parameters in ps
418. names except Default from the list Add column Display submenus and select a source From Database table or From Archive File for a column selection list Use the list to add one or more column names to the Column List Note Add column is available only from the blank row at the bottom of the Column List Select From Database table to display the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog listing columns in the database table For more information see Selecting Columns from a Table on page 420 Select From table in Archive File to display the Open dialog from which to choose an Archive File before displaying the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog For more information see Selecting Columns from a Table in an Archive File on page 421 Note Access permissions in the associated ACL determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Remove shortcut menu options are not available to roles limited to read access Column Access Control Use the Column Access Control list to define access permissions for the entry in the Column List You can assign access permissions to roles in the ACD and a default for all user accounts and roles for which access permissions are not assigned explicitly If the AC Type for an entry in the Column List is None Column Access Control list is blank and cannot be edited Role Default and names of roles for which the File Access Definitio
419. nd has the following requirements HP UX Considerations On HP UX PA RISC architectures Oracle versions 9i and later provide both 64 bit and 32 bit libraries The directory for the 32 bit library must be on the 32 bit shared library path GSHLIB_PATH Optim supports the HP UX Itanium architecture in 32 bit emulation mode only Solaris Considerations On Solaris SPARC Oracle versions 10g and later provide both 64 bit and 32 bit libraries The directory for the 32 bit library needs to be on the shared library load path LD_LIBRARY_PATH Optim does not support the Solaris x86 architecture Chapter 1 Getting Started 7 Solaris and HP UX Considerations You must manually edit the Optim environment setup script rt rtsetenv and change the RTORACLELIB environment variable definition in that file based on your Oracle environment The shell file rt rtsetenv contains comments describing how to make the necessary changes Hardware Requirements Optim requires certain hardware equipment and memory e Intel Pentium or greater or comparable processor e CD ROM drive unless installing from a LAN e Hard disk space 400 megabytes e Disk space for the database as required e 256 MB of RAM is recommended 64 MB minimum is supported Additional memory enhances performance Physical Memory Physical memory RAM requirements depend on the version of Windows you have installed refer to the system requirements for your Windows version The actu
420. ndow select the File gt New menu option 2 Select the Actions gt Report menu option to open the Report Request Editor 3 On the General tab select Security in the Report Type list and provide an optional title for the report 4 On the Security Criteria tab enter criteria for a Security Report 5 In the Report Request Editor select the File gt Save menu option to open the Save a Report Request dialog 6 In the Pattern box type a unique name for the new Report Request and click Save From the Report Request Editor This section describes how to create a Report Request from the Report Request Editor To create a Report Request from the Editor e To create a new Report Request select the File gt New menu option in the Report Request Editor e To create a new Report Request modeled on an existing one open the desired Report Request and select the File gt Save As menu option e To create and store a copy of the active Report Request and continue editing select the File gt Save Copy As menu option These steps are the minimum required to create a Report Request After you create a request you can run the process immediately or save the request and schedule it Because the options to create a Report Request and to modify a Report Request are similar refer to Using the Editor on page 439 for complete details Select a Report Request to Edit You can select a Report Request for editing from the Main window or fro
421. ndow menu bar File Menu The File menu in the main window lists commands to view or edit information regarding the Optim Directory convert Optim Directory objects when upgrading or exit the Configuration program In addition you can select commands to export or import registry data for a particular Optim Directory File Tasks Options Help Export Registry Data Import Registry Data Convert Optim Directory Objects Optim Directory Exit Select any of the following commands Export Registry Data You can save time by exporting Optim Directory registry data to a file and saving the file to a directory that is easily accessible for configuring other workstations While configuring the first workstation you are prompted to export registry data or you_can select Export Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window See Ex por Registry Data on page 179 for more information Import Registry Data To configure a workstation you can import Optim Directory registry data and the Product License Key from a file of information exported from another workstation You are prompted to import Optim Directory registry data when configuring each workstation after the first or you can select Import Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window See Import Registry Entries on page 132 for more information Convert Optim Directory Objects All Optim Directories created prior to version 6 0 of A
422. nformation No Select this option if your site prefers not to display the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns while editing data User Select this option to allow users to display the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns while editing data If you select this option users can modify this selection in Personal Options or Edit Preferences in the Table Editor Force Browse Only Select this check box to force all new and existing Edit Definitions to be in Browse Only mode When you select this check box edit options on the Edit tab in Personal Options and the Edit Preferences on the Table Editor are unavailable For example the option for Undo Levels is unavailable because Undo entries are not created in Browse Only mode Audit Tables Dialog If you select Active or Active User on the Edit tab of the Product Options dialog click Audit Tables to display the Audit Tables dialog Specify default parameters that apply to all processed tables and a list of tables for which one or more defaults are overridden 232 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Audit Tables Iof x Optim Directory Auditing Defaults IV Enabled Days to Retain Maximum Rows 366 1000 IV Write all Columns a Table Name Pattern DBMS OPTUSR4DETAILS Enabled 366 1000 All Columns DBMS OPTUSR4CUSTOMER Enabled 366 1000 All Columns OK Cancel Help Ready A Optim D
423. ng Limits spacing and table heading options for the report The defaults for formatting options are set in Product Options The Formatting tab is available only when Report Type on the General tab is set to File Notify Options for automatic email notification of the success or failure of the process Tools Menu Commands In addition to the standard commands on the File Edit and Tools menus you can select the following commands from the Tools menu Convert to Local Convert a named Report Request to a local Report Request A local Report Request is saved with the Archive Request Available only when the Report Type on the General tab is set to File Edit Joins Open the Edit Joins dialog to select joined tables in the report Available when Show Joins is selected on the Archive Details tab and the Report Type on the General tab is set to File General Tab Use the General tab to select the report type Report Type Select the type of report File Report on data in a Source Archive or Compare File For more information see the Archive User Manual or Compare User Manual Archive Directory Report on selected Archive Directory entries and the properties of associated Archive Files For more information see the Archive User Manual Security Report on Functional or Object Security permissions 440 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Report Title The Report Title is not available for Security Reports Output O
424. ng DB Alias Select the name of the DB Alias Name is available only if Use Existing is selected To select from a list click the down arrow Create New or Use Existing When you select an option to create a new or modify an existing DB Alias you are prompted for the necessary information Specify DB Alias DBMS You can provide a description to distinguish a new DB Alias from other DB Aliases The configuration process displays the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 89 lt gt Configure First Workstation Specify DB Alias DBMS he Optim Configuration program creates a DB Alias For the database based on the DBMS type and version specified when you created the Optim Directory Tables Provide a description for the DB Alias then click lt Proceed gt Note Support For some of the isted DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor Connect to Database The Configuration program requires certain information to configure the Catalog Tables DB2 or Informix Data Dictionary Oracle or System Tables Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase ASE You provide these details on the Connect to Database dialog 90 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Configure First Workstation Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim a Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the Optim Director
425. ng environment requires certain environment variables to create default settings For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to RTISETENV Shell Script on page 346 0 Do not edit RTSETENV during installation 1 Edit RTSETENV during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtsetenv 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtserver This keyword allows you to edit the RTSERVER shell script during the installation process using the default text editor The RTSERVER shell script contains a series of useful commands that allow you to manipulate the Server process This script does not need modification For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to RTSERVER Shell Script on page 347 0 Do not edit RTSERVER during installation 1 Edit RTSERVER during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtserver 0 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 325 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rt4s This keyword allows you to edit the RT4S shell script during the installation process using the default text editor The RT4S shell script is used to start or stop init 1 processing for the Server This script should be executed only as part of the system boot procedure Generally the script does not need modification unless the Server is inst
426. nline Documentation Z Customer Information 7 Optim Archive ODBC Interface 44 M6 v Type of Installation 7 Optim ODM Interface 336 ve v Install Location I Sample Fies im lV 5 x PST Directory Conversion Fies 67 MB gt Component Selection ODM Information Shortcut Location Summary Installation Installation Complete Description This component includes the Optim executable and on line help files Compare the Space Required to install the selected components with the Space Available in the directory you specified in the Choose Destination Location dialog Note If the space available is insufficient for installing the selected components click Previous to specify a different destination or click Cancel to quit the installation process Optim Select Optim to install the product and the online help files Optim Online Documentation Select Optim Online Documentation to install the Introductions User Manuals Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Basic Manual and Common Elements Manual in PDF format Additionally the latest release notice and revision history is included Optim Archive ODBC Interface Select Optim Archive ODBC Interface to install version 3 51 of the Open Data Base Connectivity ODBC Application Programming Interface API Selecting this component registers the Optim ODBC Interface driver with ODBC on your workstation This component is not available in a UNIX or Linux environme
427. nly that the connection is valid and is from the proper user No further authentication is made and transferred data is not verified This level of security requires the least overhead and of the available options offers the least security Every Call Authenticate the user each time data is exchanged regardless of number of packets Each Packet Confirm that each packet of transferred data is received from the authenticated user This level of security requires more overhead and offers more protection than the Connect Level Each Packet Verify not changed Confirm that each packet of transferred data is received from the authenticated user and verify that it has not been modified This level of security requires more overhead and offers more protection than the Packet Level Each Packet Verify not changed and Encrypt Confirm that each packet of transferred data is received from the authenticated user verify that it has not been modified and encrypt the argument value of each remote procedure call This level of security requires the most overhead and of the available options offers the most protection Update Product Configuration Files Each workstation to connect to the Server must use a Product Configuration File that includes Server endpoint information The Product Configuration File used by a workstation is specified in Personal Options To update Product Configuration Files with new information entered on the Endpoints tab cli
428. nnot contain null RATING CHAR up to 4 characters cannot contain null UNIT_PRICE DECIMAL dollar amount cannot contain null ON_HAND_INVENTORY INTEGER cannot contain null Appendix H Samples 507 Primary Keys The ITEM_ID column is the primary key column Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_ITEMS table is a parent of the OPTIM_DETAILS table through a foreign key on column ITEM_ID OPTIM_SHIP_TO Table The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table contains order shipping information The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table has the following columns CUST_ID CHAR up to 5 characters cannot contain null SHIP_ID DECIMAL cannot contain null ADDRESS1 VARCHAR up to 100 characters ADDRESS2 VARCHAR up to 100 characters LOCALITY VARCHAR up to 56 characters CITY VARCHAR up to 30 characters STATE VARCHAR up to 30 characters COUNTRY_CODE CHAR 2 character abbreviation POSTAL_CODE VARCHAR up to 15 characters POSTAL_CODE_PLUS4 CHAR 4 characters IN_CARE_OF VARCHAR up to 31 characters SHIPPING _CHANGE_ DT TIMESTAMP cannot contains nulls has default value Primary Keys The SHIP_ID column is the primary key column Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table is a parent of the OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR table through an Optim relationship on column SHIP_ID The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table is a child of the OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table through its Optim relationship on column CUST_ID 508 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configura
429. nt Note If your workstation has an earlier version of ODBC installed selecting this component will upgrade the API to ODBC version 3 51 Optim ODM Interface Select Optim ODM Interface to install Open Data Manager ODM which requires a product license If you select this option see Appendix F Open Data Manager on page 449 for ODM installation instructions Chapter 2 Installation 29 Sample Files Select Sample Files to install sample Extract Visual Basic and Column Map Exit files see Samples on page 503 for further information 5 x PST Directory Conversion 5 x PST Directory Conversion is selected by default to install files required for converting PST Directory objects created using version 5 x into a format suitable for use with Optim version 6 0 and later See Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories on page 486 for details Clear the check box unless you are upgrading from an earlier version of Optim To continue click Next e If you selected Optim ODM Interface the Install ODM dialog displays next e If you did not select Optim ODM Interface the Shortcut Location on page 32Hialog is next Install ODM The Configure Open Data Manager Now dialog displays if you chose Full Installation or you selected Optim ODM Interface on the Select Components dialog You can install ODM as part of the Optim installation process or copy the files and install ODM at a later time
430. nt Thus if the default exit was delivered signed it would bypass any security checks and additional functionality included your user supplied exit assuming you already created one Writing Your Own Exit If you want to employ the additional functionality available via a user supplied exit you must write your own exit 1 Determine what you want the exit to do 2 Determine which Optim exit points that call your exit are suitable for what you want to do 3 Write the appropriate code to respond to those exit points within your user supplied exit After you create an exit you must compile link and copy the exit to the bin directory in which Optim is installed before you can sign it The same is true when you modify an exit If a signed exit does not exist you cannot use Optim See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for more information on creating a user supplied exit Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit If you want to use your own user supplied exit the following requirements apply e The exit load linked module name must be appropriate for your platform as shown below Platform Linked Module File Name Windows opmexit dll AIX Solaris Linux libopmexit so HPUX libopmexit sl e You must copy the exit file to the bin directory before you run the Configuration program in Windows e The exit file must exist in the bin directory and be signed on every Optim installation Thus e
431. ntera centeraavail 1 tivoliavail Use Tivoli with the Archive Retention Policy To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs 0 or blank Do not delete backup files on Tivoli Default Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 335 1 Delete backup files on Tivoli nodename Identifier to access the Tivoli device password Password to access the Tivoli device tivoliavail 0 Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility Unless a Command Line process is specifically directed to a Server the process is executed locally and the settings in pstserv cfg do not apply Use the pstlocal configuration file to provide settings for these local processes An example of pstlocal cfg is in the etc subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory Before using the Command Line Utility modify the following parameters to reflect your requirements as applicable In the following syntax defaults are shown in bold text lcustomerid n 000000 name xxxxxxx Ticense icense key 000000 ltempdir directory idatadir directory directory datadir directory archivedir archivebroidx directory archivedir n 5 server name address port userid password 2 domain pstdir name dbmstype dbmsver dbqual connectstring dbname userid password pstdir name connectstring
432. ntion Tab Status Tab Email Tab Conclusion Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Configure Security for an Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory Initialize Security or Change Security Administrator Set Functional Security Option Set Optim Object Security Option Set Archive File Security Option Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Query Method to Apply Maintenance Apply Maintenance for a Single DB Alias Apply Maintenance for All DB Aliases Apply Maintenance for Specific DBMS Rename an Optim Directory Rename an Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry 145 147 148 151 153 154 156 157 161 162 164 165 168 169 170 173 173 173 174 174 176 176 179 180 181 181 183 184 185 187 188 190 192 197 iii Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory 198 Tasks to update DBMS version for an Optim Directory 199 Specify Optim Directory 199 Specify Optim Directory DBMS 200 Connect to Database 200 Create Drop Packages g 200 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias 201 Update DBMS for a Single DB Alias 202 Update Mu
433. ntion when running TRUE ON or YES Run the Configuration program in AutoRun mode hiding dialogs unless user intervention is required to correct or cancel the task If an error cannot be corrected the error message is displayed on the Log dialog Default for a parameter file FALSE OF or NO Run the Configuration program normally displaying all dialogs Default for parameters from the command line GRANTAUTHID Identifier for authorized users Specify a user ID Group Name or APublicd When Public is specified all users can run Optim RESPONDFILE The source of default values for Message IDs when AUTORUN ON filename The fully qualified path and name of a text file A sample file RESPOND PST in the RT BIN directory can be modified and used as necessary You must enclose a filename that includes blanks in quotations IGNORE Begin a comment or disregard parameters All parameters that follow and are on the same line have no effect on processing Optim Directory PSTDIRNAME Optim Directory for the task pstdirname Name of the Optim Directory currentdir The current Optim Directory default PSTDIRID Identifier that prefixes Optim Directory table names pstdirid Schema Name Creator ID or Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables PSTDIRCONNECTSTR Connection to the Optim Directory dbmscnctstr Name that permits access to the database containing the Optim Directory Appendix C Command Line Maintenanc
434. nto the Optim Server Settings dialog This action only merges new settings from the Current User If the settings are the same this command is unavailable 152 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Access Tab Use the Access tab to restrict access to all Server directories and subdirectories except those you specify Access to the Server data directory Archive Directory and Archive Index Directory is enabled by default Optim Server Settings r Program Files BM Optim Bin temp Limit Access The Limit access to only the Data Archive Archive Index and the following directories and their subdirectories check box is intended to restrict access to Server files and directories and is selected by default When this check box is selected access to the Server data directory Archive Directory and Archive Index Directory is enabled You can allow access to additional files and directories by entering each one in the Directory grid Clear the check box to provide access to all Server files and directories Directory Enter paths to specific directories and subdirectories accessible to delegating workstations Click the browse button to select from a list Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 153 Startup Tab Use the Startup tab to assign startup information lt Optim Server Settings vomas Start How Start as Service The Server is enabled when the machine is started A service does not nee
435. ntry for another Optim Directory To purge another select the check box and click Proceed to open the Specify Optim Directory dialog and select another Optim Directory Purge DB Alias Select Purge DB Alias from the Tasks menu to delete a DB Alias from an Optim Directory without connecting to the database This task does not drop packages plans or procedures created with the DB Alias nor does it drop sample or other tables accessed using the DB Alias You may purge a DB Alias any time you drop a database for example when a database used for testing applications is dropped after testing is completed You may also purge a DB Alias to make a database temporarily inaccessible to the workstations using Optim Note To reinstate a purged DB Alias refer to Create Update DB Alias on page 170 Specify Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory in which the DB Alias entry you want to purge is located Click Proceed to open the next dialog Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see Create Select DB Alias on page 185 to specify a DB Alias to purge Click Proceed to open the next dialog Confirm Purge DB Alias After you select a DB alias to purge the Configuration program prompts you to confirm the selected DB Alias is to be dropped This option is selected when the dialog opens Click Proceed to continue N
436. o 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Allocation Percent Enter a percent 0 to 999 to adjust SQL storage related parameters for the Create Utility The default is 100 Allocation percent is available for creating tables and indexes in Oracle and creating indexes in DB2 z OS Chapter 9 Personal Options 263 Target SQL is generated based on the values of the objects in a Source File If you specify zero 0 the storage related clause in the SQL statement is omitted Using any value other than zero results in a percentage of the source value being used in the target clause Default Specify a default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating new indexes based on one of the following Table Create an index in the same tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace as the owning table Source Create an index in the same tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace as the index referenced in the Source File Explicit Create an index in a particular tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace If you select this option you must specify the appropriate default If you select lt Default gt the default set in the database is used Buffer Pool The buffer pool e g BP1 that is to be used when creating an Index You can enter a specific value for the buffer pool or select a value from the list Buffer Pool is displayed only for DB2 z OS The list displays any index buffer pools already spe
437. o be unconcerned with the volume of network traffic and therefore may not derive any benefit from remote processing on the Server Your decision to install Optim on individual workstations or on a file server does not affect licensing requirements but there are considerations for either method The advantages of installing on individual workstations include e Improved performance the executables are not loaded across a network e Users are not affected by an upgrade made on the file server e Old images are not in use while installing configuring or upgrading the software In contrast a single installation on a file server offers the following advantage e Ease of administration both at installation and when applying maintenance or upgrades Regardless of your choice you should install and configure each additional workstation to create desktop shortcuts and create necessary Windows registry entries Configuration Phase The configuration process creates an Optim Directory establishes connectivity to the databases accessed by Optim and supports other maintenance tasks The Optim Directory is a set of tables that store all the Optim specific object definitions you create Typically a site uses one shared Optim Directory regardless of the number of database instances to be accessed or the number of workstations using Optim However you may create as many Optim Directories as needed to satisfy your site requirements The configura
438. oad Drop Data Privacy Data from the Tasks menu Load Drop Data Privacy Tables The Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog allows you to provide the identifier Creator ID Schema or Owner ID and tablespace for the data privacy tables before they are loaded Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 107 First Works tation Load Drop Dats Prveacy Tables I Eg configure Optim he Configuration program can create or refresh the Optin Data Privacy Tables or drop hem if they already exit Select an option to create refresh or droo the Data Privacy ables Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step DB Alias aLras2 f Load Refresh DP Tables Drop DP Tables Table Specifications Schema Name Tablespace PSTOEMO lt 06 Default gt Display SOL Previous Proceed skip Undo Cancel The Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog displays the following DB Alias DB Alias for the data privacy tables If you do not want to load data privacy tables for this DB Alias click Skip Load Refresh DP Tables Select this option to load or refresh data privacy tables This option is available and selected when Load Drop Data Privacy Tables opens Drop DP Tables Select this option to drop previously loaded data privacy tables This option is unavailable when not applicable such as when you are initially loading those tables Table Specifications Schema Name Enter an identifier f
439. oceed To skip this step leave the check box blank and click Proceed Specify Optim Directory This task describes how to specify the name of the new Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to select the name of the new Optim Directory into which objects are imported Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 495 lt gt Convert Optim Directory Objects Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory from he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Existing Optim Directory Connect to Database This task describes how to connect to the database The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to access the new Optim Directory tables The entries in the Connect to Database dialog are populated with values entered when the Directory was created 496 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt Convert Optim Directory Objects Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the E selected task Connection String The name or string needed for the server to access the Optim Directory database Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds
440. ocessing Maximum Database Connections Specify the default number of concurrent database connections for an Archive Delete or Extract Process Increasing database connections improves performance when processing large quantities of data by allowing multiple threads to process rows in parallel To increase the maximum number of connections select an even number from 2 through the site maximum as specified in Product Options Note For performance reasons you can only select an even number of maximum database connections 286 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide MBCS Roundtrip Processing Options for handling characters that could cause round trip conversion issues in a multi byte Optim Directory or DB Alias The availability of these options is governed by the MBCS Roundtrip Processing settings on the Product Options Database tab Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Archive Extract Requests Select an option for handling round trip conversion issues during Archive or Extract processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Ignore all round trip Fail
441. og enter the Host name IP address or localhost for the machine hosting Attunity Studio Appendix F Open Data Manager 457 fej Add machine Add machine Define new machine inst 4 Use the default Port 2551 5 If anonymous logon is not allowed enter the User name and Password needed to connect to the machine Edit Windows Workspace Server An ODM Server on a Windows machine must be configured to run a separate process each time ODM accesses an Archive File This configuration is the default for UNIX servers and no special configuration is required To edit the server configuration for Windows 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the Windows server list the Daemons list and the IRPCD list to display the Navigator member 2 Right click Navigator and select Open from the shortcut menu to open the IRPCD Navigator dialog 3 Select the Server Mode tab 458 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Bi design localhost daemons IRPCD dmn Attunity Studio File Edit Navigate Search Project Window Help wi le ei ii Configuration Metadata o H al 7 Sues Workspace Server Mode i Bindings Daemons meer E 483 IRPCD ES Navigator Workspace server mode singleClient ir a Port range From ps SJ To finer Sj Use default port range Maximum number of server processes f af oO Limit server reuse fa a o Limi
442. ole intended only to run the predefined process requests however you can grant more limited access to functions As a second example you might use Functional Security to grant access to the Archive specific editors Archive Request Delete Request and Restore Request as well as the Archive maintenance utilities to members of a specialized Archive role while denying access to these editors for developers that use Optim functions to create test data Establishing Functional Security requires that you edit the Access Control Domain ACD named Default to define roles and for each role grant or deny Functional Privileges The Default ACD is a security definition ie a type of object in the Optim Directory and is created automatically when Optim Security is initialized Functional Privileges are defined in the Default ACD only After editing the Default ACD you must enable Functional Security using the Configuration program for the Functional Security settings to take effect You can also use Functional Security to define Object Association Privileges which determine the ACDs a role can associate with Access Control Lists ACL used by Object Security to secure objects Within each ACD you can define Object Association Privileges for specific object types For example if an ACD denies a role the Associate Archive Requests privilege the role cannot use that ACD in an ACL that secures an Archive Request Establish Functional Security
443. olumn Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_SALES table is a parent of e The OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table through a foreign key on column SALESMAN_ID 504 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e The OPTIM_MALE_RATES table through an Optim data driven relationship on column AGE when SEX M e The OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES table through an Optim data driven relationship on column AGE when SEX F e The OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP table through an Optim substring relationship using SUBSTR SALESMAN_ID 1 2 OPTIM_CUSTOMERS Table The OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table contains customer names ID numbers and addresses The OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table has the following columns CUST_ID CHAR up to 5 characters cannot contain null contains a check constraint CUSTNAME CHAR up to 20 characters cannot contain null ADDRESS1 VARCHAR up to 100 characters cannot contain null ADDRESS2 VARCHAR up to 100 characters cannot contain null LOCALITY VARCHAR up to 56 characters CITY VARCHAR up to 60 characters STATE VARCHAR up to 30 characters COUNTRY_CODE CHAR up to 2 characters POSTAL_CODE VARCHAR up to 15 characters POSTAL_CODE_PLUS4 CHAR up to 4 characters can contain a null value EMAIL_ADDRESS VARCHAR up to 70 characters PHONE_NUMBER VARCHAR up to 20 characters YTD_SALES DECIMAL dollar amount cannot contain null has a default value SALESMAN_ID CHAR up to 6 characters NATIONALITY VARCHAR up
444. om the Archive Files in the collection For example use the following syntax to find the latest Archive File ID 482 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide SELECT MAX ARCHIVE_ID FROM PST_ARCHIVE_FILES Recovery From A Failed Upgrade This section details steps to restore an Attunity installation that was part of an ODM install in the event that the upgrade failed to preserve existing configurations After upgrading Attunity Server to version 5 3 testing the data sources may fail or produce unexpected results Data sources that use advanced features from Attunity Server version 4 8 that are not included in version 5 3 may result in errors or missing metadata To fix this problem you can downgrade from Attunity version 5 3 to version 4 8 It is recommended that the following procedure to restore to the previous configuration be used only as a last resort 1 Stop the daemon a Right click My Computer and select Manage b Expand the Services and Applications section and select Services c Right click Attunity Server and select Stop 2 Uninstall the Attunity Server that did not upgrade correctly Ensure that all directories and files have been removed and if required delete any remaining directories and files 3 Reinstall Attunity Server version 4 8 to the location used prior to the upgrade 4 Replace the lt NAVROOT gt Def directory with the new directory that was backed up during the upgrade process This backup
445. onal Options Default Segment Sizes MB Fixed Enter the segment size 0 9999 MB to use when the target destination is a fixed drive that is hard disk To specify no limit enter a value of 0 zero Notes e This value also applies to Archive Files copied to a backup device because Archive Files are created on disk before being copied to a backup device e The maximum segment size when the target is a Centera Server is 2 GB Removable Enter the segment size 1 9999 MB to use when the target destination is a removable device e g zip drive Note The naming convention for a segmented file is filename_1 ext filename_2 ext filename_n ext filename ext The name of the last segment is the file name specified in the process request For example when creating an Archive File named c arch archtest af that requires three segments the segments are named as follows c arch archtest_l af segment 1 c arch archtest_2 af segment 2 c arch archtest af segment 3 280 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Actions Tab Use the options on the Actions tab to select preferences for printing Column Map procedures displaying tabs in Action Request Editors updating the Progress dialog formatting numeric values and retaining process reports gt Personal Option Column Map Procedure Max Print Lines Specify the maximum number of lines to route to a process report If the number of lines exc
446. onfig tdatasvr userid password rowcntgle n s The Teradata loader is the default for the Optim directory and DB Alias referenced in the loader keyword pstdir Name of the Optim directory dbalias DB Alias for the Optim directory tdatasvr Name of the Teradata server userid User ID for the Teradata server password Password for the Teradata server rowcntgle n Row count to determine whether Teradata FastLoad or MultiLoad is used Allowable values are 0 to 999 999 999 If you specify 0 or do not specify a value MultiLoad is used For any other value FastLoad is used if the row count of the load file is greater than the value you specify for rowcntgle excptntblcid Default CID for creating an exception table loader Oracle opt oracle 816 bin sqldir loader OPTDIR DBALIAS opt oracle 816 bin sqlidir auditfacility Enable or disable the Audit Facility for all Optim Directories This overrides any specification for individual Optim directories true Enable the Audit Facility false Disable the Audit Facility This is the default auditfacility true Audit OptimDirNamel1 Enables or disables the Optim Audit Facility for the directory specified as OptimDirNamel1 enabled Enable auditing for this directory disabled Disable auditing for this directory This is the default retention days Number of days for audit records to be retained n Value in the range 1 to 999 999 999 999 The default value is 2 555 days 7 years
447. onnect to the database including an identifier for Optim Directory tables This task does not prompt to create a separate Product Configuration File or to modify Product or Personal Options Configure Security for an Optim Directory To initialize Optim Security and assign the Security Administrator for the directory select the Configure Security for an Optim Directory option from the Configuration program Tasks menu Only one Security Administrator can be assigned to an Optim Directory After Optim Security is initialized the Security Administrator can use this option to enable or disable Functional Security Object Security and Archive File Security Note You can also initialize Optim Security from the following Configuration program options Configure the First Workstation Create Update Optim Directory and Configure Options however you can both initialize Optim Security and enable the security features from the Configure Security for an Optim Directory task only The Security Administrator can also control access to the Default Access Control Domain ACD and Access Control List ACL Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 173 Specify Optim Directory When you select Configure Security for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu in the Configuration program the Specify Optim Directory dialog is displayed The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the name of the Optim Direct
448. onnect to the database the Configuration program displays the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog Select the level of maintenance to apply 184 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide amp Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Query Method to Apply Mai Mi E3 he Optim Configuration program can apply maintenance For one or more DB Aliases or or all databases of a particular DBMS type Select the appropriate option button then select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step To apply maintenance to create or refresh packages plans or procedures needed to access database tables select one of the following options e Apply Maintenance to a database for a single DB Alias Select this option to apply maintenance to a database referenced by a specific DB Alias in the selected Optim Directory e Apply Maintenance to databases for all DB Aliases Select this option to apply maintenance to databases referenced by each DB Alias in the selected Optim Directory e Apply Maintenance to databases with a specified DBMS Type and Version Select this option to apply maintenance to each database of a particular DBMS Type and version in the selected Optim Directory Apply Maintenance for a Single DB Alias If you select the option on the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog to apply maintenance for a single DB Alias the task includes the following steps create select the DB alias connect to the database
449. operties file Configuration Overview The first step in the Configuration process is to sign a valid exit i e the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit After you do that the Configuration program will create the Optim Directory establish connectivity to databases for Optim and perform other maintenance tasks The remainder of this manual describes the Configuration program and Tasks and explains how to e Configure the First Workstation which includes creating the Optim Directory and associated DB Aliases configuring options and exporting registry data e Configure Additional Workstations which includes importing registry data creating a registry entry and specifying a Product Configuration File e Configure the Optim Server e Use other commands available from the Tasks menu e Initialize and enable Optim Security which includes Archive File Security Functional Security and Object Security Chapter 2 Installation 47 48 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit Optim includes a mechanism that allows you to use a custom exit to apply an additional layer of security to Optim beyond the extensive security already included in the product to meet any security requirements mandated by your company or government regulations This additional security layer is accomplished through a client supplied exit that identifies who can use Optim and the executables that eac
450. opy the ODM Piles gt 1 Install and Configure ODM Now 2 Only Copy the ODM Files NTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Select 1 to install and configure ODM or 2 to copy the ODM files for installation later 0 Tf you select 1 to install and configure ODM the Open Data Manager ODM License Information screen displays gt 1 Install and Configure ODM Now 2 Only Copy the ODM Files ENTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Data Manager CODM gt D License Information ODM is distributed with a temporary license and requires a new permanent Lid each time you upgrade the version of your Optim solution If you have a va ermanent license for ODM Select Specify ODM License File If not select able a 30 day Trial License ou may obtain a permanent License by submitting a request to IBM Optim Tec 1 Support 1 Specify ODM License Pile gt 2 Enable a 30 day Trial License ENTER THE NUMBER FOR YOUR CHOICE OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Select 1 to specify your ODM license file or 2 to enable a 30 day trial license The Specify ODM License File screen displays 40 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide f DM is distributed with a temporary license and requires a new permanent lig each time you upgrade the version of your Optim solution If you have a va lermanent license
451. or Edit mode Note If the Force Browse Only check box on the Edit tab in Product Options is selected the controls pertaining to editing data are unavailable Audit Tables Dialog If you select the Auditing Active check box on the Edit tab click Audit Tables to display the Audit Tables dialog You can specify a Personal Options list of tables to audit 274 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Audit Tables oll OPTIMDIR E aooo ooo fa a faloa e O CE a S E S Note Auditing is available in Personal Options only if the Auditing Status in Product Options is set to Active User Optim Directory Select the Optim Directory associated with the tables to audit If you have access to more than one Optim Directory and want to specify the tables to audit for those directories click the down arrow Audit results are stored in the PSTAUDIT table which is one of the Optim Directory tables created when you install Optim If you are authorized you can browse or edit the PSTAUDIT table in the same way you browse or edit any other database table However Auditing Status in Product Options must be set to Active User and you must have database SELECT authority for the PSTAUDIT table You can specify a Personal Options list of tables to audit However the list specified in Product Options takes precedence over the list that you specify in Personal Options Table Name Pattern Enter the name of the database table
452. or multi byte data to connect to a multi byte database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 2 If the client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for multi byte data to connect to a multi byte database an error results 3 When connecting to an Optim Directory the client may establish a connection check the database character set drop the connection and reestablish it with a new language setting Note Because Oracle stores character LOBS in UCS2 a 16 byte Unicode format multi byte character LOBS may not be stored correctly in a multi byte database For more information refer to your Oracle documentation 18 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting Your Installation The Optim DVD includes several utilities that help you troubleshoot your installation and configuration activities You run these utilities from the Command Line Interface Image Locator Diagnostic Tool The Image Locator Diagnostic Tool PNOIMAGE EXE is a utility that can aid in locating missing DLLs The syntax of the command follows PNOIMAGE R Ofilespec imagetolocate where R Is an optional switch that creates a cross reference list of image relationships O Is an optional switch that causes the output to be sent to the location referenced by filespec Normally output is sent to STDOUT imagetolocate Is the name of the image to find The name must include the proper exten
453. or pattern that identifies the tables to audit Table names consist of dbalias creatorid tablename When you specify a pattern for like named tables you can use percent to represent one or more characters Use underscore _ to represent a single character Note An option on the General tab in Personal Options allows you to use the underscore as an SQL LIKE character Status Enable or disable the Audit option for individual tables Click to display a down arrow and select Enabled or Disabled for each table in the list Chapter 9 Personal Options 275 If the status indicates Superseded by Product List the table is ignored because of a conflict with the parameters set in Product Options You cannot enable or disable the audit option for that table but you can modify the table name or remove it from the list The Edit Process audits tables based on a number of specific parameters beginning with the parameters specified on the Edit tab in the Product Options dialog Refer to Edit Tab on page 230 for more information about the Audit option Browse Tab Use the options on the Browse tab to set preferences for browsing data and to select font characteristics for browsing a Compare File to quickly identify changed data 9 Personal Options mex z a Display Column Attributes Select to display the data type length and nullable attributes for all columns in a selected table when browsing an Extract File Archive File
454. or the data privacy tables This element is labeled Creator ID for DB2 Schema Name for Oracle and Owner ID for an SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix database Tablespace Select a tablespace to store the tables To select from a list click the down arrow Tablespace is not available if you select Drop DP Tables Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before creating or dropping the tables 108 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Note If you are loading or refreshing the data privacy tables click Proceed to open the Drop Tables dialog Drop Tables The Drop Tables dialog allows you to review the list of the data privacy tables that are to be dropped within the selected DB Alias Configure First Workstation D rop Tables folowing Optim Data Privacy Tables wil be dropped if they exist If these table ames confict with your database table names then dick lt Cancel gt to return to the previous window You can then skip this step or select another Schema Name for the ables Clik lt OK gt to drop these Optim Data Privacy Tables 7 ee 7 Pafestoenorerson OO O OOOO BPs anoss OOOO E A Dejes SSCS E SSCS Se a Aa Use the Drop Tables dialog to ensure that the names of the data privacy tables do not conflict with your other table names If there are conflicts click Cancel and specify a different schema name for the tables otherwise click OK During the process that drops dat
455. or the process the type of process archive extract etc the name of the process request the time the process started and period for which it has been running rtserver verify server Verify settings in the pstserv configuration file used to configure the system for running the Server rtserver verify local Verify the settings in the pstlocal configuration file which provides settings for local operation using the command line RT4S Shell Script The RT4S shell script is used to start or stop the Server from init 1 processing and should be executed as part of the system boot procedure only Generally the RT4S script does not need modification You must change the RT4S shell script however if the Server is installed in a directory other than the default directory opt IBM Optim rt or if the Server will be run under a user account other than root The script contains areas that allow you to modify the following environment variables e Set PSTHOME PSTHOME directory rt to define the directory containing the Server e Set PSTUSER PSTUSER user to identify a user other than root Symbolic Links A symbolic link allows a filename in one directory to point to a file in another directory To start up and shut down the Server as part of init processing you must create symbolic links to the RT4S script in the following directories e rc2 d where 2 is the run level for startup e rcl d where 1 is the run level for shutdown
456. ord install_directory rt The rt subdirectory appended to your installation directory Company Id The six digit ID assigned to your company Name The Name assigned to your company Password The Password assigned to your company e These parameters are positional so you must enter them in the order shown above e The installation directory parameter install_directory rt is required the remaining parameters ID Name and Password are optional e If you specify a Name you also must specify the company ID e If the company Name contains spaces type the name in double quotation marks such as Sample Company e If you specify a Password you also must specify the company ID and Name The following examples show three different ways of using the opmusign script to sign a user supplied exit following Optim installation In all three examples the path for the Optim installation directory is users roberts rtinstalled opmusign Signing Example 1 This section includes an example of signing a user supplied exit Do the following to sign your user supplied exit after installation 1 Shut down the Optim Server if it is running 2 Change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Notice the rt subdirectory appended to the installation directory this is required 3 Run the opmusign script in the rt sbin subdirectory and specify the present working directory In the following example the user specified the system va
457. orkspace R Navigator Server account to use with anonymous clients H E Users Run server processes under the following server account E Solutions Server account default Workspace user profile z Authorized Workspace Users Allusers Selected users only 8 Usert Srcroupa Authorized Administrators Allusers Selected users only E Properties 3 amp gt n Property Value T Rename Remove General Server Mode Security oF 7 From the File menu select Save All Runtime Connection Information The AIS User Guide and Reference manual located in the AIS_530_User_Guide_and_Reference pdf file in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory specifies the format and contents of the connection strings for ODBC and JDBC An Archive File or Archive File Collection specified in the connection string overrides the corresponding specification in the ODM data source definition If an Archive File or Archive File Collection is not identified in the data source you must specify an Archive File or Archive File Collection in the connection string Connection Parameters The following are special connection parameters that can be used when connecting to an ODM data source from ODBC or JDBC DSNCONFIG datasourcename1 ARCV_FILE archivefilename ARCV_GUID gggggg ARCV_ID n COLLECTION archivefilecollection PST_AF_SUBSET AF_IN n n AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy
458. orted EMPTY Exported OTHER Exported TEST Exported TEST2 Exported WEST Exported NRTH Access Control Lists Exported Access Control List Ootim Object Template Exported OPTUSR AD1 Exported OPTUSR ADSAMP Exported OPTUSR TEST1 Exported OPTUSR ARCORD Exported OPTUSR MULTARCHIDX Exported OPTUSRE SC NOV Exported Calendar S4MPLE_DE This log displays the following details Creation Date Date and time the Security Export Process Log was created List of errors Explanatory text for each error if errors were encountered List of exported objects Names of the exported security definitions grouped by object type Print Print the log by choosing the File gt Print menu option Each execution of Security Definition Export clears the log file before information for the current execution is written Previous log information is not retained Import Security Definitions The Import Security Definitions Utility copies security definitions from a Secured Input File to the current Optim Directory A Secured Output File generated by Security Definition Export is used as the Secured Input File Importing Security Definitions This section describes how to import security definitions To import security definitions 1 In the main window select the Options gt Security gt Import menu option to open the Import Security Definitions dialog 2 Specify a Secured Input File name The Import Security Definition Vali
459. ory you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow E Configure Security Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Optim Directory and Registry Entry Registry Entry ror Existing Optim Directory When you click Proceed and e Optim Security is not initialized for the Directory the Initialize Security dialog is displayed e Optim Security is initialized the Change Security Administrator dialog is displayed Initialize Security or Change Security Administrator Use the Initialize Security dialog to assign a Security Administrator and initialize Optim Security for the Directory After security is initialized the Set Archive File Security Option dialog is displayed For more information about the Initialize Security dialog and initializing Optim Security see Security on page 120 Use the Change Security Administrator dialog to change the Security Administrator for the Optim Directory If you do not want to change the Administrator click Skip to proceed to the Set Archive File Security Option dialog 174 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Security Change Security Administrator he Configuration program can change the Security Administrator for the curr
460. p on the Choose Shortcut Folder screen the Input Program Folder Name screen displays Chapter 2 Installation 41 thoese Shortcut Folder Where would gt 1 In gt 2 On 3 In 4 In the the the the you like to create product icons Program Group Desktop Quick Launch Bar Start Menu ENTER A COMMA SEPARATED LIST OF NUMBERS REPRESENTING THE DESIRED CHOICES OF PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT Input Program Folder Name the folder name CDEFAULT IBM Optim gt On the Input Program Folder Name screen type the name of the program group folder in which the shortcut icons will be created Optim will create the program group folder if it does not exist The Pre Installation Summary screen displays next 42 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Pre Installation Summary Please Review the Following Before Continuing Product Name IBM Optim Install Folder C Program Files I1BM Optim Shortcut Folder C Documents and Settings optimblid Start Menu Programs IBM Optim Install Set _ Full Installation of your Optim solution Product Features Opt im Optim Online Documentation Optim Archive ODBC Interface Optim ODM Interface Sample Files 5 x PST Directory Conversion Files Java UM Installation Folder C Program Files IBM Optim jre Vers ion 7 3 8 Build 3517 User Nane BM_USER onpany name Opt im onmpany ID 185499 Disk Space Information for In
461. pendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 309 Optim Server Setup _ Directory Name Enter the directory path for installing the Server To change the path type over the path provided or click Browse If you indicate a directory that does not exist setup creates it Setup also creates the subordinate directories RT and Bin Browse Click Browse to open the Choose Folder dialog where you can select a different folder for installing the Server To continue click Next Shut Down the Server Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to shut down the Server If you are installing the Server for the first time or if you are reinstalling a current version of the Server on a machine that has no other Server installations simply click Next to continue with setup 310 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Server Setup However if you are installing the Server in the same directory as any running Server or command line process or you are running a Server or a command line process under the same user id that is running setup you must stop one or more Optim Servers or Optim command line processes Before shutting a Server down you must log on as the processing user account for the Server and run the following commands e mwcleanup e mwadm stop If the services cannot be stopped because they are in use you may see a message You must then wait until the services end af
462. perates as a client application with all processing taking place directly on the Windows workstation Unless the database is installed locally the appropriate DBMS client software is used to communicate with the remote database over a network SHARED HETWORK iher Wiorwsiaion A pim dala tows aver shard network dong wiih oher atic However a different configuration may be desirable when network traffic generated by Optim competes with other network use or when workstation capacity processor memory or disk space causes some tasks to be inefficient or impossible to accomplish Also a different configuration is required if processing data from a database in a UNIX or Linux environment The Optim Server Server allows users to define tasks on a Windows workstation and direct resource intensive data processing functions to a machine more suited to the task When a task requires the movement processing or storage of very large volumes of data the request can be defined at the workstation in the normal way then directed for remote processing on the machine hosting the Server The Server can be installed and run on a Microsoft Windows Sun Solaris Hewlett Packard HP UX or IBM AIX platform or on a Red Hat Application Server If this machine is the machine on which the database is running network traffic associated with the movement of data is eliminated You can also install the Server on a machine dedicated to the Serv
463. play rows that you delete in Deleted status in the Table Editor Deleted rows appear dimmed To hide deleted rows clear this check box 272 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Single View Select to disable the Join capability when the first item in the Table Editor is a view Browsing and editing is more efficient using single view mode because relationship information is bypassed However to browse or edit related data you must clear the check box Side Label Display Select to show column names and values side by side for a single row To show column names and values for multiple rows Columnar Display clear this check box Warn on Cascade Select to display a warning that rows in other tables may be deleted or column values set to NULL when you delete rows in a table The Delete Confirmation dialog displays the names of affected tables including tables that are not shown in the Table Editor Column values may be set to NULL if the relationship between the tables is using the SET NULL delete rule Note Be certain you want to disable this feature before clearing this check box Display NULL as Insert Default Select to specify NULL as the default value for nullable columns when you insert a new row If you clear this check box Optim provides a value based on the column data type Other than NULL possible values include blank zero current date current time and current timestamp To specify the character for th
464. ple new DB Aliases for a single server or modify an existing DB Alias Note If configuring a workstation that is to function as an Optim Server Server you also must provide information for each DB Alias on the Connection tab on the Optim Server Settings applet Refer to Connection Tab on page 151 88 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Create Select DB Alias he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Select the Create New option to create a single new DB Alias the Create Select Multiple option to create or select multiple DB Aliases from a Single DB Server or the Use Existing option to use an exi lias SOL Server Informix The Create Select DB Alias dialog presents the following DB Alias specifications options Create New Select this option to create a new DB Alias You must provide a name for the DB Alias Enter the name of the new DB Alias 1 to 12 characters no embedded blanks Name is blank when the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens Create Select Multiple Select this option to create or select a DB Alias for each of two or more database instances on a ay ASE SQL Server or Informix database server Refer to Create Multiple DB Aliases onl page 110 Use Existing Select this option to use a previously created DB Alias Use this option to modify the name of a stored procedure for an existi
465. pment and testing environments e Ensure valid test results by propagating masked elements across related tables to ensure the referential integrity of the database If you have an Optim Data Privacy License the data privacy data tables are available on the installation DVD in a privacy xf extract file that is loaded during the configuration process See Load Drop Data Privacy Tables on page 107 Content of Data Privacy Tables The Privacy Extract file privacy xf includes the tables described in this section The tables include lookup information on companies and individuals that can be used for data masking or data privacy processing Minor differences in data types exist depending upon the DBMS you use to install the data privacy tables PERSON Table The PERSON table contains the following columns and data EMPNO Employee number CHAR 6 characters NATIONAL_ID National ID such as a social security number SSN CHAR 20 characters NATIONAL_ID_TYPE National ID type such as USSSN for US Social Security Number CHAR 6 characters ADDR_STREET1 First line of street address VARCHAR 30 characters ADDR_STREET2 Second line of street address VARCHAR 30 characters ADDR_CITY City CHAR 20 characters ADDR_STATE State abbreviation CHAR 6 characters Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 515 ADDR_ZIP ZIP code CHAR 6 characters ADDR_COUNTRY Country abbreviation CHAR 3 characters PHONE_NU
466. pped to the same multi byte character When these characters are converted from Unicode to multi byte plus multi byte to Unicode or multi byte to Unicode plus Unicode to multi byte the original character may not be returned This two way conversion is considered a round trip and identifies this situation Note To avoid round trip issues with multi byte data do not use multi byte characters in your source data that will result in ambiguous conversions from Unicode Optim provides a Product Option on the Database tab and a Personal Option on the Database tab that determine how to handle round trip conversion issues when processing data in a multi byte database 84 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Round Trip issues with Multi byte Format Biim E3 he code units between U 4dc0 and U 4dff contain the Yijing Hexagram Symbols hich are not on any legacy code page These symbols should not be used as input on any Optim window such as DBMS Object Names e g Tables Columns Keys etc or Optim Object Names e g Archive Requests Ac E E er Register Optim Directory The Configuration program creates a Windows registry entry that the workstation uses to access the Optim Directory For subsequent access to the Optim Directory from this workstation you can use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password different from those used to create the Optim Directory
467. procedures select the Create Select Multiple option For SQL Server if you selected to create select multiple DB aliases the User ID must have database owner dbo privileges After you create the DB Alias you can create Optim Primary Keys and Load the Sample Tables included with Optim If you have a Data Privacy license you may also load and drop the Data Privacy Data Tables provided with Optim The Configuration program then prompts you to create or update DB Aliases for other databases and repeats the process Otherwise the process completes and returns to the main window 172 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Create Update Optim Directory Optim supports using one or several Optim Directories however each workstation can use only one Optim Directory at a time In other words a workstation cannot access information in one Optim Directory while using Optim with a different Optim Directory Each Optim Directory must have unique DB Aliases for the databases used with Optim and unique identifiers for the packages plans or procedures associated with the databases In most cases a site uses only one Optim Directory that is created when the first workstation is configured However you may create an additional Optim Directory as a step in relocating the Optim Directory or when a new Directory is required by an upgrade to Optim For example if a site were to have an Optim Directory in an Oracle database and decided
468. prompt to proceed to the next atep in the inztallation If you want to change something on a previous step type hack You may cancel this installation at any time by typing quit PRESS lt ENTER gt TO CONTINUE Information about the standard installation displays Use Enter to continue to the Software License Agreement International Program License Agreement Part 1 General Terms BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING COPYING ACCESSING CLICKING ON AN ACCEPT BUTTON OR OTHERWISE USING THE PROGRAM LICENSEE AGREES TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU ARE ACCEPTING THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF LICENSEE YOU REPRESENT AND WARRANT THAT YOU HAVE FULL adh gi TO BIND LICENSEE TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL COPY ACCESS CLICK ON AN ACCEPT BUTTON OR USE THE PROGRAM AND PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNUSED MEDIA DOCUMENTATION AND PROOF OF ENTITLEMENT TO THE PARTY FROM WHOM IT WAS OBTAINED FOR A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID IF THE PROGRAM WAS DOWNLOADED DESTROY ALL COPIES OF THE PROGRAN ress Enter to continue viewing the license agreenent or enter i to accept the agreement 2 to decline it 3 to print it or 99 to go to the previous screen This screen outlines the terms of the license agreement You can choose Enter to view the license agreement 1 to accept the agreement 2 to decline it 3 to print the agreement 99 to go back to the previous screen Accepting
469. ptim or if you drop the Optim Directory for some reason See Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access on page 181 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access You must apply maintenance for DB Alias access when upgrading Optim or to refresh packages plans or procedures for database access Seel Apply Maintenance or DE Alles Acces on pace Rename an Optim Directory To rename an Optim Directory you must replace the name in the Directory itself and in the Windows registry on each workstation that accesses the Directory Use this task to change the name in the Optim Directory and workstation registry or once the Optim Directory is changed to rename a registry entry or register the renamed Directory on a workstation Secl Rename ani Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Use this task when the database for the Optim Directory has been upgraded to a new version See Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory on page 198 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias Use this task when a database has been upgraded See Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias on page 201 Configure Options Typically the Product Configuration File and the Personal Options registry entries_are created when you configure the workstations Use this task to modify these options See Configure Options on page 207 Create Primary Keys Optim Primary Keys are usually created when you configure a workstation or create a DB Alias After you instal
470. ptions The Output Options are not available for Security Reports You can save and print a report from the Report Process Report dialog Security Criteria Use the Security Criteria tab to define criteria for reports on permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges Permissions apply to users and groups defined in roles in an Access Control Domain ACD Functional Security reporting lists permissions defined in the Default ACD Object Security reporting lists permissions defined in the ACD associated with the Access Control List ACL that secures a specified object For more information about ACDs ACLs and security privileges see Optim Security on page 383 OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor _jorx File Edit Tools Options Help allalla 6 S Al ulale Description test report General Security Criteria Notify Criteria Type User v Server Name Local X Domain and User Group dom pstuser Appendix E Security Reports 441 Criteria Type Select a Security Report type User Lists Functional Security permissions for specified users and groups Function Lists all Functional Security permissions for selected privileges Object Lists Object Security permissions for specified users and groups that apply to specified objects and the ACL that secures each object Server Name For User and Object Security Reports Select the name of an Optim Server or the Local workstation t
471. ptions for handling characters that could cause round trip conversion issues in a multi byte Optim Directory or DB Alias Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Archive Extract Requests Select an option for handling round trip conversion issues during Archive or Extract processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Each row of data is checked for characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Chapter 8 Product Options 227 Ignore all round trip Failures Continue processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Use Value from Personal Options Use the round trip processing setting from the Database tab in Personal Options Insert Load Convert Requests Select an option for handling round trip conversion issues during Insert Load or Convert processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Each row of data is checked for characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Ignore all
472. r Object Association Privileges Role Name The role name up to 30 characters To create a new role for the ACD type the name or select from a history list of role name entries e You cannot use the Role Name history list to navigate from role to role in the ACD You must open each role from the Access Control Domain Editor e It is possible to assign identical names to roles made up of different user accounts if the roles are in different ACDs For simplicity a consistent naming convention that prevents duplicate role names may be advisable However duplicate role names may be useful if you wish to use the Optim Object 392 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Template ACL with more than one ACD In this case the Template ACL would assign access permissions to a standard set of roles with the role members varying by ACD You can use a role that is displayed in the Role Specifications dialog as a model to create a new role or replace another role in the ACD by typing or selecting a Role Name from the history list Description Optional text that describes the role up to 40 characters Access Control Domain The ACD for the role Allow All Privileges for this Role Select the Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges check box to allow the role all Functional if editing the Default ACD and Object Association Privileges When this check box is selected the Allow All and Allow check boxes are select
473. r This allows you to start individual processes under explicit user credentials and run multiple processes simultaneously without interfering with each other You can choose the credentials used to start these processes e Run the process under the user account that was used to start the Server e Run the process under an explicitly designated user account regardless of the initiating account i e Request Editor Command Line Interface or ODBC Interface e Run the process under the initiating user account These credentials determine the network access allowed for the process and for Oracle OS Authentication or the Informix Loader the User ID used for DBMS access The credentials are verified by the system and must include a valid User ID known to the specified security provider For Windows an actual logon for the specified user occurs and the process is started under those credentials as if the user logged on from the console directly For UNIX or Linux the effective User ID and Group ID for the process are changed to the credentials specified for running Optim processes Run Under Server Credentials You can run processes under the authentication provided by the Server credentials This limits access to the files local to the Server machine or at least to the files that are accessible with the Server credentials Select Server credentials for processes as follows Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings app
474. r an Optim Directory option For more information about enabling disabling and configuring the Optim Security features see Configure Security for an Optim Directory lon page 173 page 173 Click Skip or Cancel to exit the security configuration process Security will not be initialized and the Security Administrator will not be changed Specify Domain Connection Information Use the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog to identify the Security Administrator Enter the Domain User Name and Password for the Security Administrator or click Browse to select a user from the Security Users dialog If you select a user you must enter the user password when you return to the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog 122 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Secunty Specify Domain Connection Information Enter the Password for the specified Domain and User Name Click lt OK gt to validate the connection information and return to the previous window Click OK to return to the Initialize Security dialog Security Users The Security Users dialog allows you to select a user from an available domain Select a Server Name and a Domain to list Users in the domain After selecting a user click Select to return to the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog which will display the selected Domain and User Name Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 123 Security Users local g FJ Fee
475. r an Oracle database and Owner ID for a Microsoft SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix database For an Oracle database the Schema Name must not be SYS or any name that is the same as one of the Optim Directory tables for example PSTDBA2 PSTPK2 PSTREL2 PSTPT2 Default Tablespace Select a default tablespace To select from a list of available DBMS tablespaces click the down arrow Tablespace Grid Directory Table The names of the Optim Directory tables Tablespace Click a Tablespace cell to select from a list of available tablespaces in the database or leave blank to place the table in the default tablespace Create Drop Packages After the Optim Directory tables are created the Configuration program automatically creates the packages plans or procedures used to access them If you are creating the Optim Directory in an Oracle database the Create Drop Packages dialog is displayed Configure First Workstation Create Drop Packages Optim must use Optim created Packages to access the Optim Directory Tables The Optim Configuration program creates these Packages The Schema Name is the same as T he Schema Name for the Optim Directory Tables 78 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide If you are using SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix the same general dialog is displayed as Create Drop Stored Procedures However if DB2 LUW is the DBMS for the Optim Directory th Configuration program displays the Bind
476. r company Id 105499 Mame sample Company Mame Passward fj Note The Name assigned to your company may not match the spelling or punctuation used in your company s actual name opmdsign Signing Example 2 As in Example 1 shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then specify the directories explicitly as indicated on the first line of the following example Console users roberts rtinstalled rt sbin opmdsign users roberts rtinstalled rt prOsign d Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld 8 opmdsign Signing Example 3 This section includes another example of signing the default exit Do steps 1 and 2 in Example 1 that is shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Then run the opmdsign script in the rt sbin subdirectory but specify all of the parameters explicitly enclosing the company name in double quotation marks as shown below Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 363 Console shin opmdsign pwd D00000 Sample Company Name 000000 Run Setup Again Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to run Setup again If you have the installation DVD or image available run Setup again When the following dialog appears clear the check boxes for all listed components as indicated below to skip the install step and proceed to the
477. r has permission to run a given executable The first exit point occurs when the user launches Optim If you use the exit to provide external security that exit point determines whether the user has permission to access the product If the user has the appropriate permissions the user can continue if not Optim will terminate the user s session after displaying an appropriate error message See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for a complete list of the Optim exit points Beginning with Optim release 6 5 a signed exit must exist to use Optim whether the exit is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit To sign an exit you must specify the company credentials supplied to your organization when you received Optim Your company credentials consist of your Optim supplied company ID Name and Password The Optim setup process will automatically request these credentials during installation so you can sign an exit Note If you have write access to the Optim bin directory and you have the appropriate company credentials you can change from one exit to another at any time following installation by signing a new exit You can change from using the default exit to a user supplied exit or vice versa or you can change from one user supplied exit to another If you are switching to user supplied exit you must compile link and copy that exit to the bin directory before you can sign it In a UNIX environment you can only sign t
478. r terminate sometimes with disastrous results For the 2000 and XP versions of Windows the disk drives and amount of disk space reserved for the paging file virtual memory can be limited by user settings that can impact stability You can view or change this value Go to System Properties Advanced tab Performance Settings button Advanced tab Required Database Permissions The user account used to perform the Optim Configuration requires specific database permissions for example to allow tables and procedures to be created This section describes the required permissions for the database management systems that Optim supports Oracle Database When you use the Configuration program to create the Optim Directory tables and procedures create a DB Alias and load the sample tables for an Oracle database the user account must have the following permissions CREATE PROCEDURE 8 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide CREATE TABLE CREATE SESSION UNLIMITED TABLESPACE SELECT ANY DICTIONARY Note The SELECT ANY DICTIONARY permission can be granted to PUBLIC to satisfy the requirement If the Oracle Initialization parameter 07_DICTIONARY_ACCESSIBILITY is set to TRUE the SELECT ANY TABLE permission can be used instead of the SELECT ANY DICTIONARY permission The above permissions cannot be revoked for the user account once the Optim Directory or DB Alias is created Oracle packages are run under the permissions of the user
479. r to install on each workstation or on a file server accessed by each workstation e Decide upon the installation directory e Determine if any database for which you must create a DB Alias supports Unicode data choose the database instance for the Optim Directory and determine a User ID and password for each workstation to access the Optim Directory e Decide whether Functional Security Object Security or Archive File Security is to be established for your facility and if so broadly identify the network users and groups for which access is allowed or denied e Choose an appropriate table identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID and database location tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating Optim Directory tables e Name a directory folder for the Product Configuration File e Ensure that previously installed releases of Optim particularly the Scheduler are not operating If licensed decide where to install the Server Note Open Data Manager ODM is provided with a 30 day trial license that must be replaced with a permanent license for continued use To obtain the permanent license you must submit a Service Request at the Integrated Data Management Support site Use the following link for the Detailed System Requirements document which contains complete database and platform information Detailed System Requirements for components of IBM Optim 7 3 Installation Requirements Optim is a Windows application a
480. race file type ended with a numeric extension for example PROTOOL 123 The extension on the name of the trace file distinguishes one trace file of that type from another Trace files are sequentially numbered 001 through 999 followed by A00 through Z99 as necessary If more than 3 599 trace files of a single type are created and stored within the specified number of days file names are reused beginning with the first 146 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Errors Tab Use the Errors tab to assign default font information for messages amp Optim Server Settings OF x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status E Font for Informational Messages Message Example with Data Field Info Text Info Field Font for Warning Messages Message Example with Data Field Warning Text Warning Field Font for Error Messages Message Example with Data Field Error Text Error Field it AE Ue Display Lines IV Hide message bar when empty Defaults Unda Configuration Cancel Apply Help Ready The default fonts for message text and data fields are shown in each of the font message boxes To open the Windows Font dialog to select font attributes click the command buttons for text or fields To modify the font for text messages click Text To modify the font for data fields noted
481. ration files specify a question mark for the password to retrieve the password from the password file Commands This section describes the commands you can use with a password file The following command line actions are available to help you edit an encrypted password file Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 353 propass l List the type name and user id for passwords in the file pr0pass h prOpass Display the help for the prOpass program pr0pass a type name userid password Add a password entry The password is encrypted until passed to the DBMS or system for validation type A valid password type filelogon webserver server tivoliavail pstdir dbalias user Note User is not a parameter in a configuration file it refers to any system user id Specify the user parameter type for any parameter referring to a system user account If type is pstdir the default indicates any Optim Directory If type is dbalias use the form pstdir dbalias The default indicates any Optim Directory or DB Alias as in pstdir or dbalias name The name of the configuration file parameter Names not associated with other types are system use for the name value to prevent an error userid The user id is used to verify that the password matches the parameter name To protect changes to the password file or the configuration file the two keywords must match password The password t
482. rchive and the Relational Tools require a conversion to be compatible with later versions Additionally any Optim Directory created prior to Optim version 6 2 on an SQL Server database must be converted See Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects on page 485 for more information Optim Directory Connect to or disconnect from an Optim Directory or modify a connection Exit Close the Configuration main window Tasks Menu Select commands from the Tasks menu to configure and maintain the Optim environment You can choose to perform these tasks at any time Chapter 4 Configuration Window and Menus 61 Optim Configuration Iof x File Tasks Options Help Configure the First Workstation Configure Additional Workstation Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Pro Configure Security for an Optim Directory Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Rename an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Configure Options Create Primary Keys Create Copies of DB2 2 05 Relationships Load Drop Sample Data Load Drop Data Privacy Data o use an existing Optim Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables rkstation or Tasks gt Purge Optim Directory Regist
483. rd or argument is shown in square brackets A choice of settings from which only one must be selected is shown in curved brackets lt gt A choice of settings from which none or any may be selected is shown in angle brackets l Separates options Syntax and Keywords This section describes the command line syntax and keywords Syntax Use the following command line syntax General ZNoLOGOJ filename PROCNEG TORUN TRUE FALSE E ON OFF YES NO ZGRANTAUTHID userid PUBLIC UZRESPONDF TLE ilename 7OBQUALIFTER Hatabasequal 7SPSHARE TRUE FALSE ON OFF YES NO 7DESCRIPTIO DE RIPTION description 7UNICODEDB TRUE FALSE ON OFF TRUE FALSE ON OFF Optim Directory or DB Alias SPACTION BINDACTION CreateNew UseExisting SPQUALIFIER COLLECTIONNAME hame Task DB MAINTPST MAINTCAT Keywords This section defines the keywords specified in the syntax General PROCNFG Initiate command line processing Note the character following PR is the number 0 zero 376 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide NOLOGO Suppress the splash logo FILE The source of parameters or the parameters filename The fully qualified path and name of a text file containing parameters for one or more tasks You must enclose a filename that includes blanks in quotations parameters As follows AUTORUN Level of user interve
484. re create the directory to give it specific user rights DBMS Logon Credentials DBMS logon credentials needed to access the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias include a User ID Password and Connection String If using the Server you can provide the DBMS logon credentials in two places e The Connections tab of the Optim Server Settings applet e The Logon tab of Personal Options The location used to maintain DBMS logon credentials depends on the settings on the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet or the pstlogon or dbaliaslogon parameters in the pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg for UNIX or Linux Optim Directory Access To use the Optim Directory information from the Server Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the Optim Directories option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the pstlogon parameter to server To use the Optim Directory information from each initiating client Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Client for the Optim Directories option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the pstlogon parameter to client Appendix B Server Credentials 373 DB Alias Access To use the DB Alias information from the Server Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the DB Aliases option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the dbaliaslogon parameter to server
485. re similarly rejected when settings are pending Scheduled processes are retried until the Stop Time entered in the Scheduling Editor Credentials For information about user credentials required to run the Server refer to Appendix B Server Credentials on page 369 General Tab Use the General tab to name the Server and provide paths to required directories Optim Server The name 1 to 15 characters of the Server If you do not provide a name the computer name is the default Note The Server name must be added to the Product Configuration File for your site Temporary Work Directory The complete path to the default directory in which you want the Server to store internal work files and trace files To select from system directories click the browse button This directory must be unique to the Server and different from the Temporary Work Directory specified in Personal Options Data Directory The complete path to the default directory in which you want the Server to store process files for which an explicit directory path is not provided To select from your system directories click the browse button This directory must be unique to the Server and different from the Data Directory specified in Personal Options Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 145 Create a subdirectory within the Data Directory for clients Select Create a subdirectory within the Data Directory for clients to automatically create a subdirectory
486. rectory where IBMOptim exe is located To use the silent installer open the optim_installer properties file and make any modifications to the variables to customize it for your installation These variables are 44 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide INSTALLER_UI SILENT 2 removed CONSOLE Install using silent installer LICENSE_ACCEPTED Set this variable to TRUE to specify that the license agreement is accepted CUSTOMER_INFO_INPUT_1 username Customer user name CUSTOMER_INFO_INPUT_2 companyname Customer company name CUSTOMER_INFO_INPUT_3 companyid Customer company ID number CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST List of Optim features to be installed Specify values in a list separated by commas Values are Optim Optim Online Documentation Optim Archive ODBC Interface Optim ODM Interrface Sample Files 5 x PST Directory Conversion Files For example CHOSEN_INSTALL_FEATURE_LIST Optim Optim Online Documentation Optim Archive ODBC Interface Optim ODM Interface Sample Files 5 x PST Directory Conversion Files INSTALL_APP_FOR Specify whether to install Optim for any user or for the current user only To install Optim for all users specify INSTALL_APP_FOR any To install Optim for the current user only specify INSTALL_APP_FOR me USER_INSTALL_DIR The folder where Optim is to be installed USER_INSTALL_DIR C Program Files IBM Optim USER_INPUT_ODM_INSTALL USER_INPUT_ODM_COPYONLY Use t
487. rent Configuration File Name Directory path and name of the Configuration File that Optim is currently using Path to New Configuration File Specify the directory path for a new or different Configuration File To select an existing Configuration File from your system directories click the browse button To create a new Configuration File specify the directory path and file name and then click Create If you do not specify a full directory path with the file name the current drive and directory are used Switch to New File when Created Select this check box to apply the new Configuration File as soon as it is created Do not select this check box if you intend to modify the current Product Options and want to retain the original Configuration File Chapter 8 Product Options 229 Password Tab Use the Password tab to change the password needed to access Product Options Product Options Current Password Enter the current password 1 to 8 characters Passwords are case sensitive Initially this password is optim New Password Enter the new password 1 to 8 characters case sensitive For security reasons the password is displayed as a series of asterisks Confirm New Password Confirm the new password by entering it a second time For security reasons the password is displayed as a series of asterisks Edit Tab Use the Edit tab to select audit preferences for editing data and specify other site op
488. res a Definition which is created in an editor selected from the Definitions menu For example an Access Definition Request This class includes the following privileges Access Definition Column Map Column Map Proc edure DB Alias Point and Shoot Primary Key Relationship Table Map Associate Utilities Associate Utilities privileges are required to associate the ACD with an ACL that secures a Utilities object which is created in an editor selected from the Utilities menu For example a Currency Definition Request This class includes the following privileges Calendar Archive File Collection Currency Storage Profile Access Control List An Access Control List ACL governs the ability of a role to perform actions such as read update or delete on both an object and the associated ACL Each Access Control Domain File Access Definition and secured Optim object has an ACL Note ACLs for objects other than security definitions have no effect unless the Security Administrator has enabled Object Security When you secure an object access to any associated Local objects is governed by the ACL for the parent object Local objects are not secured individually they are secured with the object in which they are embedded Use the Access Control List Editor to set access permissions for an object and the associated ACL In general an ACL is based upon a specific ACD which defines the roles referenced by the ACL Roles that are not in
489. ress Type the sender From email address Email account logon Type the email logon name Logon domain Type the domain name Email account password Type the password A blank password is valid if the account allows it a prompt will confirm that you want to connect without entering a password Send Test Email Click this button to send a test email to your mailbox Note It is recommended that you send a test email to ensure that the information you entered is sufficient to send an email If you do not receive the test email make the necessary corrections to the information you entered Conclusion After you configure the first workstation any additional workstations and any Servers you are ready to start using Optim Note If you make changes to the configuration of a Server while it is running click Apply then stop and start the Server to effect the changes The remaining sections explain how to use the various other commands available from the Tasks menu of the Configuration program 168 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks After you configure the first and any additional workstations you are ready to start using Optim However periodically it may be necessary to perform other tasks that are available from the Tasks menu Optim Configuration OY x File Tasks Options Help Configure the First Workstation Configure Additional Worksta
490. review or change the names of security definitions you want to import Import Security Definitions E A E E a a E Default pp 2jaco EMPTY o o M ajaco OTHER Maaco EST o Msjaco TESTS o Mejaco esta e ARCH ACLIOPTUSR ARCORD1 CALENDA Object Type Identifies the security definition as an ACD ACL or FAD For ACLs the following abbreviations identify the secured object types AD Access Definition ARCH Archive Request CALENDAR Calendar CM Column Map CMPROC Column Map Procedure COMP Compare Request Appendix D Optim Security 433 CONV Convert Request CURRENCY Currency Table DBALIAS DB Alias DEL Delete Request ED Edit Definition EXTR Extract Request LOAD Load Request PK Primary Key REL Relationship REPT Report Request REST Restore Request STORPROF Storage Profile Table Map UPIN Update or Update Insert Request Object Name The names of the security definitions available for importing New Object Name Specify a new name for the security definition The name must comply with the naming conventions for the security definition Shortcut Menu Commands Right click to select from the following shortcut menu commands Copy Name Copies the Object Name to the New Object Name column for the security definition Available in the Object Name column only Populate Clear Copies the Object Name to the New Object Name column for all security definitions Add Copies the Object Name
491. riable pwd to indicate that users roberts rtinstalled rt is the present working directory The pwd variable has the same effect as specifying the directory s full path Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 365 cd users roberts tinstalled rt sbinfopmusign pwd orllsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld E Note In the above example the pr0sign s parameter shown on the third line was generated by the signing script to indicate a user supplied script is being signed 4 Type your company credentials when prompted for that information Your company credentials consist of the company ID Name and Password assigned to your organization when you received Optim All three entries are case sensitive and you must enter them in the format provided to you Press Enter after each prompt to display the next prompt After you specify your company Id for example press Enter to display the Name prompt t cd users roberts rtinstalledst sbinfopmusign pwd orllsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company Id 105499 Mame sample Company Mame Passward fj The Name assigned to your company may not match the spelling or punctuation used in your company s actual name 366 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide opmusign Signing Example 2 This section includes another e
492. rid If TASK DB and you are creating a new DB Alias or if TASK MAINTCAT the user account must have the authority through System Privileges or Roles to create the tables and to catalog the packages plans or procedures under the appropriate table identifier DBMSTYPE The DBMS associated with the DB Alias Required if TASK DB 378 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide DB2MVS SYBASE INFORMIX ORACLE SQLSERVER DBMSVERSION The version of the DBMS associated with the DB Alias DBMSVERSION must follow DBMSTYPE versionnum Required if TASK DB DBQUALIFIER Database name databasequal Required if TASK DB and DBMS is Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix SPSHARE Indicator for sharing Stored Procedures for multiple Sybase ASE or SQL Server DB Aliases when TASK DB TRUE ON or YES Stored procedures are shared For Sybase stored procedures are stored in the special Sybase ASE database sybsysprocs For SQL Server stored procedures are stored in the MASTER database Microsoft SQL Server documentation contains a cautionary statement about creating stored procedures in the MASTER database Consider the implications of sharing stored procedures for SQL Server before proceeding FALSE OFF or NO Stored procedures are not shared DESCRIPTION Optional description for DB Alias TASK DB description 1 40 characters delimited by double quotation marks UNICODEDB Store Optim Directory data in Un
493. rint Setup dialog Select a printer to use as the default when printing requests or definitions 284 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Print Setup HEI Printer Name 802 Status Ready Type HP Lasenet 5000 Series PCL 5e Where 999 99 9 999 Comment Client Server Paper Orientation Size Letter v Portrait Source Tray 1 v A Landscape OK Cancel Field Font Set Font Click to display the Font dialog Select font characteristics and a language script to use when printing requests or definitions Font Font Font style arial Regular Arial Black T Arial Narrow T Book Antiqua T Bookman Old Style T Century Gothic T Comic Sans MS bel r Effects Sample IT Strikeout M Underline AaBbYyZz Script Westem This is an OpenType font This same font will be used on both your printer and your screen Note The available languages in the Script drop down list are determined by the selected font Chapter 9 Personal Options 285 Database Tab Use the options on the Database tab to set preferences for handling database connections multi byte round trip conversion errors and cascade deletes For Sybase ASE you can specify whether to run in Unchained mode lt gt Personal Options Never sybase Unchained Mode Stop Processing fa T Run in Unchained Mode Ignore all round trip Failures F Parallel Pr
494. rivilege is required for roles that import Optim objects Register Archive File Invoke Register Archive File privilege is required for roles that register Archive Files whether online or from the command line Restart Retry Invoke Restart Retry privilege is required to restart or retry a process Scheduling Editor Invoke Scheduling Editor privilege is required to schedule process requests Storage Profile Invoke Storage Profile privilege is required to manage archive media Archive File Collection Invoke Archive File Collection privilege is required for roles that create or edit Archive File Collections used with Open Data Manager Run Untitled Actions Run Untitled Actions privileges are required to process new action requests not saved prior to 402 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide processing that is requests for which Untitled is displayed in the dialog heading The Run command in a respective action editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Compare Request Convert Request Delete Request Extract Request Insert Request Load Request Report Request Restore Request Security Tasks Security Tasks privileges are required to export or import secured Archive Files modify a FAD or run a Security Report This class includes the following privileges Export Secured Archive File Export a secured Archive File
495. rkstations task guides you through the process needed to establish them Once established any workstation can be configured as an Optim Server if your license permits Tasks Menu Use the Configuration Assistant or commands from the Tasks menu to configure the Optim environment You can choose to perform these tasks at any time Note Before you configure the first workstation and any additional workstations you must sign the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit of your own creation You cannot continue with the Configuration process or use Optim until you sign a valid exit using the Sign Optim Exit dialog as described in Configure the First Workstation Several steps are required to configure the first workstation However you need not accomplish all steps while configuring the first workstation but can come back to them later by selecting a task directly from the Tasks menu For example you are given the opportunity to initialize and establish security when configuring the first workstation but will probably want to perform this task sometime later If so you can skip this portion of the Configure the First Workstation process Specify Product License Key The first time you start the Configuration program after installing Optim you are prompted to provide the Product License Key Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 71 Configure First Workstation Specify Product License Key Optim uses a 30 character License Key
496. rn to the Modify Product Options dialog click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Modify Personal Options The Modify Personal Options dialog is similar to the Modify Product Options dialog amp Configure First Workstation Modify Personal Options he Configuration program allows you to configure personal options used by Optim To hange these options at any time select Personal Options From the Options menu on Bl he main window Click Personal Options to open the Personal Options dialog A detailed description of this dialog is provided in Using the Editor on page 248 After you modify Personal Options and return to the Modify Personal Options dialog click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Export Registry Data If you intend to configure several workstations you can save time by exporting the Optim Directory registry data to a file and saving the file to a directory that is easily accessible During the process of configuring the first workstation you are prompted to export registry data or you can select Export Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window The Export Optim Directory Registry Data dialog allows you to specify an output file name and select the registry entries and other information you want to export Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 129 Configure First Workstation Export Optim Directory Registry Data _ Oy x Optim he table on the left
497. rogram s logic e Ensure that the user s request meets your company standards and e Change the request if needed to pass your company standards or forbid the request altogether Optim will call the exit at each exit point to verify that the user s request meets your company standards such as verifying that the user has permission to run a given executable The first exit point occurs when the user launches Optim If you use the exit to provide external security that exit point determines whether the user has permission to access the product If the user has the appropriate permissions the user can continue if not Optim will terminate the user s session after displaying an appropriate error message See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for a complete list of the Optim exit points Beginning with Optim release 6 5 a signed exit must exist to use Optim whether the exit is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit To sign an exit you must enter the company credentials supplied to your organization when you received Optim Your company credentials consist of your Optim supplied company ID Name and Password The Optim setup process will automatically request these credentials during installation so you can sign an exit Note If you have write access to the Optim bin directory and you have the appropriate company credentials you can change from one exit to another at any time following installation by signing a
498. rough the installation process or click Previous to return to an earlier panel Cancel stops the installation process These panels are similar in appearance to those used to install Optim in Windows though there are differences This section contains information and descriptions of the panels Where applicable references are provided to panels that resemble those described here When the installation process begins an Introduction dialog and Welcome panel display Next is the Software License Agreement dialog This dialog is shown in Software License on page 25 A The Software License Agreement dialog prompts you to accept the License Agreement After you read and accept the License Agreement select I accept the terms in the license agreement to indicate that your company agrees to its provisions You must click Next to continue installing Optim Other command buttons I do not accept the terms in the license agreement Cancels Setup and does not install Optim Print Prints this dialog B After accepting the Software License Agreement the Choose Destination Location dialog displays See Install Location on page 28 for a sample of this dialog The Choose Destination Location dialog prompts you to select the directory where the Optim Server will be installed A default path and directory are shown You can choose the default directory type a new directory path or click Choose to browse for a directory If you select a
499. rp 1994 2010 219 1 In the main window select Product from the Options menu to open the Enter Product Options Password dialog 2 Specify the case sensitive password to open the Product Options dialog The initial distributed password is optim 3 Specify the necessary details on each tab in Product Options 4 Choose one of the following e Click Cancel to close the Product Options dialog without saving your changes e Click Apply to save your changes and continue using the Product Options dialog e Click OK to save your changes and close the Product Options dialog Using the Editor The Product Options dialog allows you to customize various features and display options in Optim Several tabs in the Product Options dialog allow you to review and set the options as required Product Options SAMPLE_US F Tabs The tabs in the Product Options dialog are described briefly in the following paragraphs Detailed information is provided in each section of this chapter 220 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide General Establish the maximum number of rows that can be read from a table when browsing or editing table data or using Point and Shoot and the maximum number of rows that can be extracted or archived during a single process Also choose a default Calendar and set cascade delete update options The General tab is always foremost when the dialog opens Database Establish the maximum number of
500. ry Entry Directory Purge DB Alias Select any of the following commands Configure the First Workstation Confirm the Product License Key after installation and create the components shared by all workstations Typically all users on all workstations share one Product Configuration File that contains the Product Options for your site although you may have more than one of each See Configure the First Workstation on page 71 Configure Additional Workstation Configure each additional workstation on which Optim is installed to share components created when the first workstation was configured You may also configure Personal Options for the workstation See Configure Additional Workstation on page 131 Create Update DB Alias A DB Alias is required for each database to which Optim connects Use this command to create any DB Aliases that were not created when configuring the first workstation or to update existing DB Aliases See Create Update DB Alias on page 170 Create Update Optim Directory In most cases your site will use a single Optim Directory that is created when the first workstation is configured Use this task as a step in relocating the Optim Directory or when an upgrade to Optim requires a new Directory See Create Update Optim Directory on page 173 Access Existing Optim Directory A workstation must have a Windows Registry entry for the Optim Directory This registry entry is created when the
501. ry or DB Alias If selected the Password and Verify entries are not required If you clear the check box the logon dialog appears the first time you access a different Optim Directory or DB Alias After you provide a password for an Optim Directory or DB Alias it is not necessary to provide a password again This check box also appears on the Logon dialog Password Enter a password 1 to 30 characters that allows you to access a particular database using the specified DB Alias For security reasons your password displays as a series of asterisks For versions of DB2 earlier than 6 1 passwords are limited to 8 characters Verify Enter the password again for verification For security reasons your password displays as a series of asterisks Connection String Connection string used by Optim to access a particular database using the specified DB Alias Always Fail Connection Select to automatically cancel the logon prompt for a DB Alias that you are not authorized to access or that you choose not to access If you clear this check box a logon dialog displays any time you do not have immediate access to a particular DB Alias You cannot modify the check box associated with the Optim Directory Description Text that describes the purpose of the logon record Test the Connection You can test the DB Alias connection to verify the validity of the DB Alias logon information To perform the test right click in a grid cel
502. ry rather than drop the Optim Directory Select the check box to purge the registry entry Note To reinstate a purged Optim Directory refer to Access Existing Optim Directory on page 173 216 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Purge a Pre 6 0 Optim Directory Entry After you confirm that you want to purge an Optim Directory entry the Configuration program prompts you to indicate the version of the registry entry you want to purge Select Purge a pre 6 0 Optim Registry Entry to purge an Optim Directory registry entry created before version 6 0 To purge an Optim Directory registry entry created with version 6 0 or later leave this option blank Click Proceed to open the next dialog Specify Optim Directory After you confirm the version of the Optim Directory entry you want to purge the Configuration program opens the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 Use this dialog to provide the name of the Optim Directory for the Windows registry entry you want to purge Click Proceed to open the next dialog Confirm Purge Optim Registry Entry After you select the Optim Directory for the registry entry you want to purge the Configuration program prompts you to confirm the Directory name Select the check box and click Proceed to purge the registry entry for the named Optim Directory Next the Configuration program opens a query dialog that prompts you to purge the registry e
503. ry tables and continue Create Drop Stored Procedures Use the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog to drop the stored procedures SQL Server uses to access tables in the 6 0 6 1 Directory Click Proceed to continue Drop the Current Directory In the Drop the Current Directory dialog select Drop Current Directory to drop all DB Aliases and object definitions in the 6 0 6 1 Directory Click Proceed to continue Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Drop the current Optim Directory OF x To drop the current Optim Directory SOLS select the Drop Current Optim Directory SQLS checkbox Caution Dropping the Current Optim Directory will drop all DB Aliases and Optim definitions defined for that Optim Directory Select lt Proceed to continue to the next step Connect to Database The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to drop the DB Aliases object definitions and stored procedures Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information for the Directory Click Proceed to continue 502 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix H Samples The installation DVD provides sample data and files to be used with Optim Sample database tables are not generally loaded until configuration but when you install Optim you can choose to install sample files For more information see Sample Files on page 30 If you install the sample files the installation create
504. ry tables for some reason you must apply maintenance to recreate the necessary packages plans or procedures To refresh or update the packages plans or procedures for the Optim Directory tables select Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access from the Tasks menu Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 181 Specify Optim Directory The first step in applying maintenance for Optim Directory access is to provide the name of the Optim Directory The Configuration prompts for this information by presenting the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 72 You must select Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry select an Optim Directory name and click Proceed to open the next dialog Connect to Database When applying maintenance for Optim Directory access the Configuration program must connect to the database to create or refresh the packages plans or procedures On the Connect to Database dialog you must provide the User ID Password and Connection String that the workstation needs to connect to the Optim Directory Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Connect to Database j l E3 he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to apply maintenance o the Optim Directory Tables The User ID must match the Schema Name of the Optim Bl Directory Tables On this dialog when you apply maintenance for Optim Directory access the User ID must ma
505. s Functional Security The Default ACD selectively grants and denies Functional Security privileges for roles in order to provide appropriate access to the interface and functions For example a member of a role expected to run an Archive Request online must be allowed the Invoke Archive Request Editor privilege while a member of a role expected to create a secured Archive Request must be allowed the Create Archive Request and Associate Archive Request privileges Object Security Secured objects including ACDs and File Access Definitions have an ACL that grants and denies read update delete and execute permissions to a subset of roles defined in the Default ACD At your option these roles can be defined in a specialized ACD rather than the Default ACD In the illustration ACLs for the Archive and Restore Requests must grant run execute permission to roles expected to run these requests Archive File Security A File Access Definition FAD defines the security rules for data in one or more Archive Files created by an Archive Request that references the FAD The FAD in the diagram may grant access to archived data in selected tables and columns and deny access to data in others The logon account used to run the Restore Request must be represented by a role in the FAD that is granted the necessary access to archived data Configure Security To use Optim Security you must initialize security for the Optim Directory assign
506. s Control List 1 In the object editor select Edit ACL from the Tools menu to open the Access Control List Editor 2 The next step depends on your purpose e To change the ACD used as the basis for roles listed in the ACL select a name from the Access Control Domain drop down list e To select an existing ACL to use as a model for the ACL displayed in the Access Control List Editor click the Model After button to display the Select Access Control List Model dialog e To list a Role select a role name from the Role drop down list in the grid e To allow or deny access to the object or associated ACL select the appropriate check boxes 3 Click OK to save the ACL and redisplay the object editor These steps are the minimum required to create or edit an ACL For complete details refer to Control List Editor on page 407 406 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Access Control List Editor Use the Access Control List Editor to define access permissions for an object and the associated ACL OTHER Access Control List Editor Enange Uwrer Glevne oe ee T 4 ee 1 w E a r Note Access permissions in the ACL determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Remove shortcut menu options are not available to roles limited to read access Description Enter text that describes the ACL up to 40 characters Owner The user account with all access right
507. s a subdirectory entitled Samples in the IBM Optim RT subdirectory The Samples subdirectory contains the following CMExit Contains sample exit routines for Column Maps CMProc Contains files for creating sample Column Map procedures Extract Contains sample Extract Files JCL Contains the sample JCL file Both the Optim sample database and the samples in the Samples subdirectory are described in this Appendix Sample Database Tables and Structure Sample database tables and data are distributed on the installation DVD and are loaded during the configuration process Refer to Load Drop Sample Data on page 210 As a group the database tables include information on customers and orders with shipping instructions The sample tables also include information about sales and inventory Minor differences in data types exist depending upon the DBMS you use to install the sample tables The following diagram shows the basic structure of the sample database This diagram shows the relationships among the tables as follows e Arrows indicate the flow from parent to child e Solid lines represent relationships defined to the DBMS e Dashed lines indicate relationships defined to the Optim Directory during training and demonstrations Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 503 e Dotted lines indicate Optim Extended Relationships Extended relationships can emulate implicit or application managed relationships
508. s can be configured to support universal character encoding Unicode if character data in your Unicode enabled database is kept in Unicode format Optim supports the Unicode character set for Oracle Sybase ASE Microsoft SQL Server DB2 Linux UNIX Windows Informix and DB2 z OS databases Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 If Optim processes data in a Unicode enabled database the Optim Directory must also be in a Unicode enabled database and the Optim Directory and DB Aliases for Unicode enabled databases must be flagged during the configuration process Oracle Unicode enabled Oracle database servers commonly use UTF 8 but may use UTF 16 The Oracle client will typically use a single byte character set Note Using char semantics from Oracle Unicode Servers for char type columns longer than 500 and varchar2 type columns longer than 1000 is not supported in this release To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the database client must be compatible with the character set of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows Version 8 Oracle clients For release 8i the character set for the Oracle client is set in the NLS_LANG environment variable for example e SET NLS_LANG AMERICAN_AMERICA UTF8 Restart Optim and or the Configuration program after making any changes to the character set 1 If the client uses a Unicode character set the database server must also use a Unicode character set The
509. s dialog click Apply e To save your changes and close the Personal Options dialog click OK to return to the Modify Personal Options dialog 10 Click Proceed to complete the process Configuring Personal Options within Optim You can configure Personal Options within Optim after you have installed and configured Optim 1 In the main window select Personal from the Options menu 2 On the Personal Options dialog provide the necessary information on each tab 3 Choose one of the following e To close the Personal Options dialog without saving your changes click Cancel e To save your changes and continue using the Personal Options dialog click Apply Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 247 e To save your changes and close the Personal Options dialog click OK Using the Editor The Personal Options dialog allows you to customize Optim for the workstation lt gt Personal Options ile Ed Confirm Display Edit 4 gt Si C Program Files IBM Optim Current New Folder ea C Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN New Folder 2 E X OPTUSR4 PSTRT CFG B None E Tabs The tabs in the Personal Options dialog are described briefly in the following paragraphs Detailed information is provided in each section of this chapter General Identify the Temporary Work Directory Data Directory and the directory for the Product Configuration File used by the workstation Options allow you to use the underscore as a
510. s occur processing continues if Continue Export if Errors is selected Errors are written to the export process log after Export Processing is finished The log is displayed in the Browse File dialog You can review and print the log for diagnostic information about errors If some objects fail to be exported due to errors check the specifications and try the Export Process again by clicking Proceed When processing is finished the status bar displays the message Ready Browse File The Browse File dialog displays the results of the Export Process and includes the following details e Names of exported objects grouped by object type e Date and time each object was exported e Explanatory text for each error if errors were encountered The following is a sample export process log C RTdata PNOEXPT LOG Browse File Oy x File Edit Options Help Sg i2006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST_AAC SHIP_IHSTR AAC i2006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST ADI SHIP INSTR ADI i2006 01 09 18 UDB 72 ST_ARP EMPPROJACT_ ARP i2006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST ARP SHIP INSTR ARP 12006 01 09 2 18 UDB72 ST ASQ EMPPROJACT ASQ 12006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST ASQ SHIP_ INSTR ASQ 12006 01 09 7 18 UDB72 ST_CRE SHIP INSTR CRE M i2006 01 09 18 UDB72 ST DAA EMPPROJACT DAA 12006 01 09 2 18 UDB72 ST DAA SHIP INSTR DAA 12006 01 09 UDB72 ST DEL SHIP_INSTR_DEL 12006 01 09 7 18 UDB72 ST_EDT SHIP INSTR 12006 01 09 UDB72 ST EDT SHIP INSTR EDH 12006 0
511. s oo a 8 L 16DE918B C768 453 ee 23B6E4B0 9CDF 46 Acct Ops Calendar for manager department tasks 2 2 0 3 0 a lt z lt oO Ea D Q o resales UK arketing generic reply acct ccount Disabled 12 0 2007 GSharp upport NJ do not delete eopleSoft Rep evelopment QA NJ ivotal Active Notification I C e ee pplication Support admin account VI i 4 ait Notes If your site does not use a Server Local is displayed in Server Name e If a UNIX or Linux Server Name is selected the node name is displayed in Domain Configure Options The Configuration program allows you to configure options for the first workstation These options include the following e Designate a machine as a Server if this feature is licensed Enable the ODBC interface for the machine if Archive is licensed e Specify a Product Configuration File to record Product Options that in most cases apply to all Optim users at a site e Personal Options that are stored in the Windows registry on a particular workstation Note Both the Product Configuration File and the registry entries are created during the configuration process Enable Disable Optim Server Feature On the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog choose to enable or disable the current machine as a Server 124 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Workstation Enable Disable Optim Server Feature _ O x
512. s registry on the workstation Use this option on each workstation that uses a renamed Directory e Access Existing Optim Directory Select this option to register an Optim Directory in the Windows registry on the workstation This option allows you to perform the Access Existing Optim Directory task see Access Existing Optim Directory on page 173 Rename an Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry This option allows you to rename an Optim Directory in the Directory tables and the Windows registry on the workstation To rename a Directory this option needs to be performed only once Specify Optim Directory After selecting the option to rename an Optim Directory the Specify Optim Directory dialog is displayed The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the Name of the Directory you want to rename To select from a list click the down arrow 192 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Rename Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From a he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Connect to Database When renaming an Optim Directory the Configuration program must connect to the database and verify the user has authorization to perform the task On the
513. s to the ACL The owner can always read update or delete the ACL even if the account is included in a role that is denied access to these actions To change the owner click Change Owner Note The Security Administrator is the owner of the Default ACL and Optim Object Template ACL Access Control Domain The ACD that forms the basis for the roles in the ACL An ACL references roles in the ACD in order to translate them into network accounts Roles not defined in the ACD or in the ACD but not referenced in the ACL are denied access Object Type The type of object secured by the ACL Appendix D Optim Security 407 ACL Grid The grid allows you to list roles in the ACL and define permissions Role Enter a role name or select from the drop down list of roles in the ACD Role names not included in the ACD are italicized Notes e If the ACD does not include any roles the Role list is not available e A role that is not defined in the ACD is denied all access e A user or group account that is not included in a listed role is denied all access e The most restrictive permission applies to a user or group account that is included in multiple roles in the ACL Access Type Allow and Deny identify the check boxes in their rows If both the Allow and Deny check boxes are cleared accounts in the role are provisionally denied the privilege but may be granted the privilege as members of another role Object Access Possible access to t
514. sabled for each entry 3 Select Enabled and set Days to Retain to 0 4 Enter in the grid names of the five tables for which audit information is retained indefinitely select from a list or type names or patterns Status is Enabled and Days to Retain is 0 for the 5 new entries 234 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 5 Set Days to Retain to 365 6 Enter names of the thirty tables in the grid select from a list or type names or patterns Status is Enabled and Days to Retain is 365 for the 30 new entries 7 Set Days to Retain to 90 8 The fifty remaining tables are not entered in the grid The default status for these tables is Enabled and audit information for each table is retained for 90 days Select Table To Be Audited Dialog When you select Add Tables or Replace Table from the shortcut menu the Select Table to be audited dialog is displayed This dialog is also displayed when you use the Join command from the Table Editor Select Table to be audited OF x DB Alias Database Table EB Creator ID Table Name EE IFx94 ria IOK gt EZ SQL8 OPTUSR4 CUSTOMERS EE SYB125 Table Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 CUSTOMERS2 EE SYBASE125 Table Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 CUSTOMERSX EE UDB Table Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 DETAILS EE UDB81 Table Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 DETAILS2 EE 205 Table Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 DETAILSAC EH zoss Table Orac
515. se Dialog on page 85 Click Proceed to display the Complete dialog and complete the process Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 195 lt gt Rename Optim Directory Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program remembers the User ID and optionally the Password or Future access to the Optim Directory Specify the User ID and Password then click lt Proceed gt What to do Next After connection information is updated in the registry the What to do Next dialog instructs you to use the Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry option to update the registry for each workstation that accesses the Optim Directory Click Proceed to display the Complete dialog and complete the process 196 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Rename Optim Directory What to do Next ou have successfully renamed a Optim Directory This task must now be run on every other workstation and server that accessed the Optim Directory using the old name When run on a server the task must also be run by launching the Configuration Program From the Optim Server Settings applet However on these machines the Anl Rename e hi ns Reni E i he ar Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry This option allows you to rename the Optim Directory in the Windows registry on the workstation Use this option on each workstation that uses a renamed Directory Specify Registry Entry to Rename After selecting the option to ren
516. se in some instances See Specifying a Company Name and ID on page 56 for more information Name Optim will automatically display the company name assigned to your organization here Your Optim supplied name may not match the spelling or punctuation used in your company s actual name You cannot change this entry ID Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit 55 Optim will automatically display the company ID assigned to your organization here You cannot change this entry Password You must specify the Password assigned to your company to sign any exit whether it be the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit This entry is case sensitive and you must enter it in the format provided to you when you received Optim This entry is required unless you selected the Leave the Currently Signed Exit Intact option Click OK to Sign the Selected Exit After you specify your company password to sign an exit click OK to complete the signing process and close the Sign Optim Exit dialog Note You must sign a valid exit to use Optim If you click Cancel instead of OK and a signed exit does not already exist Optim will display a warning message and the Configuration program will terminate Specifying a Company Name and ID The first time you execute the Configuration program on a workstation or server the Specify Company Name dialog will appear if you did not previously specify your company Name and ID In that case this dialog will
517. se privileges refer to Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials on page 371 Password Enter the password corresponding to the User ID Domain Specify the domain Check Logon Click Check Logon to verify that the Server can log on with the credentials provided This button is available if the Use Local System account check box is cleared Start Stop Service This button is available if Start as Service is selected and applied Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 155 Security Tab Use the Security tab to choose the source of the logon information for the Server Optim Server Settings iof x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention status 4 gt Acquire Logon Identification From the following source Optim Directories Server Client DB Aliases C Server Client File Input Output Server Client Use this Logon for accessing Files F Only files local to this Server may be accessed Domain Check Logon Defaults Undo Configuration Ready a Select options to indicate the source of the logon information when the Server requires access to Optim Directories DB Aliases and Input and Output files Optim Directories Server Select to use the User ID and password provided on the Connection tab for Server access to the Optim Directory Client Select to use the User ID and password for Server acc
518. sed Default 1 NetWorker is available for use This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to NetWorker or to process such a file networkeravail 0 tivoliavail Indicator for the use of a Tivoli device Note To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs 0 Tivoli is not used Default 1 Tivoli is available for use This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to Tivoli or to process such a file userid password Tivoli is available for use with the specified User ID and password This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to Tivoli or to process such a file Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 343 Note If this setting is used prOsvce must be started under root authority See Securing the Products on page 351 tivoliavail 1 rmfixedsegsize The default maximum segment size for Archive Files on fixed drive i e hard disk 0 Fixed drive software determines default segment size Default n Size in megabytes up to 9999 MB rmfixedsegsize 0 rmremsegsize The default maximum segment size in megabytes for Archive Files on a removable device e g floppy disk zip drive 10 Default n Size in megabytes up to 9999 MB rmremsegsize 10 scriptmaxlines Maximum number of lines in a Column Map Procedure that are included in the Process Report 500 Include up to 500 lines
519. ser creating the Load Request Chapter 9 Personal Options 259 Teradata Password Teradata password for the user creating the Load Request Create Tab Use the options on the Create tab to set defaults for creating objects Note that you can establish as many as three layers of default settings for the creation of database objects in addition to target system defaults The default settings determine the values displayed in the Object List for the Create Utility and can be overridden at the object level by editing the list At the broadest level DB Alias settings establish defaults for creating objects in the associated database If desired you can provide Personal Options settings as described in the following text for a user or group of users that override some or all DB Alias settings A third level of optional defaults apply at the processing level to override Personal Options and DB Alias settings Use the options on the Create tab to set second level defaults for the Create Utility Personal Options X General Confirm Display Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon Server Edit Browse Archive Rem 4 gt DB Alias M Object Name Highlighting Limit Confident Uncertain M Compile error Drop 1000 o Blue E Yellow VV Replace UDTs V DBZ UDB For 2 O5 Gurrent Rules DBZ Tables indexes Synonyms Triggers Default Database Allocation Percent 100 F Use default database Default Tab
520. set product options 128 share connection information 94 task summary 131 Configure Options for additional workstations 141 for first workstation 124 personal options 129 process steps 207 product options 128 Configure Security for an Optim Directory 173 Configure the Server process steps 143 Confirm tab Personal Options 251 104 107 531 Confirm tab Personal Options continued before deleting 251 before losing DDLs 252 before overwriting files 251 Convert PST Directory Objects 485 499 Create additional Optim Directory 173 copies of DB2 relationships 209 create drop packages 78 create drop procedures 78 create select DB Alias 88 primary keys 208 registry entry 134 Create tab Personal Options 260 267 compile error drop 261 DB Alias 260 DB2 UDB for z OS current rules 261 Limits 261 Object Name Highlighting 261 replace UDTs 261 set alias defaults 265 set index defaults 263 set synonym defaults 267 set table defaults 261 set trigger defaults 266 Credentials 369 374 DBMS logon credentials 373 374 DB Alias access 374 maintaining 374 Optim Directory access 373 Server credentials 369 373 Linux file access 373 Oracle OS Authentication 373 registry access 372 Server privileges 371 to run processes 370 to run the Server 369 UNC network share access 372 UNIX file access 373 Customer Information 26 Customer Information Dialog 26 D Data Privacy Tables descriptions 515 loading 107 211 Database sample tables 50
521. severe Exception Click the down arrow to display a drop down list with the following severity levels Success Send email notification for all processing messages including Success Information Send email notification for Information or more severe messages 166 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Warning Send email notification for Warning or more severe messages Error Send email notification for Error or more severe messages Exception Send email notification for Exception messages To clear entries right click a grid cell and select Remove or Remove All from the shortcut menu Do not send duplicates for day s Specify the number of days 1 to 999 before email notification is resent for a persistent error or warning Clear send history when Optim Server starts Select this check box to clear the send history once the Server is started When selected any email notification that took place prior to the starting of the Server is ignored Send Test eMail Right click a grid row and select Send Test eMail to validate the email address Email Transport Click this button to display the Email Transport dialog so that you may activate and configure the Collaboration Data Object CDO transport to send email If you don t click this button email is sent using the Simple Mail Protocol Transport SMTP Note You must use the CDO transport if the email client on the server requires logon credentials to send an
522. shaded and selected are not imported Continue import if error s Indicate processing if an error occurs Errors are written to the Security Import Process Log and displayed on the message bar e To continue processing if an error occurs select the check box Appendix D Optim Security 431 e To halt processing if an error occurs clear the check box Owners Tab Use the Owners tab to review or change the owner name of ACLs you want to import lt gt Import Security Definitions at E R fC NA OPTUSRG 3 WESTOPTADM6 NRTHTEST4A o o LABIENG2 o meai o oo Oooo O Oooo O MG2WP3 o posjaTuiopR7 O Current Owner A read only list of the owners of each ACL in the Secured Input File New Owner Specify a new owner name for an ACL in the Secured Input File Use the browse button to open the Security Users dialog and select an owner see F Security Users on page 409 Shortcut Menu Commands Right click to select from the following shortcut menu commands Copy Name Copies the Current Owner name to the New Owner column for the ACL Available in the Current Owner column only Populate Clear Copies the Current Owner name to the New Owner column for all ACLs 432 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Add Copies the Current Owner name to the New Owner column for ACLs without a New Owner name Empty Empties names from the New Owner column for all ACLs Objects Tab Use the Objects tab to
523. sing calls When selected Password is not available Check Logon Click Check Logon to verify that the Server can log on with the information provided Optim Server Logon Dialog If you select the Always Ask for Password check box or if the default logon information is incorrect the Optim Server Logon dialog is displayed E Optim Server Logon Always Ask for Password Select to display the Optim Server Logon dialog whenever the Server is used for remote processing calls Save as Default Logon If you select the Save as Default Logon check box the information you enter in this dialog overrides the default settings specified on the Server tab in Personal Options Chapter 9 Personal Options 271 Edit Tab Use the options on the Edit tab to set preferences for browsing and editing data lt gt Personal Options M E M E E M E E E M FF aur Auto Switch Select to automatically switch subordinate tables in a stack of two or more joined tables to display related rows When you select a row in a table and no related rows exist in the subordinate table Optim automatically switches to display the next table in the stack that has a related row Display Column Attributes Select to display column attributes data type length and nullable attribute for all columns in a selected table Column attributes are useful when you insert a row or modify column data in the Table Editor Display Deleted Rows Select to dis
524. sion DLL or EXE If the image is not in the current directory then it must be fully qualified with the proper path information This utility can be used to determine which DLL could not be loaded when the following Optim System error occurs RetCode PST_FAILED 00001 General logic error ExtCode ENVERR_BADSPGMLOAD 00231 Load of PST SPGM or ExtDLL failed OpsCode The specified module could not be found Tokenl PNODSQ20 Token2 PNODSQ20 Resolve missing DLL To resolve the missing DLL in the above example 1 Open a MS DOS window 2 Change to the drive and directory where the Optim software was installed usually C Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN 3 Run the Image Locator Diagnostic Tool with the name of the offending module For example PNOIMAGE PNO0SQ20 DLL Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool The Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool ORACONN EXE is a utility that determines if Optim was installed correctly when it fails to connect to an Oracle database The syntax of the command follows ORACONN userid password TNSservicename where userid Is the user ID used to connect to the Oracle database The user ID must be defined in the Oracle database password Is the password used to connect to the Oracle database The password must be defined for the specified user ID in the Oracle database Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 TNSservicename Is the name of the service associated with the Oracle database Test Oracle datab
525. sks Optim Directory Select an Optim Directory from the list to display the connection information for the corresponding DB Aliases Grid Details The connection information for the selected Optim Directory includes the following Note The maximum length for a User ID or password varies by DBMS DB Alias DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory User ID Identifier 1 to 30 characters that allows the Server to use a particular DB Alias User IDs are usually assigned and maintained by the database administrator Note If you are using Informix you must enter the User ID in upper case for an ANSI database and in lower case for a non ANSI database Password Enter a password 1 to 30 characters that allows the Server to access a database using the specified DB Alias Verify Reenter the password for verification Connection String Connection string the Server uses to access a database using the specified DB Alias Always Fail Connection Select this check box to deny access to the corresponding DB Alias You can use this check box to temporarily deny access to a DB Alias without having to remove the connection string Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the logon record Merge Current User Click Merge Current User to merge the Connection settings from the Current User registry to the Local Machine registry for the Server component machine This action does not overlay information previously entered i
526. source of those credentials Only files local to this Server may be accessed Select Only files local to this Server may be accessed to restrict Server access to local files Clear the check box to provide Logon information needed for Server access to files User ID Enter the appropriate User ID If these credentials are used to access files external to the Server the User ID must have the following privileges e Act as part of the operating system SeTcbPrivilege e Increase quotas SeIncreaseQuotaPrivilege e Replace a process level token SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege e Bypass traverse checking SeChangeNotifyPrivilege e Log on as a batch job GSE_BATCH_LOGON_NAME Password Enter the password corresponding to the User ID Domain Specify the domain Check Logon Click Check Logon to verify that the Server can log on with the credentials provided Endpoints Tab Use the Endpoints tab to specify protocols to be used by workstations connecting to the Server for remote procedure calls The protocol Named Pipe ncacn_np and endpoint PIPE RTSERVER are entered by default This is usually the most efficient method for workstations in the domain to connect to the Server To add access for a workstation outside the domain you must add the additional protocol Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 157 Optim Server Settings an a SSS SSS pia heuer Anae Y PIPERTSERVER paos _ my o l You can include all pro
527. splay the Currency tab in the Convert Insert and Load Request Editors Show Age Tab Pages Select to display the Age Function and Global Aging tabs in the Convert Insert and Load Request Editors Note You can override these selections with commands available from the Options menu in each Action Request Editor Monitor Update Frequency Rows Specify the number of rows 100 to 5000 to process before updating the status message on the Progress dialog The default value is 100 Seconds Specify the number of seconds 5 to 60 to pass before updating the process time on the Progress dialog The default value is 5 282 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Format Numeric Values Select this check box to format numeric values displayed on progress dialogs and in process reports for all actions Clear this check box to display numeric values without formatting e g 99888 For example if you select this check box and run the Extract Process the Extract Request Progress dialog would display 99 888 for the total number of rows extracted depending on the numeric format defined for Windows Note To view the numeric format for your workstation select Regional Options from the Control Panel and review the Numbers tab Report Retention Report Levels Specify the maximum number of reports you can retain for each type of process You can specify a value from 0 through 200 A value of 0 default disables the report retentio
528. ssages that are reported to the Windows Event Log for Windows or the syslog for UNIX or Linux Note Before using administrator email notification the desired email program must be installed For Windows the email client must be defined as the default and set up to interface with MAPI For UNIX or Linux a valid copy of SENDMAIL must be configured correctly Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 165 E Optim Server Settings Iof x Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status Email w a IV Activate Administrator Email Notification Email Address Minimum Severity user company com Do not send duplicates For 7 day s I Clear send history when Optim Server starts Email Transport Defaults Undo Configuration Cancel Apply Help Ready Activate Administrator Email Notification Select this check box to activate email notification The other options on this tab are unavailable unless this check box is selected Note Deselecting the check box does not clear the Email tab settings Email Address Enter an email address to which to automatically send notification A message is sent to the email address only if the specified Minimum Severity is reached Minimum Severity For each email address you list select the minimum severity needed to send a message The severity levels are ranked from least severe Success to most
529. st have DBMS authorization to create or refresh database packages plans or procedures You can modify these values as needed and click Proceed to continue Drop Old Packages The Configuration program displays the Drop Old Packages Plans or Procedures dialog If you select this option and click Proceed you can drop old packages plans or procedures before creating new ones If you do not select this option you can create refresh the appropriate packages plans or procedures The following guidelines apply e If you share stored procedures with other users then any one authorized user can drop old packages plans or procedures for all users e If your qualifier is not used by anyone else you can safely drop the old packages plans or procedures without affecting other users Note If the same qualifier applies to multiple users or if you regularly run different builds of Optim then you may not want to drop the old packages plans or procedures 186 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Create Drop Packages The Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages dialog see Create Drop Packages on page 78 the Bind Drop Plans dialog or the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog as appropriate for the DBMS you are using This dialog allows you to Create Refresh the e Packages to access the Data Dictionary in Oracle e Plans to access Catalog Tables in DB2 e Procedures to access System Tables i
530. stallation Target gt Required 863 208 049 bytes Available 8 064 886 646 bytes PRESS lt ENTER gt TO CONTINUE The Pre Installation Summary screen displays all the settings for this installation for you to review To modify any of the settings type BACK at the prompt PRESS lt ENTER gt TO CONTINUE to display previous installation screens and make the changes When you proceed with the installation the Installing screen displays Chapter 2 Installation 43 Disk Space Infornation for Installation Target gt Required 883 206 049 bytes Available 8 064 880 640 bytes PRESS lt ENTER gt TO CONTINUE The Installing screen displays a progress bar as the installer copies the files Then the Installation Complete screen displays PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE FOLLOWING Installation Complete Congratulations IBM Optim has been successfully installed to C Program Files IBM Optim gt 1 View Release Notes gt 2 Launch the configuration program for your Optim solution INTER A COMMA SEPARATED LIST OF NUMBERS REPRESENTING THE DESIRED CHOICES OR PRESS lt ENTER gt TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT When the installation completes you can choose to view the Release Notes and launch the configuration program Silent Installer Windows In a Windows environment you can install Optim using the silent installer The Optim installation includes the file optim_installer properties in the same di
531. station Specify Product Configuration File _ Oy x Optim he Configuration program can create a File to hold the Optim Product Options Ina ulti user environment the file must be located on a server accessible to all orksbations running Optim To create a new Configuration File select the Create New ile option and specify the name of the File to create You must also enter your amanan Mame Comma TO and Paccaiord ewar as Fhe mere cenk kno wou Freon TAM Configuration File Specifications Create New File f Use Existing File File Name Company Information Mame Passion ID Previous Undo Cancel Hs The Specify Product Configuration File dialog includes the following Configuration File Specifications Create New File Select this option to create a new Product Configuration File Use Existing File Select this option to use an existing Product Configuration File File Name Provide the complete directory path and name of the Product Configuration File To select a file from your system directories click the browse button Note The Configuration File is usually shared by all users at a site specify a path on a file server that is easily accessible to all users Company Information Name Name of the company licensed to use Optim ID Company identifier required for using Optim Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 127 Password Enter the password required for creating a new Product Configuration F
532. subset criteria is specified in the data source or connection string the WHERE clause subset must be a subset of that criteria PST_ARCHIVE_ID Pseudocolumn The PST_ARCHIVE_ID pseudocolumn is logically added to each archived table during ODM processing and contains the Archive File ID of the Archive File that includes the table Use PST_ARCHIVE_ID to specify the Archive File from which a row is selected For example you can use PST_ARCHIVE_ID to control a join by avoiding duplicate rows from a table in multiple files in the Archive File Collection If the DETAILS table is related to the ITEMS table and only the DETAILS table is unique across all files in the collection then a join between the tables would result in duplicate ITEMS rows joined with DETAILS rows To avoid duplicate rows use the following syntax SELECT FROM PST DETAILS PST ITEMS WHERE PST DETAILS ITEM_ID PST ITEMS ITEM_ID AND PST DETAILS PST_ARCHIVE_ID PST ITEMS PST_ARCHIVE_ID PST_ARCHIVE_FILES Table An Archive File Collection includes a table named PST_ARCHIVE_FILES which contains a row for each Archive File in the collection PST_ARCHIVE_FILES has the following columns Column Name Data Type Description ARCHIVE_ID INTEGER Archive File ID GUID CHAR 40 Archive File GUID ARCHIVE_FILE_NAME VARCHAR 256 Archive File name ARCHIVE_DATETIME TIMESTAMP Archive File creation date and time You can use this table to query context data fr
533. t Create Delete Edit Extract Export Import Insert Load ODM Report and Restore Auditing can be activated or deactivated at any time Enable Process Audit using the Product Options For details see General Tab on page 221 The XML documents produced by Process Audit are written to the Optim Directory audit table PSTAUDIT2 or PSTAUDIT3 for SQL Server An audit record is written at the completion of an Archive Browse Compare Convert Create Delete Edit Extract Export Import Insert Load ODM Report and Restore process Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 525 526 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document
534. t to continue pum Directory DIRECTORY Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 199 Specify Optim Directory DBMS You must specify the version of the DBMS you want to use to update the Optim Directory amp Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Specify Optim Dire Mi E3 he Optim Configuration program will update the DBMS of the selected database Select al he new DBMS version For the target database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support or some of the listed DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor Click the down arrow to select a version The version you select must be different from the current version If not an error message displays Click Proceed to connect to the database Connect to Database When you update information for the Optim Directory the Configuration program must_connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables On the Connect to Database dialog see Connect to Database on page 183 you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that allows the workstation to connect to the database If the connection is successful the next step is to drop the old packages plans or procedures and create new ones for the updated DBMS Create Drop Packages The Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages dialog the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog or the Bind Drop Plans dialog as appropriate for the DBMS you are using
535. t Workstation Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature Ioj x he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC nterface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry For he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step If the site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available Specify Product Configuration File After you create the Windows registry entry for the Optim Directory you must identify the Product Configuration File for the workstation The configuration process opens the Specify Product Configuration File dialog Note If you decide to install Optim on a server or on each workstation all workstations can use one Product Configuration File located on the server You create the Product Configuration File when you configure Product Options for the first workstation Therefore when you configure an additional workstation select Use Existing File and specify the fully qualified name of the original Product Configuration File on the Specify Product Configuration File dialog For more complete information refer to Configure Options on page 124 Configure Additional Workstation Summary The tasks for Configuring an Additional Workstation are complete e Import registry data or create a Windows registry entry for the workstation to ac
536. t be GUEST NORMAL and SUPER User and group accounts are mapped to one or more roles as appropriate The role specifications in the Default ACD are referenced for Functional Security if enabled for the Optim Directory Also the role specifications in the Default or other ACD are referenced by Access Control Lists used to secure objects and File Access Definitions used to secure Archive Files and assigned privileges to access the object or Archive File Access Control List The Access Control List is an Optim object that serves as the basis for Object Security ACL parameters govern the ability of a role to perform actions such as read update or delete on both the object and the ACL for the object Each ACD File Access Definition and secured Optim object has a unique ACL File Access Definition The File Access Definition is the basis for Archive File Security All Archive Files generated by running an Archive Request that references an FAD are secured by the FAD Security Diagram The following diagram illustrates the features of Optim Security Default ACD Archive Request Editor Restore Request Editor hesinre Han vent Rok Allow Rur y Appendix D Optim Security 385 The Default ACD an object in the Optim Directory is the linchpin for the three levels of Optim Security In the Default ACD arbitrarily named roles are linked to network accounts used as logons when performing task
537. t be UTF 8 This option is required in order for any DB Alias to have he Unicode feature e Information on Multi byte Format MBCS If you select multi byte format in the Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge the following DBMS character set requirements for multi byte e Both the DBMS client and database must have the same supported multi byte character set e An Optim Directory in multi byte format supports multi byte DB Aliases only Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 83 Configure First Workstation Information on Multi byte Format MBCS Miel Ea ou have selected the option to configure this Optim Directory so its character data is ept in Multi byte format To enable this Feature both the DBMS client and Database ust have the same Multi byte character set which must be listed as a supported Multi byte character set in the README TXT File This Feature requires that all DB Aliases ave Fhe Mulki hwre Fea PPA nla awe a DR Alia a datahase Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format After you acknowledge the DBMS character set requirements for an Optim Directory in multi byte format you are prompted to acknowledge multi byte round trip conversion issues Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA165JIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character and or some Unicode characters are ma
538. t can use Procedures created for another Optim Directory for that database Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use Pout tic Note The default stored procedure information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit stored procedure information on the Databases tab When you enter the necessary information on each tab and click Proceed the Configuration program connects to the database catalogs the stored procedures writes the registry entries and optionally creates primary keys These four steps are repeated automatically for each selected database When complete the next step is to configure security Optim Security Optim Security includes three features Archive File Security Functional Security and Object Security For more information about these security features see Archive File Security on page 384 Security on page 383 Object Security on page 384 To use Optim Security security must be initialized for the Directory Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Use the Initialize Security dialog to assign a Security Administrator for the Optim Directory and initialize security If security has been initialized for the Directory this dialog is replaced by the Change Security Administrator dialog which is similar to Initialize Security but with no initialize option 120 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure First Worksta
539. t color yellow or click the down arrow to select a different color Create Tables Tab Use the Tables tab to specify the default database for DB2 z OS Specify a default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating database objects Specify an allocation percent to adjust SQL storage related parameters for Oracle and DB2 z OS Chapter 9 Personal Options 261 Default Database Enter the name of the default database for creating tables To select from a list click the down arrow This option is available only if you are using DB2 z OS A single DB Alias in Optim can identify more than one database in DB2 z OS Use default database Select this check box to use the default database for creating tables If you clear this check box the Create Utility attempts to use the source database from the Source File However if the source database does not exist on the target system the Create Utility uses the default database Default Enter the name of the default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating tables To select from a list click the down arrow If you select lt Default gt the default set in the database is used Use default tablespace Select this check box to use the default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating tables If you clear this check box the Create Utility attempts to use the tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace in the Source File However if the source
540. t concurrent clients per server EF a Specify server priority Ef 4 Use default server priority O Keep when daemon ends Server Provisioning Number of prestarted servers in pool hi Number of spare servers fc af Prestarted server pool limit 3 E Properties 3 amp RP oe Propert value General Server Mode Security iy 4 From the Workspace server mode list select singleClient 5 From the File menu select Save All Edit the ODM Server Code Page UTF 8 users must edit the ODM Server code page By default ODM first translates archived data to match the workstation code page on the primary ODM Server ODM then translates the code page on the secondary ODM Server if one exists You can use UTF 8 data only if all data passed to ODM is in UTF 8 format including SQL statements To use UTF 8 format you must set the code page on the ODM Server To edit the ODM Server code page 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the ODM Server list and the Bindings list to display the NAV member Right click the NAV member and select Open from the shortcut menu to open the NAV binding editor Select the Environment tab Appendix F Open Data Manager 459 win3kattun bk on prioptvm63 princeton usnj ibm com File View YM m w D gt E Connect Floppy 1 Comecon G A H Design localhost bindings NA binding bnd Attunity Studio File Edit Navigate Search Project Window Help PC
541. t step in creating a new DB Alias is to specify the Optim Directory where you want to store that DB Alias The Configuration program displays the Specify Optim Directory dialog Create Update Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry The name is also stored in the Optim Directory Shared Optim Directories must have unique names Specify the name for the Optim Directory and registry entry then click lt Proceed gt to continue DIRECTORY The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the name of the Optim Directory you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow To continue click Proceed The Configuration program opens a query dialog 170 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Create Update DB Alias Create Update DB Alias for the Optim Dire If you are creating a DB Alias for the database containing the Optim Directory Tables select the Create Update DB Alias for the Optim Directory Database checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step If you plan to use Optim to access user tables other than Optim Directory tables on the database select the Create Update DB Alias for the Optim Directory Database check box If you want to create a DB Alias for another database or server clear the check box
542. t systems Terms used in a configuration dialog reflect the DBMS for the database that is being configured For example for an Oracle database a configuration dialog may refer to Packages used to access database tables However for a Sybase ASE or SQL Server database the same dialog refers to Procedures and for a DB2 database it refers to Plans Varying terms are noted in the discussion of a dialog Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 59 Main Window and Menus The Configuration main window includes the menu bar toolbar Processing Log message bar and status bar Optim Configuration Tasks Note When the Configuration Assistant or other dialogs are open the main window is inactive and cannot be used except to view the most recent entries in the Processing Log Main Window The Configuration main window includes the following components Menu bar The menus for the Configuration program Toolbar Buttons to select Online Help Contents or What s This Help Processing Log A list of actions performed by the Configuration program Message bar Basic information to help you select a task or know the outcome of a selected task Status bar Messages about a specific command or the current action The status bar appears at the bottom of the main window and each dialog 60 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Menus To use the Configuration program select a command from any menu on the main wi
543. t you will use the existing Directory instead of creating a new one e Select Yes to use the existing Directory name and proceed to the Connect to Database dialog e Select No to not use the existing Directory name and terminate the Directory creation process ey name OPTIMDIR does not match the name of the Optim Directory you selected You must use the name PSTDIRECTORY in order to Saas to this Optim Directory Table Do you want to delete the name OPTIMDIR and use the name PSTDIRECTORY instead Ce Bind Drop Plans When creating an Optim Directory in a DB2 database the configuration process prompts for authorization information using the Bind Drop Plans dialog Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 79 Configure Arst Workstation Bind Drop Plans Optim ptim must use Optim created Plans to access the Optim Directory Tables The Optim onfiguration program binds these Plans The Collection Name is the same as the reator ID for the Optim Directory Tables bd Tables Optim Directory Tables Plan Specifications E Bind Refresh Collection Name e Use Existing Grant Auth ID Drop PUBLIC Always Display Output D Display SOL Previous Skip Unda Cancel DEZ UDB qud A The elements in the Bind Drop Plans dialog are similar to those described for Create Drop Packages with the following exception Always Display Output Select this check box to open the Browse File dialog to review any errors w
544. tabase Connectivity JDBC Application Programming Interfaces APIs ODM is unavailable when Optim is installed in a UNIX or Linux environment Optim must be installed before installing ODM however ODM can be installed during the Optim installation process ODM is implemented using the Attunity Connect product in concert with a custom driver that provides access to Archive Files and Archive File Collections Attunity Connect is a rich peer to peer networking product A full set of Attunity manuals is included with ODM This appendix describes how to install configure and use ODM to provide access to Archive Files Note Open Data Manager is provided with a 30 day trial license that must be replaced with a permanent license for continued use To obtain the permanent license you must submit a Service Request at the Integrated Data Management Support site Deployment Strategy To be accessed using ODM Archive Files must be registered in an Optim Directory and be accessible from the ODM Server on which the data source is defined A primary ODM Server resides on an Optim Server machine with one or more ODM data sources for Archive Files or Archive File Collections If JDBC is the sole API used to access archived data a direct connection is made to the ODM Server This connection requires the Attunity JDBC driver to access archived data If ODBC is used to access archived data Attunity s new thin ODBC client can connect directly to an ODM S
545. tallation and Configuration Guide dbalias loader userid password User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if pstlogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See Securing the Configuration Files on page 353 for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password pstdir ORA806 Oracle 8 0 OPTUSER D0806 rt password DB Alias information Use dbalias for each DB Alias that the Server can access for Command Line processes Note that a DB Alias is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and the DB Alias information is not verified until a connection is required in a process pstdir Name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias A pstdir entry for the referenced Optim Directory is required name Name of the DB Alias connectstring Information needed by the DBMS to connect to the database typically the system name and port ID Enter if the database designated by the DB Alias includes the Optim Directory userid password User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if dbaliaslogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See Securing the Configuration Files on page 353 for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward sl
546. tallation license temporarily Ifyou are upgrading from a later version of your Install Location Optim solution you can apply the license used previously Ifyou do not have access to the license file or wish to install ODM at a later time select Only Copy the ODM Files License Agreement Customer Information Component Selection ODM Information Shortcut Location Configure ODM Now Summary Only Copy the ODM Files Installation Installation Complete Previous Install and Configure ODM Now Select this option to install the ODM Server You are prompted for the ODM license file and both the ODM Server and Attunity Studio are automatically installed The ODM Server and Attunity Studio installation files are also copied to your machine If both ODM Server and Attunity Studio version 5 3 are already installed this option is labeled Configure ODM Now If an earlier version of Attunity Server is already installed you must uninstall Attunity Server before installing the Optim ODM component Only Copy the ODM Files Select this option to install the ODM Server manually This option copies the ODM Server and Attunity Studio installation files to your machine To complete the ODM installation you must install ODM manually Appendix F Open Data Manager 451 Note If you have previously used ODM to support Optim Data Source Extensions the Optim installer will notify you that it cannot upgrade ODM Upgrading ODM is not necessary for Op
547. tation To specify another user click Change to open the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog which allows you to enter a different Domain User Name or select from a list of user accounts in an available domain The Security Administrator must be a user account in a network domain that is accessible from the current workstation Note You can also change the Security Administrator using the Change Security Administrator dialog available by selecting Configure Security for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 121 Initialize the Security Feature for this Optim Directory After identifying the Security Administrator initialize security for the Directory by selecting Initialize and clicking Proceed When security is initialized the Security Administrator is assigned and a default ACD and ACL are created for the Directory For more information about ACDs and ACLs see Access Control Domains List on page 387 and Access Control List on page 405 Once security has been initialized for an Optim Directory it cannot be undone however the Security Administrator can enable or disable the Optim Security features for the Directory by selecting the Configure Security for an Optim Directory option from the Tasks menu in the Configuration main window If you do not wish to establish security for the Directory click Skip To initialize security at a later time use the Configure Security fo
548. tch the identifier for Optim Directory tables Create Drop Packages Before creating or refreshing packages plans or procedures for the Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages or Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog see Create Drop Packages on page 73 or the Bind Drop Plans dialog so Bind Drop Plans on pagal 79 You can choose to browse the DDL statements generated to create or refresh the packages plans or procedures In addition if the specified Optim Directory tables are not the ones you want to use you can cancel the process 182 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Add Default Tables After packages plans or procedures are created for the Optim Directory the Configuration program prompts you to add default tables to the Optim Directory If you select the check box the Configuration program verifies that default Calendars and Currency tables are in the Optim Directory If not found these tables are loaded automatically Apply Maintenance to Another Before completing the task to Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access the Configuration program prompts you to apply maintenance for access to another Optim Directory If you select the check box you can repeat the maintenance process To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access At times it may be necessary to refresh or update the packages p
549. te Select DB Alias In the Create Select DB Alias dialog click Skip to continue the process of dropping the version 6 0 6 1 tables Do not click Proceed or the Configuration program will drop the DB Alias for your new Optim Directory Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables In the Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables dialog select Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables to make the Directory unavailable to the Optim products version 6 0 6 1 Click Proceed to continue amp Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables Be EG If the Optim Directory SQLS was originally created in 6 0 or 6 1 and you would like to Drop the old 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables select the Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables for SQL8 checkbox NOTE Selecting this option will ONLY drop the the E Optim Directory Tables created in 6 0 or 6 1 It will NOT drop an Optim Directory Table Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 501 Connect to Database The Configuration program must reconnect to the database to drop the Optim Directory tables Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information Click Proceed to continue Drop Optim Directory Tables Before you drop an Optim Directory and Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the table identifier and prompts you to review the generated SQL using the Drop Directory Tables dialog Click Proceed to drop the 6 0 6 1 Directo
550. ted below Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 321 Optim Server Setup Insta sSmield Note The tmp softech directory only contains files concerning the installation of Optim It does not contain any files concerning the signing of the default exit that information is stored in the rt temp directory so if installation was successful you should delete the temporary files in the tmp softech directory even if you did not sign the default exit Setup Complete Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how the installation process completes 322 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide At the conclusion of the installation a dialog indicates the Server has been successfully installed Click Finish and close the console window to complete the installation process Optim Server Setup Command Line Installation Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 To install the Server from the command line use the setup options file setupopts located on the product DVD Editing setupopts Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 To install the Server mount the product DVD and copy setupopts from the root directory to a location for which you have write access You can edit the file using an ASCII editor Enable a keyword by removing the leading characters from the line Define a parameter for a keyword by editing the characters after the Running the Setup Process Red Hat Linux 3 or So
551. ter all Optim command line processes that use them have exited and all Optim Servers that use them have been stopped You can periodically check the status of the services with the mwadm status command If you want to force stop the services you can enter the mwadm stop f command However use this command as the last resort as it will force terminate all running Optim programs that are using the services being stopped Select Components Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to select components The Select Components dialog lists the features available for installation All components are selected by default Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 311 Optim Server Setup Optim Server Executable Files Select this check box to install all files including shell scripts and configuration files needed to run the Server in a Solaris HP UX AIX or Linux operating environment Upon completion of the installation process you are prompted to modify the shell scripts and configuration files to suit your environment Sample Files Select this check box to install sample Extract Files For more information about samples refer to Appendix H Samples on page 503 Optim Open Data Manager Interface Select this check box to install Open Data Manager ODM which is used with external applications to access data in Archive Files ODM requires a product license and is required for installa
552. tes a registry entry that allows Optim to connect to the Optim Directory from that workstation If you are planning to configure one or more additional workstations you can export the Optim Directory registry entries and the Product License information to a file You can save time by importing this file when you configure each additional workstation Configure Additional Workstations After you complete the full installation and configuration for the first workstation you must configure any other workstations that are to use Optim Note Before configuring a workstation to use Optim you must configure the DBMS client software on the workstation to permit access to individual database instances Chapter 1 Getting Started 5 Run Setup Even if you decide to install Optim on a file server you can run Setup before configuring each additional workstation to create application shortcuts Next select the Configure Additional Workstation option for each workstation Import Registry Data If you exported registry settings to a file when you configured the first workstation you can import these settings to configure each additional workstation However if you do not choose to export and import Optim Directory registry data you must follow the flow in the configuration process to create a registry entry Configuration Process When you configure an additional workstation and do not import registry data you must provide the Product License Key
553. tes long Example myservicesendpoint Network Address Windows server name optionally followed by and the AppleTalk zone name Banyan Vines SSP ncacn_vns_spp Endpoint Vines SPP port number from 250 through 511 Example 500 Network Address StreetTalk server name of the form item group organization Internet Information Server IIS ncacn_http Endpoint Internet port number Example 2215 Network Address Internet address or local Windows server name Note You can specify a dynamic endpoint for any protocol using an asterisk If Supported Protocols All is specified an asterisk displays automatically Archive Tab Use the Archive tab to allow users to review data to be deleted after it has been archived select available backup devices and set a default minimum file retention period for supported devices 238 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide lt gt Product Options Allow User to review Delete After Archive list Select this check box to enable the Review Archive Delete List check box on the Archive and Delete Request Editors This check box allows users to display and review the names of tables for which data is to be deleted as a function of archiving Available File Backup Devices Select the appropriate check box es to make available one or more backup devices for use with Archive The check boxes are cleared by default Centera Select this check box if Centera is available I
554. tes the type of Security Report User Functional or Object For User and Object Security Reports the Server Name is included The Security Criteria lists the criteria entered for each Security Report type e For a User Security Report each User Group is listed e For a Functional Security Report each selected privilege is listed e For an Object Security Report each Object Type Object Name and User Group is listed Process Details User Security Reports are sorted by user group names Group names are indicated by a G The following details are included Privilege Lists each privilege class above an indented list of associated privileges Role The role name that includes the user or group State The type of permission Allow or Deny None indicates a permission is not defined Functional Security Reports are sorted by privilege The following details are included User Group The users and groups assigned permissions Group names are indicated by a G Role The role name that includes the user or group State The type of permission Allow or Deny None indicates a permission is not defined Object Security Reports are sorted by object type For each object type the report lists object names If an object is secured the report includes the ACD in parentheses associated with the ACL that secures the object the ACL owner and the permissions If an object is not secured the report will display Not Secured
555. th to DBMS Loaders 258 Load tab Product Options 241 243 additional loader parameters 243 DB Alias 242 delete when truncate fails 243 force at run time 243 Optim Directory 242 override loader defaults 242 prime new request 243 Load Drop Data Privacy Tables 107 Load Drop Sample Tables 104 Lock Tables 226 Logon for multiple DB Aliases 118 saved for multiple DB Aliases 119 Logon tab Personal Options 268 269 always ask for password 269 always fail connection 269 connection string 269 for Optim Directory 268 set passwords 269 specify User ID 268 test database connection 269 M Main Window 60 auto size 253 maximum components 253 Main Window and Menus 60 Maximum commit frequency 225 extract rows 222 fetch rows 222 253 history lists 253 menu entries 253 visible components 253 MBCS Roundtrip Processing 227 Menus 61 Messages errors 256 informational 255 limit lines to display 256 resetting 254 set font style 255 show or hide 256 warnings 256 Microsoft Debugging Utility 20 Multi byte support 18 N Notify tab Personal Options 288 Send Test eMail 168 291 O Object Name Highlighting 261 ODBC Interface Enable Disable 125 141 Installation 29 ODM 30 31 ODM Install 30 ODM license 31 Open Data Manager 30 Open Data Manager ODM 449 Archive File Collection 481 Archive File to XML Convertor 478 Attunity Studio 456 data source 460 data type conversion 477 installation 449 JDBC Thin Client 469
556. the Report Process The formatting of the Report Process Report is determined by the Report Type Appendix E Security Reports 445 The following is a sample Function Security Report OPTUSR RPT1 Report Process Report ToT x File Options Help Request Name OPTUSR RPT1 Client User ID optusr Time Started 2 19 2008 11 19 47 Time Finished 2 19 2008 11 19 47 Elapsed Time 00 00 00 Process Status no errors no warnings Process Summary Criteria Type Function Security Criteria Privilege Create New Actions Archive Request Create New Actions Compare Request Create New Actions Convert Request Process Details Privilege Create New Actions Archive Request User Group Role NAS adm OPTIM Administrator NA Guest Guests NA priasass01 Tech Writers na privbrau0 1 OPTIM Administrator OPTIM DOM tw Tech Writers NA Tech Writers G Tech Writers OPTIM DOMiadm1 OPTIM Administrator OPTIM DOMiTech Writers G Tech Writers Privilege Create New Actions Compare Request The Report Process Report displays the following information Name of the Report Request or Untitled if you did not save the request User ID of the user requesting the Report Process Date and time the Report Process started Date and time the Report Process completed The elapsed time A list of any warnings or errors that occur during processing 446 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Process Summary The Criteria Type indica
557. the company credentials you specified are incorrect an Invalid Credentials Specified dialog will prompt you to enter your credentials again as described in The Invalid Credentials Specified If there are cny citer esaerelated problems a Sig Optim Exit Failed dialog will prompt you to correct those errors as described in Failed Dialog Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 on page 359 Read Me Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes the Read Me file After editing and saving the files you are prompted to view the readme txt file containing installation notes and information 320 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Server Setup instal lSHvela Remove Temporary Files Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to remove temporary files During installation Optim creates several temporary log and error files and stores those files in a tmp softech directory Optim support personnel use those files to diagnose any problems encountered during installation If installation was successful you should remove those files when prompted to do so on the Remove Temporary Files dialog If you do not delete the temporary files and you do another install using a different user ID the old files will prevent the new files from being created Select Yes and click Next on the Remove Temporary Files dialog to delete the temporary log and err files stored in the tmp softech directory as indica
558. the machine hosting the Server to ensure that all needed locales are installed Installations that include one or more UNIX or Linux based Servers translate locales between environments using a file locale conf that is installed with Optim Depending upon the environment the locale conf file is located in IBM Optim RT BIN or PSTHOME etc You may review the list of locale translations in locale conf and if needed add translations for nonstandard locales See Character Formats on page 13 for more information Control Panel When the installation is complete select Optim from the Windows Control Panel to configure the Server You can provide settings unique to the server such as the path and executable file name for each database loader connection strings for all defined DB Aliases and protocols for access to the server 6 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Merge Current User If desired you can click Merge Current User to copy the Personal Options settings from the registry of the current user to the Server configuration Maintenance Tasks The Configuration Tasks menu offers a number of commands that allow you to maintain the Optim environment Some tasks are also used to configure the first and additional workstations Planning for Installation and Configuration Before you install Optim you must be prepared with information required by the installation and configuration process e Decide whethe
559. the speed of your Archive or Extract Processes active Automatically extract uncommitted rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes inactive Automatically extract only committed rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes Default defaultactive The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and selected by default Uncommitted rows are extracted unless this option is cleared defaultinactive The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and cleared by default Uncommitted rows are not extracted unless this option is selected uncommitedread inactive RTSETENV Shell Script This file is the script designed to be included in a user profile or login script to define the operating environment for the Server The RTSETENV script sets up the Server daemon or command line environment on login A sample is in the PSTHOME directory The UNIX operating environment requires certain environment variables to create default settings as applicable TINFORMIXSERVER INFORMIXSQLHOSTS PSTHOMEF directory PSTINFOF directory TNS ADMINFT directory ISYBASEF directory directory directory n directory directory directory server directory Environment Variables PSTHOME The
560. tim 7 3 but if you want to upgrade you will be directed to instructions on how to upgrade ODM manually Specify ODM License Type After you choose Install and Configure ODM Now the dialog prompts you to select the type of license you will use Optim requires an updated ODM license If you do not have one select Enable a 30 day ODM Trial License for immediate access To obtain a new license submit a Service Request to v Introduction Ifyou have a valid ODM license you may specify its location below V License Agreement or choose the 30 day trial license vV Customer Information Enable a 30 day Trial License vi TIPO O oncaaresca C Specify Open Data Manager ODM License File Install Location E SS Sa a Z Component Selection gt ODM Information Restore Defaull Chase Shortcut Location Summary Installation installation Complete E Automatic ODM Installation If you choose Install and Configure ODM Now or Configure ODM Now the Specify ODM License File dialog is displayed Enter the path to the ODM license file or click Browse to select a path cation on page 32 and continue the Optim installation After you provide the license file path click Next to display the Shortcut Location dialog see Shortcut Location on page 33 ODM is installed at the end of the Optim installation process and Command Prompt dialogs requiring no entries are displayed If you chose Enable a 30 day ODM Trial License you will not
561. timbuild t ete pstserv cfg W Update usersAest2 optimbuild t etc pstlocal ctg W Update userstest2 optimbuild rt etcAocale conf Installshield e The RTSETENV shell script is included in a user profile or login script to define the operating environment for the Server This script sets up the Server daemon or command line environment on login A UNIX environment requires certain environment variables to create default settings For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to RTSETENV Shell Script on page 346 e The RTSERVER shell script contains a series of useful commands that allow you to manipulate the Server process This script does not need modification For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to RTSERVER Shell Script on page 347 e The RI4S shell script is used to start or stop the Server from init 1 processing This script should be executed only as part of the system boot procedure Generally the script does not need modification unless the Server is installed in a directory other than the default directory opt 1IBM Optim or the Server will be run under a user account other than root For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to RT4S Shell Script on page 348 e The pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg is used to configure the system to run the Server daemon Before you run the Server daemon you must modify the file to reflect your site requirements
562. ting indicates an interval for WORM device file retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from the WORM device at any time n Number of years to retain the file wormdeviceyears 20 sybaseunchain Optim normally runs in chained mode However the connection must be in unchained mode to accommodate a Sybase ASE stored procedure that runs in unchained mode if the stored procedure will be triggered in a command line process to Insert Restore or Delete Sybase ASE data active Processes must run in unchained mode inactive Processes must run in normal chained mode Default defaultactive The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and selected by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in unchained mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is cleared defaultinactive The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and cleared by Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 345 default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in normal mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is selected sybaseunchain active uncommittedread Option to enable extracting of uncommitted rows from the database during an Archive or Extract Process You can extract uncommitted rows from specific tables in the Access Definition or all tables Selecting this option for tables with known performance problems may increase
563. tion Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Pro b m Configure Security for an Optim Directory Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Rename an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Configure Options Create Primary Keys Create Copies of DB2 2 05 Relationships Load Drop Sample Data Load Drop Data Privacy Data Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Purge Optim Directory Reaistry Entry Purge DB Alias For example to expand the number of databases you can create or update a DB Alias apply maintenance for DB Alias access or update the version of the DBMS Similarly you can create an additional Optim Directory apply maintenance for Optim Directory access or update the version of the DBMS for an Optim Directory You can also select options to purge a DB Alias or purge an Optim Directory registry entry Other tasks include configuring Product and Personal Options creating primary keys and creating copies of DB2 z OS relationships to be used in Optim You may also load or drop the sample data included with Optim this data provides a starting point for using many features in Optim If you have a Data Privacy License you may also load and drop the data privacy data ta
564. tion Initialize Security Optim he Configuration program can initialize the Security Features and assign a Security dminstrator Once initialized Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security dministrator Click lt Change gt to specify a different Security Administrator Select the nitialize option to Initialize the security Features Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action F lt Skin Fo hunasa hiz cken x Optim Directory Security State OPTIMOIR Mot Initialized Security Administrator For this Optim Directory DomainiUser Mame NAloptusrd Change Initialize the Security Feature For this Optim Directory Initialize Proceed Skip Cancel Ready Oracle Q0R 924K A Optim Directory displays the Directory name and Security State indicates that security is Not Initialized Security Administrator for this Optim Directory The Security Administrator is assigned to the Optim Directory when security is initialized Only one Security Administrator can be assigned to an Optim Directory The Security Administrator can configure Optim Security as well as control access to the default Access Control Domain ACD and Access Control List ACL for the Directory For more information By A EE ed Use Security Administrator for this Optim Directory to identify the Security Administrator by the two part Domain User Name By default the Security Administrator is the user signed on to the works
565. tion before you can use Optim The same is true if you reinstall Optim Anytime you replace a signed exit executable i e opmexit dll libopmexit so or libopmexit sl with another version of that exit you must sign the updated exit to use Optim This is true even if the executable was previously signed e g in another installation or copied from a backup of a signed exit Signing an Exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 Unlike in Windows UNIX does not include a Configuration program to sign an exit There are however three ways to sign the default exit in UNIX and two ways to sign a user supplied exit in UNIX Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 357 Default exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 There are three ways to sign the default exit in UNIX 1 The Optim Setup program which allows you to sign the default exit as part of the installation process as described earlier in this appendix If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must manually run a script file after installation is completed 2 The opmdsign script file located in the rt sbin directory You can run this script at any time following installation to switch to the Optim default exit The letter d in the script name indicates that it is used to sign the default exit 3 The pr0sign program User supplied exit in UNIX Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 There are two ways to sign a user supplied exit in UNIX
566. tion Guide OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR Table The OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR table contains detailed information for order shipping The OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR table has the following columns SHIP_ID DECIMAL SHIP_INSTR_ID INTEGER ORDER_SHIP_INSTR VARCHAR up to 254 characters SHIP_UPDATED TIMESTAMP cannot contain null has default value Primary Keys The SHIP_INSTR_ID column is the primary key column Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR table is a child of the OPTIM_SHIP_TO table through its Optim relationship on column SHIP_ID OPTIM_MALE_RATES Table The OPTIM_MALE_RATES table contains insurance rates based on age The OPTIM_MALE_RATES table has the following columns AGE SMALLINT RATE_PER_1000 DECIMAL rate in dollar amount Primary Keys The RATE_PER_1000 column is the primary key column Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_MALE_RATES table is a child of the OPTIM_SALES table through its Optim data driven relationship on column AGE OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES Table The OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES table contains insurance rates based on age The OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES table has the following columns AGE SMALLINT RATE_PER_1000 DECIMAL rate in dollar amount Primary Keys The RATE_PER_1000 column is the primary key column Appendix H Samples 509 Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES table is a child of the OPTIM_SALES table through its Optim data driven relationship on column AGE OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP Tab
567. tion phase consists of configuring the first workstation configuring each additional workstation and if licensed configuring the Server component e Configure the First Workstation allows you to confirm the Product License Key and create the components shared by all workstations For example only one Optim Directory and one Product Chapter 1 Getting Started 3 Configuration File are needed although you may have more than one of each Typically all users share one Product Configuration File which provides the Product Option settings for your site e Configure Additional Workstation allows you to configure each workstation to share components created when the first workstation was configured You may also specify Personal Option settings for each workstation that are recorded in the Windows registry e Configure the Server on one or more Windows Solaris HP UX or AIX machines Configure First Workstation Several steps are involved in configuring the first workstation Each step is briefly described in the following paragraphs Note Before you configure a workstation to use Optim the DBMS client software must be installed and you must define the information necessary to connect to the database You must configure the DBMS client software on each workstation to permit access to individual database instances Product License Key The 30 character Product License Key determines the Optim features your company is allowed to use This k
568. tion programs in source language which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms You may copy modify and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing using marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions IBM therefore cannot guarantee or imply reliability serviceability or function of these programs Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work must include a copyright notice as follows your company name year Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp Sample Programs Copyright IBM Corp _enter the year or years_ All rights reserved 528 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear Trademarks IBM the IBM logo AIX DB2 Informix Optim Tivoli z OS and ibm com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol or these symbols indicate U S registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the ti
569. tions Create New Definitions privileges are required to create or make copies of definitions for example an Access Definition The New command and the ability to save a copy of a definition in a respective definition editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege Local privileges refer to definitions that are created from another object editor For example if a role is denied the Access Definition Local privilege the role will be unable to create a local Access Definition from the Extract Request Editor This class includes the following privileges Access Definition Access Definition Local Column Map Column Map Local Column Map Proc edure Column Map Proc Local Optim Primary Key Optim Relationship Table Map Table Map Local Create Security Definitions Create Security Definitions privileges are required to create or make copies of security definitions for example an Access Control Domain The New command and the ability to save a copy of a security definition in a respective security definition editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Access Control Domain File Access Definition Create Utility Definitions Create Utility Definitions privileges are required to create or make copies of utility definitions for example a Storage Profile The New command and the ability to save a copy of a utility definition in a respective utility editor wi
570. tions for using default values 230 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Product Options Auditing Status Activate auditing to record rows that you edit and store images of unedited rows in an Optim Directory table You can browse these rows establish the period of time for which they are stored rows and limit the number of rows retained When rows of audit information expire they are automatically deleted When the maximum number of rows is exceeded the oldest rows are deleted to make space for new rows Active Select this option to enable the auditing feature at the site level Click Audit Tables to open a dialog on which you can select tables to be audited on a site basis Active User Select this option to activate auditing at the site level and allow users to establish auditing for the workstation Click Audit Tables to open a dialog on which you can select tables to be audited on a site basis This option enables the auditing feature in Personal Options see Auditing Active on page 273 Users can select additional tables to audit but cannot disable auditing for tables audited on a site basis Inactive Select this option to disable the auditing feature No users can audit Chapter 8 Product Options 231 User Supplies Defaults Choose whether to require user supplied values in columns that cannot accept default values This option applies to new rows that a user inserts while editing a d
571. tions of certain Optim application aware solutions If ODM is needed the Installation Guide for the Optim application aware solution directs you to select ODM Refer to Appendix F Open Data Manager on page 449 for ODM installation instructions To continue click Next Confirmation Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to confirm your destination location and the features selected for installation Setup displays the destination location the features selected for installation and the space required for your confirmation To change the destination or selection of features click Back to return to the previous dialog 312 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Server Setup install siielag To begin the installation click Next A progress indicator allows you to monitor the progress of the installation Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 313 Optim Server Setup Insta smield Edit Scripts and Configuration Files Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to edit scripts and configuration files You must modify shell scripts and configuration files before you can start the application the first time Setup installs the rtedit command file to launch your default editor so that you can make these modifications 314 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Server Setup instal lSrvela When you click N
572. to 30 characters NATIONAL_ID VARCHAR up to 30 characters CREDITCARD_NUMBER VARCHAR 19 characters CREDITCARD_TYPE VARCHAR up to 30 characters Appendix H Samples 505 CREDITCARD_EXP CHAR 4 characters CREDITCARD_CVV VARCHAR up to 4 characters DRIVER_LICENSE VARCHAR up to 30 characters CUSTOMER_INFO XMLTYPE Primary Keys The CUST_ID column is the primary key column Relationships to Other Tables The OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table is a parent of e The OPTIM_ORDERS table through a foreign key on column CUST_ID e The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table through an Optim relationship on column CUST_ID The OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table is a child of e The OPTIM_SALES table through its foreign key on column SALESMAN_ID OPTIM_ORDERS Table The OPTIM_ORDERS table contains information for orders including order number customer ID and salesman The OPTIM_ORDERS table has the following columns ORDER_ID DECIMAL order ID number cannot contain null CUST_ID CHAR customer ID number up to 5 characters cannot contain null ORDER_DATE TIMESTAMP date of order cannot contain null has default value ORDER_TIME TIMESTAMP time of day cannot contain null has default value FREIGHT_CHARGES DECIMAL dollar amount ORDER_SALESMAN CHAR up to 6 characters ORDER_POSTED_DATE TIMESTAMP cannot contain null has default value ORDER_SHIP_DATE CHAR date when order is shipped up to 8 characters cannot contain null has default value
573. to move it to a DB2 database the administrator could export a copy of the Optim objects in the Oracle database to an external file The administrator would then create the second Optim Directory in the DB2 database and import the Optim objects before dropping or disabling the original Optim Directory Creating an additional Optim Directory is similar to creating an Optim Directory when configuring the first workstation First you create the Optim Directory Then you create DB Aliases and configure the databases to be used with Optim when linked to the Optim Directory Next you create or specify the Product Configuration File and modify Personal and Product Options as needed You can also initialize Optim Security for the Optim Directory For complete information on creating an Optim Directory refer to Create Optim Directory on page 72 Access Existing Optim Directory A workstation uses a Windows registry entry to access the Optim Directory This registry entry is typically created when the workstation is configured however if a workstation must access more than one Optim Directory you must create entries for each Optim Directory after the first The Access Existing Optim Directory task replicates the steps described in Create Registry Entry on page 134 You must specify the Optim Directory and the DBMS Type and Version for the database where the Optim Directory is stored In addition you must provide information to c
574. to the New Object Name column for security definitions without a New Object Name Empty Empties names from the New Object Name column for all security definitions Run Import To import security definitions choose the File gt Run menu option Note The Run command will not be available until you select at least one available security definition 434 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide During Security Definition Import processing the Import Progress pane displays the number of security definitions of each type that are imported and the number of errors encountered The status bar displays information about the current security definition that is processed When Security Definition Import processing is finished the status bar displays the message Ready Import Errors If the Import Security Definitions Utility encounters errors processing continues according to the specification for the Continue import if error s option Errors are displayed on the message bar and represented visually by a red X beside each security definition in error Errors are written to the Security Import Process Log after Import Processing is finished You can review and print the Security Import Process Log for diagnostic information about errors If some objects fail to be imported due to errors check the specifications and try Export and Import again Import Process Log When Security Definition Import Processing finishes se
575. to the settings in the FAD which can be changed as the security requirements for your site change When settings in the FAD are changed the changes apply to the previously archived data as well as to data archived in the future A File Access Definition allows you to control access to data in specified tables and columns or use a default setting to control access to tables and columns for which access is not granted explicitly You can define access permissions by creating an access list for a table column or the default All users are allowed unlimited access to archived data to which an access list does not apply File Access Definition specifications for tables and columns that do not exist in an associated Archive File do not affect the security of the file Only roles in the Access Control Domain ACD used as the basis for the File Access Definition can be assigned explicit permissions Any user accounts for which explicit permissions do not apply are allowed or denied access according to a default setting for the File Access Definition For example you can grant access to roles in the ACD explicitly and use the default setting to deny access to all other users For a detailed File Access Definition example see File Access Definition Example on page 421 412 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Permissions Needed to Create an FAD To create an FAD a user account must be a member of a role allowed the Creat
576. tocols and endpoints available to the Server by clicking the down arrow in Protocol and selecting Supported Protocols All from the list Endpoints are created for every available protocol When configured this way workstations must query an RPC Locator for the endpoints when connecting to the Server This query introduces a small delay when the server is first selected and may compromise security Note When Supported Protocols All is selected Endpoint displays an asterisk and Network Address displays the computer name Grid Details Protocol Click the down arrow to select from a list of available protocols Endpoint Specify the endpoint or address that corresponds to the specified protocol The format and content depend on the specified protocol Network Address Displays the network address of the Server The format and content depend on the specified protocol Authentication In selecting a level of security the needs of your site must be weighed against potential performance compromises 158 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide e The higher the protection level the greater the overhead required e The more often verification is requested the more time required to complete a process Select the appropriate level of authentication None No authentication is required During Connect first call only Authenticate when the user connects to the Server on the first call This security level ensures o
577. ts Archive File Security Archive File Security allows you to control access to data in Archive Files For example you might use Archive File Security to prevent any access to data in a specific table or column for most users while granting access to members of selected roles for the same data Each secured Archive File is associated with a File Access Definition FAD which is a security definition that lists tables and columns for which access privileges are defined and for each listed role grants or denies privileges to access the archived data Establishing Archive File Security requires an ACD the Default ACD or one you create for the purpose used as the basis for roles in the FAD In addition you must use the Configuration program to enable Archive File Security 384 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Access Control Domains The Access Control Domain is a security definition that serves as the foundation for all levels of Optim Security Each Optim Directory for which Optim Security is initialized contains an ACD named Default that cannot be deleted Depending upon the needs of your facility you may create additional ACDs or use only the Default ACD Each ACD includes a list of roles Each role represents a logical grouping of user and group accounts in your network Typically you might assign names of roles to convey the capabilities of the accounts represented by the role Examples of role names migh
578. ts who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and email addresses to generate transformed data that is both valid and unique Initialize and Enable Optim Security Optim Security allows you to secure objects in an Optim Directory to control access to data in Archive Files and to limit the ability of users to create objects or perform functions by assigning access permissions To use Optim Security you must first initialize and enable security for the Optim Directory and assign a Security Administrator The Security Administrator can enable or disable security and establish default security settings for the Optim Directory Create Product Configuration File Most installations create and use one Product Configuration File that establishes Product Options for your site As part of this step you can modify the Product Options maintained in the file and edit Personal Options for the workstation You can edit Product and Personal Options from within Optim although it is a good idea to establish the directories to store work and temporary files during the configuration process These directories are personal in nature and most users specify a directory on their workstation Export Registry Data When you configure the first workstation you create the Optim Directory and the Configuration program crea
579. ts you to perform the following steps 1 Select the Optim Directory containing the DB Alias 2 Select the DB Alias and select the new DBMS version Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 201 3 Drop the old packages plans or procedures and create new ones for the Optim Directory When this process completes the database signature is updated automatically Update DBMS for a Single DB Alias You can update the DBMS version for a single DB alias however if you are using Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix and you have multiple databases on one server the Configuration program automatically directs you to the appropriate dialogs The initial steps are the same whether you are updating the DBMS version for one DB Alias or multiple DB Aliases Specify Optim Directory The first step in updating the DBMS version for a DB Alias is to specify the name of the Optim Directory associated with that DB Alias Click the down arrow to select an Optim Directory from a list and click Proceed to connect to the database Connect to Database The Configuration program must_connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables On the Connect to Database dialog see Connect to Database on page 183 you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that allows the workstation to connect to the database If the connection is successful you can create or select a DB Alias Create Select DB Alias The next step
580. tserv cfg or pstlocal cfg the configuration file are set The parameters and settings that require root authority are e filelogon client e filelogon server userid password e tivoliavail true userid password e webserver true userid password for Optim AMD users only Before running a process for which one or more of these settings apply pr0svce validates the incoming user account and password The process is then run under the credentials supplied in the configuration file If prOsvce must run a process under root authority it is advisable to include the filelogon server userid password rather than filelogon client or filelogon local and the limitaccess parameters in the configuration file to protect your system from processing that because it uses root credentials has access to all files on the system Securing the Configuration Files This section describes the program pr0pass used to encrypt passwords for parameters in the configuration files If the administrator has set up file permissions as described in Securing the Products on page 351 only the owner members of the group that includes the owner and the root user can view read the configuration files and only the owner or the root user can update write the configuration files The user account used to start prOsvce must have read access to the pstserv cfg file while the Command Line Utility prOcmnd must have read access to the pstlocal cfg fil
581. ttunity Connect may start worker threads to to improve performance This may be inadvisable under highly threaded environments such as IIS and SOL Server O Use threading Use the following table to add custom environment settings to the DSN Z Gemave 4 Setting Name x Setting Value v 7 Use the default value for the Log file name and click Next Appendix F Open Data Manager 467 BR attunity Connect ODBC Setup Wizard ODBC DSN configuration is complete Press Finish to save changes and exit Display configuration as opec file DSN x ODBC Driver C Program Files Attunity S erverbin OdN ayv32 dll OneT dpMode 1 Binding NA Passthru 0 DefT dpName NAVDEMO queryProcessor noT hreads true debug logFile ODBC_MYDSN_ p log Copy to clipboard 8 Review the changes and click Finish Client Installation and Configuration ODM is shipped with ODBC and JDBC thin client packages to provide desktop and application connectivity to ODM sources The full thick installation of Attunity Server includes the installation of the ODBC client regardless of platform In a Windows environment full installation requires NET 2 0 framework Note An Attunity license is not required to install the ODBC or JDBC thin client ODBC Thin Client The ODBC thin client is required on each machine that uses ODBC to connect to ODM To install the ODBC thin client in Windows run the AIS 53014 ODBC_Thin_Client
582. ty dialog shown below To create audit records for processes for an Optim Directory display the Directory name from the drop down list and select the check box for Auditing Active Note To activate auditing you must select the check box for Enable Process Utility Audit on the Product Options General tab and select Auditing Active for the Optim Directory named on the Audit Facility dialog To disable auditing do not select this check box When the Enable Process Utility Audit check box is unselected all auditing is disabled regardless of any auditing specification at the Optim directory level Chapter 8 Product Options 223 Optim Directory vi T Auditing Active Default Retention Days 2555 Record mk Action Audit Record Limit 100000 4 Continue Auditing aa Purge Records OK Cancel Apply Help Ready A The Audit Facility dialog has the following fields Optim Directory Name of the Optim Directory for which you are enabling or disabling auditing Enable auditing by selecting the check box Auditing Active Default Retention Days Number of days for audit records to be retained Specify a value in the range 1 999 999 999 999 The default value is 2 555 days 7 years Audit Record Limit Number of audit records maintained at any time Select a value in the range 100 999 999 999 999 The default value is 100 000 Record Limit Action Action to be performed when the Audit Record Limit is exceeded Sele
583. uct or requiring reentry of all affected passwords Protecting the Configuration Files This section describes how to protect the configuration files It is recommended that you allow only the owner or the root user to update the configuration files Maintenance of the configuration file does not require knowledge of the actual passwords if group members are allowed to update the password file since the character can be specified for the passwords Note Group members who can modify the configuration file would be able to obtain additional privileges to the Optim Directory or DB Alias or execute client processes under any identifier Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 355 The Optim Exit in UNIX Optim includes a mechanism that allows you to use a custom exit to apply an additional layer of security to Optim beyond the extensive security already included in the product to meet any security requirements mandated by your company or government regulations This additional security layer is accomplished through a client supplied exit that identifies who can use Optim and which executables each user can run Client supplied exits are called user supplied exits in Optim to differentiate them from the default exit supplied with Optim The Optim default exit allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group via the security functionality included in Optim T
584. uding characters less than x 20 except for carriage return linefeed and tab are replaced by a A diagnostic is written when this occurs e CLOBs character large objects are written as single long lines e Binary data is encoded as base64 data and written as single long lines e Null columns are omitted in attribute mode and indicated by xsi nil true in element mode Note that because of a limitation in the Attunity interface null large objects are given zero length they are not marked explicitly as null e Characters in the first column of the following table are translated to the entity reference in the second column 480 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Character Entity Reference amp quot amp amp amp l amp apos lt amp lt gt amp gt Archive File Collections An Archive File Collection is a list of Archive Files that can be logically unioned together as a single data source for ODM access For example ODM uses an Archive File Collection to provide access to data in multiple Archive Files even if all files do not include a specific table or column or if the attributes of data in a column vary from file to file ODM processes Archive Files in the order they are listed in the Archive File Collection Editor For information about creating Archive File Collections refer to the Archive User Manual Unioned Tables Tables with matching creator IDs
585. udocolumn 482 PST_ARCHIVE_FILES Table 482 Recovery From A Failed Upgrade 483 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 485 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories 486 Step 1 Create a New Optim Directory 486 Step 2 Export Data from Old Optim Directory 490 Step 3 Import Data into New Optim Directory 495 Conversion Process for Directory Tables on SQL Server 500 Converting Version 6 0 J 6 1 Directory Tables ir in SQL Server 500 Dropping Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables 501 Appendix H Samples 503 Sample Database Tables and Structure 503 OPTIM_SALES Table 504 OPTIM_CUSTOMERS Table 505 OPTIM_ORDERS Table 506 OPTIM_DETAILS Table 507 OPTIM_ITEMS Table 507 OPTIM_SHIP_TO Table 508 OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR Table 509 OPTIM_MALE RATES Table 509 OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES Table 509 OPTIM_STATE LOOKUP Table 510 Sample Column Map Exits 510 Sample Column Map Procedures z oll Create a Column Map Procedure from file provided be ee e amp oe SQ Sample Standard Procedtiie a ee amp SS E o T Sample Table Information Procedure 512 Sample Extract Files 513 Sample JGL File a 2 5e 2 we al ee es oe SEB Appendix
586. ue is 100 000 rows When a table is browsed that contains rows in excess of the Maximum Exclude Rows value a message displays to remind you of the specified limit Note If you never expect to use the Exclude Rows or Only Show Rows in Error features set this limit very low to optimize system performance Changed Data Display Attributes Select options to identify changed data when browsing a Compare File Italicize Changed Columns Select to italicize data that differs between Source 1 and Source 2 Bold Changed Columns Select to display the data that differs between Source 1 and Source 2 in bold type Color for Changed Columns Click the down arrow to select a color to identify data that differs between Source 1 and Source 2 Initially Display These Rows Select rows to display by default when browsing a Compare File All Different Duplicate Equal or Only unmatched rows Chapter 9 Personal Options 277 Archive Tab Use the options on the Archive tab to set preferences for an Archive Process lt Personal Options Archive Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want to store Archive Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Data Directory specified on the General tab is used by default Archive Index Directory Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want to store Archive Index Files To se
587. uidelines 375 Commit Frequency 225 Conceptual Overview 1 Configuration browse SQL 69 command buttons 68 completion files 131 dialog features 67 display SQL 68 main window 60 menu commands 61 planning for 7 processing log 65 68 Tasks menu 60 71 Configuration Assistant 66 additional workstations 132 description of 66 first workstation 66 Configuration File Product Options 229 current Configuration File name 229 Configuration File Product Options continued path to new Configuration File 229 switch to new file when created 229 Configuration Overview 47 Configuration phase 3 Configuration Window and Menus 59 Configure Additional Workstations Configuration Assistant 132 configure options 141 create registry entry 134 DBMS client software 5 description of 4 enable disable ODBC interface 141 Optim Server 140 guidelines 132 import registry entries 132 process steps 5 Product Configuration File 141 task summary 141 Configure Application Servers description of 6 process steps 6 Configure First Workstation completion files 131 Configuration Assistant 66 configure options 124 create DB Alias 87 Multiple DB Aliases 120 Optim Directory 72 Optim Directory tables 77 create drop packages for DB Alias 92 for Optim Directory 78 DBMS for DB Alias 89 for Optim Directory 73 description of 3 export registry data 129 load drop sample tables 211 Optim Security 124 process steps 4 product license key 72 set personal options 129
588. uired by the Report Process including the type of report i e Security the report title output options report file name and printer specifications as applicable Each time you open the editor the General tab is shown first Appendix E Security Reports 439 Security Criteria Parameters needed to create a report on permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges The Security Criteria tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to Security Archive Criteria Parameters needed to select entries in the Archive Directory for the report The Archive Criteria tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to Archive Directory For more information see the Archive User Manual Source File Parameters needed to select an Archive or Compare File for the report The Source File tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to File For more information see the Archive User Manual or Compare User Manual Archive Details Layout and row display options for the report The Archive Details tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to File and the Source File is an Archive File For more information see the Archive User Manual Compare Details Layout and row display options for the report The Compare Details tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to File and the Source File is a Compare File For more information see the Compare User Manual Formatti
589. ull as default 273 prompt for variables 273 retain selection criteria 273 side label display 273 single view 273 undo levels 274 user supplies defaults 273 warn on cascade 273 Edit tab Product Options 231 232 Audit Tables dialog 232 auditing status 231 force Browse Only 232 null as default 232 user supplies defaults 232 Email Notification 288 Errors tab Personal Options 255 256 display lines 256 error messages font 256 532 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Errors tab Personal Options continued hide empty message bar 256 informational messages font 255 warning messages font 256 Exit Routines destination format exit input to Age Function 511 samples 510 source format exit input to Age Function 511 Export Registry Data 129 Extract Files samples 513 Extract Uncommitted Data 226 F File Access Definition Editor 414 File Access Definitions using secured files 413 Functional Privileges 397 G General tab Personal Options 249 Caps mode 250 data directory 250 days to keep trace files 250 Local Optim Server ODBC 250 Product Configuration File 250 SQL LIKE character 249 temporary work directory 250 unchained mode 288 warn on cascade 287 z OS code page 250 General tab Product Options 221 223 abort Scheduler or command line 223 default calendar 222 maximum extract rows 222 maximum fetch rows 222 warn on cascade delete update 223 Getting Started 1 Image Locator Diagnostic Tool 19 I
590. ult Audit OptimDirNamel1 Enables or disables the Optim Audit Facility for the directory specified as OptimDirName1 enabled Enable auditing for this directory disabled Disable auditing for this directory This is the default retention days Number of days for audit records to be retained n Value in the range 1 to 999 999 999 999 The default value is 2 555 days 7 years Audit RecordLimit Sets the maximum for number of audit records maintained at any time n Value in the range 100 to 999 999 999 999 The default value is 100 000 lt FailureAction gt Action to be performed when the Audit RecordLimit is exceeded continue Optim will continue to generate audit records This is the default stop Optim will not generate audit records for processes 334 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide adminemailnotify Option to email logged messages reported to the Server syslog Provide the email address and severity level You can also provide options for resending messages emailaddress The email address to receive the message If an address contains a space the entire string for this attribute must be in quotes success Send email notification for all processing messages including success For example startup and termination information Send email notification for information or more severe messages warning Send email notification for warning or more severe messages error Send email notifi
591. unattended message or requires user input when SMTP is used to send a message Also select the CDO option if the server uses a Microsoft Outlook client version 2000 or later to send messages through a Microsoft Exchange server Email Transport EAE IV Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport Uncheck to use Simple Mail Transport Protocol Set from one of these known Email Servers custom Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Port if not standard EXCHANGESERVER Sender s mailbox From address MyAccount MyExchangeServer com Email account logon Logon domain Email account password MyUserID MYDOMAIN eocccccece Send Test Email Cancel Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server 167 Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport If you use the SMTP email transport keep this check box cleared default and select OK A popup will ask you if you want to connect without entering a password If you use the CDO email transport select this check box to enable the dialog and continue entering information Set from one of these known Email Servers Click to select an account from the list and populate the remainder of the Email Transport dialog with information for the selected account Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Type an exchange server name or internet address Port if not standard Type a port name or leave blank default port Sender s mailbox From add
592. unctional or Object Security privileges assigned to user and group accounts in your network You can also create a report on the contents of an Archive or Compare File or list Archive Directory entries that meet criteria you supply for more information about these reports see the Archive User Manual or Compare User Manual Security Reports Security permissions allow or deny roles which consist of user and group accounts privileges such as the ability to open a dialog run a process or modify a specific object Security Reports allow you to see which users and groups have permissions for these privileges and the roles to which the permissions apply For more information about security privileges see Appendix D Optim Security on page 383 Depending on your specifications you can create a report that will e List the Functional Security permissions assigned to specified users and groups e List all Functional Security permissions for selected privileges e List the Object Security permissions for specified users and groups that apply to specified objects and the ACL that secures each object Report Process The Report Process runs on the workstation not on the Optim Server Specifications for a Report Process are stored as a Report Request Use the Report Request to provide the report criteria and processing options The Report Process Report dialog displays the report Run or Schedule You can process a Report Request imm
593. uration on page 327 Credentials to Run the Server Credentials to run the Server are determined in Windows by the Startup tab of the Optim Server Settings applet If not using the Local System account you provide the credentials in User ID Password and Domain In UNIX or Linux the credentials are determined by the User ID under which the Server prOsvce daemon is executed After startup the User ID for the Server may require other privileges depending on whether you are using explicit credentials or client credentials For Windows credentials on the Startup tab of the Optim Server Settings applet are added to the Service Control Manager database At a minimum the user account must have the authority to log on to the local computer as a service You can use the Local Security Policy to grant this authority or you can use the built in Local System Account which has full authority on the local computer Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 369 For UNIX or Linux the user account under which the Server daemon is started dictates the privileges for the daemon If the daemon is started as part of INIT processing you must log on with the proper User ID before starting the daemon or use the SU substitute user command Credentials to Run Optim Processes Every Optim process initiated by a client whether online from a Request Editor or from the Command Line Interface or the ODBC Interface is run in its own process under the Serve
594. uration Guide Product Options a a Ae DOX260003 TCPAP ncacn_ip_tc my Server Name Enter the name of each Server that is the name given each Server when it was configured with the corresponding connection information as follows Supported Protocols all Optim generates endpoints for all possible protocols client machines connect via RPC Locator Service where possible NetBIOS over TCP ncacn_nb_tcp Endpoint Integer from 1 through 254 Example 100 Network Address Windows computer name NetBIOS over IPX ncacn_nb_ipx Endpoint Integer from 1 through 254 Example 100 Network Address Windows computer name Chapter 8 Product Options 237 NetBEUI over NetBIOS ncacn_nb_nb Endpoint Integer from 1 through 254 Example 100 Network Address Windows computer name TCP IP ncacn_ip_tcp Endpoint Internet Port Number Example 1024 Network Address Four octet internet address or host name Named Pipe ncacn_np Endpoint Windows named pipe starting with pipe Example pipe pipename Network Address Windows server name SPX ncacn_spx Endpoint Integer from 1 through 65535 Example 5000 Network Address IPX internet address or Windows server name DECnet ncacn_dnet_nsp Endpoint DECnet phase IV object number preceded by character or object name Example mailserver 17 Network Address Area and node syntax Apple Talk DSP ncacn_at_dsp Endpoint A character string up to 22 by
595. uration Guide You can use the Server to access Optim Directories DB Aliases and network shares that individual clients cannot access and simply restrict the users that can log on to the Server machine You must require that the credentials in the Optim Server Settings applet Windows or pstserv cfg UNIX or Linux be used instead of credentials from the initiating clients as follows Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the File Input Output option clear the Only files local to this Server may be accessed check box and provide explicit credentials in User ID Password and Domain UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the filelogon parameter to server and provide an explicit User ID and password Note The Server credentials must have specific rights as specified in Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials Run Under Client Credentials You can run processes under the credentials from the workstation used to initiate the process The process is run with the same rights as if it were run on the initiating machine as a LOCAL request Require the use of initiating credentials on the Server as follows Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Client for the File Input Output option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the filelogon parameter to client Also on each initiating machine you must provide the credentials for the Server
596. urce Definition Once the ODM data source shortcut has been created on the secondary ODM Server you can define the ODBC data source To define an ODBC data source on the secondary ODM Server 1 From the Administrative Tools in the Windows Control Panel select Data Sources ODBC to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog 2 From the User or System tabs depending on the data source you want to create click Add to open the Create New Data Source dialog Create New Data Source Attunity Connect Driver Driver da Microsoft para arquivos texto txt csv Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excel xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro IBM DB2 ODBC DRIVER INFORMIX 3 31 32 BIT Migivar rdh 3 Select the Attunity Connect Driver and click Finish to open the Attunity Connect ODBC Setup Wizard Appendix F Open Data Manager 463 FR Attunity Connect ODBC Setup Wizard 5 xj This wizard will help you create an ODBC data source that connects to local or remote Attunity Connect data sources What name do you want to use to refer to the data source Name T How do you want to describe this data source Description Please enter the location of the Attunity Connect server you want to connect to e g dbsrv acme com 2551 or leave blank to access the local Attunity Connect Server
597. ures Continue processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Insert Load Convert Requests Select an option for handling round trip conversion issues during Insert Load or Convert processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Ignore all round trip Failures Continue processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Select the Ignore all round trip Failures option if the database does not contain data with characters that could cause round trip errors or if columns used to manipulate data in a Column Map e g a function is used and columns for which selection criteria are defined do not contain characters that could cause round trip errors Cascade Delete Rule Warn On Cascade Delete Update Display a warning if a cascading delete or update may occur to a table that is not explicitly included in an Access Definition or a process Runtime Display a cascade delete update warning only at run time of a process Saving Access Definition Display a cascade delete update warning only when saving the Access Definition Always Display a cascade delete update warning at run time of a process and when saving the Access Definition Never Do not display a cascade delete update warning This is the default setting
598. ures the Optim hen you select this option the existing Optim Procedures will be dropped From their respective the Procedure qualifier s will be changed accordingly To convert existing DB Click proceed to open the Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog and enter the database information Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 115 Create Multiple DB Aliases Optim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables for each database that you ant to access The Optim Configuration program can create new Procedures or it can use Procedures reated For another Optim Directory for that database Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use the existing Procedures z EER S 6 Ea bia al master MASTER Creates nmm O O O O O O 4 E a Display SQL Proceed Una The Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog includes the following tabs Databases A list of all databases that reside on the server Enter explicit information for each database for which you want to create a DB Alias Logon Defaults Enter default User ID and Password required to create or refresh stored procedures for each DB Alias In some cases this logon may have greater privileges than the Saved Logon Defaults Saved Logon Defaults Enter the User ID and Password required to access the database This information is saved to the Windows registry for the workstation being configured Stored Procedure Defaults Enter the default Pro
599. urpose of the Optim Directory Move an item from one list to the other by dragging the name Also to rearrange listed items drag the line number to the new position After you make your selections click OK to export the registry data Complete When you finish the configuration process opens the Complete dialog This dialog describes the files that may be created during the process SOL TXT Contains the DDL statements generated to carry out various functions BIND TXT Contains the DB2 Bind Report KEYS TXT Contains a list of the Optim Keys created PROCNFG LOG Contains the Configuration Processing Log These files are located in the Temporary Work Directory specified using the General tab of the Personal Options dialog You can browse or print these files using a text editor such as Notepad On the Complete dialog click Close to return to the Configuration main window where you can quit the program or prepare to configure the next workstation Configure the First Workstation Summary The tasks for configuring the first workstation are complete e Create an Optim Directory and corresponding Windows registry entries e Create a DB Alias for each database within the Optim Directory e Create Optim Primary Keys for database tables that did not have DBMS primary keys but did have a unique index e Load sample database tables e Create and load the data privacy data tables if you have an Optim Data Privacy License e In
600. used to establish Optim Security Appendix E Security Reports on page 437 Create a report on the permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges assigned to user and group accounts in your network Appendix F Open Data Manager on page 449 Provides access to data in Optim Archive Files for programs that use the ODBC and JDBC APIs Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects on page 485 Contains information on converting PST Directory objects created in earlier versions of Optim into a format suitable for use in version 6 0 or later Appendix H Samples on page 503 Contains information on the sample database tables Column Map Exit Routines Column Map Procedures Extract Files and ODBC applications included on the installation DVD gt ac gej a x Data Privacy Data Tables on page 515 Contains information on the data privacy data tables included on the installation DVD Appendix J Uninstalling on page 519 Contains information on using the uninstall procedure for Optim viii IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 1 Getting Started This guide describes the programs used to install and configure the Optim solution The Setup program guides you through the installation process and the Configuration program prepares your databases and workstations to use Optim Conceptual Overview In the simplest configuration Optim o
601. user right click the user name and select Display Groups for User from the shortcut menu To display all group accounts in the domain again click Refresh Select a single user or group account by clicking the name or select multiple user or group accounts by holding the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking the names To select all accounts in a list click Select All To deselect all accounts in a list click Deselect All Click Add to add the selected accounts to the role and display the Role Specifications dialog again Privileges Tabs Both the Functional Privileges tab and the Object Association Privileges tab are divided into two grids one for privilege classes and the second for privileges that are included in the selected privilege class If Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges for the Default ACD or Allow All Object Association Privileges for this Role is selected the role is granted all privileges in all privilege classes To grant or deny selected privileges to a role you must clear this option Assigning Privileges By selecting Allow All or Deny All for a privilege class you select corresponding check boxes for the associated privileges For example you can allow accounts in a role to secure action requests by selecting Allow All for the Associate Action Editors Privilege Class on the Object Association Privileges tab Accounts in the role can then secure an action request with an ACL that uses the ACD Note
602. ve Index Browse File is created automatically whenever you join tables while browsing an Archive File The Archive Index Browse File stores primary key and foreign key information to expedite the retrieval of data and has an abf extension by default Archive Index Browse Files are dynamically updated so it is advisable to select a directory accessible to any user that may browse an Archive File Retention Tab A retention policy allows you to automatically delete Archive Files that reside on the Server When Archive Retention is activated the Server scans Optim Directories for Archive Files with a retention policy The Retention tab allows you to activate Archive retention select the Optim Directories to scan the time of day to scan and configure options for deleting Archive Files from File Backup Devices e g EMC Centera and IBM Tivoli For more information about specifying a retention policy see the Archive User Manual 162 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide E Optim Server Settings Iof x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention status eale IV Activate Archive Retention M Allow delete From File Backup Devices Time of day to scan Centera 00 01 Tivoli Optim Directories to scan Tivoli Options Mode Wame Password IV All Optim Directories Defaults Undo Configuration Cancel Apply Help R
603. velopment Kit 5 0 Update 6 Size 283 00MB amp J2SE Runtime Environment 5 0 Update 6 Size 152 00MB fo Java 2 Runtime Environment SE v1 4 2_03 Size 136 00MB Set Program Access and S Java TM 6 Update 3 Size 111 00MB Defaults ip LiveUpdate 1 6 Symantec Corporation Click Change Remove to run the Configuration program The Uninstall Optim Drop Optim Created DB Objects dialog is displayed Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2010 519 lt gt Uninstall Optim Drop Optim Created DB Objects Optim Configuration can drop the Optim Directory Tables Sample Tables and other database objects e g Packages Procedures or Plans that were created for use by Optim Select the appropriate option button then select lt Proceed gt to proceed Select lt Cancel gt to abort the entire uninstall process Select one of the three options e Prompt before dropping each set of Optim created database objects Drop all Optim created database objects without prompting e Do not drop any Optim created database objects Prompt before Dropping Each Set of Optim Database Objects When you select this option and click Proceed you are prompted to confirm the deletion of each object After all objects have been dropped you are asked to confirm deletion of the Optim Archive ODBC Interface driver Refer to Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables on page 211 for the sequence in which you are asked to confirm the deletion of Optim created database o
604. vilege is denied for a role then the privilege is unavailable to all members of the role even the members associated with another role in which the privilege is allowed e If neither the Allow nor Deny check box in a Privilege tab is selected the privilege is denied but members of the role may be allowed the privilege as members of another role that is allowed the privilege Functional Privileges Tab Use the Functional Privileges tab on the Role Specifications dialog to assign Functional Privileges to roles in the Default ACD You can allow or deny access to Functional Privileges for any role in the Default Access Control Domain Configure Functional Security_using the Functional Privileges tab on the Role Specifications dialog For additional information see Assigning Privile When a role is denied a Functional Privilege any functions associated with the privilege are unavailable to the user and group accounts in the role For example if the privilege to invoke the Access Definition Editor privilege from the Invoke Definition Editors privilege class is denied to a role the Access Definition option in the Definitions menu on the main window is unavailable to users in that role and also the Edit Access Definition button and menu option are unavailable from any request editor for example the Extract Request Editor The Default ACD governs Functional Privileges Subordinate ACDs can determine Object Association Privileges onl
605. workstations to use the Archive ODBC nterface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry For he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Click Proceed to disable the Archive ODBC feature or click Skip to advance to the next step without disabling the Archive ODBC feature If the site is not licensed for Archive this dialog is not displayed Drop the Optim Directory If you do not drop another DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Drop the Optim Directory dialog Select the check box to drop the Optim Directory Connect to Database Optim must connect to the database to drop the Optim Directory tables and packages plans or procedures Use the Connect to Database dialog see Connect to Database on page 183 to specify the connection information Drop Optim Directory Tables Before you drop an Optim Directory and Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the table identifier and prompts you to review the generated DDL using the Drop Optim Directory Tables dialog Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 215 E Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Drop the Optim Directory o drop the Optim Directory OPTIMDIR select the Drop Optim Directory OPTIMDIR heckbox Caution Dropping the Optim Directory will drop all DB Aliases and Optim
606. x designates whether to start the native application associated with an LOB or to process as a VarChar or VarBinary data type Maximum Non Native LOB Length Specify the maximum length of data to retrieve from a database for an LOB processed as a VarChar or VarBinary data type when using the Table Editor in Edit Select a value from 1 KB through 32 KB Note The setting of the Native LOB Mode check box on the Columns tab of the Table Specifications dialog available through the Access Definition Editor determines whether an LOB is processed as Native or Non Native An LOB truncates when the size of the LOB exceeds the Maximum Non Native LOB Length setting and appears in the Table Editor as a protected cell with a cross hatched pattern Reset Messages Click Reset Messages to reset system messages Message dialogs provide information or warnings You can also choose not to display the message again Reset Messages resets the option to display these message dialogs when appropriate 254 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Errors Tab Use the options on the Errors tab to set preferences for the display of error messages lt gt Personal Options The default fonts for message text and data fields are shown in each of the font message boxes To open the Windows Font dialog to select font attributes click the command buttons for text or fields To modify the font for text messages click Text To modify the font
607. xample of signing a user supplied exit As in Example 1 shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then specify the directories explicitly as indicated on the first line of the following example Console users roberts rtinstalled rt sbin opmusign users roberts rtinstalled rt prOsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld 8 opmusign Signing Example 3 This section includes another example of signing a user supplied exit Do steps 1 and 2 in Example 1 that is shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Then run the opmusign script in the rt sbin subdirectory but specify all of the parameters explicitly enclosing the company name in double quotation marks as shown below Console shin opmusign pwd D00000 Sample Company Name 000000 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 367 368 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix B Server Credentials This section provides information about credentials used with the Optim Server Server feature of Optim The Server can be installed and run on a machine using supported versions of Windows Solaris HP UX AIX or Linux therefore this appendix addresses credentials for all supported platforms Credentials uniquely identify a user and include e User ID e Password e Domain for Windows only
608. xt file is called C Maint_dba txt PSTDirName ORA_LOCAL PSTDirUserID roberts PSTDirPassword softech DBAAction useexisting DBAName DB_LOCAL UserID roberts PASSWORD fido Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName ASYB_LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AROBDB3 Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AROBDB4 Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AORA_LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AMSSQL_LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AIFX_LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AIFX_LOCALNA Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName APSTDSNY Task MAINTCAT To perform the tasks from the command line specify PROCNFG FILE C Maint_dba txt Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks 381 382 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Appendix D Optim Security Optim provides three types of security For each Optim Directory you may establish any or all of the following types of security Functional Security Object Security and Archive File Security Functional Security As the most general level of Optim Security Functional Security allows you to control user access to the interface for functions provided by Optim For example for a specialized administrator role that is intended to create process requests and objects needed to run these requests you can grant unlimited access to functions For members of a r
609. y Important Before Functional Security is first enabled the Security Administrator must define Functional Privileges for all users If Functional Privileges are not defined before Functional Security is enabled users will be unable to access any functions in Optim Appendix D Optim Security 397 lt gt Role Specifications E KIL RI Haa A A E E E Create New Definitions Olm 4 Allow Al 4 Haa A E E E Compare Request oo Mo Convert Request a Oe The Functional Privileges by privilege class are described below Create New Actions Create New Actions privileges are required to create or make copies of action requests for example an Archive Request The New command and the ability to save a copy of a request in a respective request editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege Local privileges refer to requests that are created from another object editor For example if a role is denied the Insert Request Local privilege the role will be unable to create a local Insert Request from the Restore Request Editor This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Compare Request Convert Request Convert Request Local Delete Request Extract Request 398 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Insert Request Insert Request Local Load Request Load Request Local Report Request Report Request Local Restore Request Table Editor Create New Defini
610. y tables and packages plans or procedures To enable this connection you must enter a valid User ID Password and Connection String on the Connect to Database dialog This User ID must have authorization to create tables and catalog stored procedures or bind packages 488 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Create Optim Directory Tables After the workstation is connected to the database you can create the Optim Directory The Configuration program names the tables automatically but you can specify the identifier Creator ID Owner ID or Schema Name and the database tablespace for each table The Create Optim Directory Tables dialog prompts you for the information needed to create these tables Create Drop Packages Before creating packages plans or procedures for the Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages Create Drop Stored Procedures or Bind Drop Plans dialog depending on the DBMS selected for the Directory You can choose to browse the SQL statements generated to create or refresh the packages plans or procedures Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format If you are creating a new Optim Directory in a DBMS for which Optim provides Unicode support you are prompted to indicate whether the DBMS is configured to store Unicode data Connect to Database The Configuration program creates a Windows registry entry used to access the Optim Directory For subsequent acc
611. y Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see Specify Optim Directory on page 170 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Chapter 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 209 Create Select DB Alias Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see Create Select DB Alias on page 185 to specify the DB Alias for the DB2 z OS database where the relationships are to be copied Click Proceed to open the next dialog Not a DB2 for MVS Database If you select a DB Alias for a database that is not a DB2 z OS database the Configuration program displays the Not a DB2 for MVS Database dialog This dialog prompts you to return to the Create Select DB Alias dialog using Previous to select another DB Alias To continue click Proceed Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships If you select a DB Alias for a DB2 z OS database the Configuration program prompts you to confirm that relationships are to be copied using the Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships dialog Select the check box and click Proceed to copy the relationships to the Optim Directory Create Copies for Another After the DB2 z OS relationships are copied to the Optim Directory the Configuration program prompts you to copy relationships for another DB Alias If so the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens allowing you to choose another DB Alias If not the process completes Load Drop Sample
612. y SQL statements when creating indexes from the Relationship Index Analysis dialog File Maintenance File Maintenance privileges are required to delete or rename files and directories This class includes the following privileges File Deletion Delete a file or directory File Renaming Rename a file or directory Invoke Action Editors Invoke Action Editors privileges are required to create edit or run an action request for example Insert Request The respective Action menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Compare Request Convert Request Delete Request Extract Request Insert Request Load Request Report Request Restore Request Table Editor Invoke Command Line Actions Invoke Command Line Actions PROCMND privileges are required to execute a utility from the command line 400 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Invoke Invoke This class includes the following privileges Archive Directory Maintenance Invoke Archive Directory Maintenance privilege is required to register or unregister Archive Files or update Archive File entries from the command line that is use ARCMAINT Browse Invoke Browse privilege is required to browse Archive Files Compare Files Extract Files and Control Files from the command line that is use X Import Invoke Import privilege is required to import Optim objects from th
613. y Tables The Database Connection Parameters are populated with previously entered values Modify these values as needed DB Alias Name of the DB Alias you are creating Database Connection Parameters User ID Enter the User ID up to 30 characters that the DBMS requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Connection String Enter the name or string required to access the database Note If you are using DB2 the term is Database Name or Alias Oracle uses DB Alias Sybase ASE uses Server Name SQL Server uses System Data Source Name and Informix uses Host Name Syntax is described in the DBMS documentation DB Name Enter the name of the Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database instance referenced by the DB Alias Note This prompt is displayed only if the Optim Directory is in a Sybase ASE SOL Server or Informix database Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 91 Create Drop Packages Access to database tables requires plans packages or procedures which the configuration process creates automatically If you are configuring a DB2 database the Bind Drop Plans dialog is displayed see Create Optim Directory on page 72 If you are using Oracle the Create Drop Packages dialog opens Similarly the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog is shown for SQL Server Sybase ASE and Informix Us
614. y a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users Sybase ASE Create the Optim Directory To create the Optim Directory in Sybase ASE the following must be true 1 You must connect to the database as the System Administrator SA a user account with SA role a user account with dbo alias Note The account used to connect to the database may be different from the Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables 2 The Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables must be a valid user account for the database and must have a LOGIN to the database server If wanted you may specify the special Sybase ID of dbo as the Owner ID of the Optim Directory tables and related stored procedures Note The Owner ID may be different from the ID used to connect 3 If the user account that corresponds to the Optim Directory table Owner ID does not have SA role the user account must have the following permissions CREATE TABLE CREATE PROCEDURE To create a DB Alias in Sybase ASE the following must be true 1 You must connect to the database as the System Administrator SA a user account with SA role a user account with a dbo alias or a user account with CREATE PROCEDURE permission Note The account used to connect to the database may be different from the Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables
615. y for each workstation to use the Optim Directory You must identify the Optim Directory and the associated DBMS and provide information to connect to the database Specify Optim Directory The opening dialog for configuring an additional workstation is the Specify Optim Directory dialog Use this dialog to create a Windows registry entry 134 IBM Optim Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Configure Additional Workstation Specify Optim Directory A workstation must have a Registry entry for the Optim Directory it accesses To create his Registry entry the Optim Configuration program prompts you for information equired to access the existing Optim Directory on the Following windows Click lt Proceed gt to continue The only option available when configuring an additional workstation is selected when the dialog opens To Create New Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory click Proceed Chapter 5 Configure Workstations 135 Specify Optim Directory DBMS The next step in creating the Windows registry entry is to Specify Optim Directory DBMS Configure Additional Workstation Specify Optim Directory DBMS Ioj xi he Optim Configuration program requires the DBMS type and version for the database ontaining the Optim Directory Tables Select the DBMS type and version for the database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS versions ay have been discontinued by the vendor A Orac
616. ystems when installing and executing Optim This section also describes the program pr0pass used to encrypt passwords for parameters in the configuration files Securing the Products This section describes how to obtain the most protection on UNIX systems when installing and executing Optim Installation UNIX allows you to restrict read write or execute permission to a user members of a group or members of any other group Thus to fence Optim an administrator might e Create a group for user accounts with permission to execute Optim e Within that group create a user account to be the designated owner of Optim with full access rights e Install Optim while logged on as the owner and create the installation directory as a subdirectory of the home directory Under this scenario typical system defaults for the file creation mask allow only the owner to write to the installation directory the subdirectories and files within them while user accounts within the group can execute Optim and can write to the temp and data subdirectories that hold data from processing Creating the installation directory in the home directory prevents users outside the group from executing Optim An alternative method to prevent users outside the group from executing the software is to change permissions by using the chmod command as follows chmod o rwx lt install directory gt User Accounts Before any processing occurs you should
617. zard Preparing JavaCtm Virtual Machine Running InstallShield Wizard Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 307 The installation program wizard displays a Welcome panel The Welcome panel reminds you that at the conclusion of the installation process you must manually modify the configuration files before you can run Optim Welcome to the Optim Server Setup program This program will install the Optim Server component on a UNIX computer You will need to manually modify a few files before you can start the Optim Server for the first time A list of these files will be displayed at the end of this setup program InstallShield Click Next to continue Troubleshooting Setup Red Hat Linux 3 or Solaris 8 This section describes how to troubleshoot Setup If the installation program wizard or Welcome panel fails to display check the following e The DISPLAY environment variable must be set to a value that points to the graphical workstation session used to run the setup program e The signature of the mounted Optim DVD must not contain the character When Automount is used on a Sun Solaris machine to mount a DVD it creates a unique signature for the DVD which is usually the DVD s volume label If another DVD with a matching volume label is mounted Automount appends a n to the end of the volume label to generate a unique signature This can occur if two versions

IBM Optim: Optim Installation and Configuration Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents